LV5600 - Measurement Leader - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Waveform Monitor / Rasterizer
Model	LV5600 (built-in LCD), LV7600 (external monitor)
Display (LV5600)	7-inch color TFT, 1920×1080, touch panel
Video Inputs	4x BNC SDI (SD/HD/3G/12G with options), 2x SFP+ 10GbE IP (SER05)
Video Outputs	4x BNC SDI (reclocked/TSG), 1x BNC SDI monitor, 1x HDMI monitor
Audio Inputs (SER03)	Digital AES-3id (8 pairs), Analog balanced (8 channels)
Audio Outputs (SER03)	Digital out (8 pairs), Analog out (8 channels), Headphone jack
Reference Input	1 pair BNC, black burst / tri-level sync, passive loop-through
Control Interfaces	2x USB 2.0, 1x Ethernet (10/100/1000), 1x Remote (15-pin D-sub), RS-422/485 (SER27)
Supported SDI Formats	SD, HD, 3G-A, 3G-B-DL/DS, 12G, dual/quad link 4K (with SER28/SER29)
IP Video Formats (SER05)	SMPTE ST 2022-6, ST 2110-20, 2K/HD/SD, up to 4 channels per 10GbE
Measurement Functions	Waveform, Vector, Picture, Audio, Status, Eye (SER02), Jitter, HDR (SER23), CIE Chromaticity, Focus Assist (SER25)
TSG Pattern Generator (SER24)	Color bars, multiformat, flat field, moving box, embedded audio, up to 12G
Presets	60 presets, load/save to USB
Capture	Screen capture (bitmap), Frame capture (SDI/IP, TIFF/DPX, 16 frames)
Power Supply	AC 90-240V, 50/60 Hz, auto-ranging
Dimensions (LV5600)	3U half-rack, 300 mm depth
Dimensions (LV7600)	1U full-rack, 300 mm depth
Weight	Approx. 5 kg (LV5600), 4 kg (LV7600)
Hardware Options	SER01 (SDI), SER02 (SDI+Eye), SER03 (Audio), SER05 (IP), etc.
Software Options	SER23 (HDR), SER24 (TSG), SER25 (Focus), SER26 (Layout), SER27 (Tally), SER28 (4K), SER29 (12G)
Accessories	Remote controller LV7290, rack mount adapters, SFP+ modules
Safety Standards	CE, WEEE compliant, safety summary in manual

Frequently Asked Questions - LV5600 Leader

What video formats does the LV5600 support?

The LV5600 supports SD-SDI, HD-SDI, 3G-SDI (Level A and B), and with optional SER28 and SER29 also supports 12G-SDI and 4K formats (dual/quad link). IP video (SMPTE ST 2022-6, ST 2110-20) is available with the SER05 option.

How do I connect an external monitor?

Use the MONITOR OUTPUT BNC connector (SDI) or the HDMI port (TMDS). The output resolution is 1920×1080. For touch control, connect a USB touch panel interface to the instrument's USB port.

Can I measure audio with the LV5600?

Yes, embedded audio from SDI/IP is supported. For external digital/analog audio I/O, you need the SER03 DIGI/ANA AUDIO option, which adds AES-3id and balanced analog connectors plus loudness measurement.

What is the difference between LV5600 and LV7600?

The LV5600 has a built-in 7-inch LCD touch screen. The LV7600 is a rasterizer (no screen) designed for use with an external monitor via SDI or HDMI output. Both share the same measurement capabilities and options.

How can I remotely control the instrument?

Remote control is possible via Ethernet using TELNET, FTP, SNMP, or a web browser (HTTP). You can also use the optional LV7290 remote controller or the REMOTE connector on the rear panel (contact closure).

What is the eye pattern option?

The SER02 SDI INPUT/EYE hardware option enables physical layer measurements: eye pattern and jitter display on SDI INPUT 1, supporting SD to 12G-SDI. It includes cursors and automatic measurements.

How do I install software options?

Contact your local LEADER agent with the instrument's MAC address and serial number to obtain a license key. Then go to SYS menu > LICENSE to enter the key. Each option requires a unique key per instrument.

Can I generate test patterns with the LV5600?

Yes, the SER24 TSG software option turns the reclocked SDI outputs into a signal generator. It supports HD to 12G patterns, including color bars, flat field, moving box, and embedded audio. For 4K patterns, SER28 is also needed.

How do I capture a waveform or frame?

Use the CAP menu. For screen capture, press CAP and select SCREEN CAPTURE. For frame capture (SDI or IP), select FRAME CAPTURE. Captured data can be saved to USB memory or displayed on screen.

What is the proper warm-up time?

For accurate measurements, allow approximately 30 minutes warm-up after power-on to stabilize internal temperature. This ensures reliable waveform and level accuracy.

USER MANUAL LV5600 Leader

LV5600-SER03 / LV7600-SER03

LV5600-SER05 / LV7600-SER05

LV5600-SER23 / LV7600-SER23

LV5600-SER24 / LV7600-SER24

LV5600-SER25 / LV7600-SER25

LV5600-SER26 / LV7600-SER26

LV5600-SER27 / LV7600-SER27

LV5600-SER28 / LV7600-SER28

LV5600-SER29 / LV7600-SER29

SDI INPUT

SDI INPUT / EYE

DIGI / ANA AUDIO

10G IP INPUT

HDR

TSG

FOCUS ASSIST

LAYOUT

TALLY

4K

12G-SDI

Instruction Manual

Thank you for purchasing.

Please carefully read this instruction manual and the included "GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY".

Please use the product safely.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY ...... I

1. INTRODUCTION.... 1

1.1 Scope of Warranty.... 1
1.2 Operating Precautions.... 1

1.2.1 Maximum Allowable Input Voltage 1
1.2.2 Mechanical Shock.... 2
1.2.3 Electrostatic Damage.... 2
1.2.4 Warming Up.... 2
1.2.5 About Standby Mode 2
1.2.6 Backup 2
1.2.7 About the LCD Panel (LV5600).... 2

1.3 About Trademarks and Licenses 3
1.4 Terminology Used in This Manual.... 3

2. PRODUCT CONFIGURATION.... 5

2.1 Lineup 5
2.2 Hardware Options 5
2.3 Software Options 6
2.4 Items Sold Separately....6

3. SPECIFICATIONS....7

3.1 General....7
3.2 Features 8
3.3 Specifications 12

3.3.1 SDI Video Formats and Standards (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29)....12
3.3.2 IP Video Formats and Standards (SER05)....19
3.3.3 SDI Audio Formats and Standards (SER01/SER02/SER03) 19
3.3.4 IP Audio Formats and Standards (SER03/SER05)....19
3.3.5 External Digital I/O Audio Formats and Standards (SER03) 20
3.3.6 SDI Input Connector (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29) 20
3.3.7 SDI Output Connector (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29) 21
3.3.8 IP Input Connectors (SER05)....21
3.3.9 External Reference Input....22
3.3.10 External Audio Input/Output Connectors (SER03)....23
3.3.11 Monitor Output Connector 23
3.3.12 Headphone Output....24
3.3.13 Control Connectors....24
3.3.14 Front Panel 26
3.3.15 Capturing 27
3.3.16 TSG (SER24/SER28/SER29) 28
3.3.17 Presets....31

3.3.18 Display 32

3.3.19 Video Signal Waveform Display 34

3.3.20 Vector Display 36

3.3.21 Picture Screen 37

3.3.22 Superimpose Display 38

3.3.23 CINELITE Display....39

3.3.24 CINELITE Advanced Display....40

3.3.25 CINEZONE Display 40

3.3.26 Focus Assist (SER25)....41

3.3.27 CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display 41

3.3.28 HDR Display (SER23) 42

3.3.29 Audio Display 42

3.3.30 Status Display 46

3.3.31 Eye Pattern (SER02)....52

3.3.32 Jitter Display (SER02)....54

3.3.33 Tally Display....55

3.3.34 Camera ID Display 55

3.3.35 General Specifications....56

4. PANEL DESCRIPTION....57

4.1 Front Panel....57

4.2 Rear Panel....61

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING....64

5.1 Attaching the Cover Inlet Stopper....64

5.2 Turning the Instrument On and Off 65

5.3 Connecting USB Devices....65

5.4 Installing the SFP+ Transceiver Module (SER05)....66

5.5 Signal I/O 67

5.5.1 SDI Signal I/O 67

5.5.2 IP Signal Input (SER05)....69

5.5.3 External Sync Signal Input 70

5.5.4 Digital Audio I/O (SER03)....74

5.5.5 Analog Audio Signal I/O (SER03)....75

5.5.6 Monitor Signal Output....76

5.6 Operation Basics 77

5.6.1 Displaying the Function Menu 77

5.6.2 Function Menu Operations....77

5.6.3 Mouse and Touch Panel Control....78

5.6.4 Tab Menu Operations....80

5.6.5 Setting the Key Lock....81

5.7 Measurement Screen Description....82

6. BASIC OPERATION....84

6.1 Setting the Input Signals....84

6.1.1 Selecting the Input Mode 84

6.1.2 Selecting the Simul Mode 85
6.1.3 Selecting the Displayed Channel....86
6.1.4 Input Format Error Indication 87

6.2 Setting the Signals to Measure 88

6.2.1 SD, HD, 3G-A, and 3G-B-DL Measurement .....88
6.2.2 Measuring HD(DL) Signals....90
6.2.3 Measuring 3G(DL)-2K Signals 92
6.2.4 Measuring 3G-B-DS Signals....94
6.2.5 Measuring 12G Signals (SER29) 96
6.2.6 Measuring 3G(QL) Signals (SER28)....98
6.2.7 Measuring 3G(DL)-4K Signals (SER28)....100
6.2.8 Measuring HD(QL) Signals (SER28) 102
6.2.9 IP Measurement (SER05)....104

6.3 Selecting the Measurement Mode 107

6.3.1 Video Signal Waveform Display 107
6.3.2 Vector Display 107
6.3.3 Picture Screen 108
6.3.4 Audio Display 108
6.3.5 Status Display 109
6.3.6 Eye Pattern Display (SER02)....109
6.3.7 Multi Display 110

6.4 Operation Key Actions....114

6.5 Customized Layout (SER26) 116

6.5.1 Notes 116
6.5.2 Layout Procedure....117
6.5.3 Layout Screen Description....120

6.6 Enhanced Layout (SER26) 132

6.6.1 Enhanced Layout Procedure 133
6.6.2 Enhanced Layout Screen Description....137

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS....143

7.1 Configuring the I/O Connectors....143

7.1.1 Configuring the Input System 143
7.1.2 Input Signal Assignment 144
7.1.3 Setting the Input Format....146
7.1.4 Setting the Payload ID 147
7.1.5 Setting the Format Alarm....150
7.1.6 Configuring the SDI Output Connectors....152
7.1.7 Configuring the TSG Settings (SER24)....153
7.1.8 Configuring the Monitor Output Connectors 158
7.1.9 Configuring the HDR Settings (SER23) 159
7.1.10 Configuring the IP Signal Settings (SER05) 161
7.1.11 Configuring the PTP Settings (SER05)....162
7.1.12 Setting the Video Format (SER05)....163

7.2 Configuring the Instrument 164

7.2.1 General Settings 164
7.2.2 Configuring the Function Menu....165

7.2.3 Configuring the On-screen Menu 166
7.2.4 Configuring the Capture Feature 167
7.2.5 Configuring the Information Display....169
7.2.6 Setting the Network IP 171
7.2.7 Configuring SNTP....172
7.2.8 Configuring the Server.... 173
7.2.9 Configuring SNMP 174
7.2.10 Configuring the IP Settings (SER05) 176
7.2.11 Configuring the Remote Control Settings....177
7.2.12 Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings (SER27) 179
7.2.13 Setting the Camera ID (SER27) 180
7.2.14 Configuring the Tally Display (SER27) 182
7.2.15 Setting the Operation keys.... 184
7.2.16 Date and time settings.... 186
7.2.17 Configuring the LV7290 187

7.3 Displaying System Information....189
7.4 Installing Software Options....190
7.5 Adjusting the Backlight (LV5600) 191
7.6 Turning Off the LCD Panel (LV5600)....191
7.7 Initialization 192

7.7.1 Initializing Settings.... 192
7.7.2 Initializing the Layout 193
7.7.3 Initializing the Operation keys....193
7.7.4 Initializing the Settings and Layout 193

8. CAPTURE FEATURE....194

8.1 Screen Capture.... 195

8.1.1 Capturing the Displayed Screen.... 195
8.1.2 Displaying Screen Capture Data 195
8.1.3 Saving to a USB Memory Device 196
8.1.4 Displaying Screen Capture Data from a USB Memory Device 198
8.1.5 Deleting Screen Capture Data from a USB Memory Device.... 198

8.2 Frame Capture....200

8.2.1 Capturing Frame Data 200
8.2.2 Displaying Frame Capture Data 202
8.2.3 Saving to a USB Memory Device 203
8.2.4 Displaying Frame Data from a USB Memory Device....204
8.2.5 Deleting Frame Capture Data from a USB Memory Device.... 204

9. PRESET FEATURE....205

9.1 Registering Presets....205
9.2 Loading Presets 207
9.3 Deleting Presets....208
9.4 Copying All Presets from the instrument to a USB Memory Device....209
9.5 Copying All Presets from a USB Memory Device to the instrument....210

10. VIDEO SIGNAL WAVEFORM DISPLAY 211

10.1 Operation Key Description 211

10.2 Setting the Waveform Display Position....212

10.3 Configuring the Display Settings 213

10.3.1 Selecting the Display Mode....213

10.3.2 Turning the Channels On and Off....214

10.3.3 4Y Parade Display 215

10.3.4 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display....215

10.3.5 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity 215

10.3.6 Selecting the Waveform Color 216

10.3.7 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 216

10.3.8 Selecting the Scale Color 216

10.3.9 Selecting the Scale Unit 217

10.3.10 Displaying a Scale for 75% Color Bars....219

10.3.11 Displaying the Scale 219

10.4 Configuring the Gain and Filter Settings....221

10.4.1 Setting the Variable Gain....221

10.4.2 Selecting the Fixed Gain....221

10.4.3 Selecting the Filter 222

10.4.4 Setting the Scale Jump 225

10.5 Configuring the Sweep Settings....227

10.5.1 Selecting the Sweep Method 227

10.5.2 Selecting the Line Display Format....228

10.5.3 Selecting the Field Display Format 229

10.5.4 Selecting the Horizontal Magnification 230

10.5.5 Displaying the Blanking Interval 233

10.6 Configuring the Cursor Settings....234

10.6.1 Turning Cursors On and Off 234

10.6.2 Selecting the Cursor 234

10.6.3 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit 235

10.6.4 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit 236

10.6.5 Moving the Cursors 236

10.6.6 Turning the Cursor Value Display On and Off 236

10.7 Configuring the Line Selection Settings....238

10.7.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off 238

10.7.2 Setting the Line Selection Range 239

10.8 Configuring the Color System Settings....240

10.8.1 Selecting the Color Matrix 240

10.8.2 Turning the Luminance Signal On and Off 242

10.8.3 Selecting the Composite Display Format....242

10.8.4 Selecting the Setup Level 243

10.9 Displaying the External Sync Signal Waveform....244

10.9.1 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity 244

10.9.2 Selecting the Waveform Color 244

10.9.3 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 244

10.9.4 Selecting the Scale Color....245

10.9.5 Selecting the Scale Unit 245

10.9.6 Displaying the Scale 245

11. VECTOR DISPLAY....246

11.1 Operation Key Description 247
11.2 Setting the Display and Waveform Intensity 247

11.2.1 Switching the Display Mode 247
11.2.2 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity 248
11.2.3 Selecting the Waveform Color.... 248
11.2.4 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display....249

11.3 Setting the Scale....250

11.3.1 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 250
11.3.2 Selecting the Scale Color....250
11.3.3 Turning the I and Q Axes On and Off 251
11.3.4 Selecting the Scale 252

11.4 Setting the Gain 253

11.4.1 Setting the Variable Gain....253
11.4.2 Selecting the Fixed Gain....253

11.5 Displaying the Marker 254

11.6 Configuring the Line Selection Settings....255

11.6.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off 255
11.6.2 Setting the Line Selection Range 256

11.7 Configuring the Color System Settings....257

11.7.1 Selecting the Color Matrix 257
11.7.2 Displaying a Scale for 75% Color Bars....258
11.7.3 Selecting the Composite Display Format....259
11.7.4 Selecting the Setup Level 260

11.8 5-Bar Display....260

11.8.1 Selecting the Scale Unit 261
11.8.2 Selecting the Display Order 263

11.9 Histogram Display 264

11.9.1 Selecting the Display Format 264
11.9.2 Selecting the Measurement Signal 266

12. CIE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM DISPLAY 267

12.1 Setting the Scale....267

12.1.1 Selecting the Color Scale.... 268
12.1.2 Selecting the Triangle 269
12.1.3 Setting the User-defined Triangle 270
12.1.4 Turning the Sub Scale On and Off 271

12.2 Setting the Chromaticity Diagram Mode....272

12.2.1 Selecting the Display Mode....272
12.2.2 Selecting the Display Standard....272
12.2.3 Turning Clipping On and Off 273
12.2.4 Turning the Filter On and Off 273
12.2.5 Setting the Gamma Value....273

12.3 Displaying Cursors.... 274

12.4 Configuring the Line Selection Settings....274

13. PICTURE SCREEN....275

13.1 Selecting the Display Mode 276
13.2 Adjusting the Picture 277

13.2.1 Switching between the Color and Monochrome Displays 277
13.2.2 Setting the Chroma Gain....277
13.2.3 Adjusting the Brightness 277
13.2.4 Adjusting the Contrast.... 277
13.2.5 Adjusting the Gain 278
13.2.6 Adjusting the Bias....278

13.3 Configuring the Display Settings....279

13.3.1 Displaying Gamut Errors 279
13.3.2 Turning the Information On and Off 280
13.3.3 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display....281

13.4 Configuring the Marker Settings 282

13.4.1 Turning the Frame Marker On and Off 282
13.4.2 Turning the Center Marker On and Off.... 282
13.4.3 Setting the Aspect Marker 283
13.4.4 Setting the Aspect Shadow....285
13.4.5 Setting the Safe Action Marker 286
13.4.6 Setting the Safe Title Marker 286
13.4.7 Setting User Markers 287

13.5 Setting the Superimpose Feature....288

13.5.1 Selecting the Closed Caption Display 288
13.5.2 Selecting the Format of English Closed Captions 288
13.5.3 Selecting the Display Details of English Closed Captions....288
13.5.4 Selecting the Format of Japanese Closed Captions 289
13.5.5 Selecting the Japanese Closed Caption Data 289
13.5.6 Displaying the Clear Screen Log 290
13.5.7 Clearing Japanese Closed Caption Data 295
13.5.8 Selecting the Multiplex System for European Closed Captions 296
13.5.9 Selecting the Magazine Number and Page Number for European Closed Captions.....296

13.6 Configuring CINELITE Settings 297

13.6.1 f Stop Display Description 298
13.6.2 Procedure for Displaying the f Stop Display....299
13.6.3 %DISPLAY Screen Description 300
13.6.4 Selecting the Points to Display 302
13.6.5 Setting Measurement Points 302
13.6.6 Setting the Measurement Size.... 302
13.6.7 Configuring User-Defined Correction Tables 303
13.6.8 Displaying Link Markers 308

13.7 Configuring CINEZONE Settings.... 309

13.7.1 Gradation Display....309
13.7.2 Step Display Mode 310
13.7.3 Search Display Mode 312

13.8 Focus Assist Display (SER25) 313

13.8.1 Selecting the Display Mode....313
13.8.2 Turning Focus Assist On and Off 313
13.8.3 Selecting the Detection Sensitivity 314
13.8.4 Selecting the Luminance Level 314
13.8.5 Selecting the Highlight Color 314

13.9 Configuring the Line Selection Settings....315

13.9.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off 315
13.9.2 Setting the Line Selection Range 316
13.9.3 Setting the Lip Sync Measurement Range (SER03)....316

1. HDR DISPLAY (SER23)....317

14.1 Video Signal Waveform Display 318

14.1.1 Scale Display 318
14.1.2 Selecting the Scale Display 322
14.1.3 Setting the Reference Level 323
14.1.4 Cursor Display 324

14.2 Vector Display....325

14.2.1 Histogram Display 325

14.3 Picture Screen 326

14.3.1 CINELITE and CINEZONE Displays.... 326
14.3.2 %DISPLAY 327
14.3.3 CINEZONE Display 328
14.3.4 Link Marker Display 329

14.4 MAXFALL and MAXCLL Displays 330

14.4.1 Turning the Display On and Off 330
14.4.2 Starting and Stopping Measurements....330
14.4.3 Clearing Measurements....331

1. AUDIO DISPLAY 332

15.1 Setting the Signals to Measure 333

15.1.1 Selecting the Measurement Signal 333
15.1.2 Channel Assignment for the Lissajous Display (SER03)....334
15.1.3 Channel Assignment for the Surround Display (SER03)....335
15.1.4 Configuring Audio Input/Output Connectors (SER03) 335
15.1.5 Channel Assignment for the Analog Audio Output Connector (SER03)....336

15.2 Selecting the Display Mode (SER03)....337
15.3 Configuring Error Detection Settings 340
15.4 Adjusting the Volume....341
15.5 Meter Display 342

15.5.1 Selecting the Scale....342
15.5.2 Selecting the Response Model 343
15.5.3 Setting the Peak Hold 343
15.5.4 Setting the Reference Level 344

15.6 Lissajous Display (SER03) 345

15.6.1 Adjusting the Lissajous Curve Intensity 345
15.6.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 345

15.6.3 Selecting the Lissajous Curve Display Format.... 346
15.6.4 Selecting the Scale Display Format 347
15.6.5 Setting the Lissajous Curve Gain 348

15.7 Surround Display (SER03) 348

15.7.1 Adjusting the Surround Waveform Intensity....349
15.7.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 349
15.7.3 Selecting the Surround Display Format.... 350
15.7.4 Setting the Surround Waveform Gain 350

15.8 Status Display (SER03) 351

15.8.1 Status Screen Description 351
15.8.2 Event Log Display 352
15.8.3 Channel Status Display 353
15.8.4 Displaying User Bits....354
15.8.5 Resetting Errors....354

15.9 Loudness Display (SER03) 355

15.9.1 Loudness Display Explanation 355
15.9.2 Selecting the Measurement Time....358
15.9.3 Clearing the Loudness Measurement....358
15.9.4 Starting and Stopping Measurements.... 358
15.9.5 Selecting the Scale 358
15.9.6 Configuring Loudness Settings 359
15.9.7 Saving to a USB Memory Device 364

16. STATUS DISPLAY....367

16.1 Status Screen Description....367
16.2 Configuring Error Detection Settings 372

16.2.1 Error Setup 1 372
16.2.2 Error Setup 2 374
16.2.3 Error Setup 3 376
16.2.4 Error Setup 4 378

16.3 Clearing Error Counts....381

16.4 Configuring Event Log Settings....381

16.4.1 Event Log Screen Description 381
16.4.2 Starting the Event Log....385
16.4.3 Clearing the Event Log....385
16.4.4 Selecting the Overwrite Mode 385
16.4.5 Saving to a USB Memory Device 386

16.5 Configuring the Data Dump Settings 388

16.5.1 Data Dump Display Description 389
16.5.2 Moving the Display Position 390
16.5.3 Selecting the Adjustment Step Resolution.... 391
16.5.4 Selecting What the Function Dial Controls....391
16.5.5 Selecting the Display Mode....391
16.5.6 Selecting the Display Format 392
16.5.7 Selecting the Content to Display....394
16.5.8 Saving to a USB Memory Device 394

16.6 Configuring Phase Difference Measurement Settings 395

16.6.1 Phase Difference Measurement Screen Description 396

16.7 Setting the Lip Sync Measurement (SER03) 399

16.7.1 Selecting the Measurement Range....400

16.7.2 Updating the Measurement Screen 400

16.7.3 Setting the Measurement Range 401

16.8 Configuring the IP Screen (SER05) 404

16.8.1 Displaying the IP Status Screen....404

16.8.2 Configuring the IP Status Screen 406

16.8.3 Displaying the Packet Jitter Screen 407

16.8.4 Configuring the Packet Jitter Screen....408

16.8.5 Displaying the PTP Status Screen 409

16.8.6 Configuring the PTP Status Screen 411

16.9 Displaying a List of Ancillary Data 412

16.9.1 Ancillary Data Display Description....412

16.9.2 Displaying a Dump of Ancillary Data 413

16.9.3 Updating the Dump Display 413

16.9.4 Selecting the Dump Mode 414

16.10 Detecting Ancillary Packets 415

16.10.1 Ancillary Packet Screen Description....415

16.10.2 Displaying EDH Packets....417

16.10.3 Displaying Payload IDs....417

16.10.4 Displaying Audio Control Packets 418

16.10.5 V-ANC ARIB Display 419

16.10.6 Displaying Closed Caption Packets 419

16.10.7 Displaying the Inter-Stationary Control Signal 420

16.10.8 Displaying the Data Broadcast Trigger Signal 423

16.10.9 Displaying User Data 424

16.10.10 V-ANC SMPTE Display....425

16.10.11 Displaying AFD Packets 425

16.10.12 Performing Custom Searches 426

1. EYE PATTERN DISPLAY (SER02)....428

17.1 Eye Pattern Display Description 430

17.2 Jitter Display Description 431

17.3 Setting the Waveform Display Position....432

17.4 Switching between Eye Pattern and Jitter 432

17.5 Setting the Intensity 433

17.5.1 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity 433

17.5.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity 433

17.6 Selecting the Display Colors 434

17.6.1 Selecting the Waveform Color 434

17.6.2 Selecting the Scale Color....434

17.7 Configuring Error Detection Settings 435

17.7.1 Configuring 12G Error Settings....435

17.7.2 Configuring 3G Error Settings 437

17.7.3 Configuring HD Error Settings 439

17.7.4 Configuring SD Error Settings 441

17.8 Configuring Eye Pattern Display Settings....443

17.8.1 Adjusting the Gain 443

17.8.2 Selecting the Filter 443

17.8.3 Selecting the Sweep Time 444

17.8.4 Turning the Peak Hold On and Off 445

17.8.5 Clearing the Peak Hold.... 445

17.8.6 Turning Cursors On and Off 446

17.8.7 Selecting the Cursor 447

17.8.8 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit 449

17.8.9 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit 449

17.8.10 Moving the Cursors 449

17.8.11 Resetting Cursors....450

17.8.12 Selecting the Display Mode 450

17.8.13 Selecting the 2-Screen Display Mode 450

17.9 Configuring the Jitter Display Settings 450

17.9.1 Selecting the Magnification....451

17.9.2 Selecting the Filter 451

17.9.3 Selecting the Sweep Time 451

17.9.4 Turning the Peak Hold On and Off....452

17.9.5 Clearing the Peak Hold....452

17.9.6 Turning Cursors On and Off 453

17.9.7 Selecting the Cursor 453

17.9.8 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit 454

17.9.9 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit 454

17.9.10 Moving the Cursors 454

17.9.11 Resetting Cursors....455

17.9.12 Selecting the Display Mode 455

17.9.13 Selecting the 2-Screen Display Mode 455

18. REMOTE CONTROL....456

18.1 Bit Mode 457

18.2 Binary Mode 460

18.3 Command Mode 462

18.4 Tally Mode (SER27) 464

19. RS-422/485 (SER27) 466

19.1 Transmission Commands....468

19.1.1 Setting the Address....468

19.1.2 Setting Keywords and Parameters 469

19.1.3 Setting the Checksum....474

19.2 Response Messages 475

20. NETWORK CONTROL 476

20.1 SNTP Client Function 476

20.1.1 How to Use 476

20.1.2 Time Adjustment Value....477

20.2 TELNET 478

20.2.1 How to Use 478
20.2.2 How to Enter Commands 479
20.2.3 TELNET Commands....480

20.3 FTP 497

20.3.1 How to Use 497
20.3.2 How to Enter Commands 498
20.3.3 FTP Commands 498

20.4 HTTP 499

20.4.1 Operating Environment.... 499
20.4.2 Notes 499
20.4.3 How to Use 500
20.4.4 MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY....502
20.4.5 REMOTE CONTROL....503
20.4.6 EVENT LOG VIEWER....504

20.5 SNMP 505

20.5.1 SMI Definitions 505
20.5.2 How to Use 505
20.5.3 Standard MIBs....507
20.5.4 Enterprise MIB....511
20.5.5 Extended TRAP (Variable Binding List) 538

21. MENU TREE....548

21.1 INPUT Menu 548
21.2 SYS Menu 549
21.3 CAP Menu 553
21.4 MEM Menu 555
21.5 RECALL Menu 556
21.6 WFM Menu....557
21.7 VECT Menu 560
21.8 PIC Menu 565
21.9 AUDIO Menu 571
21.10 STATUS Menu 575
21.11 EYE Menu (SER02) 580
21.12 MULTI menu....582

22. FIRMWARE UPDATE HISTORY....583

GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY

■ Read This before Using the Instrument

This instrument should only be used by persons with sufficient knowledge of electronics who thoroughly understand the contents of this manual.

This instrument is not designed or manufactured for households or ordinary consumers.

If unqualified personnel are to use the instrument, be sure the instrument is handled under the supervision of qualified personnel (those who have electrical knowledge). This is to prevent the possibility of personal injury or damage to the instrument.

■ Note about Reading This Manual

The contents of this manual contain specialized terminology and may be difficult to understand. If you have any questions about the contents of this manual, please contact your local LEADER agent.

■ Symbols and Terms

The following symbols and terms are used in this instruction manual and on the instrument to indicate important warnings and notes.

	This symbol appears in this instruction manual and on the instrument to indicate an area where improper handling could result in personal injury, damage to the instrument, or malfunction of the instrument or devices connected to it.When you encounter this symbol on the instrument, be sure to refer to the information in this instruction manual that corresponds to the area that the symbol marks.
	WARNING Ignoring the precautions that this term indicates could lead to death or serious injury.
	____CAUTION Ignoring the precautions that this term indicates could lead to personal injury or damage to the instrument.

GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY

Read the warnings and information below thoroughly to avoid death, personal injury, and damage and deterioration of the instrument.

WARNING

■ Warnings Concerning the Case and Panels

Do not remove the instrument's case or panels for any reason. Touching the internal components of the instrument could lead to fire or electric shock.

Also, do not allow foreign materials, such as liquids, combustible matter, and metal, to enter the instrument. Turning the instrument on when such materials are inside it could lead to fire, electric shock, damage to the instrument, or some other accident.

■ Installation Environment

• Operating Temperature Range
  Use this instrument in a 0 to 40 °C environment. Using the instrument with its vents blocked or in a high temperature environment could lead to fire.
  Drastic changes in temperature, such as might be caused by moving the instrument between two rooms with different temperatures, can damage the instrument by causing condensation to form within it. If there is a possibility that the instrument has condensation within it, wait for approximately 30 minutes before turning on the power.

- Operating Humidity Range

Use this instrument in an environment whose relative humidity is 85 % or less where there is no threat of condensation forming.

Also, do not operate this instrument with wet hands. Doing so could lead to electric shock or fire.

- Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere

Using this instrument in an environment where flammable gases, explosive gazes, or steam is emitted or stored could lead to an explosion or fire. Do not use the instrument in such an environment.

- Do Not Insert Foreign Materials

Do not insert foreign materials, such as metal and flammable objects, through the vents or allow liquid to enter the instrument. Such acts can lead to fire, electric shock, damage to the instrument, or some other accident.

■ If You Notice Something Wrong during Operation

If you notice smoke, fire, a strange smell, or something else that is wrong with the instrument while you are operating it, stop operation immediately. Failing to do so could lead to fire. Turn OFF the power switch, and remove the power cord from the outlet. After making sure that fire has not spread anywhere, contact your local LEADER agent.

GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY

WARNING

■ Warnings Concerning the Power Source

Do not use a power source with a voltage other than the rated power source voltage for the instrument. Doing so could lead to fire.

Confirm the voltage of the power source before you connect the power cord to it.

Only use a power source whose frequency is 50/60 Hz.

Use a power cord that is appropriate for the voltage of the power source. Also, use a power cord that meets the safety standards of the country that you are using it in.

Using a power cord that does not meet the standards could lead to fire. If the power cord is damaged, stop using it, and contact your local LEADER agent. Using a damaged power cord could lead to electrical shock or fire.

When removing the power cord from the power outlet, do not pull on the cord. Pull from the plug.

■ Warnings Concerning Grounding

The instrument has a ground terminal to protect the user and the instrument from electric shock. Ensure that the product is properly grounded for safe operation.

■ Warnings Concerning the Panel

Sections of the panel are made out of glass. If the glass breaks, the broken glass may lead to injury. Do not apply a strong shock to the panel, cut it with sharp metal, or damage it in any similar manner.

CAUTION

■ Cautions Concerning the Input and Output Connectors

To avoid damaging the instrument, only apply signals to the input connectors that conform to the specifications in this instruction manual. Do not short or apply external voltage to the output connectors. Doing so could damage the instrument.

■ Cautions Concerning the Ethernet Port

When you are connecting the instrument to the communication provider's equipment, connect to the Ethernet port through a hub that is authorized for use in the country that you are using the instrument in.

GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY

■ Calibration and Repairs

This instrument has been carefully examined at the factory to ensure that its performance is in accordance with the standards. However, because of factors such as parts wearing out over time, the performance of the instrument may degrade. To ensure stable performance, we recommend that you have the instrument calibrated regularly. Also, if the instrument malfunctions, repairs are necessary. For repairs and calibration, contact your local LEADER agent.

■ Routine Maintenance

When you clean the instrument, remove the power plug from the outlet.

Do not use thinner or benzene when you clean the instrument's case, panels, or knobs. Doing so could lead to paint chipping and the corrosion of plastic components. To clean the case, panels, and knobs, use a soft cloth with mild detergent, and wipe gently. While cleaning, make sure that foreign materials, such as water and detergent, do not enter the product. If liquid or a metal object enters into the instrument, fire or electric shock may result.

■ About the European WEEE Directive

This instrument and its accessories are subject to the European WEEE Directive. Follow the applicable regulations of your country or region when discarding this instrument or its accessories. Follow the EU Battery Directive when discarding the batteries that you removed from this instrument. (WEEE stands for Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment.)

Follow the warnings and precautions that have been listed in this section to use the instrument correctly and safely. Precautions are also contained in various other sections of this instruction manual. To use the instrument correctly, be sure to follow those precautions as well.

If you have any questions or comments about this instruction manual, please contact your local LEADER agent.

1. INTRODUCTION

1. INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing this LEADER instrument. To use this instrument safely, read this instruction manual thoroughly, and make sure that you know how to use the instrument properly.

If some point about the operation of this instrument is still unclear after you have read this instruction manual, refer to the contact information on the back cover of the manual to contact LEADER, or contact your local LEADER agent.

After you have finished reading this manual, keep it in a convenient place so that you can refer to it when necessary.

1.1 Scope of Warranty

This LEADER instrument has been manufactured under the strictest quality control guidelines.

LEADER shall not be obligated to furnish the following free services during the warranty period.

1. Repair of malfunction or damages resulting from fire, natural calamity, or improper voltage applied by the user.
2. Repair of a product that has been improperly repaired, adjusted, or modified by personnel other than a factory-trained LEADER representative.
3. Repair of malfunctions or damages resulting from improper use.
4. Repair of malfunctions caused by devices other than this instrument.
5. Repair of malfunctions or damages without the presentation of a proof of purchase or receipt bill for the instrument.

This Warranty is valid only in Japan.

1.2 Operating Precautions

1.2.1 Maximum Allowable Input Voltage

The maximum signal voltage that can be applied to the input connectors is indicated below. Do not apply excessive voltage to the connectors. Doing so may damage the device or lead to injury.

Table 1-1 Maximum allowable input voltage

Input Connector		Maximum Allowable Voltage
Main unit	EXT REF	±5 V (DC + peak AC)
Main unit	REMOTE	0 to 5 VDC
SER01	SDI INPUT	±2 V (DC + peak AC)
SER02	SDI INPUT	±2 V (DC + peak AC)
SER03	DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT	±5 V (DC + peak AC)

1. INTRODUCTION

1.2.2 Mechanical Shock

This instrument contains sensitive components, so it may be damaged if it is dropped or otherwise exposed to a strong shock.

1.2.3 Electrostatic Damage

Electronic components can be damaged by static discharge. Static electricity can build up in the core wire of a coaxial cable. Before connecting a coaxial cable to an I/O connector of the instrument, short the core wire of the cable with the external conductor.

1.2.4 Warming Up

To ensure more accurate measurements, turn ON the instrument approximately 30 minutes before you intend to use it to allow its internal temperature to stabilize.

1.2.5 About Standby Mode

Even if you press the power switch to turn off this instrument, the instrument remains in standby mode as long as the power cord is connected to the outlet. In standby mode, some of the internal circuits operate and may generate heat. Unless necessary, keep the power cord disconnected from the outlet.

1.2.6 Backup

This instrument has a last-memory feature. When you turn the power on, the instrument starts with the panel settings that were in use the last time that it was turned off. If the backup battery is out of power, the message "The last memory feature is disabled." will appear, and this last-memory feature will no longer work.

To continually use the last-memory feature, we recommend that you replace the backup battery with a new one every five years after you purchase the instrument. You cannot replace the backup battery yourself. For details, contact your nearest LEADER agent.

1.2.7 About the LCD Panel (LV5600)

There may be a small number of pixels in the LCD panel that do not light or are always on. Note that this is not a malfunction.

The LCD panel supports a large number of video signals. SDI input signals are displayed asynchronously on the LCD. Therefore, images may appear to flicker on the waveform and picture displays.

In addition, the input SDI signal is temporarily stored in frame memory and is loaded by using the LCD display synchronization signal—which is not synchronized with the input SDI signal. Therefore, because frame skip—which skips over frames in the memory—and frame repeat—which reads the same frames of the memory twice—occur, the image may appear to flicker.

(An external sync signal can be used to synchronize the LCD to the input signal.)

1. INTRODUCTION

1.3 About Trademarks and Licenses

The company and product names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

DynaFont is a registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

This product uses open source software under the GNU General Public License (http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html).

If you need the source code covered by the GNU General Public License, CONTACT YOUR LOCAL LEADER AGENT.

[Notes]

1. Leader does not provide warranty or support for the software covered by the GNU General Public License.
2. Alteration and distribution of this program shall be performed under your responsibility.
3. The expense of Leader distributing the software to you shall be borne by you.

1.4 Terminology Used in This Manual

• SER**
  LV5600-SER** and LV7600-SER** are referred to as SER**.

• Single Input Mode
  This refers to the mode in which on the INPUT menu, F•7 DISPLAY is set to SINGLE. It is a mode for measuring a single input signal.

• Simul Mode
  This refers to the mode in which on the INPUT menu, F•7 DISPLAY is set to SIMUL. It is a mode for measuring multiple input signals simultaneously.

• Multi-screen Display
  This refers to the mode in which the MULTI key is on.

• Underlining (_)
  Underlined options indicate the default values.

1. INTRODUCTION

- Input Formats and Link Systems

The following names are used for the input formats and link systems.

Multi link may be used as a collective term to refer to dual link and quad link.

Table 1-2 Input formats and link systems

Name	Description	Link System
SD	SD-SDI	Single link
HD	HD-SDI	Single link
3G-A	3G-SDI level A	Single link
3G-B-DL	3G-SDI level B dual link mapping	Single link
3G-B-DS	3G-SDI level B dual stream mapping	Single link
12G	12G-SDI TYPE 1	Single link
HD(DL)	HD-SDI dual link	Dual link
3G(DL)-2K	3G-A, 3G-B-DL dual linkResolution 1920 (2048)×1080	Dual link
3G(DL)-4K	3G-B-DS dual linkResolution 3840 (4096)×2160	Dual link
HD(QL)	HD-SDI quad link	Quad link
3G(QL)	3G-A, 3G-B-DL quad link	Quad link
3G	Collective name for 3G links	-
3G-B	Collective name for 3G-B-DL and 3G-B-DS	-
3G(DL)	Collective name for 3G(DL)-2K, 3G(DL)-4K	-
4K	Collective name for 12G, 3G(QL), 3G(DL)-4K, HD(QL)	-

2. Product Configuration

2. PRODUCT CONFIGURATION

2.1 Lineup

LV5600 WAVEFORM MONITOR

Built-in LCD

LV7600 RASTERIZER External monitor type

2.2 Hardware Options

This instrument operates as a measuring instrument by installing hardware options.

To replace or add hardware options, contact your local LEADER agent. You cannot install or uninstall units.

Table 2-1 Hardware options

Model Name	Lineup		Function
	LV5600	LV7600
SDI INPUT	LV5600-SER01		SD, HD, 3G SDI input (*1)
SDI INPUT/EYE	LV5600-SER02		SD, HD, 3G SDI input and eye pattern display (*1)
DIGI/ANA AUDIO	LV5600-SER03	LV7600-SER03	Digital/analog audio I/O and display
10G IP INPUT	LV5600-SER05	LV7600-SER05	IP input (*1)

*1 The LV5600 requires the LV5600-SER01, LV5600-SER02, or LV5600-SER05 to be installed. The LV7600 requires the LV5600-SER01, LV5600-SER02, or LV7600-SER05 to be installed. The LV5600-SER01 and LV5600-SER02 cannot be installed in the instrument at the same time.

2. Product Configuration

2.3 Software Options

The following software options (sold separately) can be installed in the instrument.

If you want to obtain a software option, provide your local LEADER agent with the instrument's MAC address (see the LICENSE tab) and serial number (see the rear panel). We will issue a license key.

When you receive the license key, install the option by referring to section 7.4, "Installing Software Options." Each instrument requires a unique license key. You cannot use the same key for multiple instruments.

Table 2-2 Software options

Model Name	Lineup		Function
	LV5600	LV7600
HDR	LV5600-SER23	LV7600-SER23	HDR measurement function
TSG	LV5600-SER24	LV7600-SER24	SDI signal generation function (*1)
FOCUS ASSIST	LV5600-SER25	LV7600-SER25	Focus assist display function
LAYOUT	LV5600-SER26	LV7600-SER26	Customized layout, display assignment function
TALLY	LV5600-SER27	LV7600-SER27	ID, iris, tally display function
4K	LV5600-SER28	LV7600-SER28	4K video signal support function
12G-SDI	LV5600-SER29	LV7600-SER29	12G-SDI support (*2)

*1 You need the LV5600-SER28 to output 4K patterns (other than 12G) on the LV5600-SER24. You need the LV7600-SER28 to output 4K patterns (other than 12G) on the LV7600-SER24.
*2 You need the LV5600-SER28 to install the LV5600-SER29 in the LV5600. You need the LV7600-SER28 to install the LV7600-SER29 in the LV7600.

2.4 Items Sold Separately

LV5600, LV7600

LV7290

Ethernet connection remote controller

LV5600

LR2560 Rack Mount Adapters

LC2565 Blank Panels

LV5600-SER05, LV7600-SER05

LC2144

SFP+ module for 10GbE multi-mode fibers 300 m

LC2145

SFP+ module for 10GbE single-mode fibers 10 km

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 General

The LV5600 WAVEFORM MONITOR and LV7600 RASTERIZER are integrated media measuring and monitoring devices that support various video signals and audio signals. A built-in LCD type and a rasterizer type for use with an external monitor are available, so you can choose the model appropriate for your installation location.

The LV5600 and LV7600 integrate waveform display technologies, measurement technologies, and monitoring technologies that Leader has accumulated over the years to provide both high functionality and superb operability.

In terms of video signals, these instruments support a variety of SDI signals up to 12G-SDI as well as video over IP. The video signal waveform display, vector display, picture display, and eye pattern display enable measurements and quality control of various video signals. The status display allows you to view various error statuses and system stability in the form of event logs and long-term charts.

In terms of audio signals, these instruments support digitally embedded audio signals in SDI or IP signals and digital/analog audio signals received from external sources. Level display, Lissajous display, status display, and so on are available.

In addition to the keys and knobs available on conventional models, these instruments can be controlled through a USB mouse, the touch panel (*1), and on the LV7600, a set of dedicated keys for frequently used camera adjustment menus.

Moreover, a rich lineup of options is available in addition to these powerful functions and operability. Through the combination of these options, these instruments can be used in the measurement, monitoring, and evaluation of video and audio signals in a wide variety of applications including (1) broadcast station master monitoring applications for the integrated monitoring of video and audio signals, (2) monitoring applications for monitoring the quality of transmission signals, (3) studio sub and post production applications for controlling the video signal levels, and (4) broadcast equipment compliance applications for determining whether video and audio signals comply with appropriate standards.

*1 The LV7600 requires a touch-panel type external monitor to be connected to the main unit. The touch panel interface on the external monitor is connected to the LV7600's USB port. The video interface on the external monitor is connected to the LV7600's monitor output connector. LEADER does not guarantee that all touch panel type monitors will work with the LV7600.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.2 Features

- Support for a Variety of Signal Inputs

The abundant video signal input options enable measurement and monitoring of SDI signals and IP (video over IP) signals as well. In terms of audio signals, SDI embedded audio, IP embedded audio, and external AES/EBU and analog audio are supported. The supported audio format is L-PCM.

- Superb Operability

Operability was prioritized in the design of these instruments. You can use the best control interface according to your liking or situation. In addition to the conventional keys and knobs on the front panel, you can control the instrument remotely using a USB mouse. Further, the LV5600 has a 7-inch full-HD touch panel. The LV7600 can be connected to a USB touch panel interface of a touch-panel monitor. These interfaces allow intuitive control and configuration through touch operation.

The LV7600 also has function menu operation keys that can be operated while viewing a remote display and an independent set of dedicated keys for frequently used camera adjustment operations.

These instruments can also be controlled remotely by connecting a dedicated remote controller (sold separately), controlled remotely from a Web browser on a PC over an Ethernet connection, and used to perform automatic measurements using TELNET or FTP.

- Compact

While providing high flexibility through various options and high functionality for various situations, the LV5600 is 3U half-rack size and the LV7600 1U full-rack size, each with 300 mm depth. A 90 V to 240 V AC power supply is employed, so you do not need to worry about where and how to install an AC adapter.

• 4K Video Format (SER28/SER29)

In addition to SD-SDI, HD-SDI, 3G-SDI single link, 12G-SDI single link, 3G-SDI dual link and quad link, and HD-SDI quad link are supported. These cover SDI signals from SD video format to HD video format and even 4K video format.

For the 4K video format, in the case of 12G-SDI single link input, up to four inputs can be displayed through switching. In the case of 3G-SDI dual link input, up to two inputs can be displayed through switching. In the case of 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, or SD-SDI single link input, up to four inputs can be displayed and monitored simultaneously.

• IP Video Format (SER05)

2K video format signals on IP signal SMPTE ST 2022-6 (uncompressed) and SMPTE ST 2110-20 (uncompressed) are supported. In the case of the 2K video format, up to four channels can be received through a single 10 Gbit Ethernet cable.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

• Transmission Quality Analysis Function

Signal analysis functions have been enhanced based on the SDI signal measurement technology that Leader has cultivated over the years. Other enhancements have been made to various transmission error monitoring, external sync phase difference display, lip sync measurement (SER03), SDI signal frequency deviation measurement function, equivalent cable length meter function, and the ancillary data analysis function, which has become more important with the introduction of 4K video signals.

For the IP signal measurement, enhanced transmission quality (QoS) monitoring features are available for detecting packet loss, checksum errors, discontinuous packets, and other transmission errors as well as packet jitters and other parameters that have become harder to detect as a result of IP encryption.

• Video Analysis Functions

Numerous types of displays are available for the various video signals such as the video signal waveform display, vector display, picture display, 5-bar display, and CIE chromaticity diagram display. In addition, quality control (QoE) functions for video signals are available including freeze error, black error, and gamut error detection functions. Detected errors can be recorded in event logs.

• Audio Analysis Functions (SER03)

For audio signals, level meter display is possible on audio signals embedded in SDI or IP signals and AES/EBU audio signals received from external sources.

The SER03 DIGI/ANA AUDIO option allows Lissajous display, surround display, loudness display and detection of mute and clip errors. Detected errors can be recorded in event logs.

- Eye Pattern Display (SER02/SER28/SER29) (*1)

Eye pattern display and jitter display, which are physical layer measurements of SDI signals from SD-SDI to 12G-SDI, are possible. These physical layer measurements can be performed using cursors or performed automatically. Measurements can be exported via a network.

- Closed Caption Decode Display Function

Japanese closed captions embedded in SDI signals, CEA-608 and CEA-708 closed captions, teletext, and OP47 subtitles can be decoded and displayed.

- External Sync Signal Input with Waveform Display Function

The phase difference and synchronization states of SDI or IP video signals can be shown graphically based on an external reference sync signal (black burst, tri-level sync). Further, the waveform of the applied external reference sync signal can be displayed, allowing early discovery of problems related to the sync signal.

Video signal waveforms, vector waveforms, picture, and other items of input video signals can be laid out freely in the sizes of your choice. It is possible to display up to four input signals simultaneously or display a single input signal in several displays. You can create other display layouts such as displaying a normal picture display of a single input signal next to an HDR CINEZONE display or display the waveforms of all lines simultaneously with a line selection waveform.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

• SDI Signal Generation Function (SER24)

The SDI signal reclock output connector also functions as a simple SDI signal generator. It supports HD-SDI to 12G-SDI as well as the 4K video format of 3G-SDI quad link. For the pattern, you can select the HD multiformat color bar, the 4K multiformat color bar, or the flat field pattern, which allows you to select any level. You can also overlay a moving box or insert embedded audio.

• External Monitor Output

The measurement screen can be output in SDI or TMDS from the monitor output connector. The output signal can be displayed on an external SDI or HDMI monitor (*2) in full high definition resolution.

- Capture Feature

A screen capture feature, which captures the entire display as still-image data, is available. Not only can be captured data be displayed on the instrument, but it can also be compared with an input signal or saved to a USB memory device as bitmap data for viewing on a PC.

A frame capture feature is also available. If an SDI Signal is being received, a frame including the blanking interval can be captured. If an IP signal is being received, a frame covering the active video period can be captured. You can set the frame capture function mode to manual or auto, which captures frames when errors occur. The frame capture data can be viewed and searched through on a PC using a frame capture viewer.

- Time Code Display

The timecodes embedded in SDI or IP signals can be displayed. The timecode can also be used as the timestamp in the event log.

• External Remote Connector

A contact terminal can be used to load presets, switch the input signal, and transmit alarms.

- Ethernet Port

The following features become available when you connect the instrument to a PC: remote control through TELNET, file transfer through FTP, remote control and alarm generation through SNMP, remote control from a Web browser through HTTP, and internal clock synchronization through SNTP. Using the LV7290 REMOTE CONTROLLER (sold separately) allows up to eight LV5600s, or LV7600s to be remote controlled.

- HDR (SER23)

Level monitoring is possible on HLG and PQ defined in ITU-R BT.2100 as well as S-Log3-compatible HDR signals. Level control is possible based on the estimated brightness (nits, cd/m ² ) of a display taking the OOTF into consideration. Video signal waveform display supports IRE scale as well as HDR scale. On CINEZONE display, the SDR area is displayed in monochrome, while the HDR area is displayed using colors corresponding to the brightness. This makes it easy to view the brightness distribution in the HDR area.

- Focus Assist (SER25)

A new focusing algorithm based on nonlinear super-resolution technology has been developed, allowing highly sensitive focusing even on low-contrast images that were difficult to be focused in on in the past. You can select the sensitivity according to the image scene.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

• RS-422/485 Connector (SER27)

You can recall presets, switch the display channel, and display the camera ID, iris, and tally by using serial communication.

*1 Only SDI INPUT 1 supports the eye pattern display.
*2 LEADER does not guarantee the operation on all HDMI monitors.

3.3 Specifications

3.3.1 SDI Video Formats and Standards (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29)

Table 3-1 SD video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Field Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	720×487	59.94 /I	SMPTE ST 259
		720×576	50 /I

Table 3-2 HD video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	1280×720	60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 292-1SMPTE ST 296
		1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 292-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF

Table 3-3 3G-A video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			48/47.95 /P	-
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
YCB CR 4:4:4	10 bit	1280×720	60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 296SMPTE ST 425-1
		1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	1280×720	60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 296SMPTE ST 425-1
		1920×1080	60/59.94/50/ I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29. 97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF

1. SPECIFICATIONS

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
			30/25/24 /PsF
XYZ 4:4:4	12bit	2048×1080	30/25/24 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 428
			30/25/24 /PsF

Table 3-4 3G-B-DL, HD(DL) Video Signal Formats and Standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1
			48/47.95 /P	-
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
YCB CR 4:4:4	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.9B /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /Ps
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29,97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97(25/24/23.98 /PsF

1. SPECIFICATIONS

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	SMPTE ST 425-1
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	SMPTE ST 425-1
				SMPTE ST 2048-2
	12 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	SMPTE ST 2048-2
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 372
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	SMPTE ST 425-1
				SMPTE ST 248-2
XYZ 4:4:4	12bit	2048×1080	30/25/24 /P	SMPTE ST 372
			30/25/24 /PsF	SMPTE ST 425-1
				SMPTE ST 428

* When these signals are displayed, phase differences of up to 100 clocks (approx. 1.34 μs) between HD(DL) links are automatically corrected.

Table 3-5 3G-B-DS video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		1280×720	60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 296SMPTE ST 425-1

Table 3-6 3G(DL)-2K Video Signal Formats and Standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	12 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-3
			48/47.95 /P	-
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-2SMPTE ST 425-3
YCBCR 4:4:4	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-3
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-2SMPTE ST 425-3
	12 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-3
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-2SMPTE ST 4 25-3

1. SPECIFICATIONS

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-3
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-2SMPTE ST 425-3
	12 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-3
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-2SMPTE ST 4 25-3

* When these signals are displayed, phase differences of up to 100 clocks (approx. 0.67 μs) between links are automatically corrected.

* 3G-A and 3G-B-DL links are supported.

Table 3-7 3G(DL)-4K Video Signal Formats and Standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
Square YC	BCR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
2 sample interleave	YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2048-1

* You also need the SER28.

* When these signals are displayed, phase differences of up to 100 clocks (approx. 0.67 μs) between links are automatically corrected.

* 3G-B-DS links are supported.

Table 3-8 HD(QL) video signal formats and standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
Square YC	B CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	-
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	-
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-

* You also need the SER28.

* When these signals are displayed, phase differences of up to 100 clocks (approx. 0.67 μs) between links are automatically corrected.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Table 3-9 3G(QL) video signal formats and standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
Square YC	BCR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				48/47.95 /P	-
			4096×2160	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2048-1
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
	YCBR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2060	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
	12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 2048-1
				3O/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
	XYZ 4:4:4	12bit	4096×2160	30/25/24 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5 SMPTE ST 428
				30/25/24 /PsF	-

1. SPECIFICATIONS

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
2 sample interleave	YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
				48/47.95 /P	-
			4096×2160	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	YCB CR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/28.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23. 98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2060	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	XYZ 4:4:4	12bit	4096×2160	30/25/24 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 428

* You also need the SER28.
* When these signals are displayed, phase differences of up to 100 clocks (approx. 0.67 μs) between links are automatically corrected.
* 3G-A and 3G-B-DL links are supported.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Table 3-10 12G video signal formats and standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
2 sample interleave	YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
				48/47.95/P	-
			4096×2160	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
	YCB CR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTEST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	3O/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23,98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
		12 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096x2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10

* You also need the SER28 and SER29.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.2 IP Video Formats and Standards (SER05)

Supported IP Formats SMPTE ST 2022-6, SMPTE ST 2110-20

Redundant System Compliant Standard

SMPTE ST 2022-7

Synchronization Mode PTP (SMPTE ST 2059-1/2)

Supported Protocol IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4)

IGMPv2/v3 (Internet Group Management Protocol)

Table 3-11 IP input signal formats

Link	Compression	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning
SD (*1)	Uncompressed	YCB CR 4:2:2	10bit	720x487	59.94 /I
				720x576	50 /I
HD Uncompressed YC		B CR 4:2:2	10bit	1920x1080	60/59.94/50 /I
				1280x720 (*1)	60/59.94/50 /P
3G-A	Uncompressed	YCB CR 4:2:2	10bit	1920x1080	60/59.94/50 /P

*1 Only SMPTE ST 2022 is supported.

3.3.3 SDI Audio Formats and Standards (SER01/SER02/SER03)

Compliant Standard

12G, 3G, HD, HD(DL) SMPTE ST 299

SD SMPTE ST 272

Sampling Frequency 48 kHz

Quantization 24 bit

Format L-PCM

Clock Generation Generated from the video clock

Synchronization Synchronized to the video signal

SDI Audio Channel Separation

Separates up to four groups (16 channels) from an SDI input.

3.3.4 IP Audio Formats and Standards (SER03/SER05)

Compliant Standard SMPTE ST 2022-6, SMPTE ST 2110-30, AMWA NMOS IS-04

Sampling frequency 48 kHz

Quantization 24 bit

Format L-PCM

Clock Generation System Generated from the video clock

Synchronization Relationship Synchronized to the video signal

IP Audio Channel Separation Up to four groups 16 channels

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.5 External Digital I/O Audio Formats and Standards (SER03)

Compliant Standard AES-3id

Sampling Frequency 48 kHz

Quantization 24 bit

Format L-PCM

Output Signal Separates and outputs audio signals embedded in SDI or IP signals

(audio channel displayed on the screen)

3.3.6 SDI Input Connector (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29)

SDI Input Connector

Connector Type BNC

Number of Input Connectors

4 (SDI INPUT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4)

Input Impedance 75Ω

Input Return Loss

5 MHz to 1.485 GHz -15 dB or more

1.485 to 2.970 GHz -10 dB or more

2.970 to 5.940 GHz -7 dB or more

5.940 to 11.880 GHz -4 dB or more

Maximum Input Voltage ±2 V (DC + peak AC)

Eye Pattern Display Eye pattern display is possible only on SDI INPUT 1.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.7 SDI Output Connector (SER01/SER02/SER24/SER28/SER29)

SDI Output Connector

Connector Type BNC

Number of Output Connectors

4 (SDI OUTPUT 1 / 2 / 3 / 4)

Output Impedance 75Ω

Output Return Loss

5 MHz to 1.485 GHz -15 dB or more

1.485 to 2.970 GHz -10 dB or more

2.970 to 5.940 GHz -7 dB or more

5.940 to 11.880 GHz -4 dB or more

Output Voltage 800 mVp-p ± 10 % (into 75 Ω)

Output Signal Reclocked signal of SDI input (*1), TSG output

Reclocked Signal Reclocks the SDI signals of SDI INPUT 1 to 4 and outputs them through SDI OUTPUT 1 to 4

Select Reclocked Signal SDI OUTPUT 1 can reclock and output a signal from SDI INPUT 1 to 4 by switching. (*1)

Signal Generation Function

SDI OUTPUT 1 to 4 output SDI signals as a TSG. (*2)

*1 Valid when the input signal is SD/HD/3G-B-DL/3G-A and the display assignment mode is set to off.
*2 For dual link and quad link, audio is embedded only in channel 1.

3.3.8 IP Input Connectors (SER05)

Connector Type SFP+

Number of Ports 2

Compliant Standard 10GBASE-SR / 10GBASE-LR

Fiber Types Multi-mode, single-mode

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.9 External Reference Input

Connector Type BNC

Number of Input Connectors 1 pair

Input Impedance 15 kΩ passive loop-through

Input Return Loss ≥ 30 dB for 50 kHz to 30 MHz into 75 Ω

Maximum Input Voltage ±5 V (DC + peak AC)

Input Signal Tri-level sync or NTSC/PAL black burst signal

10 field IDs are supported.

Function Video signal waveform display and phase difference display

based on the phase of an external sync signal

Waveform display of external sync signal

* The display position of the video signal waveform display and the measured phase of the phase difference display based on the phase of the external sync signal may vary by ±1 clock depending on the timing when the external sync signal or SDI signal is connected or disconnected or when the device is restarted.
* Video signal waveform display based on the phase of an external sync signal is not possible for the following formats.

• IP input video signal using SER05
• 3G's 720/30P, 720/29.97P, 720/25P, 720/24P, 720/23.98P
• HD(DL)'s 1080/60P, 1080/59.94P, 1080/50P
• 3G(DL), 3G(QL), HD(QL), 12G
• Frame frequency 48P, 47.95P

* Phase difference display based on the phase of an external sync signal is not possible for the following formats.

• 3G's 720/30P, 720/29.97P, 720/25P, 720/24P, 720/23.98P
• Frame frequency 48P, 47.95P

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.10 External Audio Input/Output Connectors (SER03)

Digital Audio I/O Connectors

Connector Type DIN 1.0/2.3 connector

Number of I/O Connectors

Group A 4 pairs (8 channels)

Group B 4 pairs (8 channels)

I/O Impedance 75Ω

Maximum Input Voltage ±5 V (DC + peak AC)

Output Voltage 1.0 Vp-p ± 10 % (into 75 Ω)

Input/Output Switching By group (4 pairs (8 channels))

Output Signal Audio signal displayed on the screen

Analog Audio I/O Connectors

Connector Type 37-pin D-sub (female)

I/O Signal Format Balanced DC coupling

I/O Channels 8ch

Input/Output Switching Switch all channels

Input Impedance ≤ 20 kΩ

Maximum Input Voltage 24 dBu

Output Impedance Nominal 50 Ω

Output Signal 8 audio signal channels displayed on the screen

Maximum Output Level 24 dBu ± 0.5 dB 1 kHz (into a balanced load of 100 kΩ or more)

3.3.11 Monitor Output Connector

SDI Output Connector

Function Output the displayed screen to an SDI monitor

Output Connector BNC

Number of Output Connectors

1

Output Impedance 75Ω

Output Return Loss

5 MHz to 1.485 GHz 15 dB or more

1.485 to 2.97 GHz 10 dB or more

Output Voltage 800 mVp-p ± 10 % (into 75 Ω)

Output Signal Outputs the LCD screen in HD, 3G-A, or 3G-B-DL.

Output Format

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274
			60/59.94/50 /P

Synchronization

Synchronized with the LCD refresh rate

(free run or frequency synchronization with the external reference signal(*1))

3. SPECIFICATIONS

TMDS Output Connector

Function Output the displayed screen to an HDMI monitor (*2)

Output Connector HDMI

Number of Output Connectors

1

Signal Format Single Link T.M.D.S

DDC Not supported

HOT PLUG Detection Not supported

Output Signal Outputs the LCD screen

Image 1920×1080

Frame Frequency 60P, 59.94P, 50P

Synchronization Synchronized with the LCD refresh rate (free run or frequency synchronization with the external reference signal(*1))

Touch Control Touch control possible by connecting the USB touch panel interface of a touch panel monitor to the LV5600 or LV7600 (*3)

*1 Frame (field) frequencies 24 Hz and 23.98 Hz are not supported.
*2 LEADER does not guarantee the operation on all HDMI monitors.
*3 LEADER does not guarantee that all touch panel type monitors will work with the LV7600.

3.3.12 Headphone Output

Output Connector

LV5600 One 3.5 mm mini jack (stereo)

LV7600 One stereo jack

Output Signal 2 channels from the audio signals that are being displayed on the screen (downmixed Lt and Rt are also possible)

Sampling Frequency 48 kHz

Volume Adjustment Using the menu

Power Output 100 mW maximum (into 8 Ω load)

3.3.13 Control Connectors

USB Port

Port Type Standard A

Number of Ports 2

Specifications USB 2.0

Compatible Devices USB memory, USB mouse, touch panel monitor

USB Memory Feature Saves capture data, preset data, event log data, data dumps, and loudness log data (SER03)

USB Mouse Feature Used to control on the screen

Touch panel monitor Touch control of the displayed screen (*1, *2)

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Ethernet Port

Compliant Standard IEEE802.3

Supported Protocol

TELNET (*3) Command control, status query

FTP File transfer

SNMP Command control, alarm query

HTTP Remote monitoring and control from a Web browser

SNTP Internal clock synchronization

Connector Type RJ-45

Type 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T

Function Remote control from an external PC or remote controller (*3), file transfer, status information query

Remote Connector

Port Type 15-pin D-sub (female)

Locking Screws Inch screws (No.4-40UNC)

Number of Ports 1

Control Signal LV-TTL level (low active)

Input Voltage Range 0 to 5 V DC

All inputs are pulled up to +3.3 V (control is also possible using +5 V)

Function Load preset settings, switch input signals, transmit alarm signals activate tally, and start, stop, and clear the loudness measurement

Alarm Output Outputs alarms signals when a format alarm occurs, when various errors occur, when the fan malfunctions, or when the internal temperature is abnormal

RS-422/485 Connector (SER27)

Function Receives tally, camera ID, and camera iris signals and displays them

Port Type RJ-45

Number of Ports 2

*1 Pinch out and swipe operations are not supported.
*2 LEADER does not guarantee that all touch panel type monitors will work with the LV7600.
*3 You cannot use TELNET and the LV7290 at the same time.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.14 Front Panel

Display (LV5600)

LCD Type 7-inch color TFT

Resolution 1920×1080

Refresh Rate 60 Hz, 59.94 Hz, 50 Hz

(free run or frequency synchronization with the external reference signal(*1))

Touch Panel Electrostatic touch panel

Tapping the display shows touch keys

Key LEDs

All the keys are dimly back-lit.

The selected key is lit more brightly.

Power Switch

Electronic switch (which remembers whether the instrument is on or off)

Last Memory Backs up the panel settings to memory

Key Lock Lock by holding down the SYS key. Prevents unintentional

operations on the instrument.

*1 The LCD refresh rate changes automatically depending on the frame rate of the external reference signal.

Frame Rate of the External Reference Signal	LCD Refresh Rate
23.98Hz	Free run
24Hz	Free run
25Hz	50Hz
29.97Hz	59.94Hz
30Hz	60Hz

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.15 Capturing

Screen Capture

Function Captures the screen
Display	Displays only the captured image or overlays the captured image over the input signal
Media	Internal memory (RAM) and USB memoryYou can only save one screen capture to the internal memory.
Data Output	Saved to bitmap format to a USB memory device or to a file format that the instrument can load (BSG).
Data Input Data saved to a USB memory device can be loaded and displayed on the instrument.

Frame Capture

Function	Captures frame data (blanking included for SDI)
Input Signal SDI signal (SER01/02), IP signal (SER05)
Display	Displays only the captured frame data or superimposes the captured frame data over the input signal
Media	Internal memory (RAM) and USB memoryStores 1 frame or 16 consecutive frames (32 frames for some formats) in the internal memory
Data Output	Saved to DPX or TIFF format to a USB memory device or to a file format that the instrument can load (FRM).
Data Input Data saved to a USB memory device can be loaded and displayed on the instrument. (*1)
Capture Timing	Manual and automatic (error capture)
Error Capturing	Automatically captures frame data when an error occurs
Error Location Search	Can be searched on Frame Capture Viewer

* An input signal in the same format as the frame data is required.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.16 TSG (SER24/SER28/SER29)

Table 3-12 HD video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	1280x720	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 292-1SMPTE ST 296
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
		1920x1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 292-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF

Table 3-13 3G-A, 3G-B-DL video signal formats and standards

Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame (Field) Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			48/47.95 /P	-
		2048×1080	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
YCBCR 4:4:4	10 bit 1920×	1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	1920×1080	60/59.94/50 /I	SMPTE ST 274SMPTE ST 425-1
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF
		2048×1080	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-1SMPTE ST 2048-2
			30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF

Table 3-14 3G(DL)-4K Video Signal Formats and Standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
Square YC	B CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
2 sample interleave	YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-3SMPTE ST 2048-1

* You also need the SER28.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Table 3-15 3G(QL) video signal formats and standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
Square YC	BCR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
				48/47.95 /P	-
			4096×2160	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	YCBCR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
				30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /PsF	-
2 sampleinterleave	YCBCR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
				48/47.95 /P	-
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	YCBCR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 1036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2036-1
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 425-5SMPTE ST 2048-1

* You also need the SER28.
* 3G-A and 3G-B-DL links are supported.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Table 3-16 12G video signal formats and standards

Division Transmission System	Color System	Quantization	Image	Frame Frequency/Scanning	Compliant Standard
2 sample interleave	YCB CR 4:2:2	10 bit	3840×2160	60/59.94/50 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
				48/47.95/P	-
			4096×2160	60/59.94/50/48/47.95 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
	YCB CR 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
	RGB 4:4:4	10 bit	3840×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23.98 /P	SMPTE ST 2036-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10
			4096×2160	30/29.97/25/24/23,98 /P	SMPTE ST 2048-1 SMPTE ST 2082-10

* 12G-SDI TYPE 1 is supported.
* You also need the SER28 and SER29.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Output Pattern	100% color bar, 75% color bar, HD multiformat color bar, 4K multiformat color bar, color raster, gamma, cross hatch, 10 step, limit lamp, check field, lip sync pattern (SER03)
Scrolling (*1)
Direction	Eight directions (up, down, left, right, and their combinations)
Speed Range and Unit	Per frame (field)4 to 124 dots, in 4 dot steps
Moving Box ON / OFF (*1)
Colors	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / BLACK
Speed 1 to 3
Frequency Phase Adjustment (*1, *2)
Quad link	Vary the phases of SDI OUTPUT 2 to 4 independently relative to SDI OUTPUT 1
Dual link	Vary the phase of SDI OUTPUT 2 relative to SDI OUTPUT 1 and the phase of SDI OUTPUT 4 relative to SDI OUTPUT 3
Adjustment Range ±0.5 lines (in unit of video clocks)±1/2 frames (in unit of lines)
Embedded Audio
Number of Embedded Channels
	16 channels max. (*3)
Embedding On/Off	On/off at the audio group level
Audio Level	-20d BFS, -18 dBFS, 0 dBFS, Mute

*1 Either scrolling, moving box, or frequency phase adjustment can be turned on.
*2 The output phase may be off by ±2 clock from the specified value as a result of switching the format or turning on and off the power.
*3 For horizontal 4096/2048 pixel format at frame rates 60, 59.94, 30, 29.97 Hz, only 8 channels are embedded.

3.3.17 Presets

Preset	Saves panel settings (with a few exceptions)
Number of Presets	60
Preset Loading Method	Front panel or remote connector(*1)
Copying	All preset data can be copied from the instrument to a USB memory device or from a USB memory device to the instrument.

*1 The number of presets loaded from the remote connector can be 8 or 60.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.18 Display

Number of simultaneously displayed SDI input signals

SD, HD, 3G-A, 3G-B-DL 4

HD(DL) 2

3G-B-DS 1

3G(DL)-2K 2

3G(DL)-4K (SER28) 1

HD(QL) (SER28) 1

3G(QL) (SER28) 1

12G (SER29) 1

Number of Display Systems in the IP Input Signal (SER05)

1

Display Mode

Single display Displays a single input signal

Simul Display Displays two or more input signals simultaneously SDI and IP can be displayed simultaneously. (*1)

Display Assignment Mode (SER26)

Maps the input video signal of a channel to multiple areas (*2)

Alarm Indications

System Alarm Indication Displays an alarm when the fan malfunctions or when the internal temperature is abnormal

Error Indication Displays an error when an receive signal error occurs

Display Layout

Multi Display Control the WFM/PIC and other display functions in multiple areas from a single screen

Customized Layout (SER26)

Function Freely arrange the windows shown with the WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, and EYE (SER02) keys (one of each), and a window consisting of six displays shown with MULTI

Display Format Displays up to four single link input signals in tiled, mixed, V aligned, or H aligned mode.

Normal Mode Each display area is divided evenly.

Tiled Display The windows are divided into four quadrants.

Mixed Display The windows are cascaded.

V Aligned Display The windows are arranged top to bottom.

H Aligned Display The windows are arranged side by side.

Tile Mode The display contents arranged in the display are shown in four quadrants per screen.

V Aligned Mode The display contents arranged in the display are shown in four vertical divided windows per screen.

H Aligned Mode The display contents arranged in the display are shown in four horizontally divided windows per screen.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Enhanced Layout (SER26)

Function

When multiple channels of single link are displayed, the selected channel is automatically shown in a specific area. You can make the specific area larger than the other areas to show the selected channel enlarged.

3G-B-DS Display Format

Aligned Display The screen is divided into windows.
Time Display

Displayed Contents	Current time, time code
Current Time Display	The time based on the internal clock
Time Code Display	LTC, VITC, D-VITC (SD only)

Compliant Standard
LTC, VITC SMPTE ST 12-2

D-VITC SMPTE ST 266
Tally Display

Remote Connector	Turn on and off the tally display by controlling through the remote connector
RS-485 Control (SER27)	Shows tallies through RS-485 control

Camera ID Display

Instrument Setting	Shows the camera ID set with the instrument’s menu
RS-485 Control (SER27)	Shows the camera ID through RS-485 control

Iris Display

RS-485 Control (SER27)

Shows the iris through RS-485 control

*1 IP signals can be displayed when the SDI system is set to SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL.
*2 Simultaneous display of HDR (SER23) and normal picture or CINEZONE and normal picture is possible. However, there is a limit to the number of channels that can be displayed. This can be set only for SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL single link. It cannot be set for 4K signals or SDI system that transmits multiple lines.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.19 Video Signal Waveform Display

Waveform Control

Display Mode

Overlay Overlays component signals

Parade Displays component signals side by side

Blanking Interval H and V blanking periods can be masked.

RGB Conversion Converts a YC BCR signal into an RGB signal and displays the result

Channel Assignment GBR or RGB order

Pseudo-Composite Display Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result

Line Select Displays the selected line

Sweep Modes H / V

Color 7 colors to choose from

Vertical Axis

Gain ×1 / ×5 / ×10

Variable Gain

Gain x1 ×0.2 to ×2.0

Gain x5 ×1.0 to ×10.0

Gain x10 ×2.0 to ×10.0

Amplitude Accuracy ±0.5% (single default display)

3G, HD(DL) (1080/60P, 1080/59.94P, 1080/50P)

Y Signal ±0.5 % (1 to 60 MHz)

C_BC_R Signal ±0.5 % (0.5 to 30 MHz)

Low-Pass Attenuation ≥ 20 dB (at 40 MHz)

3G, HD, HD(DL) (1080/60P, 1080/59.94P, 1080/50P)

Y Signal ±0.5 % (1 to 30 MHz)

C_BC_R Signal ±0.5 % (0.5 to 15 MHz)

Low-Pass Attenuation ≥ 20 dB (at 20 MHz)

SD

Y Signal ±0.5 % (1 to 5.75 MHz)

C_BC_R Signal ±0.5 % (0.5 to 2.75 MHz)

Low-Pass Attenuation ≥ 20 dB (at 3.8 MHz)

Horizontal Axis

Line Display

Display Format Overlay (1H, 2H) (*1)

Parade (1H, 2H, 3H)

4Y parade (4H)

Magnification ×1 / ×10 / ×20 / ACTIVE / BLANK

Field Display

Display Format Overlay (1V, 2V) (*2)

Parade (1V, 2V, 3V)

Magnification ×1 / ×20 / ×40

Time Accuracy ±0.5% (single default display)

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Cursor Measurement

Composition

Horizontal Cursors 2 (REF and DELTA)

Vertical Cursors 2 (REF and DELTA)

Simultaneous Display Displays the horizontal cursors and vertical cursors simultaneously

Amplitude Measurement mV / % / R% / DEC / HEX

Time Measurement Second display

Frequency Display Computes and displays the frequency with the length of one period set to the time between two cursors

Cursor Value Display Displays measured values at the cursors

Scale

Type %, V, decimal, hexadecimal

Display Colors 7 colors to choose from

HDR Scale (SER23) Adds an HDR scale to each scale for HDR

External Sync Signal Waveform Display

Compatible SDI Systems Can be displayed for SD, HD, 3G-A, and 3G-B-DL

Features Waveform display of external sync signal

Vertical Axis

Gain ×1

Variable Gain CAL

Horizontal Axis

Line Display

Display Format 1H, 2H

Magnification ×1

Field Display

Display Format 1V, 2V

Magnification ×1

Scale

Type %

Display Colors 7 colors to choose from

*1 2H display is not possible when the input signal is 4K.
*2 2V display is not possible when the input signal is progressive.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.20 Vector Display

Display Colors 7 colors to choose from

Blanking Interval H and V blanking periods can be masked (according to the video signal waveform display settings).

Pseudo-Composite Display Artificially converts component signals into composite signals and displays the result

Line Select Displays the selected line

Gain ×1 / ×5 / IQ-MAG

Variable Gain

Gain x1 ×0.2 to ×2.0

Gain x5 ×1.0 to ×10.0

Gain IQ-MAG

Not SD, component display

0.620 to 6.240

SD, component display

0.580 to 5.840

Not SD, pseudo-composite display

0.570 to 5.700

SD, pseudo-composite display

0.520 to 5.260

Amplitude Accuracy ±0.5 %

Scale

Type AUTO / ITU-R BT.601 / ITU-R BT.709 / DCI / ITU-R BT.2020

Color Bar Saturation 75% / 100%

IQ Axis Show or hide

Display Colors 7 colors to choose from

Vector Marker Display Displays a marker and numeric value at the specified location on the vector display

Number of Markers 1

Numeric Display Displays the marker position numerically

Cb Displays the C _B position as a percentage

Cr Displays the C_R position as a percentage

deg Displays the hue in degrees.

d Displays the distance from the center as a percentage

Histogram Display Displays the Y, R, G, and B histograms

SDI Signal 5-Bar Display Function Converts an SDI signal into Y, R, G, B, and composite values, and then displays the five peak levels.

Channel Assignment RGB / GBR

Scale % / mV / HEX / DEC

Error Level Based on the gamut error, composite gamut error, and luminance error thresholds

Line Select Displays the selected line

Low-Pass Filter The same as for gamut errors

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.21 Picture Screen

Quantization	8 bit (internal signal processing is performed with signed 12 bit or higher)
Level Mapping	Maps the black level to 0 (8bit), SDI code value (when receiving 10 bit RGB) 1024 to 255 (8 bit)
Display Sizes Reduced, actual size, ×2, full frame
Quality Adjustment and Color Selection
	Brightness, contrast, RGB gain, RGB bias, chroma gain, monochrome display (RGB gain, RGB bias, chroma gain not valid)
Frame Rate	Converts the frame rate based on the LCD frame rate (60P, 59.94P, 50P)
Aspect Marker Display
3G (17:9 aspect ratio) 16:9 / 14:9 / 13:9 / 4:3 / 2.39:1
3G (16:9 aspect ratio), HD, HD(DL)
	17:9 / 14:9 / 13:9 / 4:3 / 2.39:1 / AFD (*1)
SD 16:9 / 14:9 / 13:9 / AFD(*1)
Aspect Marker Format Line, shadow (99 levels), or black
Safety Marker Size	ARIB TR-B4, SMPTE RP-218, or user-defined
AFD Display(*1)	Displays abbreviations for SMPTE ST 2016-1-2007 standard AFD codes
Line Select	Marks the selected line
Error Indication	Displays markers in the gamut error and level error areas

*1 AFD Supports only SD or HD.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.22 Superimpose Display

Displays English closed captions, European closed captions, and Japanese closed captions over the picture

English Closed Caption

Compliant Standards (Mapping Standards)

EIA-708 SMPTE ST 334

EIA/CEA-608-B (EIA-708-B)

SMPTE ST 334

EIA/CEA-608-B (EIA/CEA-608-B)

SMPTE ST 334

VBI (EIA/CEA-608-B Line21)

CIA/EIA-608-B

European Closed Caption

Compliant Standards

Teletext

TU-R BT. 653-3 System B / OP47

Simple Japanese Closed Caption Display

Displays a simple Japanese closed caption on the picture display. (Select HD, SD, analog, or portable closed caption to display. Select language 1 or 2.)

Compliant Standard

ARIB STD-B37 short form data

Supported Video Formats

1080i/59.94 (SMPTE 274M, 292)

525i/59.94 (SMPTE 259M)

Display

Display position control is supported only for HD and SD closed captions.

Characters

Only Kanji, roman numerals, katakana, hiragana, additional characters (ARIB STD-B24), additional kanji (ARIB STD-B24), and 1-byte DRCS are displayed.

Character Sizes

Supports only standard, medium, small, and specified size codes

Logging

Logged Events

Clear screen command, text closed caption display event, time code, TV commercial material check result

Data Format Text

TV Commercial Material Checking

Function

Checks whether closed caption displays are present during the closed caption prohibited time

Check Period

The material start time and end time can be specified using timecodes.

Log Display Color

Closed Caption during Prohibited Time

Red

Closed Caption Not during Prohibited Time

Green

Check Result Display

Displays OK or NG when measurements are complete

Loudness Synchronization

(SER03)

Simultaneous measurement with loudness measurement

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.23 CINELITE Display

Function	Video levels are displayed numerically.
f Stop Display	Displays f Stop values relative to a reference pointSet in reference to an object with an 18% reflectancef Stop gamma correction (not supported on the SER23)
Fundamental Gamma	ITU-R BT.709 / hybrid log gamma (HLG)(SER23) / PQ (SER23)/ S-Log3 (SER23)
User Correction Table	3 types (data acquired with a real device)
% Display (SDR)	Displays the luminance level or RGB level as a percentage withthe SDI code value 64 assumed to be 0% and the SDI codevalue 940 assumed to be 100%
Gradation Display	Displays the luminance or RGB value with the SDI code value64 assumed to be 0 and the SDI code value 940 assumed to be255
CV Display	Decimal, hexadecimalDisplays the SDI signal code value as YCBCR or RGB accordingto the input signal(only for measurement size 1×1)
HDR Display (SER23)
HLG
System Gamma OFF
Narrow Range	Displays the relative HLG luminance with the SDI code value 64assumed to 0% and 940 assumed to be 1200% or 100%
Full Range	Displays the relative HLG luminance with the SDI code value 0assumed to 0% and 1023 assumed to be 1200% or 100%
System Gamma ON
Narrow Range	Displays the relative HLG luminance with the SDI code value 64assumed to 0cd/m2 and 940 assumed to be 1000cd/m2
Full Range	Displays the relative HLG luminance with the SDI code value 0assumed to 0cd/m2 and 1023 assumed to be 1000cd/m2
PQ	Converts the luminance level to the display’s cd/m2 anddisplays the result
Narrow Range	SDI code value 64 to 940 are assumed to be 0cd/m2 to 10000cd/m2
Full Range	SDI code value 0 to 1023 are assumed to be 0cd/m2 to 10000cd/m2
S-Log3	Converts the reflectance to IRE with SDI code value 95assumed to be 0% and 589 assumed to be 100% and displaysit as a percentage
Measured Points	3
Measurement Sizes	1 × 1 pixel, 3 × 3 pixels, and 9 × 9 pixels

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.24 CINELITE Advanced Display

Function	Synchronizes the markers on the waveform display, vector display, and chromaticity diagram display to the points selected with CINELITE
Waveform Display Link Markers
	Synchronizes the markers on the waveform display to the points selected with CINELITE
Number of Link Markers	Up to 16 (for YRGB, YGBR display) (including the 4 reference points)
Vector Link Markers	Synchronizes the markers on the vector display to the points selected with CINELITE
Number of Link Markers	Up to 4 (including the 1 reference point)
Vector Numeric Display	Displays numerically the active marker position
Cb	Displays the CB position as a percentage
Cr	Displays the CR position as a percentage
deg Displays the hue as an angle (°).
d Displays the distance from the center as a percentage
CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display Link Markers
	Synchronizes the markers on the CIE chromaticity diagram display to the points selected with CINELITE
Number of Link Markers	Up to 4 (including the 1 reference point)

3.3.25 CINEZONE Display

CINEZONE Display (SDR)

Function	Adds colors to the display in accordance with luminance levels
Display Colors Linear (1024 colors), step (12 colors)
Upper Limit	-6.3 to 109.4 % (values equal to or greater than the upper limit are displayed in white)
Lower Limit	-7.3 to 108.4 % (values less than the lower limit are displayed in black)

CINEZONE display (HDR) (SER23)

Function	Adds colors to the display in accordance with luminance levels
HDR Area Setting	Displays color according to the brightness
SDR Area Setting	Monochrome display
Upper Limit Displays magenta for values exceeding the limit
	Ref.LEVEL to 100% (code values 64 to 940 or 0 to 1023 assumed to be 100%)
Lower Limit Displays black for values less than the limit
	0% to Ref.LEVEL% (code values 64 to 940 or 0 to 1023 assumed to be 100%)

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.26 Focus Assist (SER25)

Detection Sensitivity LOW / MIDDLE / HIGH

Highlight Display Color WHITE / GREEN / BLUE / RED

Picture Luminance Level OFF / EMBOSS / 25% / 50% / 75% / 100%

3.3.27 CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

Display Standard CIE1931 (xy display), CIE1976 (u'v' display)

Display Type Chromaticity diagram display, color temperature display

Display Mode

Chromaticity Diagram Display

Luminance display, color display

Color Temperature Display Luminance display

Colorimetry ITU-R BT.601(525) / ITU-R BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / ITU-R

BT.2020

Clipping

ON Clips negative values of the input signal to zero

OFF Displays negative values of the input signal according to ITU-R

BT.1361

Smoothing Displays by averaging data every two pixels

Accuracy ±0.005 (relative to the measurement coordinate value)

Chromaticity Diagram Display Scale

Triangle Select two from ITU-R BT.601 (525), ITU-R BT.601 (625),

ITU-R BT.709, DCI, and ITU-R BT.2020

User-defined Triangle Set a single user-defined triangle

Background Color sample, white background, black background

Sub scale Color temperature curve, grid (0.1 steps), white point (D65),

triangle name (each can be turned on or off)

Cursor Displays the cursor position in coordinates

Gamma ITU-R BT.709, user (1.5 to 3.0), HLG (SER23), PQ (SER23),

S-Log3 (SER23)

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.28 HDR Display (SER23)

Compliant Standard	ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG: Hybrid Log Gamma, FullRange / NarrowRange),ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ: Perceptual Quantization, FullRange / NarrowRange)S-Log3
Supported Formats	All formats except SD-SDI
Function
Video Waveform Display	Scale, cursor
Vector Display Histogram
Picture Screen
HDR CINEZONE
HDR CINELITE
MAXCLL, MAXFALL (CEA861 compliant)
START MAXCLL, MAXFALL computation start
STOP	MAXCLL, MAXFALL computation stop

3.3.29 Audio Display

Input Signal SDI embedded audio

Digital audio I/O connector (SER03)

Analog audio input (SER03)

SFP IP Audio (SER05)

Format L-PCM

Sampling Frequency 48 kHz

Quantization 24 bit

SDI Embedded Audio

Compliant Standard

3G, HD, HD(DL) SMPTE ST 299

SD SMPTE ST 272

Clock Generation Generated from the video clock

Synchronization Must be synchronized to the video clock.

All SDI signals must be synchronized.

Channel Separation Separates up to four groups (16 channels) from an SDI input.

(For 3G, channels 1 to 16 and channels 17 to 32 are divided.)

IP Input (SER05)

Clock Generation System Generated from the video clock

Synchronization Relationship

Must be synchronized to the video clock.

All the content video signals must be synchronized.

Channel Separation

IP Input Audio Separates up to four groups 16 channels

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Number of Display Channels

SDI embedded audio signal

16 (from any SDI input, displayed in groups)

External Audio Signals (SER03)

16 (A, B)

Analog Audio Signals (SER03)

8

IP Input Audio Signal (SER05)

16

Display Types Level meter, Lissajous (SER03), correlation meter (SER03),

surround (SER03), status (SER03), loudness (SER03)

Level meter

Displayed Channels 8ch / 16ch

Dynamic Range

SDI Embedded Audio

SDI-60 dBFS, -90 dBFS, reference level±3 dB

External Digital Audio (SER03)

-60 dBFS, -90 dBFS, reference level±3 dB

External Analog Audio (SER03)

-60dBFS, reference level±3 dB

Scales the scale reference level 4dBu to -20dBFS

Level Accuracy ±0.3 dB

(-50 to 0 dBFS, 1 kHz, signal source impedance 40 Ω or less)

Frequency Response 30 Hz to 20 kHz ± 0.4 dB (4 dBu, 1 kHz reference, TRUE PEAK response)

20 Hz to 20 kHz + 0.4 dB, -0.6 dB (4 dBu, 1 kHz reference,

TRUE PEAK response)

Meter Response Model TRUE PEAK / PPM type I / PPM type II / VU

Peak Hold Time 0.0 to 5.0 s (in 0.5 s steps), HOLD

Level Setting -40.0 to 0.0 dBFS (standard level, warning level, over level)

Level Numeric Display Displays the levels numerically

Numeric display in red when level-over is detected

Displays a blue "M" when mute is detected (ON/OFF selectable.

The displays changes to a blue ■ when the layout size is small.)

Displays "U.L" when audio is not detected

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Lissajous Display (SER03)

Displayed Channels 2ch×1

2ch×4

2ch×8

Display Mode X-Y / MATRIX

Correlation Meter Displays the correlation between two channels as a value from -1 to 1

Channel Assignment

SINGLE LISSAJOU L/R

MULTI LISSAJOU L1, R1 to L4, R4 to L8, R8

Surround Display (SER03) (*1)

Function Displays a graphical representation of a sound field

Surround Format 5.1ch

Channel Mapping L / R / C / LFE / Ls / Rs / Lt / Rt

Center Channel Format NORMAL / PHANTOM CENTER

Gain ×1 / AUTO

Status Display (SER03)

Level Audio levels are displayed using numbers (dBFS).

Error Detection Counts the number of errors that occur for each channel

Level Over Counts the number of times that the level of the input signal exceeds the set value

Detection Setting -40.0 to 0.0 dBFS

Clipping Counts the number of times that a received signal exceeds the maximum signal value for the specified number of consecutive samples

Detection Setting 1 to 100 sample

Mute Counts the number of times that the length of a received mute signal exceeds the specified period

Detection Setting 1 to 5000 ms

Parity Error Counts the number of times that the input signal's parity bit and the parity bit recalculated by the instrument differ

Validity Error Counts the number of times that the input signal's validity bit is 1

CRC Error Counts the number of times that the CRC of the channel status bits and the calculated CRC are different

Code Violation Counts the number of times that the state of the input signal's biphase modulation is abnormal

Elapsed Time Displays the amount of time that has elapsed since the instrument was reset

Channel Status Bits Dump display, text display

User Data Bits Dump Display

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Loudness Display (SER03)

Function	Loudness chart display, numeric display, log, level meter display, peak value display
Compliant Standard	ITU-R BS.1770, ARIB TR-B32, EBU R128, ATSC A/85
Measurement Channel	Simultaneous measurement of two audio sources
Mode (Main)	Monaural, stereo, 5.1, user specified channel
Mode (Sub)	Off, monaural, stereo
Channel Selection	User-defined assignment of eight channels
LFE Gain 0 to 10 times
Measurement Trigger	Manual (panel), remote, timecode, mute
Measurement Mode	BS1770, ARIB, EBU, ATSC, CUSTOM
Target Level
BS1770 -24.0 LKFS
ARIB -24.0 LKFS ( ± 1 LK)
EBU	-23.0 LUFS ( ± 1 LU)
ATSC	-24.0 LKFS ( ± 2 LK)
CUSTOM	-25.0 to -23.0 LKFS
Average Time
Momentary Loudness	200 to 10000 ms
Short-term Loudness	200 to 10000 ms
Chart Display

1 During Audio Measurement

Graph display of integrated loudness and momentary or short-term loudness

2 During Audio Measurement

Graph display of integrated, momentary, or short-term loudness

Measurement Time	2min, 10min, 30min, 1hour, 2hour, 6hour, 12hour, 24hour
MAG	Zoomed display of the target level from -18 to +9 (LK/LU)

Numeric Display

Absolute value and relative value displays of integrated loudness and momentary or short-term loudness

Integrated Loudness	Displayed in red when the target level range is exceeded
Momentary, Short-term Loudness

Displayed in red when the target level is exceeded

Log

Log Time	Up to 24 hours
File

Log Saves gating block loudness in CSV format

Summary

Saves settings and measurement results in text format

Level Meter Display Displays level meters for eight channels

Peak Value Display

Displays peak values of a measurement channel numerically

*1 Only CH MODE 8CH is supported.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.30 Status Display

Signal Detection Detects the presence of an SDI signal

Format Display Displays the video signal format

Frequency Deviation Display

Function Displays the sampling frequency deviation Displays an error if ±10 ppm is exceeded

Measurement Range ±100 ppm

Precision ±2 ppm

Equivalent Cable Length Display

Function Displays SDI signal attenuation in terms of cable length Displays an error if the specified cable length is exceeded

Supported Cables

12G L-5.5CUHD

3G, HD LS-5CFB / 1694A

SD L-5C2V / 8281

Display Range

12G < 10 m, 10 to 80 m, > 80 m

3G < 10 m, 10 to 100 m, > 100 m

HD < 10 m, 10 to 130 m, > 130 m

SD < 50 m, 50 to 200 m, > 200 m

Precision

12G, 3G, HD ±20 m

SD ±30 m

Resolution 10 m

Error Count Display Up to 999999 errors for each error type

Count Period 1 second, 1 field (frame)

Embedded Audio Channel Display

Displays the embedded audio channel numbers

* If the input signal is 3G-B-DL, only stream 1 is supported.

SDI Signal Error Detection

CRC Error Detects 3G and HD signal transmission errors

EDH Error Detects SD signal transmission errors

TRS Position Error Detects TRS embedding position errors

TRS Code Error Detects TRS protection bit errors

Line Number Error Detects errors with the line numbers embedded in 3G and HD signals

Illegal Code Error Detects data within the range of 000 to 003h and 3FC to 3FFh in locations other than TRS and ADF

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Ancillary Data Packet Error Detection

Checksum error Detects ancillary data transmission errors

Parity Error Detects ancillary data header parity errors

Embedded Audio Packet Error Detection (*1)

BCH Error Detects audio packet transmission errors

DBN Error Detects audio packet continuity errors

Parity Error Detects audio packet parity errors

Embedded Position Error Detects the presence of audio in lines where it should not be embedded

Sample Counter Error Detects asynchronous audio by measuring the number of audio samples

*1 If the input signal is 3G-B-DL, only stream 1 is supported.

Video Error Detection

Freeze Error Detects freezing of video within the specified time range

Detection Method Video interval checksum

Time Specification 2 to 300 frames

Black Error Detects video blackouts

Black Level Specification 0 to 100%

Area Specification 1 to 100%

Time Specification 1 to 300 frames

Gamut Error Detects gamut errors

Detection Range

Upper limit 90.8 to 109.4%

Lower Limit -7.2 to 6.1%

Low-Pass Filter

Format	Low-Pass Filter
	HD/SD: 1 MHz	HD: 2.8 MHz SD: 1 MHz
SD 720×487	Approx. 1 MHz (EBU R103-2000)	Approx. 1 MHz
SD 720×576	Approx. 1 MHz (EBU R103-2000)	Approx. 1 MHz
HD 1280×720	Approx. 1 MHz	Approx. 2.8 MHz
HD 1920×1080 (frame rate ≤ 30 Hz)	Approx. 1 MHz (IEEE STD 205)	Approx. 2.8 MHz
HD 1920×1080 (frame rate > 30 Hz)	Approx. 2 MHz	Approx. 5.5 MHz
HD 2048×1080 (frame rate ≤ 30 Hz)	Approx. 1 MHz (IEEE STD 205)	Approx. 2.8 MHz
HD 2048×1080 (frame rate > 30 Hz)	Approx. 2 MHz	Approx. 5.5 MHz
4K 3840×2160 (frame rate ≤ 30 Hz)	Approx. 4 MHz	Approx. 11 MHz
4K 3840×2160 (frame rate > 30 Hz)	Approx. 8 MHz	Approx. 22 MHz
4K 4096×2160 (frame rate ≤ 30 Hz)	Approx. 4 MHz	Approx. 11 MHz
4K 4096×2160 (frame rate > 30 Hz)	Approx. 8 MHz	Approx. 22 MHz

Area Specification 0.0 to 5.0%

Time Specification 1 to 60 frames

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Composite Gamut Error Detects level errors that occur when component signals are converted to composite signals

Detection Range

Upper limit 90.0 to 135.0%

Lower Limit -40.0 to 20.0%

Low-Pass Filter The same as the gamut error

Area Specification 0.0 to 5.0%

Time Specification 1 to 60 frames

SDI Analysis Features

Event Log Display

Function Records detected errors, events—such as the instrument switching between input signals, and timestamps.

Log Capacity Up to 1000 events

Operation Logs all events from start to finish

Data Output Overwrite mode, Stop after 1,000 events

Data Dump Display

Display Format Displays serial data sequence or displays each color component separately

SD, HD, 3G-A, 3G-B-DS

PICTURE, stream 1, stream 2

3G-B-DL PICTURE, link A, link B

HD(DL) PICTURE, link A, link B

3G(DL)-2K PICTURE, link 1, link 2

3G(DL)-4K (SER28) PICTURE, link 1, link 2

3G(QL), HD(QL) (SER28)

PICTURE, link 1, link 2, link 3, link 4

12G (SER29) PICTURE, sub1, sub2, sub3, sub4

Display Format Details

PICTURE Links or streams 1 and 2 are combined and displayed in a picture structure.

Stream 1/2 Displays each stream in a transmission structure

Link A, B, 1, 2, 3, 4 Displays the selected link

Line Select Displays the selected line

Sample Select Displays from the selected sample

Jump Feature Jumps to an EAV or SAV

Data Output Text output to USB memory

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Phase Difference Display

Function

Displays the phase difference between a reference signal and an SDI signal numerically and graphically

Reference Signal

SD, HD, 3G-A, 3G-B-DL

external sync signal, Ach

3G-B-DS External sync signal

HD(DL) External sync signal, Ach, Cch

3G(DL)-2K (SER28) External sync signal, Ach, Cch

HD(QL), 3G(DL)-4K, 3G(QL) (SER28)

External sync signal

12G (SER29) External sync signal

Display Range

Vertical 1 frame

For 3G-B-DL 47.95P to 60P, ±1 frame measurement possible

Horizontal ±1 line

* If the reference signal is set to an external sync signal, the measured phase may vary by ±1 clock depending on the timing when the external sync signal or SDI signal is connected or disconnected or when the power is turned on and off.

SDI Ancillary Data List Display

List Display Details

Presence or absence of each ancillary data type, embedded line number, and number of packets per frame

Dump Display

The selected ancillary data is displayed in hexadecimal or binary.

EDH Display (Only for SD)

Compliant Standard

SMPTE RP 165

Displayed Contents

Analyzes and displays EDH packets and displays received CRC errors

Display Format

Text, hexadecimal, binary

Payload ID Display

Compliant Standard

SMPTE ST 352

Displayed Contents

Analyzes and displays payload information

Display Format

Text and binary

Displaying Audio Control Packets

Compliant Standard

SMPTE ST 299-1, SMPTE ST 272

Displayed Contents

Displays audio control packet analysis

Display Format

Text, hexadecimal, binary

Display Format

1 / 2 / 3 / 4

Japanese Closed Caption Display

Compliant Standard

ARIB STD-B37

Displayed Contents

Analysis display of closed caption signals

Display Format

Text, hexadecimal, binary

3. SPECIFICATIONS

English Closed Caption Display (*1)

CDP Packet Display Details

CDP packet header information

Presence or absence of timecode packet,

Presence or absence of closed caption packet and validity of this packet,

Presence or absence of closed caption service packet and validity of this packet,

Presence or absence of the FUTURE data packet

Time Code

When time code packets are present

Closed Caption Data

When valid closed caption packets are present

Presence or absence of CC1 to 4, TEXT1 to 4, XDS packets

XDS Packet Display Details

Contents adviser information

Copy management information

Display content of ProgramDescription packet

Stuffing Descriptor

AC3 Audio Descriptor

Caption Service Descriptor

Content Advisory Descriptor

Extended Channel Name Descriptor

Service Location Descriptor

Time-Shifted Service Descriptor

Component Name Descriptor

DCC Arriving Request Descriptor

DCC Arriving Request Descriptor

Redistribution Control Descriptor

Inter-Stationary Control Signal (NET-Q) Display

ARIB STD-B39

Analysis display of inter-stationary control signals

Text, hexadecimal, binary

Q signal logging

Analysis display of the format ID

Outputs Q signal logs in CSV format through a USB memory device

Data Broadcast Trigger Signal Display(*1)

ARIB STD-B35

Text, hexadecimal, binary

V-ANC User Data Display (*1)

ARIB TR-B23

Hexadecimal, binary

AFD Packet Display SMPTE ST 2016-3

Text, hexadecimal, binary

3. SPECIFICATIONS

User-Defined ANC Packet Display

DID / SDID

Y / C

Hexadecimal, binary

*1 This is not supported when the input signal is 3G or 12G (SER29).

Lip Sync Display (SER03)	Displays the phase difference between the video and audio
Lip Sync Measurement
Function	Measures the time difference between the SDI signal and digital audio signal and displays the results numerically and graphically
Reference Signal	A Leader TSG that supports lip syncing (*1)
Measurement Method	Measures the time difference when the luminance level of the video signal exceeds the specified value and when the audio level signal exceeds the specified value
Luminance Level Setting	25 to 100%
Audio Signal Level Setting	-30 to 0 dBFS
Supported Audio Signals	Embedded audio signal, digital audio signal
Measurement Range (Bar Display)	±50 ms / ±100 ms / ±500 ms / ±1.0 s / ±2.5 s
Measurement Range (Numeric Display)	±3999 ms
Measurement Resolution	1 ms

*1 TSG patterns not made by Leader may be supportable by specifying the video signal setting and audio signal setting.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

IP Analysis Function (SER05)

IP Status Display
Function	Display the 10G Ethernet (IP 1/2) traffic an streams
Status Display
Linkup Detects Ethernet linkup
Protocol	ST2022-6 / ST2110-20 / PTP / UDP
Bit Rate Display	Displays the bit rate (Mbps) of the user data section of each stream excluding the header section
Number of Measured Streams
	Up to 100
Integration Rate Display	Displays the total number of bits per second (Gbps) excluding the Ethernet frame header and FCS
Measurement Range Resolution 1 s	2 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h, 72 h
IP Packet Jitter Display
Function	Displays graphically the packet arrival interval of the selected video stream
Measurement Range Resolution 1 s	2 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h, 72 h
PTP Status Display
Function	Displays graphically the PTP time and delay information
Measurement Range Resolution 1 s	2 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h, 72 h
Display Mode	Delay Time / Time Offset

3.3.31 Eye Pattern (SER02)

SDI Input Connector SDI INPUT 1

Display	Displays the input SDI waveform before equalizing
Number of Displays
1-Screen Display	Displays the eye pattern of the selected filter in a single screen
2-Screen Display	Displays the timing filter and eye pattern of the selected filter in two screens
Waveform Display Color 7 colors to choose from
Scale Display Color 7 colors to choose from
Method Equivalent time sampling
Amplitude Accuracy	800 mV ± 5 % (for 800 mV input)
Time Axis
2 UI Display
12G (SER29)	12.5 ps/div
3G	50 ps/div
HD 100 ps/div
SD	550 ps/div

3. SPECIFICATIONS

4 UI Display

12G (SER29) 25 ps/div

3G 100 ps/div

HD 200 ps/div

SD 1100 ps/div

16 UI Display

12G (SER29) 100 ps/div

3G 400 ps/div

HD 800 ps/div

SD 4400 ps/div

Time Axis Accuracy ±3 %

Jitter Filter

10Hz HPF 10Hz

100Hz HPF 100Hz

1 kHz

HPF 1 kHz

100 kHz

HPF 100 kHz

TIMING HPF 10Hz

ALIGNMENT

12G (SER29)

HPF 100 kHz

3G, HD

HPF 100 kHz

SD HPF 1 kHz

Cursor Measurement

Amplitude measurement using Y cursors

Time measurement using X cursors

Rise time and fall time measurement using the TrTf cursor

Automatic Measurement Items

Eye pattern's amplitude

Rise time (the time for the signal to rise from 20 to 80 % of its amplitude)

Fall time (the time for the signal to fall from 80 to 20 % of its amplitude)

Timing jitter

Jitter

Rising edge overshoot

Falling edge overshoot

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.32 Jitter Display (SER02)

SDI Input Connector SDI INPUT 1

Display	Displays the jitter component of an SDI signal
Number of Displays
1-Screen Display	Displays the jitter waveform of the selected filter in a single screen
2-Screen Display	Displays the timing jitter and the jitter waveform of the selected filter in two screens
Waveform Display Color	7 colors to choose from
Scale Display Color 7 colors to choose from
Method Phase detection method
Gain ×16 / ×8 / ×4 / ×2 / ×1
Measurement Range
12G (SER29)
×16 0.00 to 1.20 UI
×4 1.20 to 4.80 UI
×2 4.80 to 9.60 UI
×1 9.60 to 19.20 UI
3G, HD, SD
×8 0.00 to 1.20 UI
×2 1.20 to 4.80 UI
×1 4.80 to 9.60 UI
Time Axis 1H / 2H / 1V / 2V (*1)
Time Axis Accuracy ±3 %
Jitter Filter
10Hz HPF 10Hz
100Hz HPF 100Hz
1 kHz	HPF 1 kHz
100 kHz	HPF 100 kHz
TIMING HPF 10Hz
ALIGNMENT
12G (SER29)	HPF 100 kHz
3G, HD	HPF 100 kHz
SD	HPF 1 kHz

3. SPECIFICATIONS

Cursor Measurement Jitter value measurement through the use of cursors

Automatic Measurement Display Feature

Displays the jitter value in seconds (sec) and unit intervals (UI)

Automatic Measurement Items

Timing jitter, alignment jitter, jitter

Accuracy Input jitter frequency: 1 kHz. Filter setting: 10 Hz, within measurement range

0 UI < automatic measured value ≤ 1 UI
±10 % + 0.07 UI
1 UI < automatic measured value ≤ 7 UI
±10 % 

*1 2V display is not possible when the input signal is progressive except for 60/59.94/50P of HD(DL).

3.3.33 Tally Display

Number of Displays 3 (TALLY-1, TALLY-2, TALLY-EXT) (*1)

Display Colors 7 colors to choose from

Control Method Remote connector, RS-422/485 connector (SER27)

*1 The number of displays per channel. Arranged using the customized layout feature or the enhanced layout feature.

3.3.34 Camera ID Display

Number of Displays 2 (LABEL-1, LABEL-2) (*1)

Iris Display 1 (IRIS) (*1)

Control Method Instrument, RS-422/485 connector (SER27)

*1 The number of displays per channel. Arranged using the customized layout feature or the enhanced layout feature.

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.35 General Specifications

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 0 to 40 °C

Operating Humidity Range 85 %RH or less (no condensation)

Optimal Temperature 10 to 30 °C

Operating Environment Indoors

Elevation Up to 2,000 m

Overvoltage Category II

Pollution Degree 2

Power Requirements

Voltage 90 to 250 VAC

Frequency 50/60Hz

Power Consumption 160 W max.

Dimensions

LV5600 215 (W) × 132 (H) × 298 (D) mm (excluding protrusions)

LV7600 426 (W) × 44 (H) × 300 (D) mm (excluding protrusions)

Weight

LV5600 4.6 kg max. (including options, excluding accessories)

LV7600 4.2 kg max. (including options, excluding accessories)

Accessories

LV5600, LV7600 Power cord 1

Cover/Inlet stopper....1

15-pin D-sub connector....1

15-pin D-sub connector cover....1

Instruction manual (CD-ROM) 1

LV5600-SER03, LV7600-SER03

37-pin D-sub connector....1

37-pin D-sub connector cover....1

4. PANEL DESCRIPTION

4. PANEL DESCRIPTION

4.1 Front Panel

Figure 4-1 LV5600 front panel

Table 4-1 LV5600 front panel description

No.	Name	Description
1	LCD	Displays measurement and setup screens. Control the instrument with the touch panel.
2	F•1 to F•7	Carries out the corresponding function menu operation.[See also] 5.6.2, "Function Menu Operations"
3	Power Switch	Press to turn the instrument on. Hold down to turn the instrument off.[See also] 5.2, "Turning the Instrument On and Off"
4	INPUT	Sets the display channel.[See also] 6.1, "Setting the Input Signals"
5	EXT	Switches the sync signal. When the internal sync signal is being used, this key's LED turns off. When the external sync signal is being used, this key's LED lights.[See also] 5.5.2, "External Sync Signal Input"
6	SYS Configures the	settings[See also] 7, "SYSTEM SETTINGS."
7	CAP Captures the screen	[See also] 8, "CAPTURE FEATURE"
8	MEM Press this key	to register or delete a single preset setting, or copy all preset settings.[See also] 9, "PRESET FEATURE"
9	RECALL	Press this key to recall a preset setting configuration.[See also] 9, "PRESET FEATURE"

1. PANEL DESCRIPTION

No.	Name	Description
10	S-CUT	Loads panel settings, saves a screen capture to the USB memory device, adjusts the intensity, performs cursor measurement, or adjusts the headphone volume.[See also] 6.4, "Operation Key Actions"
11	WFM	Shows the video signal waveform display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 10, "Video Signal Waveform Display."
12	VECT	Shows vectors. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 11, "VECTOR DISPLAY"
13	PIC	Shows the picture display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 13, "PICTURE DISPLAY"
14	AUDIO	Shows the audio display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 15, "AUDIO DISPLAY"
15	STATUS	Shows the status. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 16, "Status Display"
16	EYE(SER02)	The eye pattern is displayed. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 17, "EYE PATTERN DISPLAY (SER02)"
17	MULTI	Shows a combination of measurement screens. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 6.3.7, "MULTI-SCREEN DISPLAY"
18	V POS	Turn to adjust the vertical position of the video signal waveform or other item. Press to return to the reference position.
19	H POS	Turn to adjust the horizontal position of the video signal waveform or other item. Press to return to the reference position.
20	F•D	Turn to specify a numeric value or to move cursors. In most cases, press to reset the value to its default value.
21	USB	Connect a USB memory device, USB mouse, or touch panel monitor.[See also] 5.3, "Connecting USB Devices."
22	Headphonejack	This is a mini-plug headphone jack. When a pair of headphones are connected to this jack, the instrument transmits the audio signal embedded in the SDI signal or the audio signal (SER03) received through its rear panel.

1. PANEL DESCRIPTION
   

Figure 4-2 LV7600 front panel

Table 4-2 LV7600 front panel description

No.	Name	Description
1	Power Switch	Press to turn the instrument on. Hold down to turn the instrument off.[See also] 5.2, "Turning the Instrument On and Off"
2	INPUT Sets the display channel.[See also] 6.1, "Setting the Input Signals"
3	CAP Captures the screen[See also] 8, "CAPTURE FEATURE"
4	MEM Press this key to register or delete a single preset setting, or copy all preset settings.[See also] 9, "PRESET FEATURE"
5	F•1 to F•7	Carries out the corresponding function menu operation.[See also] 5.6.2, "Function Menu Operations"
6	FORM	Switches the video signal waveform and vector display format. The display format types and order can be changed as you like.[See also] 6.4, "Operation Key Actions"
7	OVLAY	Switches the video signal waveform display format. When the overlay display (video signal waveforms are displayed on top of each other) is in use, this key's LED lights. When the parade display (video signal waveforms are displayed side by side) is in use, this key's LED turns off.[See also] 6.4, "Operation Key Actions"
8	GAIN	Switches the video signal waveform and vector gain. When fixed gain is being used, this key's LED turns off. When variable gain is being used, this key's LED lights.[See also] 6.4, "Operation Key Actions"
9	SWEEP	Switches the video signal waveform sweep method. When line display is being used, this key's LED turns off. When field/frame display is being used, this key's LED lights. The sweep method types and order can be changed as you like.[See also] 6.4, "Operation Key Actions"
10	SELECT ▶	Carries out the corresponding function menu operation.[See also] 5.6.2, "Function Menu Operations"
11	V POS	Turn to adjust the vertical position of the video signal waveform or other item. Press to return to the reference position.
12	H POS	Turn to adjust the horizontal position of the video signal waveform or other item. Press to return to the reference position.
13	F•D	Turn to specify a numeric value or to move cursors. In most cases, press to reset the value to its default value.
14	PHONES	This is a mini-plug headphone jack. When a pair of headphones are connected

1. PANEL DESCRIPTION

No.	Name	Description
		to this jack, the instrument transmits the audio signal embedded in the SDI signal or the audio signal (SER03) received through its rear panel.
15	USB	Connect a USB memory device, USB mouse, or touch panel monitor.[See also] 5.3, “Connecting USB Devices.”
16	EXT	Switches the sync signal. When the internal sync signal is being used, this key’s LED turns off. When the external sync signal is being used, this key’s LED lights.[See also] 5.5.2, “External Sync Signal Input”
17	SYS Configures the settings[See also] 7, “SYSTEM SETTINGS.”
18	RECALL	Press this key to recall a preset setting configuration.[See also] 9, "PRESET FEATURE"
19	WFM	Shows the video signal waveform display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 10, “Video Signal Waveform Display.”
20	VECT	Shows vectors. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 11, “VECTOR DISPLAY”
21	PIC	Shows the picture display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 13, “PICTURE DISPLAY”
22	AUDIO	Shows the audio display. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 15, “AUDIO DISPLAY”
23	STATUS	Shows the status. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 16, “Status Display”
24	EYE(SER02)	The eye pattern is displayed. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 17, “EYE PATTERN DISPLAY (SER02)”
25	MULTI	Shows a combination of measurement screens. You can change the layout as you like.[See also] 6.3.7, “MULTI-SCREEN DISPLAY”
26	S-CUT	Loads panel settings, saves a screen capture to the USB memory device, adjusts the intensity, performs cursor measurement, or adjusts the headphone volume.[See also] 6.4, “Operation Key Actions”
27	FILTER	Switches the video signal waveform filter. When FLAT is being used, this key’s LED turns off. Otherwise, this key’s LED lights. During pseudo-composite display, the filter types and order can be changed as you like.[See also] 6.4, “Operation Key Actions”
28	MAG(GAIN)	Switches the video signal waveform and vector gain. When X1 is being used, this key’s LED turns off. Otherwise, this key’s LED lights. The vector gain types and order can be changed as you like.[See also] 6.4, “Operation Key Actions”
29	MAG(SWEEP)	Switches the video signal waveform horizontal magnification. When X1 is being used, this key’s LED turns off. Otherwise, this key’s LED lights. The magnification types and order can be changed as you like.[See also] 6.4, “Operation Key Actions”

4.2 Rear Panel

Figure 4-3 LV5600 rear panel (SER01/SER02/SER03/SER05)

Table 4-3 LV5600 rear panel description

No.	Name	Description
1	SDI OUTPUT(SER01/SER02)	SDI signal output connectors[See also] 5.5.1, "SDI Signal I/O."
2	SDI INPUT(SER01/SER02)	SDI signal input connectors.[See also] 5.5.1, "SDI Signal I/O."
3	MONITOR	Transmits the screen image.[See also] 5.5.6, "Transmitting Monitor Signals"
4	IP(SER05)	IP signal input connectors. These are used by installing an SFP+ module sold separately.[See also] 5.4, "Installing the SFP+ Module (SER05)"
5	DIGITAL AUDIOINPUT/OUTPUT(SER03)	Digital audio signal I/O connectors. Switch between input and output using audio menu.[See also] 5.5.4, "Digital Audio I/O (SER03)."
6	ANALOG AUDIO(SER03)	Analog audio signal I/O connectors. Switch between input and output using audio menu.[See also] 5.5.5, "Analog Audio Signal I/O (SER03)"
7	AC inlet	An inlet for receiving AC power. Attach the included cover/inlet stopper to the AC inlet.[See also] 5.1, "Attaching the Cover Inlet Stopper"
8	Serial numberlabel	The serial number is printed on this label.

1. PANEL DESCRIPTION

No.	Name	Description
9	EXT REF	External reference input connector. This is a loop-through connector.[See also] 5.5.2, “External Sync Signal Input”
10	ETHERNET	Ethernet port. Supports TELNET, FTP, SNMP, HTTP, and SNTP.
11	REMOTE	15-pin D-sub remote connector. This can be used to execute actions such as recalling preset settings.
12	RS-422/485(SER27)	Receives tally, camera ID, and camera iris signals through serial communication and displays them.
13	Ground terminal	Connect the instrument to an external ground.

1. PANEL DESCRIPTION
   

Figure 4-4 LV7600 rear panel (SER01/SER02/SER03/SER05)

Table 4-4 LV7600 rear panel description

No.	Name	Description
1	SDI INPUT(SER01/SER02)	SDI signal input connectors.[See also] 5.5.1, "SDI Signal I/O."
2	MONITOR Transmits	the screen image.[See also] 5.5.6, "Transmitting Monitor Signals"
3	EXT REF	External reference input connector. This is a loop-through connector.[See also] 5.5.2, "External Sync Signal Input"
4	IP(SER05)	IP signal input connectors. These are used by installing SFP+ modules sold separately.[See also] 5.4, "Installing the SFP+ Module (SER05)"
5	REMOTE	15-pin D-sub remote connector. This can be used to execute actions such as recalling preset settings.
6	ANALOG AUDIO(SER03)	Analog audio signal I/O connectors. Switch between input and output using audio menu.[See also] 5.5.5, "Analog Audio Signal I/O (SER03)"
7	Ground terminal	Connect the instrument to an external ground.
8	AC inlet	An inlet for receiving AC power. Attach the included cover/inlet stopper to the AC inlet.[See also] 5.1, "Attaching the Cover Inlet Stopper"
9	Serial number label	The serial number is printed on this label.
10	SDI OUTPUT(SER01/SER02)	SDI signal output connectors[See also] 5.5.1, "SDI Signal I/O."
11	RS-422/485(SER27)	Receives tally, camera ID, and camera iris signals through serial communication and displays them.
12	ETHERNET	Ethernet port. Supports TELNET, FTP, SNMP, HTTP, and SNTP.
13	DIGITAL AUDIOINPUT/OUTPUT(SER03)	Digital audio signal I/O connectors. Switch between input and output using audio menu.[See also] 5.5.4, "Digital Audio I/O (SER03)."

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.1 Attaching the Cover Inlet Stopper

A cover/inlet stopper is included with the instrument. Use this device to prevent the power cord from being pulled free of the AC inlet. To attach the cover/inlet stopper, follow the procedure below.

- Installation

1. Cover the power cord with the cover/inlet stopper.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating assembly (no text or symbols present)

1. Push the cover/inlet stopper, until you hear a click, to attach it to the AC inlet.

1. Check that the cover/inlet stopper is securely attached to the AC inlet.

- Removing the Cover/Inlet Stopper

1. Release the lock by using two fingers to press the cover/inlet stopper levers.

1. Pull the cover/inlet stopper away from the AC inlet.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component being inserted into a housing (no text or symbols)

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.2 Turning the Instrument On and Off

To turn on the power, press the power switch. The power switch LED lights, and the instrument turns ON. When you turn ON the power, the instrument starts up with the same panel settings that were set when it was last turned OFF.

To turn off the power, hold down the power switch for at least 2 seconds. The power switch LED and the instrument turn OFF.

5.3 Connecting USB Devices

The front panel has two USB ports. You can connect a USB memory device, USB mouse, or touch panel monitor to these ports. You can connect the devices to either USB port, but you cannot connect the same type of devices to the instrument simultaneously.

USB devices can be connected or removed with the power turned on.

- USB Memory Device

When a USB memory devices is connected, a USB memory icon 📋 appears in the upper right of the screen.

You can save various types of data in a USB memory device.

This icon is normally green, but it changes to red when the USB memory device is being accessed. Do not turn the power OFF or remove the USB memory device when the icon is red.

- USB Mouse

When a USB mouse is connected, a mouse icon 📂 appears in the upper right of the screen. Basic operations can be performed without a mouse, but arranging the measurement screen layout requires a mouse or touch panel control.

[See also] 6.5, "Customized Layout (SER26)," 6.6, "Enhanced Layout (SER26)"

- Touch Panel Monitor

When the USB touch panel interface of a touch panel monitor is connected, a mouse icon appears in the upper right of the screen. The video interface of the touch panel monitor is connected to the monitor output connector.

Basic operations can be performed without a touch panel, but arranging the measurement screen layout requires a mouse or touch panel control.

[See also] 6.5, "Customized Layout (SER26)," 6.6, "Enhanced Layout (SER26)"

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.4 Installing the SFP+ Transceiver Module (SER05)

If the SER05 is installed, the rear panel has two IP input connectors. Install SFP+ modules sold separately.

You can connect and disconnect an SFP+ transceiver module with the power turned on.

To install it, follow the procedure below.

- Installation

1. Pay attention to the orientation of the SFP+ module, and insert the module into IP input connector 1.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Push it in until a click is heard.
2. Install another module into 2 in a similar manner.

- Uninstallation

Pinch the SFP+ transceiver module with your fingers, and pull it out. Do not pull the cable.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5 Signal I/O

5.5.1 SDI Signal I/O

* When an SER01 or SER02 is installed

Figure 5-1 SDI I/O connectors

• SDI Signal Input SDI INPUT 1 to 4

These are the input connectors for the link system.

Apply signals that are specified in section 3.3.1, "SDI Video Formats and Standards," and section 3.3.2, "SDI Audio Formats and Standards."

Select the SDI System on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, and then apply signals to SDI INPUT 1 to 4.

[See also] SDI IN SETUP1 tab → 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors."

Table 5-1 SDI signal input

Link System	Connector Type
Single link	Apply to SDI INPUT 1, 2, 3, and 4 (up to four inputs)
Dual link	Apply to SDI INPUT 1/2 and 3/4 (up to two inputs)
Quad link	Apply to SDI INPUT 1/2/3/4 (up to one input)

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

• SDI Signal Output SDI OUTPUT 1 to 4

There are two SDI signal output settings: Input Through and Test Signal. You can set it on the SDI OUT tab of the SYS menu.

- Input Through

SDI OUTPUT 1 to 4 transmit reclocked signals of the signals received through SDI INPUT 1 to 4. Use the signals for monitoring.

For single link, you can select whether to assign SDI OUTPUT 1 to SDI INPUT 1 or a channel that you select on the SDI OUT tab. If you select to use a channel that you select, set the output channel using the INPUT menu or F•6 INPUT SELECT in the appropriate measurement screen. If SER26 is installed, you can also output the signal assigned with Display Assignment on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab.

For IP, signals are converted into HD-SDI and output.

- Test Signal

SDI OUTPUT 1 to 4 output various patterns. You can superimpose a moving box, vary the phase, and so on. You can use the instrument as a signal generator.

- Terminators

The SDI input connectors are terminated internally at 75 Ω , so there is no need to connect terminators to them. Connect cables with a characteristic impedance of 75 Ω .

- Setting the Display Channels

Configure the display channels using the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu and the INPUT menu.

[See also] 6.2, "Setting the Signals to Measure"

- Cables

It has been confirmed that errors do not occur when the instrument receives an 800 mVp-p stress pattern through the following cables.

Input Signal	Cable Type	Input Connector (SDI INPUT 1 to 4)	Video Pattern
12G	L5.5CUHD cable	70 m	Check field
3G	LS-5CFB cable	70 m	Check field
HD	LS-5CFB cable	110 m	Check field
SD	L-5C2V cable	200 m	Check field

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5.2 IP Signal Input (SER05)

* When SFP+ modules (sold separately) are installed

Figure 5-2 IP input connectors

Install the SFP+ modules sold separately, and then apply signals to IP 1 and 2. Because IP 1 and 2 take on a redundant structure, when applying signals to both connectors, apply the same signal to them. If you are applying the signal to one of the connectors, apply it to IP 1. To configure IP settings, use the SDI IN SETUP1, IP SETUP1, and IP SETUP2 tabs of the SYS menu.

[See also] SDI IN SETUP1 tab → 7.1.1, "Configuring the Input System," 7.1.2 "Input Signal Assignment" IP SETUP1 tab → 7.1.10, "Configuring the IP Signal Settings (SER05)" IP SETUP2 tab → 7.1.11, Configuring PTP Settings (SER05)," 7.1.12, "Setting the Video Format (SER05)"

- SDI IN SETUP1 Tab

Set the SDI System to 2K SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL. Then, set Display Assignment Type to IP (when the SER26 is not installed), or assign IP Stream1 to 4 to Input-A to D (when the SER26 is installed). If Type is set to IP, IP Stream1 to 4 are assigned to Input-A to D, respectively.

- IP SETUP1 Tab

Set the signal standard, IP address, and port number. You can set the IP address and port number for each stream.

- IP SETUP2 Tab

Configure the PTP and video format settings.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5.3 External Sync Signal Input

Figure 5-3 External sync signal input connectors

On the video-signal-waveform and vector displays, you can apply an external sync signal to display waveforms. (*1) Apply an external sync signal to an external sync signal input connector, and then press EXT. The instrument determines the sync signal format automatically.

As shown in the figure below, the external sync signal input connectors are loop-through. Apply the input signal to one of the two connectors, and terminate the other connector at 75 Ω, or connect it to another 75 Ω device. If you connect to another device, be sure to terminate the device at the end of the chain at 75 Ω. Connect cables with a characteristic impedance of 75 Ω.

Figure 5-4 Loop-through

*1 Waveform display using an external sync signal is not possible for the following formats.

• IP input video signal using SER05
• 3G's 720/30P, 720/29.97P, 720/25P, 720/24P, 720/23.98P
• HD(DL)'s 1080/60P, 1080/59.94P, 1080/50P
• 3G(DL), 3G(QL), HD(QL), 12G
• Frame frequency 48P, 47.95P

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

External sync signals that are compatible with each input signal are indicated with a check mark in the following table.

Proper measurement is possible only for combinations that are indicated with check marks.

Table 5-2 External sync signal formats (SD, HD)

SDI (SD, HD) Input Signal Format

525/59.94I

625/50I

1080/60I

1080/59.94I

1080/50I

1080/30PsF

1080/29.97PsF

1080/25PsF

1080/24PsF

1080/23.98PsF

1080/30P

1080/29.97P

1080/25P

1080/24P

1080/23.98P

720/60P

720/59.94P

720/50P

720/30P

720/29.97P

720/25P

720/24P

720/23.98P

External Sync Signal Format

NTSC with 10 field ID (59.94Hz)(*1)

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

NTSC (59.94Hz)

√

√

√

√

√

√

PAL (50Hz)

√

√

√

√

√

√

1080/60I

√

√

√

1080/59.94I

√

√

√

1080/50I

√

√

√

1080/24PsF

√

√

1080/23.98PsF

√

√

1080/30P

√

√

√

1080/29.97P

√

√

√

1080/25P

√

√

√

1080/24P

√

√

1080/23.98P

√

√

720/60P

√

720/59.94P

√

720/50P

√

720/30P

√

720/29.97P

√

720/25P

√

720/24P

√

720/23.98P

√

*1 If the input signal is 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/23.98P, the 10 field ID is automatically detected.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

Table 5-3 External sync signal formats (3G)

1080/60P

1080/59.94P

1080/50P

1080/60I

1080/59.94I

1080/50I

1080/30PsF

1080/29.97PsF

1080/25PsF

1080/24PsF

1080/23.98PsF

1080/30P

1080/29.97P

1080/25P

1080/24P

1080/23.98P

720/60P

720/59.94P

720/50P

External Sync Signal Format

NTSC with 10 field ID (59.94Hz)(*1)

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

NTSC (59.94Hz)

√

√

√

√

√

PAL (50Hz)

√

√

√

√

√

1080/60I

√

√

√

1080/59.94I

√

√

√

1080/50I

√

√

√

1080/24PsF

√

√

1080/23.98PsF

√

√

1080/30P

√

√

√

√

1080/29.97P

√

√

√

√

1080/25P

√

√

√

√

1080/24P

√

√

1080/23.98P

√

√

720/60P

√

720/59.94P

√

720/50P

√

*1 If the input signal is 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/23.98P, the 10 field ID is automatically detected.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

Table 5-4 External sync signal formats (12G)

SDI (12G) Sub Image		Input Signal Format (*1)
		1080/60P	1080/59.94P	1080/50P	1080/30P	1080/29.97P	1080/25P	1080/24P	1080/23.98P
External Sync Signal Format	NTSC with 10 field ID (59.94Hz)(*2)		√	√	√
	NTSC (59.94Hz)		√			√
	PAL (50Hz)			√			√
	1080/60I	√
	1080/59.94I		√
	1080/50I			√
	1080/30P				√
	1080/29.97P		√			√
	1080/25P			√			√
	1080/24P							√
	1080/23.98P								√

*1 If the input signal is 12G, the phase difference is measured for the 4k sub image format.
*2 If the input signal is 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/23.98P, the 10 field ID is automatically detected.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5.4 Digital Audio I/O (SER03)

* When an SER03 is installed

Figure 5-5 Digital audio I/O connectors

- Input/Output Switching

The connectors can be switched between input and output in groups (A and B). Under EXTERNAL AUDIO on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab of the AUDIO menu, select Input or Output.

[See also] AUDIO IN/OUT tab → 15.1.4, "Configuring the Audio I/O Connectors (SER03)"

• Audio Signal Output

If group A or B is set to output, the following signals are output. Use the signals for monitoring.

Table 5-5 Audio signal output

INPUT	CH MODE	Group A Output	Group B Output
SDI	8ch	8 channels in the1st GROUP and 2nd GROUP	8 channels in the1st GROUP and 2nd GROUP
	16ch 8 channels in the1st GROUP and 2nd GROUP		8 channels in the3rd GROUP and 4th GROUP
EXT AUDIO 8ch		- (Input)	8 channels applied to group A
		8 channels applied to group B	- (Input)
	16ch	- (Input)	- (Input)

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5.5 Analog Audio Signal I/O (SER03)

* When an SER03 is installed

Figure 5-6 Analog Audio Signal I/O Connector

- Input/Output Switching

This connector is used by switching between input and output.

Under ANALOG AUDIO on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab of the AUDIO menu, select Input or Output.

[See also] AUDIO IN/OUT tab → 15.1.4, "Configuring the Audio I/O Connectors (SER03)"

• Audio Signal Output

8 audio signal channels displayed on the screen are output. Use the signals for monitoring.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.5.6 Monitor Signal Output

Figure 5-7 Monitor output connectors

The SDI OUTPUT connector and TMDS OUTPUT connector transmit the instrument's screen for monitoring purposes. Connect to an full high definition (1920×1080) display.

- Selecting the Sync Mode

On the MONITOR OUT tab of the SYS menu, select internal synchronization or external synchronization. If you select internal synchronization, you can also select the output format.

[See also] MONITOR OUT tab → 7.1.8, "Configuring the Monitor Output Connectors"

5.6 Operation Basics

5.6.1 Displaying the Function Menu

Use the function menu to change the various settings.

Normally the function menu is displayed, but it can be cleared by pressing the mode key that is currently selected. You can also set it to disappear automatically on the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu.

[See also] GENERAL tab → 7.2.1, "General Settings"

If the measurement menu disappears, carry out one of the following operations to display it again. When you perform this operation, the menu is displayed at the level that was displayed before it disappeared.

- Displaying the Menu by Pressing the Mode Key

Press the currently selected mode key (WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, or EYE) to display the menu again.

In multi-screen display, you can select whether to switch the measurement screen with the mode keys (WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, and EYE) on the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu.

[See also] GENERAL tab → 7.2.1, "General Settings"

- Pressing a Function Key to Display a Menu

Press one of the function keys to display the menu again.

5.6.2 Function Menu Operations

This section explains how to operate the function menu, using the WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu as an example.

Figure 5-8 Function menu operations

- Specifying Values

To set the value of a setting like F•3 WFM INTENSITY, which is shown in the figure above, press F•3, and then turn the function dial (F•D). You can reset most settings to their default values by pressing the function dial (F•D).

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

- Selecting Settings

To select a setting from a list like the one shown in the figure above for F•4 WFM COLOR, press F•4 several times to select the setting you want. The setting changes each time you press F•4. After you stop pressing F•4, the setting is confirmed and the pop-up menu disappears.

When the options are on and off or start and stop, the setting toggles each time you press the key.

- Selecting Settings Using the ◀ SELECT ▶ Key (LV7600)

On the LV7600, you can use the ◀ SELECT ▶ key to operate the function menu. Press the ◀ ▶ key to move horizontally, and press SELECT to select.

The menu level changes. If there is no applicable menu item, the selection moves to the left menu item.

5.6.3 Mouse and Touch Panel Control

You can use the mouse or touch panel to control the keys on the screen to specify settings in the same manner as using the front panel keys. To display the keys, connect a mouse, and click in the screen or tap the screen.

Mouse and touch panel can be used at the same time.

To use touch panel control on the LV7600, connect the USB touch panel interface of a touch panel monitor using a USB cable. Connect the video interface of the touch panel monitor to the monitor output connector.

Figure 5-9 Mouse and touch panel control

• Measurement Screen Settings

Click or tap the keys on the screen and the function menu.

You can change a value in the function menu by using the ▲▼ key to the left and right of FD, the ▲▼ key to the left and right of the value, or the mouse wheel.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

- Tab Screen Settings

Click or tap the setting on the screen and the function menu.

You can change a value on a tab screen by using the ▲▼ key to the left and right of FD or the mouse wheel.

- Moving Cursors

Cursors on video signal waveforms can be moved easily with a mouse or touch panel.

When using a mouse, click a cursor to select it, and then click a position to move the cursor. To unselect, right-click. A portion of the cursors can be moved with a mouse wheel. If you use a mouse wheel, right-click to set the position.

When using the touch panel, tap a cursor to select it, and then tap a position to move the cursor.

- Right-Click Menu

Right-click the mouse or click or tap RIGHT CLICK at the upper left of the screen to display the following menu.

LAYOUT is an item that can only be set using the mouse or touch panel.

Table 5-6 Right-click menu

Menu	Description
ALL CLEAR	Hides the keys and function menu from the screen.Click in the screen to redisplay them.
KEY CLEAR	Hides the keys from the screen.Click in the screen to redisplay them.
MENU CLEAR Hides the function menu.Click in the screen to redisplay it.
LAYOUT	Creates a measurement screen layout.[See also] 6.5, “Customized Layout (SER26)”
ENHANCED LAYOUT	Creates a measurement screen layout.This option can be selected in simul mode.[See also] 6.6, “Enhanced Layout (SER26)”

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.6.4 Tab Menu Operations

Normally, the function menus are used to configure the various settings. However, tab menus—such as that shown below—are displayed in some situations.

This section explains how to operate the tab menu, using the GENERAL tab menu as an example.

Figure 5-10 Tab menu operations

- Moving Cursors

To move the cursor, turn the function dial (F•D). Depending on what you are setting, there are some items in which you cannot move the cursor.

- Switching Tabs

When there are multiple tabs, such as in the figure above, F•2 PREV TAB and F•3 NEXT TAB to change between tabs. If you switch to another tab, the settings are retained, but they are not confirmed until you press F•1 COMPLETE.

- Selecting a Check Box

Move the cursor to the check box that you want to select, and press the function dial (F•D).

- Entering Values

Move the cursor to the item that you want to enter the value for, and press the function dial (F•D). Turn the function dial (F•D) to set the value. To confirm the value that you have set, press the function dial (F•D) again.

- Confirming Settings

Press F•1 COMPLETE to apply the settings from all the tabs and return to the screen that is one level up.

- Canceling Settings

Press F•7 up menu to cancel the settings from all the tabs and return to the screen that is one level up.

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.6.5 Setting the Key Lock

You can prevent unintentional operations on the instrument by enabling the key lock. The key lock disables all the keys except for the power switch.

Mouse and touch panel control are also disabled.

- Enabling the Key Lock

Hold down SYS until the following message is displayed on the screen. While the key lock is enabled, the key lock icon 🔗 appears in the upper right of the screen.

KEYLOCK !!

Press 'SYS' for 2 sec.

Figure 5-11 Enabling the key lock

- Releasing the Key Lock

Hold down SYS until the following message is displayed on the screen.

KEYLOCK !!

Canceled.

Figure 5-12 Releasing the key lock

5. BEFORE YOU BEGIN MEASURING

5.7 Measurement Screen Description

The measurement screen layout can be arranged as you like. This section explains items that are common to all displays.

Figure 5-13 Measurement screen description

Table 5-7 Measurement screen description

No.	Name	Description
1 OVER HEATFAN ALARM		"OVER HEAT" appears when the internal temperature increases."FAN ALARM" appears when a fan error occurs.If either of these alarm appears, immediately turn the power off,and then check for problems with the operating environment. If thisalarm appears even though there are no problems with theoperating environment, contact your local LEADER agent.[See also] 7.2.17, "Displaying System Information."
2	TEMPERATURE	Appears when the internal temperature increases. You can alsochoose to hide this information.[See also] 7.2.17, "Displaying System Information" and 7.2.1,"General Settings."
3	ERROR	Appears when an input signal error occurs.(*1) You can also chooseto hide this information.To configure error detection settings, use F•5 STATUS SETUP on theSTATUS menu or F•4 ERROR SETUP on the EYE menu.[See also] 7.2.17, "Displaying System Information" and 7.2.1,"General Settings."
4	Mouse icon	Appears when a USB mouse is connected or the USB interface of atouch panel monitor is connected. You can also choose to hide thisinformation.[See also] 5.3, "Connecting USB Devices," and 7.2.1, "GeneralSettings"
5	Key lock icon	Appears when key lock is enabled. You can also choose to hide thisinformation.[See also] 5.6.5, "Setting the Key Lock," and 7.2.1, "GeneralSettings"
6	USB memory icon	This appears when a USB memory device is connected. You can alsochoose to hide this information.[See also] 5.3, "Connecting USB Devices," and 7.2.1, "GeneralSettings"
7	Screen keys	Keys on the screen that you operate with a mouse or the touchpanel.[See also] 5.6.3, "Mouse and Touch Panel Control"
8	Function menu	A menu for configuring settings.[See also] 5.6.1, "Displaying the Function Menu."

*1 All channels are applicable. However, when measuring 12G, 3G-B-DS or 3G(DL)-4K, only on the currently displayed channels are applicable.

6. BASIC OPERATION

6. BASIC OPERATION

6.1 Setting the Input Signals

This section explains the INPUT menu settings and input format display.

6.1.1 Selecting the Input Mode

When SDI System on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab is set to SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL, or HD Dual Link, to select the input mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

INPUT

→

F•7

DISPLAY : SINGLE / SIMUL

Settings

SINGLE:	The instrument operates in single input mode.
	It is a mode for measuring a single signal that has been turned on using F•1 to F•4.
SIMUL:	The instrument operates in simul mode.
	It is a mode for measuring multiple signals that have been turned on using F•1 to F•4.

DISPLAY = SINGLE

6. BASIC OPERATION

Figure 6-1 Selecting the input mode

6.1.2 Selecting the Simul Mode

When in simul mode, to select how to set each channel, follow the procedure below. If you change INDIVIDUAL to COM, all the settings are changed to those of the channel selected with F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen.

Procedure

INPUT → F•6	OPERATE CH MODE: COMMON / INDIVIDUAL
Settings
COMMON:	Measurement settings are made for all channels.A portion of the settings, such as the line selection when signals of different formats are applied, are not shared by all channels.
INDIVIDUAL:	Measurement settings are made for each channel. To select the channel you want to set, use F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen.A portion of the settings, such as ERROR CLEAR on the STATUS menu are shared by all channels.

6.1.3 Selecting the Displayed Channel

To select the channels to display, follow the procedure below.

On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, assign input signal to the display channels.

[See also] 7.1.2, "Input Signal Assignment"

Procedure (When the link format is set to single)

|INPUT|

→ F•1 A: ON / OFF
→ F•2 B: ON / OFF
→ F•3 C: ON / OFF
→ F•4 D: ON / OFF

Procedure (for dual link)

INPUT

→ F•1 A: ON / OFF

→ F•2 B: ON / OFF

Procedure (for quad link)

|INPUT|

→ F•1 A: ON

You can also use F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen to select the display channels.

F•6 INPUT SELECT works as follows:

• In single input mode, select the display channel.
• When Through Out(SDI1) on the SDI OUT tab is Selection(A/B/C/D), select the signal to output from SDI OUTPUT 1.
• Selects that channel to be configured when F•6 OPERATE CH MODE of the INPUT menu is set to INDIVIDUAL.
• Selects where to recall captured frame data from.

6.1.4 Input Format Error Indication

If the format of the received signal is not appropriate for the setting specified on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, the instrument displays the format in red or an INPUT FORMAT window in the center of the screen. If this occurs, check the settings on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab, the input signal, and payload ID.

The format is displayed in red in the following situations.

• If the format is 2 sample interleave of 3G(DL)-4K or 3G(QL), and the order of the link is not correct
• When the payload ID is not appropriate

An INPUT FORMAT window is displayed in the following situations.

- If the input signal is multi link, and the format specified on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab is not received

[See also] SDI IN SETUP1 tab → 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors."

Figure 6-2 Input format error indication

6. BASIC OPERATION

6.2 Setting the Signals to Measure

This section explains the procedure from applying an input to displaying the measurement screen for each of the different input signal formats.

6.2.1 SD, HD, 3G-A, and 3G-B-DL Measurement

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 2K SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL, and under Display Assignment, select the SDI signal channels to measure.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-3 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. If the input signal is HD or 3G, press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, specify the following settings.

• HD: Set i/PsF Select.
• 3G: Set i/PsF Select, Color System, and Pixel Depth.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-4 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply SDI signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 6-5 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•7 DISPLAY to select whether to measure a single channel (SINGLE) or multiple channels (SIMUL).

Press F•1 to F•4 to turn on the channels you want to measure.

Figure 6-6 Measurement screen

6.2.2 Measuring HD(DL) Signals

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 2K HD Dual Link.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-7 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set i/PsF Select, Color System, and Pixel Depth.

Even if Use is selected, if a HD signal is applied, it will be detected as an HD(DL) signal.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-8 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply HD signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Connectors 1 and 2 and connectors 3 and 4 are pairs.

Figure 6-9 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•7 DISPLAY to select whether to measure a single channel (SINGLE) or multiple channels (SIMUL).

Press F•1 and F•2 to turn on the channels you want to measure.

Figure 6-10 Measurement screen

6.2.3 Measuring 3G(DL)-2K Signals

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 2K 3G Dual Link.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-11 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set Color System and Pixel Depth. Even if Use is selected, if a 3G-A or 3G-B-DL signal is applied, it will be detected as a 3G(DL)-2K signal.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-12 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply a 3G-A or 3G-B-DL signal to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel. Connectors 1 and 2 and connectors 3 and 4 are pairs.

Figure 6-13 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•7 DISPLAY to select whether to measure a single channel (SINGLE) or multiple channels (SIMUL).

Press F•1 and F•2 to turn on the channels you want to measure.

Figure 6-14 Measurement screen

6.2.4 Measuring 3G-B-DS Signals

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 2K 3G-B-DS.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-15 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set i/PsF Select.

Even if Use is selected, if a 3G-B-DL signal is applied, the instrument will detect is as a 3G-B-DS signal.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-16 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply 3G-B-DS signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 6-17 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•1 to F•4 to turn on the channels you want to measure. Simul mode cannot be used.

Figure 6-18 Measurement screen

6.2.5 Measuring 12G Signals (SER29)

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 4K 12G.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-19 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set Division, Color System, and Pixel Depth. [See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-20 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply 12G signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 6-21 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•1 to F•4 to turn on the channels you want to measure. Simul mode cannot be used.

Figure 6-22 Measurement screen

* To measure 12G-SDI signals, use cables and connectors that are appropriate for transmitting 12G-SDI signals. Using incompatible or degraded cables or connectors may cause the transmission characteristics to degrade drastically.

6.2.6 Measuring 3G(QL) Signals (SER28)

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 4K 3G Quad Link.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-23 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set Division, Color System, and Pixel Depth. Even if Use is selected, if a 3G-B-DS signal is applied, it will be detected as a 3G-B-DL signal.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-24 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply a 3G-A or 3G-B-DL signal to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 6-25 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Channels to be measured are fixed to F•1 ON.

Figure 6-26 Measurement screen

6.2.7 Measuring 3G(DL)-4K Signals (SER28)

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 4K 3G Dual Link. [See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-27 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and under SETTING on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab, set the payload ID.

Select Use or Not Use. If you select Not Use, set Division.

Even if Use is selected, if a 3G-B-DL signal is applied, it will be detected as a 3G-B-DS signal.

[See also] 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

Figure 6-28 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.
2. Apply 3G-B-DS signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Connectors 1 and 2 and connectors 3 and 4 are pairs.

LV5600

Figure 6-29 SDI input connectors

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press INPUT to select the channels you want to measure.

Press F•1 and F•2 to turn on the channels you want to measure. Simul mode cannot be used.

Figure 6-30 Measurement screen

6.2.8 Measuring HD(QL) Signals (SER28)

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 4K HD Quad Link.

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-31 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

1. Press COMPLETE.

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Apply HD signals to the SDI INPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 6-32 SDI input connectors

1. Channels to be measured are fixed to F•1 ON.

Figure 6-33 Measurement screen

6. BASIC OPERATION

6.2.9 IP Measurement (SER05)

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to 2K SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL. Then, for Display Assignment, select IP signal.

Set Display Assignment Type to IP (when the SER26 is not installed), or assign IP Stream1 to 4 to Input-A to D (when the SER26 is installed).

[See also] 7.1.1, "Configuring the SDI Input Connectors"

Figure 6-34 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB, and set the parameters on the IP SETUP1 tab. Set the signal standard, IP address, and port number.

You can set the IP address and port number for each stream. If you do not select the check boxes, the addresses and port numbers can be assigned automatically on a first-come-first-served basis or assigned by pressing a single key on the status screen.

[See also] 7.1.10, "Configuring the IP Signal Settings (SER05)," 16.8.2, "Configuring the IP Status Screen"

Figure 6-35 IP SETUP1 tab

1. Press F•3 NEXT TAB, and set the parameters on the IP SETUP2 tab.

Set the PTP domain number and the video format for when the signal standard is ST2110. [See also] 7.1.11, "Configuring the PTP Settings (SER05)," 7.1.12, "Setting the Video Format (SER05)"

Figure 6-36 IP SETUP2 tab

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Install SFP+ transceiver modules into the IP area of the rear panel, and apply IP signals.

When the signal standard is ST2110 or when Redundancy Mode is set to Off, apply the signal to IP 1.

When Redundancy Mode is set to On, apply the signal to IP 1 and 2.

[See also] 5.4, "Installing the SFP+ Module (SER05)," 5.5.2, "Applying IP Signals (SER05)"

Figure 6-37 IP input connectors

1. Press INPUT to select the channels (streams) you want to measure.

Press F•7 DISPLAY to select whether to measure a single channel (SINGLE) or multiple channels (SIMUL).

Press F•1 to F•4 to turn on the channels you want to measure. If the SER26 is not installed, channels A to D are assigned streams 1 to 4.

Figure 6-38 Measurement screen

6.3 Selecting the Measurement Mode

The types of measurement screens available are WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, and EYE. There is also another type, MULTI, that combines these six types. Press a mode key on the front panel to select the type.

6.3.1 Video Signal Waveform Display

To display video signal waveforms, press WFM.

The available features include line select display, which displays the waveform of the selected line, RGB display, pseudo-composite display, and external sync signal waveform display.

Figure 6-39 Video signal waveform display

6.3.2 Vector Display

To display vectors, press VECT.

The available features include line select display, marker display, pseudo-composite display, 5-bar display, and CIE chromaticity diagram display.

Figure 6-40 Vector display

6.3.3 Picture Screen

To show the picture display, press PIC.

The available features include monochrome display, marker display, line select display, and focus assist display (SER25).

Figure 6-41 Picture display

6.3.4 Audio Display

To show the audio display, press AUDIO.

The available features include meter display, Lissajous display (SER03), surround display (SER03), and status display (SER03) of the signal selected with F•7 MAPPING.

Figure 6-42 Audio display

6.3.5 Status Display

To show the status display, press STATUS.

Event log display and data dump display are available.

Figure 6-43 Status display

6.3.6 Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

To show eye patterns, press EYE. (If SER02 is not installed, the EYE key is disabled.) You can also show jitter by switching F•1 EYE/JITTER MODE. Simul mode is not supported.

Figure 6-44 Eye pattern display

6.3.7 Multi Display

To show a multi screen, which is a combination of measurement screens, press MULTI.

If Mode Key Direct on the GENERAL tab is set to Single, you can select between six types of layouts by using F•1 LAYOUT SELECT.

To set each measurement screen, use F•2 MULTI WFM MENU to F•7 MULTI EYE MENU.

If Mode Key Direct on the GENERAL tab is set to Multi/Single Common, you can switch between measurement screens by pressing MULTI. To select the layout, hold MULTI down for 2 seconds to display the function menu. Then select using F•1 LAYOUT USER 1 to F•6 LAYOUT USER 6. [See also] GENERAL tab → 7.2.1, "General Settings"

- USER 1

The vector, video signal waveform, status, and picture are displayed in four divided screens.

Figure 6-45 Multi display (USER 1)

6. BASIC OPERATION

- USER 2

The picture is displayed in the main screen, and the video signal waveform and vector are displayed as thumbnails.

Figure 6-46 Multi display (USER 2)

- USER 3

The vector is displayed in the main screen, and the video signal waveform and picture are displayed as thumbnails.

Figure 6-47 Multi display (USER 3)

- USER 4

The picture, video-signal-waveform, and vector are displayed top to bottom. This is suitable for simul mode.

Figure 6-48 Multi display (USER 4)

- USER 5

The picture and video signal waveform are displayed in the top and bottom screens. This is suitable for simul mode.

Figure 6-49 Multi display (USER 5)

6. BASIC OPERATION

- USER 6

The tally, picture, and video signal waveform are displayed in tiles.

This is suitable for simul mode.

Figure 6-50 Multi display (USER 6)

6. BASIC OPERATION

6.4 Operation Key Actions

Operation keys are shortcut keys for functions that are frequently used in video content production. Key assignments can be changed freely on the OPERATION KEY tab.

[See also] OPERATION KEY tab → 7.2.15, "Setting the Operation keys"

- LV5600

The S-CUT key can be controlled from the panel, mouse, and touch panel. Others can be controlled from the mouse and touch panel.

• LV7600

Keys can be controlled from the panel, mouse, and touch panel.

graph TD
    A["LV5600"] --> B["S-CUT"]
    C["LV7600"] --> D["FORM"]
    C --> E["OVLAY"]
    C --> F["GAIN"]
    C --> G["SWEEP"]
    C --> H["MAG"]
    C --> I["MAG"]
    B --> J["S-CUT"]
    B --> K["FILTER"]
    E --> L["MAG"]

Figure 6-51 Operation keys (panel)

Figure 6-52 Operation keys (mouse and touch panel control screen)

- S-CUT Key

Performs the action selected with SHORT CUT on the OPERATION KEY tab.

Table 6-1 SHORTCUT key action

DIRECT	The previously registered panel settings will be loaded.To register the panel settings, configure the instrument to the settings that you want to register, press MEM, and then press SHORTCUT.
CAP&WAIT	A screen capture will be taken and saved to a USB memory device.Connect a USB memory device in advance.
INTEN	Use the function menu shown in the lower right of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity.This is valid on the video signal waveform display, vector display, and audio display (SER03).When a mouse is connected, clicking the function menu resets the value to the default.When using the touch panel, tapping the function menu resets the value to the default.
CURSOR Performs cursor measurement.This is valid on the video signal waveform display and vector display.
VOLUME	Use the function menu shown in the lower right of the screen to adjust the headphone volume.When a mouse is connected, clicking the function menu resets the value to the default.When using the touch panel, tapping the function menu resets the value to the default.

• Operation Keys Other Than S-CUT

This is valid on the video signal waveform display and vector display. Each time you press the key, the settings assigned to the key switch.

[See also] Video signal waveform display → 10.1, "Operation Key Description"

Vector display → 11.1, "Operation Key Description"

6.5 Customized Layout (SER26)

The layout of the measurement screen that appears when the WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, or EYE key is pressed (one type each) and the screen that appears when the MULTI key is pressed (six types) can be arranged freely. To do so, connect a mouse to the front panel USB port or use the touch panel.

The layout that you specify will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. To initialize, perform any of the procedures below.

[See also] 7.7, "Initialization"

LAYOUT INITIALIZE YES on the SYS menu: The entire layout is initialized.

ALL INITIALIZE YES on the SYS menu: The entire layout is initialized.

Factory default settings: The entire layout is initialized.

DEFAULT LAYOUT in the layout window The layout of the selected measurement display is initialized.

6.5.1 Notes

The maximum number of items that can be arranged is determined by 128 ÷ the number of display channels (1 to 4).

Item, here, includes the items on the Main and Sub tabs as well as Format, Input, and Time on the Option tab.

6.5.2 Layout Procedure

As an example, this section explains how to change the layout of a multi display (User 1) in the following manner.

a) Display the layout screen
b) Change TIME in the upper right of the screen to DATE
c) Superimpose the vector on the picture
d) Add audio
e) Add TIME to the status
f) Apply the changes

Before change

After change

Figure 6-53 Arranging the multi display layout

a) Display the layout screen

1. Press MULTI, and set F•1 LAYOUT SELECT to USER 1.

If Mode Key Direct on the GENERAL tab is set to Multi/Single Common, hold MULTI down for about 2 seconds to display the function menu.

There are six layouts for the multi screen. You can use USER 1 to USER 6 to switch between the layouts.

1. Right-click on the measurement screen or click or tap RIGHT CLICK at the upper left of the screen to select LAYOUT.

The layout screen appears.

Figure 6-54 Layout screen

b) Change TIME in the upper right of the screen to DATE

1. Click or tap the TIME item in the upper right of the screen.

The color of the frame and text changes to light blue, and Select Item in the layout window displays TIME. This indicates that the TIME item is selected.

1. Click or tap DELETE.

The TIME item is deleted.

1. On the Sub tab, click or tap DATE.

The DATE item appears.

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Place the DATE item in the area where the TIME item was displayed.

To move an item, drag it.

To resize an item, drag the green handles at the four corners of the item.

The position and size of an item snap to the grid selected by Grid Size in the layout window.

You can also use the Area tab to move and resize an item.

The coordinates at the upper left corner of the screen are (0, 0) . Those at the lower right corner are (1920, 1080) . Using these references, set the coordinates of the upper left corner of the item (x0, y0) and the lower right corner (x1, y1) .

The minimum size is 90 × 60 .

If the layout window gets in the way, move it or close it. When using a mouse, to display a window that you closed, double-click in the layout screen.

If multiple items are on top of each other, items in the back may not be selectable. If you need to select such item, click or tap the item on the Main or Sub tab. The selected item will move to the front.

c) Superimpose the vector on the picture

1. Select the VECTOR item, and click Background Transparent on the Option tab.

Background Transparent is for making the background transparent when an item is superimposed on a picture.

1. Place the VECTOR item on top of the picture.

Resize as necessary.

d) Add audio

1. On the Main tab, click or tap AUDIO.

The AUDIO item appears.

You can place an AUDIO item even if SER03 is not installed, but the message "Not installed" will appear.

1. Place the AUDIO item in the area where the VECTOR item was originally displayed.

e) Add TIME to the status

1. Click or tap the STATUS item.

2. On the Option tab, click or tap Time.

The TIME item on the Sub tab can be placed anywhere. Time on the Option tab is displayed at the top of the selected item. You cannot change the display position or size.

f) Apply the changes

1. Right-click or tap in the layout screen, and click or tap SAVE.

The measurement screen returns.

If you click or tap EXIT, all the changes that you made up to that point will be canceled.

6.5.3 Layout Screen Description

Figure 6-55 Layout screen

1 Layout Window

The Layout window is used to create layouts.

Mode in the title bar displays the current measurement mode (WFM, USER 1 to USER 5, etc.).

You can move the window by dragging and close it by clicking or tapping ✗ in the upper right of the window. When using a mouse, to display a window that you closed, double-click in the layout screen.

2 Item

Displays the item selected on the Main or Sub tab.

The settings specified with Item Setting are displayed in the frame.

If you select it, the frame color changes from white to light blue.

3 Menu Guide

A function menu appears in this area.

Use these as guides when placing items.

1. BASIC OPERATION
   4 5
   

6 7 8

Figure 6-56 Layout window

4 Select Item

Displays the selected item.

5 Display Mode / Style

Select the display format for simul mode.

Display Mode applies to the entire screen, Style applies to the selected item.

If Display Mode is not set to NORMAL or if the selected item is AUDIO or EYE, Style cannot be selected.

If the selected item is VECTOR (5BAR), VECTOR (HIST), VECTOR (CIE), STATUS, or an item on the Sub tab, you cannot set Style to MIX.

If Display Mode is not set to NORMAL and multiple channels are displayed in simul mode, even if you place AUDIO or EYE items in the layout, "Not supported" will appear and will not work.

For example, if the following screens are displayed in single input mode and you change to simul mode, the display changes depending on Display Mode as follows.

Figure 6-57 Single input mode

6. BASIC OPERATION

- When Display Mode Is NORMAL

The screen is divided by channel within each item. Select the division format with Style.

TILE (tile the screens) MIX (cascade the screens)

Figure 6-58 Normal display

- When Display Mode Is TILE

The screen is divided by channel.

Ach Bch

Cch Dch

Figure 6-59 Tiled display

6. BASIC OPERATION

- When Display Mode Is ALIGN-H

The screen is divided by channel and arranged side by side.

Ach Bch Cch Dch

Figure 6-60 ALIGN-H display

- When Display Mode Is ALIGN-V

The screen is divided by channel and arranged top to bottom.

Figure 6-61 ALIGN-V display

6. BASIC OPERATION

6 DELETE

Deletes the selected item.

7 DEFAULT LAYOUT

Resets the layout to the initial settings defined for each measurement mode. Grid Size is not reset.

8 Grid Size: 10x10 / 30x30

Select the grid size.

The position and size of items snap to the grid specified here.

9 Main

Measurement items.

• WFM

Shows the video signal waveform display.

- PIC

Shows the picture display.

- VECTOR

Click or tap this after selecting the display mode on the VECTOR tab to show the vector waveform. A CIE chromaticity diagram will not be displayed properly if the VECT item is overlapping other items.

- AUDIO

Click or tap this after selecting the display mode on the AUDIO tab to show audio. If SER03 is not installed, the message "Not installed" is displayed.

- STATUS

Click or tap this after selecting the display mode on the STATUS tab to show the status.

• EYE

Click or tap this after selecting the display mode on the EYE tab to show the eye pattern or jitter.

If SER02 is not installed, the message "Not installed" is displayed.

10 Sub

Items for displaying information.

- FORMAT

Shows the format (e.g., 1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD).

If you place this item, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

It is normally displayed in white, but if the input format is not appropriate, it turns red.

- INPUT

Shows the input signal (e.g., SDI A).

If you place this item, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

• TIME

Shows the time (e.g., TIME: 00:00:00).

If you place this item, you can select the display format using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

- DATE

Shows the date (e.g., DATE: 2000/01/01).

If you place this item, you can select the display format using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

Only one item is displayed even if you switch to simul mode.

11 Tally

Items for tally display and camera ID display.

Unarranged items are displayed with black characters. Clicking an item places the item.

Arranged items are displayed with green characters. Clicking an item selects the item.

- LABEL-1, LABEL-2

Shows the camera ID set on the RS485 tab, CAMERA ID tab or through RS-422/485.

The default values are CAM A to CAM D and vary depending on the channel.

[See also] RS485 tab → 7.2.12, "Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings (SER27)"

CAMERA ID tab → 7.2.13, "Setting the Camera ID (SER27)"

• IRIS

Shows the iris set on the RS485 tab, CAMERA ID tab or through RS-422/485.

The default values are CAM A to CAM D and vary depending on the channel.

[See also] RS485 tab →7.2.12, "Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings (SER27)"

CAMERA ID tab →7.2.13, "Setting the Camera ID (SER27)"

• TALLY-1, TALLY-2, TALLY-EXT

Shows the tally set through the remote connector, TALLY tab or RS-422/485.

TALLY-EXT (EXTENDED) is a tally display with a comment of up to eight characters. You can edit the comment on the REMOTE tab.

[See also] TALLY tab → 7.2.14, "Configuring the Tally Display (SER27)"

REMOTE tab → 7.2.8, "Setting the Remote Connector"

6. BASIC OPERATION

12 Area

Set the position and size of the selected item.

The coordinates at the upper left corner of the screen are (0, 0) . Those at the lower right corner are (1920, 1080) . Based on these references, the coordinates of the upper left corner of the item is (x0, y0) , and those of the lower right corner is (x1, y1) .

You can change the values using the ▲▼ key or the wheel on the mouse.

13 Option

Set the options for the selected item.

- Format

Turns on and off the format display (e.g., 1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD).

This option cannot be displayed for an AUDIO item, EYE item, or an item on the Sub tab. If this is set to on, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

It is normally displayed in white, but if the input format is not appropriate, it turns red.

- Input

Turns on and off the input signal display (e.g., SDI A).

This option cannot be displayed for an AUDIO item, EYE item, or an item on the Sub tab. If this is set to on, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

- Time

Turns on and off the time display (e.g., TIME: 00:00:00).

This option cannot be displayed for an AUDIO item, EYE item, or an item on the Sub tab. If this is set to on, you can select the display format using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

• Background Transparent

Selects the transmittance of the background when the sub item is superimposed on a picture.

When enabled, the transmittance is set to 100 %; when disabled, the transmittance is set to 50 %.

You cannot set this option for a PIC item.

•Frame

Turns on and off the frame display of PICTURE items.

14 Tally Setup

Select whether to display tallies on the outer frame of the PICTURE item.

This setting applies to all PICTURE items and enhanced layout.

If this is set to on, TALLY-1 set through the remote connector, TALLY tab or RS-422/485 is shown on the outside and TALLY-2 on the inside. Tally is not displayed when the input signal is 3G-B-DS.

Figure 6-62 Tally display

15 Audio Level

Select whether to display audio meters on both sides of the PICTURE item.

This setting applies to all PICTURE items.

If the AUDIO item is also displayed simultaneously or if the input signal is 3G-B-DS, audio meters are not displayed.

Figure 6-63 Audio meter display

16 VECT

Select the display mode of the VECTOR item. Select the mode before clicking or tapping the VECTOR item.

VECT / 5BAR / HIST / CIE	Shows the normal vector display. You can switch the display between vector waveform, 5bar, histogram and CIE chromaticity diagram. It cannot be arranged with the items below at the same time. If you want to arrange the items below, delete this item first.
VECTOR	Shows vectors.
5BAR	Switches to the 5-bar display.
HIST	A histogram is displayed.
CIE	The CIE chromaticity diagram display is shown.

17 AUDIO

Select the display mode of the AUDIO item. Select the mode before clicking or tapping the AUDIO item.

LEVEL BAR + etc.	This is the normal audio display. The display switches between Lissajous, surround, meter, status, and loudness.It cannot be arranged with the items below at the same time. If you want to arrange the items below, delete this item first.
LEVEL BAR Meters are displayed.It cannot be arranged with LOUDNESS at the same time.When 16 channels are being measured, meters will not be displayed correctly if arranged at the same time with SURROUND.
LISSAJOU	Lissajous curves are displayed.
STATUS	Shows the status.
SURROUND Surround waveforms are displayed.This item will not be displayed correctly when 16 channels are being measured or when embedded audio is being measured.
LOUDNESS	Loudness are displayedIt cannot be arranged with LEVEL BAR at the same time.This item will not be displayed correctly when 16 channels are being measured or when embedded audio is being measured.

18 STATUS

Selects the display mode of the STATUS item. Select the mode before clicking or tapping the STATUS item.

STATUS ALL	This is the normal status display. The display switches between error count, data dump, etc.It cannot be arranged with the items below at the same time. If you want to arrange the items below, delete this item first.
STATUS ERROR	Error counts are displayed.
DATA DUMP	Data dump is displayed.
EVENT LOG	The event log is displayed.
EXT REF	Phase differences are displayed.
ANC PACKET SUMMARY	A summary of ancillary pockets is displayed.
ANC One of the following is displayed.
	•STATUS EDH: EDH Display•STATUS PAYLOAD: Payload ID Display•STATUS CONTROL: Audio control packet display•STATUS ARIB CC: Closed Caption Display•STATUS ARIB NETQ: NET-Q display•STATUS ARIB TRIG: Data trigger display•STATUS ARIB USER1: User data 1 display•STATUS ARIB USER2: User data 2 display•STATUS SMPTE AFD: AFD Display•STATUS SEARCH: Ancillary packet search display

6. BASIC OPERATION

19 EYE

Select the display mode of the EYE item. Select the mode before clicking or tapping the EYE item.

EYE / JITTER	This is the normal eye pattern display. The display switches between eye pattern and jitter.It cannot be arranged with the items below at the same time. If you want to arrange the items below, delete this item first.
EYE	The eye pattern is displayed.
JITTER	The jitter waveform is displayed.

For example, you can arrange EYE and JITTER to be displayed at the same time.

Figure 6-64 Eye pattern and jitter display

6.6 Enhanced Layout (SER26)

Enhanced layout is an extended function that enables the measurement screens of up to four channels to be laid out on a single screen simultaneously in simul mode. To use this function, connect a mouse to the front panel USB port.

Figure 6-65 Enhanced layout

Enhanced layout will not be initialized even if PARAM INIT YES is executed from the SYS menu. To initialize it, execute LAYOUT INIT YES or ALL INIT YES from the SYS menu, factory default initialization, or DEFAULT LAYOUT from the enhanced layout window.

[See also] 7.7, "Initialization"

As shown below, the number of layout channels differs between the enhanced layout and customized layout.

[See also] 6.5, "Customized Layout (SER26)"

Table 6-2 Layout comparison

	Enhanced layout	Customized layout
Number of layout channels	1 to 4	1

6. BASIC OPERATION

6.6.1 Enhanced Layout Procedure

As an example, this section will explain the procedure to display the enhanced layout of channels A to D.

Enhanced layout can be shown in simul mode when multi-screen display is in use.

1. On the SDI IN SETUP1 tab of the SYS menu, set SDI System to SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL.

Figure 6-66 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

1. Set F•7 DISPLAY of the INPUT menu to SIMUL, and set F•1 A to F•4 D to ON.

Figure 6-67 INPUT menu

1. Press MULTI.

2. Right-click in the measurement screen, and click ENHANCED LAYOUT.

The enhanced layout screen appears.

Figure 6-68 Enhanced layout screen

1. Change the layout as necessary.

A default layout is initially stored in the main unit. Even after you change the layout, you can return to the default layout by clicking DEFAULT LAYOUT.

To create a new layout after clearing the default layout, click ALL CLEAR.

The basic operation is the same as with the customized layout. See section 6.5.2, "Layout Procedure."

For details on the enhanced layout screen, see section 6.6.2, "Enhanced Layout Screen Description."

- Selecting the Measurement Mode

You can select up to four measurement modes. Assign measurement modes to Layout-1 to Layout-4.

6. BASIC OPERATION

- Arranging Items

Arrange items on the Main, Sub1, Sub2, Sub3, and Other tabs.

Main, Sub1, Sub2, and Sub3 represent four channels. The channel selected with F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen is displayed in Main.

- Notes

• Arrange PICTURE items so they do not overlap.
• Arrange waveform display items (WFM, VECTOR) so they do not overlap.
• Arrange Main, Sub1, Sub2, and Sub3 according to the number of channels to be used with the following combinations. Arrangements other than these combinations are possible, but they will not be displayed correctly.

Number of channels	Main	Sub1	Sub2	Sub3
1	√	-	-	-
2	√	√	-	-
3	√	√	√	-
4	√	√	√	√

6. BASIC OPERATION

1. Right-click or tap in the enhanced layout screen, and click or tap SAVE.

The measurement screen returns.

If you click or tap EXIT, all the changes that you made up to that point will be canceled.

Figure 6-69 Enhanced layout (INPUT SELECT = A)

Items arranged on Main show the channels selected with F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen. However, if you click a picture of Sub1, Sub2, or Sub3, the channel that you click appears on Main.

For example, in the above figure, if you click the picture of Sub2 (Cch), Cch appears on Main. (Sub1 to Sub3 show channels other than the channel shown on Main in the A, B, C, D order.)

Figure 6-70 Enhanced layout (INPUT SELECT = C)

6.6.2 Enhanced Layout Screen Description

1

Figure 6-71 Enhanced layout screen description

1 Enhanced layout window

The Layout window is used to create layouts.

You can move the window by dragging and close it by clicking ☒ in the upper right of the window. If you close it, you can redisplay it by double-clicking in the enhanced layout screen.

2 Item

Items arranged on the Main, Sub1 to Sub3, and Other tabs are displayed. The upper-left coordinate, item name, and size are displayed in the frame. If you select it, the item name color changes from white to light blue.

Figure 6-72 Enhanced layout window

3 MODE

Assign measurement modes to Layout-1 to Layout-4. You can select from the following measurement modes.

WFM / VECTOR / PICTURE / STATUS

4 WFM / PICTURE / VECTOR / AUDIO / STATUS / EYE

Set the options for each measurement mode.

You can set these items when you arrange an item.

- Format

Turns on and off the format display (e.g., 1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD). If you set this to ON, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

It is normally displayed in white, but if the input format is not appropriate, it turns red. If the specified format is not received, it turns yellow.

- Time

Turns on and off the time display (e.g., TIME: 00:00:00).

If you set this option to ON, you can select the display format using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

6. BASIC OPERATION

- Input

Turns on and off the input signal display (e.g., SDI A).

If you set this to ON, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

- Frame

Turns on and off the frame display of PICTURE items.

• Background Transparent

Selects the transmittance of the background when the sub item is superimposed on a picture.

When enabled, the transmittance is set to 100 %; when disabled, the transmittance is set to 50 %.

You cannot set this option for a PICTURE item.

- Tally Setup

Select whether to display tallies on the outer frame of the PICTURE item.

See "14 Tally Setup" in section 6.5.3, "Layout Screen."

- Audio Level

Select whether to display audio meters on both sides of the PICTURE item.

See "15 Audio Level" in section 6.5.3, "Layout Screen."

5 Main / Sub1 / Sub2 / Sub3

Main, Sub1, Sub2, and Sub3 represent four channels. For each channel, you arrange items. (To arrange items for three channels, use the Main, Sub1, Sub2 combination. For two channels, use the Main, Sub1 combination. For one channel, use Main.)

Main displays the channel selected with F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen. Sub1 to Sub3 show channels other than the channel shown on Main in the A, B, C, D order.

Items are categorized into Layout, Info, and Tally.

Unarranged items are displayed with black characters. Clicking an item places the item. Arranged items are displayed with green characters. Clicking an item selects the item.

- LAYOUT-1 to LAYOUT-4

Shows the measurement mode assigned on the MODE tab.

6. BASIC OPERATION

- FORMAT

Shows the format (e.g., 1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD).

If you place this item, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

It is normally displayed in white, but if the input format is not appropriate, it turns red. If the specified format is not received, it turns yellow.

- INPUT

Shows the input signal (e.g., SDI A).

If you place this item, you can show and hide it using the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu.

• TIME

Shows the time (e.g., TIME: 00:00:00).

If you place this item, you can select the display format using the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu.

• TALLY-1, TALLY-2, TALLY-EXT

Shows the tally set through the remote connector, TALLY tab or RS-422/485.

TALLY-EXT (EXTENDED) is a tally display with a comment of up to eight characters. You can edit the comment on the REMOTE tab.

[See also] TALLY tab → 7.2.14, "Configuring the Tally Display (SER27)"

REMOTE tab → 7.2.8, "Setting the Remote Connector"

- LABEL-1, LABEL-2

Shows the camera ID set on the RS485 tab, CAMERA ID tab or through RS-422/485.

The default values are CAM A to CAM D and vary depending on the channel.

[See also] RS485 tab → 7.2.12, "Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings"

CAMERA ID tab → 7.2.13, "Setting the Camera ID (SER27)"

• IRIS

Shows the iris set on the RS485 tab, CAMERA ID tab or through RS-422/485.

The default values are CAM A to CAM D and vary depending on the channel.

[See also] RS485 tab →7.2.12, "Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings"

CAMERA ID tab →7.2.13, "Setting the Camera ID (SER27)"

6 Other

- DATE

Place the DATE item.

The DATE item shows the date (e.g., DATE: 2000/01/01).

If you place this item, you can select the display format using the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu.

• AUDIO

Place the AUDIO item.

• EYE

Place the EYE item.

7 Ctrl

Manipulates items such as select, copy, and paste.

- TEMP-SAVE

Temporarily saves the current layout.

Note that the layout that is present when you enter the enhanced layout screen is automatically saved even if you don't click TEMP-SAVE.

The saved layout is deleted when you exit from the enhanced layout screen.

- TEMP-LOAD

Loads the layout saved with TEMP-SAVE or the layout that was present when you entered the enhanced layout screen.

- SELECT OPTION

Selects the target items when you group items with the SELECT function.

- MAIN/SUB1/SUB2/SUB3 - SELECT

Selects the items of the selected channels as a group.

If items are not grouped, SELECT is displayed with black characters.

If items are grouped, SELECT is displayed with green characters, and the selected item range is displayed in white. Moving by dragging, COPY, and DELETE can be used on grouped items.

• COPY

Temporarily saves the layout of items grouped with SELECT.

The saved layout is deleted when you exit from the enhanced layout screen or change the SELECT OPTION.

• MAIN/SUB1/SUB2/SUB3 - PASTE

Pastes the layout saved with COPY to the selected channel.

This is useful such as when you want to make Sub1 to Sub3 the same layout.

If there is a same item as the copied item at the paste destination channel, the position and size are overwritten.

6. BASIC OPERATION

- ALL - ---

CH - MAIN/SUB1/SUB2/SUB3

ITEM - LAYOUT-1/LAYOUT-2 and the like

Selects the target items when you select items with << and >>.

If you select ALL, all items of all channels are selected in order.

If you select CH, all items of the selected channel are selected in order.

If you select ITEM, the selected items of all channels are selected in order.

• <<, >>

Selects the items specified by ALL/CH/ITEM in order. You can select an item by clicking it directly, but this is useful when items are overlapped and you want to select items in the back.

Moving by dragging, COPY, DELETE, and TOP can be used on selected items.

• TOP

Moves the selected items to the front.

8 DELETE

Deletes individually selected or grouped items.

If the Ctrl tab is displayed, individually selected items can only be deleted if they are part of the ALL/CH/ITEM target.

9 ALL CLEAR

Deletes all items.

10 DEFAULT LAYOUT

Resets the layout to factory default.

11 Item name

Displays the selected item name.

12 x0, y0, x1, y1

Set the position and size of the selected item.

The coordinates at the upper left corner of the screen are (0, 0) . Those at the lower right corner are (1920, 1080) . Based on these references, the coordinates of the upper left corner of the item is (x0, y0) , and those of the lower right corner is (x1, y1) .

You can change the values using the ▲▼ key or the wheel on the mouse.

13 Grid Size: 10x10 / 30x30

Select the grid size.

The position and size of items snap to the grid specified here.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

The SYS menu can be used to configure the instrument and options. Press SYS, and use the SYS menu.

Figure 7-1 SYS menu

7.1 Configuring the I/O Connectors

To configure the I/O connector settings, use F•1 SIGNAL IN OUT on the SYS menu.

7.1.1 Configuring the Input System

Use SDI on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab to configure the input system of SDI INPUT and IP on the rear panel.

Figure 7-2 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

- System

Select the input format.

4K 12G / 4K 3G Quad Link / 4K 3G Dual Link / 4K HD Quad Link / 2K SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL / 2K HD Dual Link / 2K 3G Dual Link / 2K 3G-B-DS 

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Colorimetry

Select the colorimetry to use on the video-signal-waveform, vector, picture, and CIE-chromaticity-diagram displays.

The currently applied colorimetry is displayed in cyan in the vector display and CIE chromaticity diagram display. For 3G(QL) and 3G(DL)-4K, if you select a payload ID, the current applied colorimetry is displayed in yellow if the colorimetries of all links are not matched.

For SD input, the colorimetry is fixed to BT.601, regardless of the colorimetry selection.

The picture display on the instrument LCD is not capable of expressing the color space of the applied colorimetry.

Payload ID:	If SDI System is 4K 12G, 4K 3G Quad Link, or 4K 3G Dual Link and the division transmission system is 2 sample interleave, the instrument automatically detects BT.2020 from the payload ID and operates. For the square format or for modes other than BT.2020, the instrument runs in BT.709 mode.
BT-709:	Runs in BT.709 mode.
BT-2020:	Runs in BT.2020 mode.
DCI:	Runs in DCI mode.

- XYZ Gamma Select

Select the gamma for XYZ input.

Bottom Zero Gamma / DCI Gamma

7.1.2 Input Signal Assignment

Use Display Assignment on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab to assign the SDI INPUT and IP connectors on the rear panel to the display channels.

Figure 7-3 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Type

Select which signals to apply to the display channels, the SDI signals received through the SDI INPUT connectors or the IP signals received through the IP connectors on the rear panel. This selection is possible when SDI System is set to SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL, the SER05 10G IP INPUT is installed, and SER26 LAYOUT is not installed. In all other cases, the type is fixed to SDI.

SDI / IP

- Input-A to D (SER26)

When SER26 LAYOUT is installed, the display assignment display is enabled allowing you to assign a single input signal to multiple display channels, regardless of whether the signal is SDI or IP.

You can set these parameters only when SDI System is set to SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL.

You can select IP Stream when the SER05 10G IP INPUT is installed.

- Input A

Selects the input to display channel A.

SDI 1 / SDI 2 / SDI 3 / SDI 4 /

IP Stream1 / IP Stream2 / IP Stream3 / IP Stream4

- Input B

Selects the input to display channel B.

SDI 1 / SDI 2 / SDI 3 / SDI 4 /

IP Stream1 / IP Stream2 / IP Stream3 / IP Stream4

- Input C

Selects the input to display channel C.

SDI 1 / SDI 2 / SDI 3 / SDI 4 /

IP Stream1 / IP Stream2 / IP Stream3 / IP Stream4

- Input D

Selects the input to display channel D.

SDI 1 / SDI 2 / SDI 3 / SDI 4 /

IP Stream1 / IP Stream2 / IP Stream3 / IP Stream4

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

When SER26 is installed

Figure 7-4 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

7.1.3 Setting the Input Format

Use SDI Input Rate on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab to set the SDI input signal format.

Figure 7-5 SDI IN SETUP1 tab

- SDI Input Rate

Select the format of the signal to receive from SDI INPUT 1 to 4. In normal cases, use AUTO. If you select a setting other than AUTO and apply a signal different from the selected format, the signal will not be received correctly.

AUTO / 12G / 3G / HD / SD

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.1.4 Setting the Payload ID

User Format on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab to set the payload ID parameters.

Figure 7-6 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

- Payload ID

Select whether to use the payload ID for input format identification.

This cannot be selected when SDI System is 4K HD Quad Link.

Use / Not Use

If you select Not Use, set the items marked with a Y in

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

Table 7-1. The instrument will operate using the specified settings.

If you select Use, the items marked with a Y will be detected from the payload ID. There is no need to set these items, but if you set them and a payload ID is not embedded in the input signal, the instrument will operate using the specified settings.

Regardless of whether you select Use or Not Use, items such as scanning and frame frequency will be detected from the TRS.

Table 7-1 Payload ID settings.

Input Signal	Division	i/PsF Select	Color System	Pixel Depth
HD Cannot be set Y No need to set			(fixed to YCbCr 422)	No need to set (fixed to 10 bits)
SD	Cannot be set	No need to set (fixed to interlace)	No need to set (fixed to YCbCr 422)	No need to set (fixed to 10 bits)
3G-A, 3G-B-DL	Cannot be set	Y	Y	Y
3G-B-DS	Cannot be set	Y	Cannot be set	Cannot be set
12G	Y	Cannot be set	Y	Y
HD(DL)	Cannot be set	Y	Y	Y
3G(DL)-2K	Cannot be set	Cannot be set	Y	Y
3G(DL)-4K	Y	Cannot be set	Cannot be set	Cannot be set
3G(QL)	Y	Cannot be set	Y	Y

- Division

Selects the division transmission system when SDI System is 4K.

Square / 2 Sample Interleave

- i/PsF Select

The instrument cannot detect the following formats. Therefore, select whether to use interlace or segmented frame for displaying.

This cannot be selected when SDI System is 4K or 3G Dual Link.

• 1080/60I and 1080/30PsF

• 1080/59.94I and 1080/29.97PsF

• 1080/50I and 1080/25PsF

Interlace / Segmented Frame(PsF)

- Color System

Select the color system of the input signal.

SDI System is 3G-B-DS or 4K 3G Dual Link, this is fixed to YCbCr 422, and you cannot change it.

YCbCr 422 / YCbCr 444 / RGB 444 / XYZ 444

- Pixel Depth

Select the quantization of the input signal.

SDI System is 3G-B-DS or 4K 3G Dual Link, this is fixed to 10 bit, and you cannot change it.

10bit / 12bit

7.1.5 Setting the Format Alarm

User Alarm on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab to set the format alarm parameters.

Figure 7-7 SDI IN SETUP2 tab

- Format

Turn on and off the format alarm detection.

If alarm detection is set to ON and a format other than the format specified with Format is received, the instrument operates in the following manner.

• Displays the format in yellow
- Displays errors in the event log of the status display
- Displays "ERROR" in the upper right of the display.
- Transmits a signal from the alarm output remote terminal

OFF / ON

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

• System
• Structure
• Frame/Field Rate
• Division

When format alarm detection is on, specify the expected format. For information on the format combinations that are available, see section 3.3.1, "SDI Video Formats and Standards," and 3.3.2, "IP Video Formats and Standards (SER05)."

Table 7-2 Format selection

SDI System	System	Structure	Frame/Field Rate	Division
4K 12G 3840x2160 12G TYPE 14096x2160 12G TYPE 1		YCbCr(422) 10 bit YCbCr(422) 12 bit YCbCr(444) 10 bit YCbCr(444) 12 bit RGB(444) 10 bit RGB(444) 12 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P	-
4K 3G Quad Link	3840x2160 3G-B-DL Quad4096x2160 3G-B-DL Quad3840x2160 3G-A Quad4096x2160 3G-A Quad	YCbCr(422) 10 bit YCbCr(422) 12 bit YCbCr(444) 10 bit YCbCr(444) 12 bit RGB(444) 10 bit RGB(444) 12 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/30/29.97 / 25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	Square/2 Sample Interleave
4K 3G Dual Link	3840x2160 3G-B-DS Dual4096x2160 3G-B-DS Dual	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	Square/2 Sample Interleave
4K HD Quad Link	3840x2160 HD Quad4096x2160 HD Quad	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	-
SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL	1920x1080 3G-B-DL2048x1080 3G-B-DL1280x720 3G-A1920x1080 3G-A2048x1080 3G-A1280x720 HD1920x1080 HD720x487 SD720x576 SD	YCbCr(422) 10 bit YCbCr(422) 12 bit YCbCr(444) 10 bit YCbCr(444) 12 bit RGB(444) 10 bit RGB(444) 12 bit	60/59.94/50/I60/59.94/50/48/47.95/30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	-
HD Dual Link 1920x1080 HD Dual2048x1080 HD Dual		YCbCr(422) 10 bit YCbCr(422) 12 bit YCbCr(444) 10 bit YCbCr(444) 12 bit RGB(444) 10 bit RGB(444) 12 bit	60/59.94/50/I60/59.94/50/48/47 .95/30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	-
3G Dual Link	1920x1080 3G-B-DL Dual2048x1080 3G-B-DL Dual1920x1080 3G-A Dual2048x1080 3G-A Dual	YCbCr(422) 12 bit YCbCr(444) 10 bit YCbCr(444) 12 bit RGB(444) 10 bit RGB(444) 12 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P -
3G-B-DS	1280x720 3G-B-DS1920x1080 3G-B-DS	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/I60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF	-

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Colorimetry

Turn on and off the colorimetry alarm detection.

Normally, colorimetry is displayed in cyan on the vector waveform display and CIE chromaticity diagram display. But for 3G(QL) and 3G(DL)-4K, if any of the colorimetries does not match, it is displayed in yellow.

If alarm detection is set to on and a colorimetry other than that specified with Type is received, the colorimetry is displayed in red. It is also displayed in red on the video signal waveform display.

Note that this is invalid when the input signal is SD.

OFF / ON

- Type

When colorimetry alarm detection is on, specify the expected colorimetry.

BT-709 / BT-2020 / DCI

7.1.6 Configuring the SDI Output Connectors

Use Output on the SDI OUT tab to configure the SDI OUTPUT connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 7-8 SDI OUT tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Mode

Select the signal that is generated from SDI OUTPUT. If SER24 TSG is not installed, Test Signal cannot be selected.

Input Through: Transmits the reclocked version of the signal that has been received by the SDI INPUT 1 to 4 connectors. If SER26 LAYOUT is installed, you can output the signal assigned with Display Assignment on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab.

Test Signal: Transmits the pattern specified by Test Signal.

• Follow the Display Assignment

If Mode is set to Input Through and SER26 LAYOUT is installed, selecting this check box outputs the signal assigned with Display Assignment on the SDI IN SETUP1 tab. If an IP signal is assigned, the signal is converted into an SDI signal and output.

- Through Out (SDI1)

When Mode is set to Input Through, select the signal to output from SDI OUTPUT 1. If the format is not SD, HD, 3G-A, or 3G-B-D, SDI INPUT 1 is fixed, and you cannot select it.

Fixed (1):	Transmits the reclocked version of the signal that has been received by the SDI INPUT 1 connector.
Selection (1/2/3/4):	Transmits the reclocked version of the signal that has been received by the SDI INPUT 1 to 4 connectors.To select the output channel, use the INPUT menu or F•6 INPUT SELECT on each measurement screen.

7.1.7 Configuring the TSG Settings (SER24)

When Mode on the SDI OUT tab is set to Test Signal, use the parameters under Test Signal to set the TSG to output from SDI OUTPUT on the rear panel.

Figure 7-9 SDI OUT tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

• System
• Structure
• Frame/Field Rate

Set the output format. The possible format combinations are shown below. The default values are 1920x1080 HD, YCbCr(422) 10 bit, 59.94I.

Table 7-3 Output format selection

System	Structure	Frame/Field Rate
3840x2160 12G4096x2160 12G	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P
	YCbCr(444) 10 bitRGB(444) 10 bit	30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P
3840x2160 3G-B-DL Quad4096x2160 3G-B-DL Quad3840x2160 3G-A Quad4096x2160 3G-A Quad2048x1080 3G-B-DL2048x1080 3G-A	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P
	YCbCr(444) 10 bitRGB(444) 10 bit	30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF
3840x2160 3G-B-DS Dual4096x2160 3G-B-DS Dual	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF
1920x1080 3G-B-DL1920x1080 3G-A	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P
	YCbCr(444) 10 bitRGB(444) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/I30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF
1920x1080 HD	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/I30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/PsF
1280x720 HD	YCbCr(422) 10 bit	60/59.94/50/P30/29.97/25/24/23.98/P

- Division

Selects the division transmission system when System is Quad or Dual.

Square / 2 Sample Interleave

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

• Pattern
• Interlock

Select the output pattern. The selectable patterns are shown below. The selectable patterns vary depending on the System setting.

Depending on the pattern, you can turn on and off YCbCr or RGB separately.

For COLOR RASTER, you can set the YCbCr or RGB levels separately. Moreover, if Structure is set to RGB, you can select the Interlock check box to synchronize the RGB levels.

Table 7-4 Output pattern selection

Pattern	YCbCr/RGB on/off	Level adjustment
COLOR BAR 100%	Yes	No
COLOR BAR 75%	Yes	No
ARIB2020 COLOR BAR	Yes	No
MULTI COLOR BAR 100%	Yes	No
MULTI COLOR BAR 75%	Yes	No
MULTI COLOR BAR (+I)	Yes	No
COLOR RASTER	Yes	Yes
OETF	Yes	No
CROSS HATCH	No	No
10_STEP	No	No
LIMIT RAMP	Yes	No
CHECK FIELD	No	No
LIP SYNC (SER03)	No	No

* The signal will be interrupted when the pattern is changed.

When OETF is selected, select the gamma characteristics.

BT-709 / HLG / PQ

Note that bandwidth limit is not applied to patterns other than COLOR BAR 100% and COLOR BAR 75%.

- Scroll

Select the scroll direction for when a pattern is scrolled.

If a setting other than OFF is selected, Moving Box and Phase Difference are turned off. You cannot select this when Pattern is set to CROSS HATCH.

OFF

RIGHT: Scrolls from left to right.

LEFT: Scrolls from right to left.

UP: Scrolls from bottom to top.

DOWN: Scrolls from top to bottom.

RIGHT & UP: Scrolls from lower left to upper right.

RIGHT & DOWN: Scrolls from upper left to lower right.

LEFT & UP: Scrolls from lower right to upper left.

LEFT & DOWN: Scrolls from upper right to lower left.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Speed

When Scroll is not set to off, set the scroll speed.

4 - 124 dots (4 dot steps)

- Moving Box

If you select the color of the moving box, a square that moves randomly is superimposed. If a setting other than OFF is selected, Scroll and Phase Difference are turned off.

When Moving Box is not set to off, set the moving box speed.

Greater the value, higher the speed.

1 - 3

- Phase Difference

If H or V is selected, the phase of other channels can be varied relative to Ach.

When System is set to Quad, you can adjust the Bch, Cch, and Dch phases relative to Ach. When System is set to Dual, you can adjust the Bch phase relative to Ach and the Dch phase relative to Cch.

If a setting other than OFF is selected, Scroll and Moving Box are turned off.

OFF / H / V

• Bch, Cch, Dch, or B/Dch

When Phase Difference is not set to off, you can adjust the Bch, Cch, and Dch phases. When System is set to Dual, the Bch and Dch phases are shared.

Phase Difference = H

-1374 - 0 - 1374 dots (depending on Frame/Field Rate)

Phase Difference = V

-562 - 0 - 562 Dot

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Embedded Audio

When the pattern is not LIP SYNC, select the audio channels to embed in the SDI signal. 1 to 4ch is referred to as G1, 5 to 8ch as G2, 9 to 12ch as G3, and 13 to 16ch as G4.

The channels that can be embedded are 8 channels or 16 channels depending on the system and frame/field rate as shown below.

Table 7-5 Embedded audio settings

System	Frame/Field Rate	G1	G2	G3	G4
3840x2160 12G4096x2160 12G3840x2160 3G-B-DL Quad3840x2160 3G-A Quad4096x2160 3G-A Quad3840x2160 3G-B-DS Dual1920x1080 3G-B-DL1920x1080 3G-A2048x1080 3G-A1920x1080 HD1280x720 HD	- Y Y Y Y
4096x2160 3G-B-DL Quad2048x1080 3G-B-DL	60/59.94/30/29.97/P30/29.97/PsF	Y Y	N		N
	50/48/47.95/25/24/23.98/P25/24/23.98/PsF	Y Y	Y Y
4096x2160 3G-B-DS Dual	30/29.97/P30/29.97/PsF	Y Y	N		N
	25/24/23.98/P25/24/23.98/PsF	Y Y	Y Y

- Level

Select the embedded audio level.

-20dBFS / -18dBFS / 0dBFS / Mute

- CRC Error

When set to on, an incorrect CRC is inserted into the Y series of the first line.

OFF / ON

7.1.8 Configuring the Monitor Output Connectors

Use LCD, TMDS, and SDI on the MONITOR OUT tab to configure the MONITOR OUTPUT connectors on the rear panel and the instrument's LCD.

Figure 7-10 MONITOR OUT tab

- Freq. Sync Mode

Select the sync mode.

INT: Transmits in the selected format by using the internal clock.

EXT (Frequency lock, expect 24 Hz):

Transmits by using the external sync signal received through EXT REF.

The output signal format varies depending on the frame frequency of the external sync signal as follows.

30 Hz: 1080/60p

29.97 Hz: 1080/59.94p

25 Hz: 1080/50p

24 Hz or 23.98 Hz: INT

When there is no external sync signal: INT

- Format

If Freq Sync Mode is set to INT, select the frame frequency of the output signal.

1080/60p / 1080/59.94p / 1080/50p

- SDI Out

Select the output format of the SDI signal.

HD-SDI (convert Interlace) / 3G-SDI Level-A / 3G-SDI Level-B

7.1.9 Configuring the HDR Settings (SER23)

On the HDR tab, configure the settings of HDR measurement for each display channel (Input A to D).

Figure 7-11 HDR tab
- HDR Mode

Turn of the HDR measurement, or select the HDR signal standard. If you select an HDR signal standard, HDR signals can be measured on the video-signal-waveform, vector, and picture displays.
HLG and PQ refer to ITU-R BT.2100, and S-Log3 refers to the log curve output from cameras of other manufacturers.

OFF: An HDR scale is not displayed.
HLG:	When HLG Scale is 1200% (default value), 0 to 100% is displayed as 0 to 1200%.
	When HLG Scale is 100% (default value), 0 to 100% is displayed as 0 to 100%.
PQ:	0 to 100 % is displayed as 0 to 10000 cd/m2.
S-Log3:	If 0 to 100% is set to 64 to 940, 95 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 2055%.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Ref. Level

When HDR Mode is set to HLG or PQ, select the reference level for the program production. On the video signal waveform display, the selected reference level is shown using broken lines on the scale.

On the picture display, the selected reference level is set to the REF default value on the HDR signal CINEZONE display. The REF default value is applied when you press the function dial (F•D).

HDR Mode = HLG

50% / 75%

HDR Mode = PQ

51% / 58%

- Variable

Select whether to enable the reference level setting.

When HDR Mode is set to HLG or PQ, the default reference level is set to the Ref.Level value. When HDR Mode is set to S-Log3, the default reference level is set to 61.0%.

OFF / ON

- System Gamma

When HDR Mode is set to HLG or S-Log3, turn system gamma on or off.

If system gamma is set to on, the scale corresponding to the HDR signal of the video signal waveform display and picture display is shown in cd/m ² , which is a unit of display intensity for HLG displays.

When HDR Mode is set to HLG, gamma 1.2 is used to calculate the intensity with the full scale ranging up to 1000 cd/m² .

When HDR Mode is set to S-Log3, the intensity is displayed with the full scale ranging up to 3000 cd/m² .

OFF / ON

- Range

When HDR Mode is set to HLG or PQ, select the range.

Narrow / Full

- HLG Scale

When HDR Mode is set to HLG, select the HDR scale display.

1200%: 0 to 100 % is displayed as 0 to 1200%.

100% 0 to 100 % is displayed as 0 to 100%.

7.1.10 Configuring the IP Signal Settings (SER05)

Use IP Setup on the IP SETUP1 tab to configure the IP input signal settings.

Figure 7-12 IP SETUP1 tab

- Type

Select the IP signal standard.

ST2022-6 / ST2110

- Redundancy Mode

When Type is set to ST2022-6, set the redundancy mode to on or off.

Off / On

- IP Input

Select which IP input you want to configure. You can set the following parameters for each IP input and IP stream.

You can select 2 when Type is set to ST2022-6 and Redundancy Mode is set to On.

1 / 2

- IP Stream

Select which IP stream you want to configure. You can set the following parameters for each IP input and IP stream.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Source Address

For the signals selected with IP Input and IP Stream, select the check boxes and assign their source IP addresses.

If you do not select the check boxes, they will be assigned automatically on a first-come-first-served basis. They can also be assigned by pressing a single key on the status screen.

[See also] 16.8.2, "Configuring the IP Status Screen."

192.168.0.1

- Destination Address, Destination Port

For the signals selected with IP Input and IP Stream, select the check boxes and assign their destination IP addresses and port numbers.

If you do not select the check boxes, they will be assigned automatically on a first-come-first-served basis. They can also be assigned by pressing a single key on the status screen.

0.0.0.0 / 05000

7.1.11 Configuring the PTP Settings (SER05)

Use PTP Setup on the IP SETUP2 tab to configure the PTP settings.

Figure 7-13 IP SETUP2 tab

- Domain Number

Set the domain number.

0 - 127

7.1.12 Setting the Video Format (SER05)

Use ST2110 Video Format on the IP SETUP2 tab to set the video format for when the signal standard is set to ST2110.

Figure 7-14 IP SETUP2 tab

- IP Stream

Select which IP stream you want to configure. You can set the following parameters for each IP stream.

1/2/3/4

- RTP Payload Type

Set the payload type of the signal selected with IP Stream.

96 - 127

• System
• Structure
• Frame/Field Rate

Set format of the signal selected with IP Stream. For information on the format combinations that are available, see section 3.3.2, "IP Video Formats and Standards (SER05)."

Table 7-6 Format selection

System	Structure	Frame/Field Rate
1920x1080 3GA	YCbCr(422)10bit 60	59.94/50 P
1920x1080 HD		60/59.94/50 I

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2 Configuring the Instrument

To configure the instrument, press F•2 SYSTEM SETUP on the SYS menu.

7.2.1 General Settings

Use General on the GENERAL tab to configure general settings of the instrument.

They are not reset even if you initialize the settings. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-15 GENERAL tab

- Preset Overwrite

Select whether to enable overwriting when registering presets.

Disable this to prevent overwriting presets.

Disable / Enable

- Fan Speed

Select the fan speed.

The larger the value, the higher the speed and the higher the cooling capability. In contrast, the smaller the value, the quieter the fan noise.

When an SER02 or an SER05 is installed

4/5/6/7/8

When an SER02 and an SER05 is not installed

1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Screensaver

Select the length of time that must elapse without any key operations for the screen saver to start.

To clear the screen saver, press any key excluding the power switch, double-click, or operate the touch panel.

Select the length of time that must elapse after the last key operation before the backlight is automatically turned off.

To turn it on again, press any key excluding the power switch, double-click, or operate the touch panel.

In multi-screen display, you can select whether to switch the measurement screen with the mode keys (WFM, VECT, PIC, AUDIO, STATUS, and EYE).

Single:	Using the mode key switches the function menu and measurement screen.
Multi/Single Common:	Using the mode key switches only the function menu. The measurement screen does not change from the multi-screen display.To display the function menu on the multi-screen display, hold down MULTI for about 2 seconds.

- Auto Off

Set the length of time that must elapse without any key operations for the function menu to disappear automatically.

If set to off, the menu will not disappear automatically, but for example, the measurement menu can be temporarily hidden by pressing the MODE key again.

Even if set to a value other than off, some menus, such as the SYS menu, never automatically disappear.

Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 60 [sec]

- Recall

Select the menu to be displayed when recalling presets.

Recall Menu: The Recall menu is displayed.

Function Menu: The measurement menu is displayed.

7.2.3 Configuring the On-screen Menu

Use On-screen Menu on the GENERAL tab to configure the on-screen menu.

Figure 7-17 GENERAL tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Auto Off

For keys on the screen controlled with the mouse or touch panel, select the length of time that must elapse without any key operations for the keys to disappear automatically.

Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 60 [sec]

- Operation Key

Set whether to include the operation key in the keys on the screen controlled with the mouse or touch panel.

OFF / ON

7.2.4 Configuring the Capture Feature

Use Capture on the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab to configure the capture feature.

Figure 7-18 CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab

- Mode

Select the capture mode for when you press CAP.

[See also] 8, "CAPTURE FEATURE"

Screen: The screen will be captured as still images.

Video Frame (SDI Code Value): Frame data will be captured.

Video Frame (Converted): Frame data will be captured.

When data is saved to DPX or TIFF format, frame data is captured with the black level offset to zero.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- File Type

Turns on the file format for saving the captured screen or frame data to a USB memory device.

[See also] 8, "CAPTURE FEATURE"

Mode = Screen

BMP:	Files are saved to a USB memory device in BMP format. You can view the saved files on a PC.
BSG:	Files are saved to a USB memory device in BSG format. You can view the saved files on the instrument.

* By default, BMP and BSG are both on. You cannot set both of these settings to OFF.

Mode = Video Frame (SDI Code Value) or Video Frame (Converted)

DPX:	Only the picture area is saved as 10-bit DPX files.Even when the input signal is 12 bits, it is rounded to 10 bits and saved.When Mode is set to video Frame (Converted), the black level is offset to zero.This cannot be selected when Frame Number is set to 16 Frames.

TIF: Only picture data is saved as TIFF files.

This data is DPX data converted into TIFF format.

When Mode is set to video Frame (Converted), the black level is offset to zero.

This cannot be selected when Frame Number is set to 16 Frames.

FRM: frame data is saved.
* By default, all the check boxes are selected. You cannot turn all the settings off.

- Transport Frame Number

When Mode is set to Video Frame (SDI Code Value) or Video Frame (Converted), select the number of frames to capture.

[See also] 8.2, "Frame Capture"

1 Frame: A single frame of data is saved.

16 Frames:

16 consecutive frames of data are saved.For the following formats, 32 picture frames are captured because two picture frames are mapped to each frame.3G-B-DL transmission; 3G(QL), 3G(DL)-2K frame rate60P/59.94P/50P/48P/47.95PHD(DL)transmission; frame rate 60P/59.94P/50P/48P/47.95P

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.5 Configuring the Information Display

Use Information Display on the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab to configure the information display.

Figure 7-19 CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Format

Turns on and off the format display (e.g., 1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD). This setting is valid when a FORMAT item or Format option is placed in the layout.

Off / On

- Input

Turns on and off the input signal display (e.g., SDI A). This setting is valid when a INPUT item or Input option is placed in the layout.

Off / On

- Icon

Turns on and off the mouse icon 1, key lock icon ⚠, and USB memory icon ⚣. If you turn this off, you will not be able to tell from the screen whether a mouse, the US interface of a touch panel monitor, or a USB memory device is connected.

[See also] 5.7, "Measurement Screen Description"

Off / On

- Temperature Warning

Turns on and off the alarm display (TEMPERATURE) that appears when the internal temperature increases.

"OVER HEAT" will still be displayed even if this is set to off.

[See also] 7.2.17, "Displaying System Information"

Off / On

- Error

Turn on or off the error display in the upper right of the measurement screen. [See also] 5.7, "Measurement Screen Description"

Off / On

- Date

Select the display format of the date. y is the Gregorian year, m is the month, and d is the day. This setting is valid when a DATE item is placed in the layout.

Off / y/m/d / m/d/y / d/m/y

- Time

Select the display format of the time. This setting is valid when a TIME item or Time option is placed in the layout, in the clear screen log of the picture display, and in the event log of the status display.

Off / Real Time / LTC / VITC / D-VITC

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.6 Setting the Network IP

Use IP on the NETWORK tab to configure network IP settings and view the MAC address. The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-20 NETWORK tab

• DHCP
  Select how to set the IP address.

Off:	Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway manually.
On:	The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are set automatically.

• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Default Gateway

Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

- MAC Address

Displays the MAC address.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.7 Configuring SNTP

Use SNTP on the NETWORK tab to configure the SNTP parameters.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-21 NETWORK tab

• SNTP

Select whether to enable the SNTP client function.

When set to ON, enter the NTP server IP address in Server IP Address and the time adjustment value in Time Zone Adjust.

Off / On

• Server IP Address
• Time Zone Adjust

When the SNTP client function is set to ON, enter the NTP server IP address in Server IP Address and the time adjustment value in Time Zone Adjust.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.8 Configuring the Server

Use Server on the NETWORK tab to configure the TELNE, FTP, and HTTP.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-22 NETWORK tab

- Telnet

Select whether to enable the TELNET server feature and the LV7290 REMOTE CONTROLLER. You cannot use TELNET and the LV7290 at the same time.

Off / On / LV7290

- FTP Server

Select whether to enable the FTP server function.

Off / On

- HTTP Server

Select whether to enable the HTTP server feature.

Off / On

7.2.9 Configuring SNMP

Use SNTP tab to configure the SNTP parameters.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. Nor are they recorded to presets.

Figure 7-23 SNMP tab
- SNMP Client
Select the SNMP access mode.
OFF: SNMP cannot be used.
ReadOnly: Settings can be read.
ReadWrite: Settings can be read and written.
• SNMP Community
Shows the SNMP community name.

The default values are shown below. You can change them using F•4 READ ONLY COMMUNITY and F•5 READ WRITE COMMUNITY. You cannot change the community name of TRAP.
Enter a comment using up to 15 characters.
Default
ReadOnly: LDRUser
ReadWrite: LDRAdm
TRAP: LDRUser
You can use the following keys on the SNMP community name input screen.

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts the selected character at the cursor position
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

Function dial (F•D)

Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

Figure 7-24 Community name input screen

- Trap

Select whether to enable SNMP trap output.

OFF / ON

- Manager IP Address

Shows up to four SNMP manager IP addresses.

- Saving the enterprise MIB file to USB memory device

To save the enterprise MIB file to USB memory device, follow the procedure shown below.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press F·6 USB MEMORY.
3. Press F•1 MIB FILE COPY.

The enterprise MIB file is saved to USB memory device.

Enterprise MIB file is saved to the following locations.

USB memory device

LV5600_USER or LV7600_USER

MIB

Lv5600.my or lv7600.my

When the enterprise MIB file exists in the USB memory device, F•1 OVER WRITE YES and F•3 OVER WRITE NO appear.

To overwrite, press F•1 OVER WRITE YES. To not overwrite, press F•3 OVER WRITE NO.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.10 Configuring the IP Settings (SER05)

Use SER05 on the SER05 (IP) tab to configure network settings and view the MAC address for IP 1 and 2.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. Nor are they recorded to presets.

Figure 7-25 SER05 (IP) tab

• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Default Gateway
  Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
• MAC Address

Displays the MAC address.

7.2.11 Configuring the Remote Control Settings

Use the REMOTE tab to configure remote control settings.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

[See also] 10, "REMOTE CONTROL"

Figure 7-26 REMOTE tab

• Mode
  Select the method for loading presets.

Bit: Use pin 2 (/P1) to pin 9 (/P8) to load presets 1 to 8.
Binary:	Set pin 2 (/P1) as the least significant bit and pin 7 (/P6) as the most significant bit, and use binary code to load presets 1 to 60.
Command:	Recalls presets (1 to 60), selects channels, outputs alarms, and displays tallies (1/2).
Tally:	Outputs alarms and displays tallies (1/2/EXT). (SER27)

- Select (SER03/SER27)

When Mode is Bit or Binary, select the function to assign to pin 8 (/P7), pin 9 (/P8), pin 10 (/ACH), pin 11 (/BCH), pin 12 (/CCH), and pin 13 (/DCH) of the remote connector. When Mode is Command or Tally, select Recall.

This is displayed when SER03 or SER27 or both are installed.

Recall: Assign preset recalling.

Recall&Loudness:

Assigned loudness control. Recall&Tally: Assigned tally control.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Alarm Polarity

Select the alarm output polarity.

Positive: A high signal is transmitted when an error is detected.

Negative: A low signal is transmitted when an error is detected.

- Alarm Select

Select the display channel that errors are detected on for transmitting alarms.

By default, all the check boxes are selected.

When measuring 3G-B-DS, alarms are output only for the currently shown display channels.

Input-A / Input-B / Input-C / Input-D

• Tally-1
• Tally-2
• Tally-EXT

Select whether to control the tally using the remote connector or RS-422/485 connector (SER27).

Remote / RS485

7.2.12 Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings (SER27)

Use the RS485 tab to configure the RS-422/485 settings.

The settings that you specify here (except Local ID Setting) will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-27 RS485 tab

- Baud Rate

Select the baud rate.

The following parameters are fixed: data length: 8 bit, parity: none, stop bit: 1 bit.

9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200

- Device Address

Set the instrument's address. If you are connecting several instruments, assign different numbers.

0 - 99

- Termination Setting

Terminates the RS-422/485 connector. If you are connecting several instruments, set the instrument at the end to ON and all others to OFF.

Off / On

7.2.13 Setting the Camera ID (SER27)

When ID Control Select is set to Local, use the CAMERA ID tab to select the placement of the camera ID and set the label.

The procedures for Camera ID Label-1, Camera ID Label-2, and Camera ID Label-IRIS are the same.

The settings that you specify here (except the placement selection and label setting) will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-28 CAMERA ID tab

- Control Select

Select whether to set the camera ID on the instrument or through the RS-422/485 connector.

To camera ID is displayed for the LABEL-1, LABEL-2, and IRIS items on the layout.

Local / RS485

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Selecting the placement

Select the placement of the camera ID.

LEFT / CENTER / RIGHT

- Setting the label

The default camera ID labels are CAM A to CAM D, but you can change them by selecting their check boxes and pressing F•5 LOCAL LABEL INPUT. Enter up to 16 characters.

You can use the following keys on the camera ID input screen.

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts the selected character at the cursor position
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

The camera IDs can also be changed through RS-422/485. (When using this method, you can use Japanese Shift-JIS codes in addition to ASCII codes.)

Figure 7-29 Camera ID label input screen

7.2.14 Configuring the Tally Display (SER27)

Use the TALLY tab to configure the settings of the TALLY item placed in the layout.

Figure 7-30 TALLY tab

• Tally-1, Tally-2, Tally-EXT

Select the color of the TALLY item placed in the layout. The default values are red for Tally-1, green for Tally-2, and orange for Tally-EXT.

Red / Green / Blue / Cyan / Magenta / Yellow / Orange

• Tally Off

Select the color of the TALLY item placed in the layout and that of the tally frame for when the tally is off.

Black: No color is displayed.

DIM COLOR: The selected color is displayed dimly.

- Frame

Turns on and off the frame of the LABEL-1, LABEL-2, IRIS, TALLY-1, and TALLY-2 items placed in the layout.

(The frame of the TALLY-EXT item is always shown.)

OFF / ON

- Gray Background

Select whether to display the background of the LABEL-1, LABEL-2, IRIS, and TALLY-EXT items placed in the layout in gray.

OFF / ON

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Tally-EXT Comment

Displays the comment of the TALLY-EXT item placed in the layout.

The default value is EXT, but you can change it using F•5 TALLY EXT COMMENT INPUT. Enter a comment using up to eight characters.

You can use the following keys on the comment input screen.

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts the selected character at the cursor position
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

Figure 7-31 Comment input screen

- Comment Layout

Select the comment position of the TALLY-EXT item placed in the layout.

on the left: Places the comment on the left.

on the right: Places the comment on the right.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.15 Setting the Operation keys

Use the OPERATION KEY tab to set the operation keys.

Figure 7-32 OPERATION KEY tab

- FORM

Set the display format and display order to apply when the FORM key is pressed on the video signal waveform display or vector display. Select SKIP to skip an item.

WFM: Y / YCbCr / YGBR / GBR / YRGB / RGB / COMPOSITE / SKIP VECTOR: COMPONENT / COMPOSITE / SKIP

- SHORT CUT

Select the action to perform when the S-CUT key is pressed.

DIRECT:	The previously registered panel settings will be loaded. To register the panel settings, configure the instrument to the settings that you want to register, press MEM, and then press SHORTCUT.
CAP&WAIT:	A screen capture will be taken and saved to a USB memory device. Connect a USB memory device in advance.
INTENSITY:	Use the function menu shown in the lower right of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity. This is valid on the video signal waveform display, vector display, and audio display (SER03). When a mouse is connected, clicking the function menu resets the value to the default. When using the touch panel, tapping the function menu resets the value to the default.
CURSOR:	Performs cursor measurement. This is valid on the video signal waveform display and vector display.
VOLUME:	Use the function menu shown in the lower right of the screen to adjust the headphone volume. When a mouse is connected, clicking the function menu resets the value to the default. When using the touch panel, tapping the function menu resets the value to the default.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- FILTER

Set the filter and display order to apply when the FILTER key is pressed in the pseudo-composite display of the video signal waveform display. Select SKIP to skip an item. Note that for component display, the FILTER key is used to switch between FLAT and LOWPASS.

FLAT / LUM / FLAT+LUM / LUM+CRMA / SKIP

- MAG(GAIN)

Set the magnification and display order to apply when the MAG (GAIN) key is pressed on the video signal waveform display or vector display. Select SKIP to skip an item.

WFM:	X1 / X5 0% / X5 10% / X5 20% / X5 30% / X5 40% / X5 50% / X5 60% / X5 70% / X5 80% / X5 90% / X5 100% / X10 0% / X10 10% / X10 20% / X10 30% / X10 40% / X10 50% / X10 60% / X10 70% / X10 80% / X10 90% / X10 100% / SKIP
VECTOR:	X1 / X5 / IQ-MAG / SKIP

- SWEEP

Set the sweep method and display order to apply when the SWEEP key is pressed on the video signal waveform display. Select SKIP to skip an item.

1H / 2H / 1V / 2V / SKIP

- MAG(SWEEP)

Set the horizontal magnification and display order to apply when the MAG (SWEEP) key is pressed on the video signal waveform display. Select SKIP to skip an item.

X1 / X10 / X20 / X40 / ACTIVE / BLANK / SKIP

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.16 Date and time settings

Use the DATE&TIME tab to set the date and time.

You cannot set these settings when the SNTP client function is set to on.

The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. In addition, they are not recorded to presets.

Figure 7-33 DATE & TIME tab

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.2.17 Configuring the LV7290

You can configure the LV 7290 REMOTE CONTROLLER (sold separately) on the LV7290 SETUP tab.

If LV7290 is not selected under Telnet on the NETWORK tab, the LV7290 will not be displayed.

[See also] Telnet → 7.2.8, "Configuring the Server"

The connection to the LV7290 will be disconnected as soon as you change the LV7290 settings. The settings that you specify here will not be initialized even if you initialize the instrument. Nor are they recorded to presets.

Figure 7-34 LV7290 tab

- Remote Controller

Select whether to send the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway settings to the LV7290.

Off / On

• IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway

Set the LV7290's IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

- Remote Label

Displays the label of the REMOTE LABEL item placed in the layout.

There is no label in the default settings, but, you can press F•5 REMOTE LABEL INPUT to enter a label.

Enter up to 16 characters.

You can use the following keys on the label input screen.

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts the selected character at the cursor position
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

Figure 7-35 Label input screen

- Frame

Turns on and off the frame of the REMOTE LABEL item placed in the layout.

Off / On

- Gray Background

Select whether to display the background of the REMOTE LABEL item placed in the layout in gray.

Off / On

- Connect Distination

Select whether to send the LV5600's and LV7600's IP address to the LV7290.

Off / On

• UNIT-1 to 8 IP Address

Set the connection destination LV5600 and LV7600 IP addresses.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.3 Displaying System Information

To display the system information, press F•3 SYSTEM INFO on the SYS menu. You can view the instrument version and the internal temperature on this tab.

Figure 7-36 INFORMATION tab

- Firmware

Displays the firmware version.

• MOTHER / WFM / PICTURE

Displays the hardware versions.

• SER01 / SER02 / SER03 / SER05

Displays the versions of the installed hardware options. Units displayed as "NONE" are not installed.

- Temperature

The internal temperature is displayed in a bar graph.

The internal temperature is displayed using 6 levels. Green levels indicate normal temperature. If the temperature increases and reaches the yellow area, a "TEMPERATURE" alarm appears at the top of the measurement screen.

If the internal temperature increases still further and reaches the red area, the alarm "OVER HEAT" appears in the upper left area of the measurement screen. When a specific temperature is reached, the power will be shut down.

If either of these alarm appears, immediately turn the power off, and then check for problems with the operating environment. If this alarm appears even though there are no problems with the operating environment, contact your local LEADER agent.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.4 Installing Software Options

To install options, use F•4 LICENSE on the SYS menu.

You can use this screen to view the MAC address and install options.

[See also] 2.3, "Software Options"

Figure 7-37 LICENSE tab

- Installing an Option

Have your license key ready, and follow the procedure below.

1. Use the function dial (F•D) to enter the license key number.

Press F•2 CLEAR to clear the license key to 0000000000.

1. Press F•3 REGISTER.

"Accepted" appears if the license key has been entered correctly, and the corresponding option becomes usable. The name of the option that has been installed appears in the License List.

"Failed" appears if the license key is not correct. Reenter the license key correctly.

- Disabling an Option

Have your license key ready, and follow the procedure below.

1. Use the function dial (F•D) to enter the license key number.

Press F•2 CLEAR to clear the license key to 0000000000.

1. Press F•4 REMOVE.

"Accepted" appears if the license key has been entered correctly, and the corresponding option is disabled. The name of the option is deleted from the License list.

"Failed" appears if the license key is not correct. Reenter the license key correctly.

1. Restart the instrument.

7.5 Adjusting the Backlight (LV5600)

To adjust the backlight, use F•5 LCD BACK LIGHT on the SYS menu.

The larger the value, the brighter the backlight. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (28).

1 - 28 - 32

7.6 Turning Off the LCD Panel (LV5600)

To turn off the LCD, press F•6 LCD OFF on the SYS menu.

To turn it on again, press any key excluding the power switch, double-click, or operate the touch panel.

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.7 Initialization

To initialize the settings and layout, use F•7 INITIALIZE on the SYS menu.

graph LR
    A["F1 PALAM INIT YES"] --> B["F2 LAYOUT INIT YES"]
    B --> C["F3 OPERATE INIT YES"]
    C --> D["F4 ALL INIT YES"]
    D --> E["F5 INIT CANCEL"]
    E --> F["F6"]
    F --> G["F7"]

Figure 7-38 INITIALIZE menu

7.7.1 Initializing Settings

To initialize the settings, press F•1 PARAM INIT YES.

To cancel, press F•5 INIT CANCEL.

When you initialize the settings, all the settings—excluding those listed below—are initialized. For information about the default values, see chapter 21, "MENU TREES."

• Network settings (NETWORK tab)
• IP settings (SER05 (IP) tab)
- Remote control settings (REMOTE tab)
• RS-422/485 settings (RS485 tab)
- Camera ID settings (excluding Local ID Setting) (CAMERA ID tab)
- Date and time settings (DATE&TIME tab)
- Preset contents
• Measurement screen layout
• Factory Default Settings

If you also want to initialize the above settings (excluding the date and time settings), turn on the power while holding down the V POS and H POS knobs. Release them when about 3 seconds elapse after the power is turned on, and then press F•3 SRAM/FLASH INIT YES.

Figure 7-39 Factory default settings

7. SYSTEM SETTINGS

7.7.2 Initializing the Layout

To initialize the layout, press F•2 LAYOUT INIT YES. To cancel, press F•5 INIT CANCEL.

When you initialize the layout, the layouts configured in all measurement displays (11 total) will be initialized. To initialize the layout in each measurement display, click or tap DEFAULT LAYOUT in the appropriate layout window.

[See also] DEFAULT LAYOUT → 6.5.3, "Layout Screen Description"

7.7.3 Initializing the Operation keys

To initialize the operation keys, press F•3 OPERATE INIT YES. To cancel, press F•5 INIT CANCEL.

7.7.4 Initializing the Settings and Layout

To initialize the settings and layout, press F•4 ALL INIT YES. To cancel, press F•5 INIT CANCEL.

8. CAPTURE FEATURE

The capture feature consists of screen capture and frame capture.

- Screen Capture

You can use the screen capture feature to capture still-image data of the screen. You can save the captured data to a USB memory device or overlay it on the input signal on the instrument's display.

• Frame Capture (SDI Code Value, Converted)

You can use the frame capture feature to capture a single frame or 16 consecutive frames of data from the SDI or IP signal. You can save the captured data to USB memory or overlay it on the input signal on the instrument display.

When data is saved to DPX or TIFF format in Converted mode, the black level is offset to zero.

Because data is captured as frame data, the data can be displayed on the instrument in different display modes. The supported display modes are the video signal waveform, vector, picture, and status (data dump) displays.

- Switching between Screen Capture and Frame Capture (SDI Code Value, Converted)

Use Mode on the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab to switch between the two.

[See also] CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab → 7.2.4, "Configuring the Capture Feature"

Figure 8-1 CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab

8.1 Screen Capture

8.1.1 Capturing the Displayed Screen

To take a screen capture, follow the procedure below.

1. Display the screen you want to capture.
2. Press CAP.

The screen is captured to the internal memory. You can also take screen captures by pressing F•2 REFRESH while the CAP menu is displayed.

Note that if you perform one of the following operations after taking a screen capture, the captured data will be deleted.

• Change the measurement screen
• Press INPUT, MULTI, SYS, MEM, or RECALL
• Turn off the power
• Change the measurement screen
• Press INPUT, MULTI, SYS, MEM, or RECALL
• Turn off the power

graph LR
    A["F1"] --> B["F2 REFRESH"]
    B --> C["F3 DISPLAY REAL"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5"]
    E --> F["F6"]
    F --> G["F7 SELECT CHA"]
    subgraph CAP
        H["F·1"]
        I["F·2"]
        J["F·3"]
        K["F·4"]
        L["F·5"]
        M["F·6"]
        N["F·7"]
    end

Figure 8-2 CAP menu

8.1.2 Displaying Screen Capture Data

Press CAP to display the acquired screen capture data on the instrument or overlay it on the current input signal.
You can display captured video signal waveform, vector, picture, audio waveform, and eye pattern waveform display data on the instrument. Other kinds of data (such as status and scale data) cannot be displayed. However, these other kinds of data can be saved to a USB memory device as BMP files.
To display screen capture data, press F•3 DISPLAY on the CAP menu.

REAL: The current input signal is displayed.
HOLD:	The screen capture data is displayed.
BOTH:	The current input signal and the screen capture data are overlaid with their intensities halved.

8.1.3 Saving to a USB Memory Device

Captured data acquired by pressing CAP is deleted when you perform an operation such as changing the measurement screen. However, by saving the screen capture data to a USB memory device in BSG format, you will be able to display the screen capture data on the instrument even after it is restarted.

Also, if you save the screen capture data in BMP format, you can view the captured data on a PC.

Use the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab on the SYS menu to set the file format.

[See also] CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab → 7.2.4, "Configuring the Capture Feature"

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.

A file list screen and a USB MEMORY menu appear.

1. Select how to name the file.

If F•1 AUTO FILENAME is set to on, the file is automatically assigned a name that consists of the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second (in that order) that are set on the SYS menu. (Example: 20090501100859.bmp)

Screen capture data is saved to the following locations.

USB memory device

LV5600_USER or LV7600_USER

L BMP

• yyyymmddhhmmss.bmp
• yyyymmddhhmmss.bsg

8. CAPTURE FEATURE

If F•1 AUTO FILENAME is set to off, press F•2 NAME INPUT to enter the file name. Enter up to 17 characters.

The key operations that you can perform in the file name input display are as follows:

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

After entering the file name, F•7 up menu. The CAP menu appears.

Figure 8-3 File name input screen

1. Press F•3 STORE.

When AUTO FILENAME is set to on or if the specified file name does not exist in the USB memory device when AUTO FILENAME is set to off, the message "Please wait. Saving file" is displayed on the screen, and the screen capture data is saved to USB memory.

When AUTO FILENAME is set to off and the specified file name exists in the USB memory device, the STORE menu appears.

To overwrite, press F•1 OVER WRITE YES. The message "Please wait. Saving file" is displayed on the screen, and the screen capture data is saved to USB memory.

To not overwrite, press F•3 OVER WRITE NO.

CAP → F•6 USB MEMORY → F•3 STORE

Figure 8-4 STORE menu

8.1.4 Displaying Screen Capture Data from a USB Memory Device

To display or overlay on the current input signal the BSG screen capture data that has been saved to a USB memory device, follow the procedure below.

(Screen capture data that has been saved in BMP format and screen capture data that has been saved in BSG format on a different model cannot be displayed on the instrument.)

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press CAP.
   The CAP menu appears.
3. Press F•6 USB MEMORY. A file list screen and a USB MEMORY menu appear.

4. Press F•5 RECALL.
   The BSG format file list screen appears.

5. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the file that you want to display.

6. Press F•1 RECALL.

The capture data and CAP menu appear.

1. Press F•3 DISPLAY to select the display format.

After you press F•1 RECALL, the display format is BOTH.

8.1.5 Deleting Screen Capture Data from a USB Memory Device

To delete screen capture data from a USB memory device, follow the procedure below. (You can also delete the data on the PC.)

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press CAP.
   The CAP menu appears.

3. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.
   A file list screen and a USB MEMORY menu appear.
   You can also press F•5 RECALL here to display a BSG format file list screen.

4. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the file that you want to delete.

8. CAPTURE FEATURE

1. Press F•5 DELETE FILE.

The DELETE FILE menu appears.

Figure 8-5 DELETE FILE menu

1. Press F•1 DELETE YES.

To cancel the operation, press F•3 DELETE NO.

8.2 Frame Capture

8.2.1 Capturing Frame Data

There are two ways to capture frame data. One way is to capture frame data manually, and the other is to capture frame data automatically when errors occur (error capture).

When using error capture, use single input mode. It will not work properly in simul mode.

1. Display the screen you want to capture.

The display must be showing video signal waveforms, vectors, or a picture. However, capturing is not possible if an eye pattern (SER02) or audio is shown in the same display. For vector waveforms, press VECT and then set F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG → F•1 VECTOR DISPLAY to VECTOR. This feature does not support the 5-bar display.

1. Press CAP.

The CAP menu appears.

Unlike screen captures, frame data is not captured when you press CAP.

graph LR
    A["CAP"] --> B["F1 TRIGGER MANUAL"]
    B --> C["F2 REFRESH"]
    C --> D["F3 DISPLAY REAL"]
    D --> E["F4"]
    E --> F["F5"]
    F --> G["F6"]
    G --> H["F7 SELECT CHA"]
    H --> I["F·1"]
    I --> J["F·2"]
    J --> K["F·3"]
    K --> L["F·4"]
    L --> M["F·5"]
    M --> N["F·6"]
    N --> O["F·7"]

Figure 8-6 CAP menu

• Capturing frame data manually
3. Press F•1 TRIGGER to select MANUAL.
4. Press F•2 REFRESH.

Frame data is captured in the instrument.

- Capturing frame data automatically (error capture)

1. Press F•1 TRIGGER to select ERROR.
2. Press F•7 SELECT CH to select a channel.
3. Press F•2 REFRESH.

Error capture for the selected channel begins.

To begin error capture on other channels, repeat steps 4 and 5.

The instrument switches to error standby mode and Channels for which capture is in progress appear in the upper right of the screen. Standby mode is cleared by setting F•1 TRIGGER to MANUAL.

In Simul mode, "Capture is invalid" will appear, and the capture function will not work.

Figure 8-7 Error standby

8. CAPTURE FEATURE

6. When the message below appears, press any key except for the power key

If an error occurs during error standby, the instrument captures the frame data at that point and stops the frame capture.

The applicable errors are those listed under "Applicable Errors" below whose detection setting has been set to ON through F•5 STATUS SETUP on the STATUS menu.

Table 8-1 Applicable errors for error capturing

	Applicable Errors	Inapplicable Errors
SDI Error	TRS, Line Number, CRC, EDH, Illegal Code	Frequency, Cable
Ancillary Data Error	Parity, Checksum	-
Embedded Audio Error	BCH, DBN, Parity, Inhibit Line	Sample Count
Video Error	Gamut, Composite Gamut, Level	Freeze, Black

Figure 8-8 Error capture end

8.2.2 Displaying Frame Capture Data

You can display the captured frame data on the instrument or overlay it on the current input signal. You can also display the frame data in different display modes.

- Selecting display format

To select the display format, follow the procedure below.

• If the frame data captured to the internal memory does not exist, you cannot select the display format.
• First, show the video signal waveform display, vector display (excluding the 5-bar display), or picture display.
• To display frame data, the instrument must be receiving a signal whose format is the same as that of the captured data.
• The display may blink when you operate the V POS knob, H POS knob, or function dial (F•D).
• The scale and measured values are those of the current signal, not those of the captured data.

Procedure

CAP

→

F•3

DISPLAY: REAL / REPLAY / BOTH / HOLD

Settings

REAL: The current input signal is displayed.
REPLAY:	The frame data is displayed. With 3G-B-DL, two video frames are embedded in a single frame data structure, so the screen may flicker. If this happens, set the display format to HOLD. Every time you select HOLD, the image of either frame will be displayed.When Transport Frame Number is set to 16 Frames, 16 consecutive frames (*1) of data are displayed repeatedly.
BOTH:	The current input signal and the frame data are overlaid with their intensities halved.When Transport Frame Number is set to 16 Frames, the data of the first frame of the16 consecutive frames (*1) is displayed.
HOLD:	The frame data is displayed. For measurements other than 3G-B-DL, we recommend the use of REPLAY.When Transport Frame Number is set to 16 Frames, the data of the first frame of the16 consecutive frames (*1) is displayed.

*1 The number of frames is 32 for the following formats.
• 3G-B-DL transmission; 3G(QL), 3G(DL)-2K frame rate 60P/59.94P/50P/48P/47.95P
• HD(DL)transmission; frame rate 60P/59.94P/50P/48P/47.95P

8.2.3 Saving to a USB Memory Device

The frame data captured in the instrument is cleared when the power is turned off, but you can save the data to a USB memory device. If the file format is set to FRM, you can display the data even after you turn the power off.

Use the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab on the SYS menu to set the file format.

[See also] CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab → 7.2.4, "Configuring the Capture Feature"

The procedure to save is the same as with screen captures. After capturing frame data, see the procedure in section 8.1.3, "Saving to a USB Memory Device."

- When Transport Frame Number is set to 1 Frame, frame capture data is saved to the following locations.

- When Transport Frame Number is set to 16 Frames, frame capture data is saved to the following locations.

8.2.4 Displaying Frame Data from a USB Memory Device

To display on this instrument the frame data that has been saved in FRM format to a USB memory device or superimpose the data on the current input signal, follow the procedure below.

Frame data in FRM format that has been saved on a different model cannot be displayed on this instrument.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press CAP.

The CAP menu appears.

1. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.

The USB MEMORY menu appears.

1. Press F•5 RECALL.

The FRM format file list screen appears.

1. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the file that you want to display.
2. Press F•1 RECALL.

The frame data and CAP menu appear.

To display frame data, the instrument must be receiving a signal whose format is the same as that of the saved data. The FORMAT item at the bottom of the display shows the format of the saved data. It is displayed in green if the format is the same as the current format or in red if the format is not the same. If the FORMAT item is in red, F•1 RECALL does not appear.

When Transport Frame Number is set to 16 Frames, select the folder in which the 16 frames are stored.

1. Press F•3 DISPLAY to select the display format.

8.2.5 Deleting Frame Capture Data from a USB Memory Device

The procedure to delete is the same as with screen captures. See 8.1.5, "Deleting Screen Capture Data from a USB Memory Device."

Note that when you press F•5 RECALL, however, the FRM format file list will appear.

9. PRESET FEATURE

9. PRESET FEATURE

The preset feature stores up to 60 sets of panel settings. It can be used to easily recall fixed settings.

Also, you can use the same settings on multiple instruments by copying presets to USB memory. However, the preset data is not compatible between the LV5600 and LV7600.

All items except the items below are stored in a preset. Stored items are not deleted even if you initialize the settings.

• Network settings (NETWORK tab)
• IP settings (SER05 (IP) tab)
- Remote control settings (REMOTE tab)
• RS-422/485 settings (RS485 tab)
- Camera ID settings (excluding Local ID Setting) (CAMERA ID tab)
- Date and time settings (DATE&TIME tab)

9.1 Registering Presets

To register a selected preset, follow the procedure below.

1. Display the screen you want to register.

You can prevent overwriting presets by setting Preset Overwrite to Disable on the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu. To overwrite presets, set Preset Overwrite to Enable. Note that even when set to Disable, registering to an empty preset is possible.

You can set the menu that appears when a preset is recalled by setting Recall on the GENERAL SETUP tab of the SYS menu in advance.

[See also] GENERAL SETUP tab → 7.2.1, "General Settings"

1. Press MEM.

The preset registration screen appears.

Figure 9-1 Preset registration screen

9. PRESET FEATURE

3. Press F•1 COMMENT INPUT.

The comment input screen appears.

You can also copy a comment from a preset that already has a comment saved to it. To copy a comment, on the preset registration display, move the cursor to the preset that has the comment that you want to copy, and press the function dial (F•D).

Figure 9-2 Comment input screen

4. Enter a comment of up to 16 characters.

You can use the following keys on the comment input screen.

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts the selected character at the cursor position
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

5. Press F•7 up menu.

1. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the number of the preset you want to register.

7. Press F•2 STORE.

If a preset has already been stored with the number that you selected, the STORE menu appears. To overwrite the existing preset, press F•1 OVER WRITE YES. Otherwise, press F•4 OVER WRITE NO.

F-2 STORE does not appear if Preset Overwrite is set to Disable on the GENERAL tab of the SYS menu.

Figure 9-3 STORE menu

9. PRESET FEATURE

9.2 Loading Presets

To recall a preset, follow the procedure below.

1. Press RECALL.

The RECALL menu appears.

Figure 9-4 RECALL menu

1. Press a key from F•1 No.1 to F•6 No.6.

If the preset that you want to load is number 7 or greater, press F•7 more or turn the function dial (F•D).

The menu that appears immediately after loading the preset is either the RECALL menu or measurement menu depending on the setting that was specified on the GENERAL SETUP tab when the preset was registered.

[See also] GENERAL SETUP tab → 7.2.1, "General Settings"

9.3 Deleting Presets

To delete a preset, follow the procedure below.

1. Press MEM.

The preset registration screen appears.

Figure 9-5 Preset registration screen

1. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the file that you want to delete.
2. Press F•3 DELETE.

The DELETE menu appears.

graph LR
    A["F1 DELETE YES"] --> B["F2"]
    B --> C["F3 DELETE NO"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5"]
    E --> F["F6"]
    F --> G["F7"]
    H["F·1"] --> I["F·2"]
    I --> J["F·3"]
    J --> K["F·4"]
    K --> L["F·5"]
    L --> M["F·6"]
    M --> N["F·7"]

Figure 9-6 DELETE menu

1. Press F•1 DELETE YES.

To cancel the operation, press F•3 DELETE NO.

9. PRESET FEATURE

9.4 Copying All Presets from the instrument to a USB Memory Device

To copy all the presets from the instrument to a USB memory device, follow the procedure below.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press MEM.

The preset registration screen appears.

Figure 9-7 Preset registration screen

1. Press F•6 ALL COPY INT->USB.

The ALL COPY INT->USB menu appears.

Figure 9-8 ALL COPY INT->USB menu

1. Press F•1 COPY INT->USB YES.

To cancel the copy operation, press F•3 COPY INT->USB NO. If the USB memory device already contains presets, they will be overwritten.

Presets are saved to the following location.

Note that if you use a PC to change the names of the files stored in the USB memory device, you will no longer be able to copy the altered presets from the USB memory device to an instrument.

9. PRESET FEATURE

9.5 Copying All Presets from a USB Memory Device to the instrument

To copy all the presets from a USB memory device to the instrument, follow the procedure below.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press MEM.

The preset registration screen appears.

Figure 9-9 Preset registration screen

1. Press F•5 ALL COPY USB->INT.

The ALL COPY USB->INT menu appears.

Figure 9-10 ALL COPY USB->INT menu

1. Press F•1 COPY USB->INT YES.

To cancel the copy operation, press F•3 COPY USB->INT NO. If the instrument already has presets, the operation will be according to the Preset Overwrite setting on the GENERAL tab.

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Normally, colorimetry is not displayed, but when the colorimetry alarm on the SYS menu is set to on and a colorimetry different from the one specified is received, the alarm is indicated in red in the upper left of the screen.

10.1 Operation Key Description

On the LV5600, operation keys other than S-CUT can be controlled from the mouse and touch panel. On the LV7600, keys can be controlled from the panel, mouse, and touch panel.

On the video signal waveform display, you can press the operation keys to change the following settings. (Some settings may not be changed.) The key LEDs light when the underlined setting is selected.

Key assignments can be changed freely on the OPERATION KEY tab.

[See also] OPERATION KEY tab → 7.2.15, "Setting the Operation keys"

Table 10-1 Operation Key Actions

	Setting	Notes
FORM	Y / YCbCr / YGBR / GBR / YRGB / RGB / COMPOSITE
OVLAY	OVERLAY / PARADE
FILTER	FLAT / LOWPASS	During component display
	FLAT / LUM / FLAT+LUM / LUM+CRMA	During pseudo-composite display
GAIN	CAL / VARIABLE
MAG (GAIN)	X1 / X5 0% / X5 +90%	X5 + 10% to X5 + 80%
SWEEP	1H / 2H / 1V / 2V
MAG (SWEEP)	X1 / X10 / X20 / X40	ACTIVE and BLANK are also selectable.

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.2 Setting the Waveform Display Position

Use the V POS and H POS knobs to adjust the display position of video signal waveforms. On the multi display, these are valid when you press F•2 MULTI WFM on the MULTI menu.

Figure 10-2 V POS and H POS knobs

• V POS Knob

This knob adjusts the vertical position of the video signal waveform. Pressing the knob returns the waveform to its default position.

• H POS Knob

This knob adjusts the horizontal position of the video signal waveform. Pressing the knob returns the waveform to its default position.

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.3 Configuring the Display Settings

To configure the display settings, press F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG on the WFM menu.

Figure 10-3 WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu

10.3.1 Selecting the Display Mode

To configure the display settings, press F•2 WFM MODE on the WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM → F•1"] --> B["WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•2"]
    B --> C["WFM MODE →"]
    D["F1 WFM MODE PARADE"] --> E["F2 Y ON"]
    E --> F["F3 Cb ON"]
    F --> G["F4 Cr ON"]
    G --> H["F5 4Y PARADE OFF"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    K["F•1"] --> L["F•2"] --> M["F•3"] --> N["F•4"] --> O["F•5"] --> P["F•6"] --> Q["F•7"]

Figure 10-4 WFM MODE menu

To select the video signal waveform display mode, follow the procedure below.

This setting is invalid when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•2 WFM MODE → F•1 MODE: OVERLAY / PARADE

Settings

OVERLAY: The input signals are displayed overlaid.

PARADE: The input signals are displayed side by side.

WFM MODE = OVERLAY

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

WFM MODE = PARADE

Figure 10-5 Selecting the display mode

10.3.2 Turning the Channels On and Off

To turn the waveforms on and off, follow the procedure below.

You cannot turn all the waveforms off.

This menu item is not displayed when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE or when YGBR or YRGB is set to ON.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

YGBR, YRGB → section 10.8.20, "Turning Luminance Signals On and Off."

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•2 WFM MODE
→ F•2 Y / G / R / X: ON / OFF
→ F•3 Cb / B / G / Y: ON / OFF
→ F•4 Cr / R / B / Z: ON / OFF 

10.3.3 4Y Parade Display

To extract the Y signals from channels 1 to 4 and display them side by side, follow the procedure below.

The conditions for displaying the 4Y parade display are listed below.

• SDI System is set to SD, HD, 3G-A, or 3G-B-DL.
• Simul mode
• F•6 OPERATE CH MODE on the INPUT menu is set to COMMON.
• F•7 COLOR SYSTEM → F•1 COLOR MATRIX on the WFM menu is set to YCbCr or COMPOSITE.
• The layout display mode is set to NORMAL.

Also, note the following points.

• Only the channels that have been set to ON on the INPUT menu are displayed.
• Option in layout will be hidden.
• Style in layout will be invalid.
• The scale jump function cannot be used.

Procedure

10.3.4 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display

When measuring 3G-B-DS, to select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

STREAM1: Stream 1 is displayed.

STREAM2: Stream 2 is displayed.

MIX: Streams 1 and 2 are displayed on top of each other.

ALIGN: Streams 1 and 2 are displayed side by side.

10.3.5 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity

To adjust the video signal waveform intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

Procedure

WFM

→

F•1

WFM INTEN/CONFIG →

F•3

WFM INTENSITY: -128 - 0 - 127

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.3.6 Selecting the Waveform Color

To select the video signal waveform color, follow the procedure below.

On the multi display, the following colors are assigned to the video signal waveforms.

Y: White Cb: Cyan Cr: Magenta

G: Green

B: Blue

R: Red

X: White

Y: Cyan

Z: Magenta

COMPOSITE: White

Procedure (a signal other than 3G-B-DS)

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•4 WFM COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI

Procedure (3G-B-DS)

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG→ F•4 WFM COLOR

→|F•1|STREAM1 COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI

→|F•2|STREAM2 COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI

10.3.7 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To configure the scale, press F•5 WFM SCALE on the WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu.

→ 1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → 5 WFM SCALE →

Figure 10-6 WFM SCALE menu

To adjust the scale intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•1 SCALE INTEN: -8 - 4 - 7

10.3.8 Selecting the Scale Color

To select the scale color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•2 SCALE COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.3.9 Selecting the Scale Unit

To select the scale unit, follow the procedure below.

When COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE and the composite display format is NTSC, the scale unit setting is fixed at %. When the composite display format is PAL, this is fixed to V.

Video signal white (100 %) becomes 0.7 V or 100 % on the scale.

Video signal black (0 %) becomes 0 V or 0 % on the scale.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure

WFM → F•1	WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5	WFM SCALE → F•3	SCALE SETTING → F•1	SCALE
UNIT: HDV,SD% / HDV,SDV / HD%,SD% / CV DEC / CV HEX / V / %

Settings

HDV,SD%:

The scale shows voltages when the input signal is not SD and percentages when the input signal is SD.

HDV,SDV: The scale shows voltages.

HD%, SD%: The scale shows percentages.

CV DEC: 0 to 100 % is displayed as 64 to 940 (YGBR) or 64 to 960 (CbCr). For XYZ, 0 to 100% is displayed as 0 to 4095.

CV HEX: 0 to 100 % is displayed as 040 to 3AC (YGBR) or 040 to 3C0 (CbCr). For XYZ, 0 to 100% is displayed as 000 to FFF.

V The scale shows voltages.

% The scale shows percentages.

SCALE UNIT = HDV, SDV

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

SCALE UNIT = HD%, SD%

SCALE UNIT = CV DEC

SCALE UNIT = CV HEX

Figure 10-7 Selecting the scale unit

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.3.10 Displaying a Scale for 75% Color Bars

When COLOR MATRIX is set to YCbCr, to display a scale on which a 75% color bar signal input is mapped to the peak level of the chrominance, follow the procedure below.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•3 SCALE SETTING → F•2 75% COLOR SCALE: ON / OFF

75%COLOR SCALE = ON

Figure 10-8 Displaying a scale for 75 % color bars

10.3.11 Displaying the Scale

To turn the scale display on and off, follow the procedure shown below.

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•3 SCALE SETTING → F•3 SCALE DISPLAY: ON / OFF

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

SCALE DISPLAY = OFF

Figure 10-9 Displaying the scale

10.4 Configuring the Gain and Filter Settings

To configure the gain and filter settings, press F•2 GAIN/FILTER on the WFM menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM"] --> B["F•2"]
    B --> C["GAIN/FILTER"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["GAIN VARIABLE CAL"]
    E --> F["F2"]
    F --> G["GAIN MAG X5"]
    G --> H["F3"]
    H --> I["FILTER FLAT"]
    I --> J["F4"]
    J --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["SCALE JUMP 0%"]
    L --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["INPUT SELECT A"]
    N --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["up menu"]
    P --> Q["F•7"]
    Q --> R["F•6"]
    R --> S["F•5"]
    S --> T["F•4"]
    T --> U["F•3"]
    U --> V["F•2"]
    V --> W["F•1"]

Figure 10-10 GAIN/FILTER menu

You cannot set these when external sync signal waveform display is in use. They are set to the following values.

• GAIN VARIABLE: CAL
- GAIN MAG: X1
- FILTER: FLAT

10.4.1 Setting the Variable Gain

To set the variable video signal waveform gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

WFM → F•2 GAIN/FILTER → F•1 GAIN VARIABLE: CAL / VARIABLE

Settings

CAL: The waveform gain is fixed.

VARIABLE: You can adjust the waveform gain by turning the function dial (F•D). Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (1.000 or 5.000). The adjusted gain value (the combination of F•1 GAIN VARIABLE and F•2 GAIN MAG) appears at the bottom of the screen. 0.200 - 1.000 - 2.000 (for X1) 1.000 - 5.000 - 10.000 (for X5) 2.000 - 10.000 (for X10)

10.4.2 Selecting the Fixed Gain

To select the fixed video signal waveform gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

WFM → F•2 GAIN/FILTER → F•2 GAIN MAG: X1 / X5 / X10

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.4.3 Selecting the Filter

To select the filter to apply to video signal waveforms, follow the procedure below. The filters that you can select vary depending on the COLOR MATRIX setting.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure (When COLOR MATRIX is set to YCbCr, GBR, or RGB)

WFM → F•2 GAIN/FILTER → F•3 FILTER: FLAT / LOWPASS

Settings

FLAT:	A filter with a flat frequency response over the entire bandwidth of the input signal is applied.
LOWPASS:	A low-pass filter with the following characteristics is applied.At 40 MHz, 20 dB attenuation or more (when the input signal is 1080/60P, 59.94P, or 50P)At 20 MHz, 20 dB attenuation or more (when the input signal is 3G, HD, or HD (DL) excluding 1080/60P, 59.94P, or 50P)At 3.8 MHz, 20 dB attenuation or more (when the input signal is SD)

FILTER = FLAT

FILTER = LOWPASS

Figure 10-11 Selecting the filter (component)

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Procedure (When COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE)

WFM → F•2 GAIN/FILTER → F•3 FILTER: FLAT / LUM / FLAT+LUM / LUM+CRMA

Settings

FLAT: Only the pseudo-composite signal is displayed.

LUM: Only the luminance signal is displayed.

FLAT+LUM: The pseudo-composite and luminance signals are displayed side by side. A filter with an attenuation of 20 dB or more at 40 MHz is applied to the luminance signal.

LUM+CRMA: The luminance and chrominance signals are displayed side by side. A filter with an attenuation of 20 dB or more at 40 MHz is applied to the luminance signal.

FILTER = FLAT

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

FILTER = LUM

FILTER = FLAT+LUM

FILTER = LUM+CRMA

Figure 10-12 Selecting the filter (composite)

10.4.4 Setting the Scale Jump

If F•2 GAIN MAG is set to X5, the waveform is expanded five times in the Y-axis direction. To select the area you want to see expanded, follow the procedure below. You can view the area that is currently displayed with respect to the entire waveform on the scale shown on the right side of the screen.

This menu item appears when GAIN MAG is set to X5 or X10.

Procedure

WFM → F 2 GAIN / FILTER → F 5 SCALE JUMP: 0 % / 1 0 % / 2 0 % / 3 0 % / 4 0 % / 5 0 % / 6 0 %\/ 7 0 % / 8 0 % / 9 0 % / 1 0 0 % / CURSOR

- 0 to 100%

The instrument has 11 types of screens in the Y-axis direction, these screens are switched in the range of 0 to 100%.

For example, if the scale unit is % and YCbCr is displayed, selecting 0% displays the 0 to 20% range, selecting 10% displays the 10 to 30% range, selecting 90% displays the 90 to 110% range, and selecting 100% displays the 100 to 120% range.

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

- Cursors

The scale jump function operates based on the Y-axis cursor, and the area near the currently selected cursor (▼ mark) is expanded. An operation example is shown below.

[Preparation]

1. On the CURSOR menu, set F•1 CURSOR to ON and F•2 XY SEL to Y.
2. On the GAIN/FILTER menu, set F•2 GAIN MAG to X5 or X10.
3. Set F•4 SCALE JUMP to CURSOR.

[Operation]

1. Set F•2 GAIN MAG to X1.
2. Move the Y-axis cursor to the area you want magnified. (You can move the cursor on the GAIN/FILTER menu. You can switch between REF, DELTA, and TRACK by pressing the function dial (F•D).)
3. Set F·2 GAIN MAG to X5 or X10 to expand the area near the Y-axis cursor.

SCALE JUMP = CURSOR

Figure 10-13 Setting the scale jump

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.5 Configuring the Sweep Settings

To configure the sweep settings, press F•3 SWEEP on the WFM menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM"] --> B["F•3"]
    B --> C["SWEEP"]
    C --> D["F1 SWEEP V"]
    D --> E["F2 V SWEEP 1V"]
    E --> F["F3 SWEEP MAG X1"]
    F --> G["F4 FIELD FIELD1"]
    G --> H["F5 BLANKING REMOVE"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    subgraph F1
        K["F·1"]
        L["F·2"]
        M["F·3"]
        N["F·4"]
        O["F·5"]
        P["F·6"]
        Q["F·7"]
    end

Figure 10-14 SWEEP menu

10.5.1 Selecting the Sweep Method

To select the video signal waveform sweep method, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

H: Lines are displayed.

V: Fields or frames are displayed. Because the sampled data is downsampled, aliasing distortion occurs.

SWEEP = H

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

SWEEP = V

Figure 10-15 Selecting the sweep method

10.5.2 Selecting the Line Display Format

When F•1 SWEEP is set to H, to select the sweep time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

1H: One line is displayed.

2H: Two lines are displayed. This cannot be selected in the following situations.

• For 4K
• When WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•2 WFM MODE → F•1 MODE is set to PARADE
• When F•7 COLOR SYSTEM → F•1 COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE

H SWEEP = 1H

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Figure 10-16 Selecting the line display format

10.5.3 Selecting the Field Display Format

When F•1 SWEEP is set to V, to select the sweep time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

1V: One field is displayed.

2V: One frame is displayed. This option cannot be selected when the input signal is progressive.

V SWEEP = 1V

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Figure 10-17 Selecting the field display format

Furthermore, when the input signal is interlace or segmented frame and F•2 V SWEEP is set to 1V, to select which field is displayed, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

10.5.4 Selecting the Horizontal Magnification

To select the horizontal magnification, follow the procedure below. The magnifications that you can select vary as shown below depending on settings such as COLOR MATRIX.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

You cannot set this when external sync signal waveform display is in use. This is fixed to X1.

Table 10-2 Horizontal magnifications

F•1 SWEEP	COLOR MATRIX	F•2 H SWEEP	X1	X10	X20	X40	ACTIVE	BLANK
H YCbCr, GBR, RGB		1H	Y	Y	Y	N	Y	Y
		2H	Y	Y	Y	N	N	Y
		COMPOSITE	-	Y	Y	Y	N	Y
V	-	-	Y	N	Y	Y	N	N

(Yes: Settable. No: Not settable.)

Procedure

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Settings

X1:	The video signal waveforms are displayed so that they fit on the screen.
X10:	The video signal waveforms are magnified from the center of the display to 10 times the size of X1.
X20:	The video signal waveforms are magnified from the center of the display to 20 times the size of X1.
X40:	The video signal waveforms are magnified from the center of the display to 40 times the size of X1.
ACTIVE:	Everything but the video signal waveform blanking interval is magnified.
BLANK:	The video signal waveform blanking interval is magnified.The vertical blanking interval is also displayed on the vector display.

SWEEP MAG = X1

SWEEP MAG = X10

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

SWEEP MAG = ACTIVE

SWEEP MAG = BLANK

Figure 10-18 Horizontal magnifications

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.5.5 Displaying the Blanking Interval

To set how the waveforms in the blanking interval are displayed, follow the procedure below. If a setting other than REMOVE is selected, the vertical blanking interval is also displayed on the vector display.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

You cannot set this when external sync signal waveform display is in use.

Procedure

Settings

REMOVE: Only the active interval is displayed.

V VIEW: The active interval and the vertical blanking interval are displayed.

H VIEW: The active interval and the horizontal blanking interval are displayed.

This option cannot be selected when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE.

ALL VIEW: The entire input signal is displayed.

This option cannot be selected when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE.

BLANKING = ALL VIEW

Figure 10-19 Displaying blanking intervals

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.6 Configuring the Cursor Settings

To configure the cursor settings, press F•4 CURSOR on the WFM menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM → F•4"] --> B["CURSOR →"]
    B --> C["F1 CURSOR BOTH"]
    C --> D["F2 XY SELECT Y"]
    D --> E["F3 Y UNIT %"]
    E --> F["F4 FD VALUE REF"]
    F --> G["F5 CURSOR VALUE OFF"]
    G --> H["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    H --> I["F7 up menu"]
    subgraph F-1
        J["F·1"]
        K["F·2"]
        L["F·3"]
        M["F·4"]
        N["F·5"]
        O["F·6"]
        P["F·7"]
    end

Figure 10-20 CURSOR menu

10.6.1 Turning Cursors On and Off

To turn cursors on and off, follow the procedure shown below.

The REF cursor is displayed in blue, and the DELTA cursor is displayed in green. The value of DELTA - REF appears as a measured value in the lower right of the screen. (When F•3 Y UNIT is set to DEC or HEX, absolute values are displayed.)

0If BOTH is selected, the X-axis cursors and Y-axis cursors are displayed simultaneously.

Procedure

WFM → F•4 CURSOR → F•1 CURSOR: SINGLE / BOTH / OFF

10.6.2 Selecting the Cursor

To select the X (time measurement) or Y (amplitude measurement) cursor, follow the procedure below.

If F•1 CURSOR is set to BOTH, select the cursor to move here.

Procedure

WFM → F•4 CURSOR → F•2 XY SELECT: X / Y

XY SELECT = X

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

Figure 10-21 Selecting the cursor

10.6.3 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SELECT is set to Y, to select the Y-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

When COLOR MATRIX is set to YCbCr, GBR, or RGB, the default value is %.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 10.8.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure

WFM → F•4

CURSOR → F•3

Y UNIT: mV / % / R% / DEC / HEX / HDR

Settings

mV:	The measurement unit is volts.
%:	The measurement unit is percentage.When the composite display format is NTSC, 714.3 mV is 100 %. When the composite display format is PAL, 700 mV is 100 %.
R%:	The amplitude will be measured as a percentage of the amplitude at the time when you pressed F•5 REF SET.
DEC:	Values are displayed in decimal with 0 to 100 % expressed as 64 to 940.This option cannot be selected when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE. CBCR signal measurement is not supported.
HEX:	Values are displayed in hexadecimal with 0 to 100 % expressed as 040 to 3AC.This option cannot be selected when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE. CBCR signal measurement is not supported.
HDR: Values are displayed as a percentage or cd/m 2 .You can select this option when SER23 is installed and when HDR signals are being measured.For details, see section 14.1.4, “Cursor Display.”

10.6.4 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SELECT is set to X, to select the X-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

WFM

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•3

X UNIT: sec / Hz

Settings

sec:	The measurement unit is seconds.
Hz:	The measurement unit is frequency, with the length of one period set to the distance between the two cursors.

10.6.5 Moving the Cursors

To move a cursor, follow the procedure shown below to select a cursor. Then, move the cursor by turning the function dial (F•D). Triangles appear on both ends of the selected cursor.

You can also select a cursor by pressing the function dial (F•D). Each time you press the function dial (F•D), the selected cursor switches from REF, to DELTA, to TRACK, and then back to REF.

Procedure

WFM

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•4

FD VALUE: REF / DELTA / TRACK

10.6.6 Turning the Cursor Value Display On and Off

To display cursor values, follow the procedure shown below (except when F•3 Y UNIT is set to R%).

The display unit is the unit specified with F•3 Y UNIT or F•3 X UNIT.

If F•1 CURSOR is set to BOTH, the value is displayed on the cursor selected with F•2 XY SELECT.

Procedure

WFM

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•5

CURSOR VALUE: ON / OFF

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

CURSOR VALUE = ON

Figure 10-22 Turning the cursor value display on and off

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.7 Configuring the Line Selection Settings

To configure the line selection settings, press F•5 LINE SELECT on the WFM menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM"] --> B["F•5"]
    B --> C["LINE SELECT"]
    C --> D["F1 LINE SELECT ON"]
    D --> E["F2 FIELD FRAME"]
    E --> F["F3"]
    F --> G["F4"]
    G --> H["F5"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    K["F·1"] --> L["F·2"]
    L --> M["F·3"]
    M --> N["F·4"]
    N --> O["F·5"]
    O --> P["F·6"]
    P --> Q["F·7"]

Figure 10-23 LINE SELECT menu

10.7.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off

To display the vector of the selected line, follow the procedure below. You can use the function dial (F•D) to select a line. The number of the selected line appears in the lower left of the screen.

Changing this setting will also change the vector-display and picture-display line selection settings.

When SWEEP is set to V, this is fixed at OFF.

When CINELITE ADVANCE is set to on, CINELITE appears.

[See also] SWEEP → 10.5.1, "Selecting the Sweep Method," CINELITE ADVANCE → 13.6.8, "Displaying Link Markers"

You cannot set this when external sync signal waveform display is in use. This is fixed to OFF.

Procedure

WFM → F•5 LINE SELECT → F•1 LINE SELECT: ON / OFF / CINELITE

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

LINE SELECT = ON

LINE SELECT = OFF

Figure 10-24 Turning line selection on and off

10.7.2 Setting the Line Selection Range

When F•1 LINE SELECT is set to ON and the input signal format is interlaced or segmented frame, to set the line selection range, follow the procedure below.

Changing this setting will also change the selected line on the video-signal-waveform, picture, and status (data dump) displays.

Procedure

VECT

→

F•3

LINE SEL →

F•2

FIELD: FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME

Settings

FIELD1:	A line from field 1 can be selected. (Example: 1 to 563)
FIELD2:	A line from field 2 can be selected. (Example: 564 to 1125)

FRAME: All lines can be selected. (Example: 1 to 1125)

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.8 Configuring the Color System Settings

To configure the color system settings, press F•7 COLOR SYSTEM on the WFM menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM → F•7"] --> B["COLOR SYSTEM →"]
    B --> C["F1 COLOR MATRIX GBR"]
    C --> D["F2 YGBR OFF"]
    D --> E["F3 COMPOSITE FORMAT AUTO"]
    E --> F["F4"]
    F --> G["F5"]
    G --> H["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    H --> I["F7 up menu"]
    I --> J["F•1"]
    J --> K["F•2"]
    K --> L["F•3"]
    L --> M["F•4"]
    M --> N["F•5"]
    N --> O["F•6"]
    O --> P["F•7"]

Figure 10-25 COLOR SYSTEM menu

You cannot set these when external sync signal waveform display is in use.

10.8.1 Selecting the Color Matrix

The instrument performs a matrix conversion on an input signal to convert it into a GBR, RGB or pseudo-composite signal. To select the waveform display format, follow the procedure below. The selected display format is indicated in the lower right of the display.

Procedure

Settings

YCbCr: The YC BCR signal is displayed.

This setting cannot be selected when the input signal is RGB.

GBR: The input signal is converted into a GBR signal and displayed.

RGB: The input signal is converted into a RGB signal and displayed.

COMPOSITE:

The input signal is converted into a pseudo NTSC or PAL composite signal and displayed.

• Color burst frequencies do not match those of PAL and NTSC.

- Color burst and sync signal widths and locations are different from those of PAL and NTSC.

- The signal bandwidth is that of the original signal.

COLOR MATRIX = YCbCr

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

COLOR MATRIX = GBR

COLOR MATRIX = RGB

COLOR MATRIX = COMPOSITE

Figure 10-26 Selecting the color matrix

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.8.2 Turning the Luminance Signal On and Off

When F•1 COLOR MATRIX is set to GBR or RGB, to turn the luminance signal (Y) on and off, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

YGBR = ON

Figure 10-27 Turning the luminance signal on and off

10.8.3 Selecting the Composite Display Format

To select the composite display format, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

AUTO: When the input signal frame rate is 25 Hz or 50 Hz, the format is PAL. Otherwise, the format is NTSC.

NTSC: The format is NTSC. The scale is fixed to percentage.

PAL: The format is PAL. The scale is fixed to V.

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.8.4 Selecting the Setup Level

When F•1 COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE, to select the setup level, follow the procedure below.

This menu does not appear if the composite display format is PAL.

Procedure

WFM → F•7 COLOR SYSTEM → F•5 SETUP: 0% / 7.5%

SETUP = 7.5%

Figure 10-28 Selecting the setup level

10.9 Displaying the External Sync Signal Waveform

When F•1 EXTERNAL SYNC is set to ON on the WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu, the external sync signal waveform and the EXTERNAL SYNC menu appear.

When SDI System is set to 2K SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL on the SYS menu, the external sync signal waveform can be displayed.

[See also] SDI System → 7.1.1, "Configuring the Input System."

graph LR
    A["WFM"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["WFM INTEN/CONFIG"] --> D["F•1"]
    D --> E["EXTERNAL SYNC"] --> F["F1 EXTERNAL SYNC ON"]
    F --> G["F2"]
    G --> H["F3 EXT.SYNC INTENSITY θ"]
    H --> I["F4 EXT.SYNC COLOR WHITE"]
    I --> J["F5 WFM SCALE"]
    J --> K["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    K --> L["F7 up menu"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Figure 10-29 EXTERNAL SYNC menu

10.9.1 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity

To adjust the video signal waveform intensity, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

Procedure

10.9.2 Selecting the Waveform Color

To select the external sync signal waveform color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

10.9.3 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To configure the scale, press F•5 WFM SCALE on the WFM INTEN/CONFIG menu.

graph LR
    A["WFM"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["WFM INTEN/CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F•5"]
    D --> E["WFM SCALE"]
    F["F1 SCALE INTEN 4"] --> G["F2 SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    G --> H["F3 SCALE SETTING"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["F5"]
    J --> K["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    K --> L["F7 up menu"]

Figure 10-30 WFM SCALE menu

To adjust the scale intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

10. Video Signal Waveform Display

10.9.4 Selecting the Scale Color

To select the scale color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•2 SCALE COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE 

10.9.5 Selecting the Scale Unit

When the external sync signal is NTSC, this is fixed to %. When the external sync signal is HD or PAL, this is fixed to V.

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•3 SCALE SETTING
→ F•1 SCALE UNIT: % (when the external sync signal is NTSC)
→ F•1 SCALE UNIT: V (when the external sync signal is HD or PAL) 

10.9.6 Displaying the Scale

To turn the scale display on and off, follow the procedure shown below.

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•3 SCALE SETTING → F•3
SCALE DISPLAY: ON / OFF 

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

To display vectors, press VECT, F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG, and then F•1 VECTOR DISPLAY to select VECTOR.

When VECTOR DISPLAY is set to 5BAR, see 11.8, "5-Bar Display," for the explanation. When set to HISTGRAM, see 11.9, "Histogram Display," for the explanation. When VECTOR DISPLAY is set to CIE, see 12, "CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display," for the explanation.

Figure 11-1 Vector display

- Vectors

Component signal vector displays are X-Y displays based on C_B (horizontal) and C_R (vertical). The vector display scale has the following qualities.

Frame: ±5% of the full scale value 0.7 V (during component display) ±3% of the full scale value 0.7 V (during pseudo-composite display)

Circle: +20 % with respect to green

- Blanking interval

Normally, blanking interval is not displayed with vectors, but if SWEEP MAG is set to BLANK on the WFM menu or BLANKING is set to REMOVE, it is displayed.

- Colorimetry

The colorimetry selected on the SYS menu is displayed in cyan in the upper right of the screen. However, for 3G(DL)-4K and 3G(QL), the current applied colorimetry is displayed in yellow if the colorimetry information of all links specified by the payload ID are not matched.

When the colorimetry alarm on the SYS menu is set to on and a colorimetry different from the one specified is received, the alarm is indicated in red.

[See also] Colorimetry alarm → 7.1.4, "Setting the Input Format and Format Alarm"

11.1 Operation Key Description

On the LV5600, operation keys other than S-CUT can be controlled from the mouse and touch panel. On the LV7600, keys can be controlled from the panel, mouse, and touch panel. On the vector display, you can press the operation keys to change the following settings. (Some settings may not be changed.) The key LEDs light when the underlined setting is selected. Key assignments can be changed freely on the OPERATION KEY tab.

[See also] OPERATION KEY tab → 7.2.15, "Setting the Operation keys"

Table 11-1 Operation Key Actions

	Setting
FORM	COMPONENT / COMPOSITE
OVLAY	Disabled
FILTER	Disabled
GAIN	CAL / VARIABLE
MAG (GAIN)	X1 / X5 / IQ-MAG
SWEEP	Disabled
MAG (SWEEP)	Disabled

11.2 Setting the Display and Waveform Intensity

To configure the display and waveform intensity settings, press F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG on the VECT menu.

graph LR
    A["VECT"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["VECT INTEN/CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F1 VECTOR DISPLAY VECT"]
    D --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["F3 VECTOR INTENSITY θ"]
    F --> G["F4 VECTOR COLOR WHITE"]
    G --> H["F5"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    K["F•1"] --> L["F•2"]
    L --> M["F•3"]
    M --> N["F•4"]
    N --> O["F•5"]
    O --> P["F•6"]
    P --> Q["F•7"]

Figure 11-2 VECT INTEN/CONFIG menu

11.2.1 Switching the Display Mode

To select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

→ 1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG → 1 VECTOR DISPLAY: VECTOR / 5BAR / HISTGRAM / CIE DIAGRAM

Settings

VECTOR: Shows vectors.

5BAR: Switches to the 5-bar display. For details, see section 11.8, "5-Bar Display."

HISTGRAM: A histogram is displayed. For details, see section 11.9, "Histogram Display."

CIE DIAGRAM: The CIE chromaticity diagram display is shown. For details, see section 12, "CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display."

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11.2.2 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity

To adjust the vector intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

Procedure

11.2.3 Selecting the Waveform Color

To select the vector color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure (a signal other than 3G-B-DS)

Procedure (3G-B-DS)

→ 1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG → 2 VECTOR COLOR

→|F•1|STREAM1 COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI

→ F•2 STREAM2 COLOR: WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11.2.4 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display

When measuring 3G-B-DS, to select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

→ 1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG → 5 3G-B-DS DISPLAY: STREAM1 / STREAM2 / MIX / ALIGN

Settings

STREAM1: Stream 1 is displayed.

STREAM2: Stream 2 is displayed.

MIX: Streams 1 and 2 are displayed on top of each other.

ALIGN: Streams 1 and 2 are displayed side by side.

3G-B-DS DISPLAY = MIX

3G-B-DS DISPLAY = ALIGN

Figure 11-3 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display

11.3 Setting the Scale

To configure the scale, use F•2 VECTOR SCALE on the VECT menu.

Figure 11-4 VECTOR SCALE menu

11.3.1 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To adjust the scale intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

11.3.2 Selecting the Scale Color

To select the scale color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

11.3.3 Turning the I and Q Axes On and Off

To turn the I and Q axes on and off, follow the procedure below.

This menu item does not appear when VECTOR SCALE is set to DCI or BT.2020.

When the full scale value of 0.7 V is 100 %, the I and Q axes are displayed at the following values.

Table 11-2 Displaying the I and Q axes

	I Axis	Q Axis
G	44.559 %	37.056 %
B	27.865 %	84.085 %
R	69.120 %	62.417 %

Procedure

VECT → F•2 VECTOR SCALE → F•3 IQ AXIS: ON / OFF

IQ AXIS = ON

Figure 11-5 Turning the I and Q axes on and off

11.3.4 Selecting the Scale

When COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPONENT, follow the procedure below to select the scale type.

[See also] COLOR MATRIX → section 11.7.1, "Selecting the Color Matrix."

Procedure

VECT

→

F•2

VECTOR SCALE

→

F•4

VECTOR SCALE: AUTO / BT.601 / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020

Settings

AUTO:	A scale for the colorimetry selected on the SYS menu is displayed.
BT.601:	A scale defined in ITU-R BT.601 is displayed. When the input signal is SD and a 100 % color bar signal is being applied, the peak levels match the ends of the scale.
BT.709:	A scale defined in ITU-R BT.709 is displayed. When the input signal is HD and a 100 % color bar signal is being applied, the peak levels match the ends of the scale.

DCI: A scale defined in DCI is displayed.

BT.2020:

A scale defined in ITU-R BT.2020 is displayed. When the input signal is 4K, the division transmission system is 2 sample interleave, and a 100% color bar signal is being applied, the peak levels match the ends of the scale.

11.4 Setting the Gain

To set the gain, press F•3 VECTOR GAIN on the VECT menu.

graph LR
    A["VECT → F·3"] --> B["VECTOR GAIN →"]
    B --> C["F1 GAIN VARIABLE CAL"]
    C --> D["F2 GAIN MAG X1"]
    D --> E["F3"]
    E --> F["F4"]
    F --> G["F5"]
    G --> H["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    H --> I["F7 up menu"]
    subgraph Function call
        J["F·1"] --> K["F·2"] --> L["F·3"] --> M["F·4"] --> N["F·5"] --> O["F·6"] --> P["F·7"]
    end

Figure 11-6 VECTOR GAIN menu

11.4.1 Setting the Variable Gain

To set the variable vector gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT → F•3

VECTOR GAIN → F•1

GAIN VARIABLE: CAL / VARIABLE

Settings

CAL: The waveform gain is fixed.

VARIABLE:

You can adjust the waveform gain by turning the function dial (F•D). Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value.The adjusted gain value (the combination of F•1 GAIN VARIABLE and F•2 GAIN MAG) appears in the lower right of the screen.0.200 - 1.000 - 2.000 (for X1)1.000 - 5.000 - 10.000 (for X5)0.620 - 3.120 - 6.240 (not IQ-MAG or SD, component display)0.580 - 2.920 - 5.840 (IQ-MAG or SD, composite display)0.570 - 2.850 - 5.700 (not IQ-MAG or SD, for pseudo-composite display)0.520 - 2.630 - 5.260 (IQ-MAG or SD, for pseudo-composite display)

11.4.2 Selecting the Fixed Gain

To select the fixed vector gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT

→

F•3

VECTOR GAIN →

F•2

GAIN MAG: X1 / X5 / IQ-MAG

Settings

X1:	Vectors are displayed at ×1 magnification.
X5:	Vectors are displayed at ×5 magnification.
IQ-MAG:	Vectors are displayed using the following magnifications.×3.12 (for signals other than SD during component display; magnification that causes the I signal of the multiformat colorbar to lie on the circumference of the scale)×2.85 (for signals other than SD during pseudo-composite display; magnification that causes the I signal of the multiformat colorbar, which has gone through pseudo-composite conversion, to lie on the circumference of the scale)×2.92 (for SD signals during component display; magnification that causes

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

the amplitude to lie on the circumference of the scale when the burst signal of the composite vector display is converted into component signals) ×2.63 (for SD signals during pseudo-composite display; magnification that causes the -I and Q signals of the SMPTE colorbar, which has gone through pseudo-composite conversion, to lie on the circumference of the scale)

11.5 Displaying the Marker

To display a marker on the vector display, follow the procedure below.

You can move the marker horizontally using the H POS knob and vertically using the V POS knob. The measured values are displayed in the lower right of the display. Press the H POS knob to move the marker to the Cb = 0.0% position. Press the V POS knob to move the marker to the Cr = 0.0% position.

Measured values are displayed using the following references: Cb at position B = 100.0% and Cr at position R = 100.0%. The distance from the center is expressed as "d," and hue is expressed as "deg."

Normally, the marker is displayed in green. When if falls outside the display area, it blinks in red. If this occurs, "OVER" appears above the measured values.

Procedure

Figure 11-7 Displaying the vector marker

11.6 Configuring the Line Selection Settings

To configure the line selection settings, press F•5 LINE SELECT on the VECT menu.

graph LR
    A["VECT"] --> B["F•5"]
    B --> C["LINE SELECT"]
    C --> D["F1 LINE SELECT ON"]
    D --> E["F2 FIELD FRAME"]
    E --> F["F3"]
    F --> G["F4"]
    G --> H["F5"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    K["F·1"] --> L["F·2"]
    L --> M["F·3"]
    M --> N["F·4"]
    N --> O["F·5"]
    O --> P["F·6"]
    P --> Q["F·7"]

Figure 11-8 LINE SELECT menu

11.6.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off

To display the vector of the selected line, follow the procedure below. You can use the function dial (F•D) to select a line. The number of the selected line appears in the lower left of the screen.

Changing this setting will also change the video-signal-waveform-display and picture-display line selection settings.

This menu item does not appear when SWEEP on the WFM menu is set to V.

[See also] SWEEP → Section 10.5.1, "Selecting the Sweep Method"

Procedure

→ 5 LINE SELECT → 1 LINE SELECT: ON / OFF

LINE SELECT = ON

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

LINE SELECT = OFF

Figure 11-9 Turning line selection on and off

11.6.2 Setting the Line Selection Range

When F•1 LINE SELECT is set to ON and the input signal format is interlaced or segmented frame, to set the line selection range, follow the procedure below.

Changing this setting will also change the selected line on the video-signal-waveform, picture, and status (data dump) displays.

Procedure

VECT → F•5 LINE SELECT → F•2 FIELD: FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME

Settings

FIELD1: A line from field 1 can be selected. (Example: 1 to 563)

FIELD2: A line from field 2 can be selected. (Example: 564 to 1125)

FRAME: All lines can be selected. (Example: 1 to 1125)

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11.7 Configuring the Color System Settings

To configure the color system settings, press F•7 COLOR SYSTEM on the VECT menu.

graph LR
    A["VECT → F•7"] --> B["COLOR SYSTEM →"]
    B --> C["F1 COLOR MATRIX GBR"]
    C --> D["F2 YGBR OFF"]
    D --> E["F3 COMPOSITE FORMAT AUTO"]
    E --> F["F4"]
    F --> G["F5"]
    G --> H["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    H --> I["F7 up menu"]
    subgraph Function Blocks
        J["F•1"] --> K["F•2"] --> L["F•3"] --> M["F•4"] --> N["F•5"] --> O["F•6"] --> P["F•7"]
    end

Figure 11-10 COLOR SYSTEM menu

11.7.1 Selecting the Color Matrix

To select the vector display format, follow the procedure below. The selected display format is indicated in the lower right of the display.

Procedure

Settings

COMPONENT: The component chrominance signal is displayed on the X and Y axes. COMPOSITE: The component signal is converted into a pseudo-composite signal, and the pseudo-composite signal's chrominance signal is displayed on the X and Y axes.

COLOR MATRIX = COMPONENT

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

COLOR MATRIX = COMPOSITE

Figure 11-11 Selecting the color matrix

11.7.2 Displaying a Scale for 75% Color Bars

To display a scale for 75 % color bars, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT → F•7 COLOR SYSTEM → F•2 COLOR BAR: 100% / 75%

Settings

100%:	A scale on which a 100% color bar signal input is mapped to the peak level is displayed.
75%:	A scale on which a 75% color bar signal input is mapped to the peak level is displayed.

COLOR BAR = 75%

Figure 11-12 Displaying a scale for 75 % color bars (when receiving a 75 % intensity color bar signal)

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11.7.3 Selecting the Composite Display Format

To select the composite display format, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

AUTO: When the input signal frame rate is 25 Hz or 50 Hz, the format is PAL. Otherwise, the format is NTSC.

NTSC: The format is NTSC.

PAL: The format is PAL.

COMPOSITE FORMAT = NTSC

COMPOSITE FORMAT = PAL

Figure 11-13 Selecting the composite display format

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

11.7.4 Selecting the Setup Level

When F•1 COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE, to select the setup level, follow the procedure below.

This menu does not appear if the composite display format is PAL.

Procedure

→ 7 COLOR SYSTEM → 4 SETUP: 0 % / 7.5 %

11.8 5-Bar Display

To display the 5 bar screen, press VECT, F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG, and then F•1 VECTOR DISPLAY to select 5BAR.

In the 5-bar display, the YC_BC_R signal is converted into a GBR or pseudo-composite signal, and the peak levels of the converted signal's Y, G, B, R, and CMP (composite) components are displayed simultaneously using five bars.

Figure 11-14 5-bar display

• Y

Levels that fall outside of the range that you set using Luminance Upper and Luminance Lower on the status menu are displayed in red.

[See also] Luminance Upper and Luminance Lower → 4, "Error Setup 4"

• GBR

Levels that fall outside of the range that you set using Gamut Upper and Gamut Lower on the status menu are displayed in red.

[See also] Gamut Upper/Lower → 16.2.3, "Error Setup 3"

- CMP

Levels that fall outside of the range that you set using Composite Upper and Composite Lower on the status menu are displayed in red.

[See also] Composite Upper/Lower → 16.2.3, "Error Setup 3"

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

- Menu

Use the VECT menu to configure the 5-bar display settings.

graph LR
    A["VECT"] --> B["F1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG"]
    B --> C["F2 5BAR SCALE %"]
    C --> D["F3 5BAR SEQUENCE GBR"]
    D --> E["F4"]
    E --> F["F5 LINE SELECT"]
    F --> G["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    G --> H["F7"]
    subgraph F-1
        B
        C
        D
        E
        F
        G
        H
    end

Figure 11-15 Vector menu

11.8.1 Selecting the Scale Unit

When VECTOR DISPLAY is set to 5BAR, to select the scale unit, follow the procedure below.

[See also] VECTOR DISPLAY → 11.2.1, "Switching the Display Mode" and 10.8.3, "Selecting the Composite Display Format"

Procedure

VECT

→

F•2

5BAR SCALE: % / mV / HEX / DEC

Settings

%:	The display unit for YGBR is percentage, and the display unit for CMP is IRE.
mV:	The display unit is mV. Depending on the composite display format, the scale differs as follows:NTSC: 100 % = 700 mV (YGBR), 100IRE = 714.3 mV (CMP)PAL: 100%(IRE) = 700mV
HEX:	YGBR is displayed as a percentage with 0 to 100% expressed as 040 to 3AC.CMP is displayed using IRE.
DEC:	YGBR is displayed as a percentage with 0 to 100% expressed as 64 to 940.CMP is displayed using IRE.

5BAR SCALE = %

5BAR SCALE = mV

5BAR SCALE = HEX

5BAR SCALE = DEC

Figure 11-16 Selecting the scale unit

11.8.2 Selecting the Display Order

To select the 5-bar display order, follow the procedure shown below.

Procedure

VECT

→

F•3

5BAR SEQUENCE: GBR / RGB

Settings

GBR:	From the left, the signals are displayed in this order: Y, G, B, R, CMP.
RGB:	From the left, the signals are displayed in this order: Y, R, G, B, CMP.

5BAR SEQUENCE = GBR

5BAR SEQUENCE = RGB

Figure 11-17 Selecting the display order

11.9 Histogram Display

To display histograms, press VECT, F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG, and then F•1 VECTOR DISPLAY to select HISTGRAM.

The histogram display shows the image data distribution by plotting the luminance level and R, G, B levels on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels at each luminance level and R, G, B level on the vertical axis.

If SER23 is installed, you can change the horizontal scale. See section 14.2.1, "Histogram Display."

Figure 11-18 Histogram Display

- Menu

Use the VECT menu to configure the histogram display settings.

graph LR
    A["VECT"] --> B["F1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG"]
    B --> C["F2"]
    C --> D["F3 HISTOGRAM FORM SINGLE"]
    D --> E["F4 HISTOGRAM SETUP"]
    E --> F["F5"]
    F --> G["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    G --> H["F7"]

Figure 11-19 Vector menu

11.9.1 Selecting the Display Format

To select the display format, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

→ 3 HISTGRAM FORM: SINGLE / TILE / ALIGN_H / ALIGN_V

Settings

SINGLE: Luminance, R, G, or B is displayed.

TILE: Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed in tiles.

ALIGN_H: Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed side by side.

ALIGN_V: Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed top to bottom.

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

- When HISTGRAM FORM is TILE

Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed in tiles.

Figure 11-20 Tiled display

- When HISTGRAM FORM is ALIGN-H

Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed side by side.

Figure 11-21 ALIGN_H display

11. VECTOR DISPLAY

- When HISTGRAM FORM is ALIGN-V

Luminance, R, G, and B are displayed top to bottom.

Figure 11-22 ALIGN_V display

11.9.2 Selecting the Measurement Signal

When HISTGRAM FORM is SINGLE, to select the measurement signal, follow the procedure below. A single signal from luminance, R, G, and B can be turned on.

Procedure

→ 4 HISTGRAM SETUP → 1 Y: ON / OFF → 2 R: ON / OFF → 3 G: ON / OFF → 4 B: ON / OFF

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

12. CIE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM DISPLAY

To display the CIE chromaticity diagram, press VECT, F•1 VECT INTEN/CONFIG, and then F•1 VECTOR DISPLAY to select CIE DIAGRAM.

When VECTOR DISPLAY is set to VECT, 5BAR or HISTGRAM, see 11, "CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display," for the explanation.

Figure 12-1 CIE chromaticity diagram display

- Colorimetry

The colorimetry selected on the SYS menu is displayed in cyan in the lower right of the screen. However, for 3G(DL)-4K and 3G(QL), the current applied colorimetry is displayed in yellow if the colorimetry information of all links specified by the payload ID are not matched.

12.1 Setting the Scale

To configure the scale, use F•2 CIE DIAGRAM SCALE on the VECT menu.

This menu item does not appear when DISPLAY MODE is set to TEMP.

[See also] DISPLAY MODE → 12.2.1, "Selecting the Display Mode"

Figure 12-2 CIE DIAGRAM SCALE menu

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

12.1.1 Selecting the Color Scale

To select the horseshoe-shaped color scale, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT → F•2	CIE DIAGRAM SCALE → F•1	COLOR: B.G. COLOR / B.G. WHITE / B.G. BLACK
Settings
B.G. COLOR:	The color scale is displayed. The background is black, and the waveform is displayed according to the luminance level.
B.G. WHITE:	The color scale is not displayed. The background is white, and the waveform is displayed according to the picture color.
B.G. BLACK:	The color scale is not displayed. The background is black, and the waveform is displayed according to the picture color.

COLOR = B.G. WHITE

COLOR = B.G. BLACK

Figure 12-3 Selecting the color scale

12.1.2 Selecting the Triangle

To display up to three color triangles, follow the procedure below.

Procedure
→ 2 CIE DIAGRAM SCALE → 2 TRIANGLE1: BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020 / OFF → 3 TRIANGLE2: BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020 / OFF → 4 USER TRIANGLE → 1 TRIANGLE: 1 / 2 / OFF

The color triangle vertex coordinates are shown below. u'v' coordinates are calculated from the xy coordinates.

Table 12-1 Color triangle vertex coordinates

12.1.3 Setting the User-defined Triangle

To set the user-defined triangle, press F•4 USER TRIANGLE on the CIE DIAGRAM SCALE menu.

Up to two user-defined triangles can be specified. Press F•1 TRIANGLE to select 1 or 2.

Figure 12-4 USER TRIANGLE menu

To change the vertex coordinates of the color triangle, follow the procedure below. Press PRIMARY COLOR to select the vertex you want to change, and then press F•3 x VALUE and F•4 y VALUE to set the coordinates. The default setting is equivalent to the BT.2020 coordinates.

Procedure

Press F•5 COMMENT INPUT to assign names of your choice to user-defined triangles. Enter up to 8 characters.

Figure 12-5 Triangle name input screen

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

The key operations that you can perform in the triangle name input display are as follows:

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•3	INSERT	Inserts a character at the cursor
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

12.1.4 Turning the Sub Scale On and Off

To set the sub scale, press F•5 SUB SCALE on the CIE DIAGRAM SCALE menu.

graph LR
    A["VECT → F•2"] --> B["CIE DIAGRAM SCALE → F•5"]
    B --> C["SUB SCALE →"]
    D["F1 TEMP SCALE OFF"] --> E["F2 GRID ON"]
    E --> F["F3 D65 ON"]
    F --> G["F4 TRIANGLE CAPTION ON"]
    G --> H["F5"]
    H --> I["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    I --> J["F7 up menu"]
    K["F·1"] --> L["F·2"] --> M["F·3"] --> N["F·4"] --> O["F·5"] --> P["F·6"] --> Q["F·7"]

Figure 12-6 SUB SCALE menu

To turn on and off the color temperature curve, grid, white point (D65), or triangle name, follow the procedure below.
Procedure

VECT→F•2CIE DIAGRAM SCALE→F•5SUB SCALE
→F•1	TEMP SCALE:	ON / OFF
→F•2	GRID:	ON / OFF
→F•3	D65:	ON / OFF
→F•4	TRIANGLE CAPTION:	ON / OFF

TEMP SCALE = ON / GRID = ON / D65 = ON / TRIANGLE CAPTION = ON

Figure 12-7 Turning the sub scale on and off

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

12.2 Setting the Chromaticity Diagram Mode

To set the chromaticity diagram mode, press F•3 CIE DIAGRAM SETTING on the VECT menu.

Figure 12-8 CIE DIAGRAM SETTING menu

12.2.1 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

DIAGRAM: The chromaticity diagram is displayed.

TEMP: The color temperature is displayed.

DISPLAY MODE = TEMP

Figure 12-9 Selecting the display mode

12.2.2 Selecting the Display Standard

To select the display standard, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

CIE1931: Chromaticity diagram based on CIE 1931 is displayed.

CIE1976: Chromaticity diagram based on CIE 1976 is displayed.

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

12.2.3 Turning Clipping On and Off

To turn clipping on and off, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT → F•3	CIE DIAGRAM SETTING → F•3	CLIP: ON / OFF
Settings
ON:	Negative values of the input signal are clipped to zero.
OFF:	Negative values of the input signal are displayed according to BT.1361.

12.2.4 Turning the Filter On and Off

To turn the filter on and off, follow the procedure below.

When set to ON, data is averaged every two pixels and displayed.

Procedure

VECT

→

F●3

CIE DIAGRAM SETTING →

F●4

FILTER: ON / OFF

12.2.5 Setting the Gamma Value

To set the gamma value, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT	→ F•3	CIE DIAGRAM SETTING → F•5	MANUAL SETUP
→ F•1	MANUAL SETUP: ON / OFF
→ F•2	COLORIMETRY: BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020
→ F•5	GAMMA SETUP: 1.50 - 2.20 - 3.00

Settings

ON:	The colorimetry set using F•2 COLORIMETRY and the gamma value set with F•5 GAMMA SETUP are used. However, this is not applied to the video-signal-waveform, vector, or picture display.The gamma calculation expression is (input signal level)^(gamma value).Negative input signal values are clipped to zero, regardless of whether F•3 CLIP is set to on or off.
OFF:	The colorimetry standard selected on the SYS menu is used.

12. CIE Chromaticity Diagram Display

12.3 Displaying Cursors

To display a cursor on the chromaticity diagram, follow the procedure shown below. You can move the cursor horizontally using the H POS knob and vertically using the V POS knob. The measured values are shown in the upper right of the display. Press the H POS and V POS knobs to move the cursor to the following position.

Chromaticity diagram display: (x, y) = (u', v') = (0, 0)

Color temperature display: Lower left of the display

Procedure

VECT → F•4 CURSOR: ON / OFF

Figure 12-10 Displaying the chromaticity diagram cursor

12.4 Configuring the Line Selection Settings

To configure the line selection settings, press F•5 LINE SELECT on the VECT menu. See section 11.6, "Configuring Line Selection Settings."

13. Picture Screen

13. PICTURE SCREEN

To display the picture, press PIC.

Figure 13-1 Picture display

13. Picture Screen

13.1 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the picture display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•1	PIC CONFIG → F•1	PICTURE MODE: FIT / REAL / X2 / FULL FRM
Settings
FIT:	The picture is displayed at the optimal size for the display area.Because the picture is enlarged or reduced, the display may become coarse or pixels may drop out. The instrument uses simple filtering to enlarge and reduce the picture.
REAL: A single sample of the video signal is displayed with a single pixel on the screen.If the picture is larger than the display area, use the V•POS and H•POS knobs to adjust the picture display position. Press a knob to return the picture to the corresponding default location.
X2:	A single sample of the video signal is displayed with 4 pixels (2 horizontal and 2 vertical pixels) on the screen.If the picture is larger than the display area, use the V•POS and H•POS knobs to adjust the picture display position. Press a knob to return the picture to the corresponding default location.
FULL FRM:	A single frame, including the blanking interval, is displayed.This is not displayed for 4K.

SIZE = FIT SIZE = REAL

Figure 13-2 Selecting the display mode

13. Picture Screen

13.2 Adjusting the Picture

To adjust the picture, press F•2 ADJUST in the PIC CONFIG menu.

graph LR
    A["PIC → F•1"] --> B["PIC CONFIG → F•2"]
    B --> C["ADJUST →"]
    D["F1"] --> E["MONO/COLOR"]
    D --> F["COLOR"]
    E --> G["F2"]
    E --> H["CHROMA UP"]
    E --> I["MORMAL"]
    F --> J["BRIGHTNESS [%"]]
    F --> K["0.0"]
    G --> L["F3"]
    H --> M["CONTRAST [%"]]
    H --> N["100.0"]
    I --> O["F4"]
    J --> P["GAIN/BIAS"]
    K --> Q["F5"]
    L --> R["F6"]
    M --> S["INPUT SELECT A"]
    N --> T["F7"]
    U["F•1"] --> V["F•2"]
    V --> W["F•3"]
    W --> X["F•4"]
    X --> Y["F•5"]
    Y --> Z["F•6"]
    Z --> AA["F•7"]

Figure 13-3 ADJUST menu

13.2.1 Switching between the Color and Monochrome Displays

To switch between the color and monochrome displays, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

13.2.2 Setting the Chroma Gain

To switch the chroma gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

UP: The chroma gain is set to 2 (200.0 %).

NORMAL: The chroma gain is set to the value that you have set using F•5 GAIN/BIAS → F•1 GAIN.

13.2.3 Adjusting the Brightness

To adjust the brightness, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0.0).

Procedure

13.2.4 Adjusting the Contrast

To adjust the contrast, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (100.0).

Procedure

13. Picture Screen

13.2.5 Adjusting the Gain

To adjust the gain, press F•1 GAIN on the GAIN/BIAS menu.

graph LR
    A["F-1"] --> B["F-2"]
    B --> C["F-3"]
    C --> D["F-4"]
    D --> E["F-5"]
    E --> F["F-6"]
    F --> G["F-7"]

    H["R GAIN [%"] 100.0] --> I["G GAIN [%"] 100.0] --> J["B GAIN [%"] 100.0] --> K["CHROMA GAIN[%"] 100.0] --> L["F6 INPUT SELECT A"] --> M["up menu"]

Figure 13-4 GAIN menu

To adjust the gain separately for the R, G, B, and chroma signals, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (100.0).

When F•2 CHROMA UP is set to UP, F•4 CHROMA GAIN does not appear. If is fixed at 200.0.

Procedure

13.2.6 Adjusting the Bias

To adjust the bias, press F•2 BIAS on the GAIN/BIAS menu.

graph LR
    A["PIC"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["PIC CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F•2"]
    D --> E["F•5"]
    E --> F["GAIN/BIAS"]
    F --> G["F•2"]
    G --> H["BIAS"]
    H --> I["F1"]
    I --> J["R BIAS [%"]]
    I --> K["0.0"]
    J --> L["F2"]
    L --> M["G BIAS [%"]]
    L --> N["0.0"]
    M --> O["F3"]
    O --> P["B BIAS [%"]]
    O --> Q["0.0"]
    P --> R["F4"]
    R --> S["F5"]
    S --> T["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    T --> U["F7 up menu"]
    U --> V["F•7"]

Figure 13-5 BIAS menu

To set the RGB signal bias separately for each color, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0.0).

Procedure

13.3 Configuring the Display Settings

To configure the display settings, press F•3 INDICATION SETTING on the PIC CONFIG menu.

graph LR
    A["F1 GAMUT ERR. DISPLAY OFF"] --> B["F2"]
    B --> C["F3 STATUS INFOMATION ON"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5 3G-B-DS DISPLAY ALIGN"]
    E --> F["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]

Figure 13-6 INDICATION SETTING menu

13.3.1 Displaying Gamut Errors

To display the locations of gamut errors and luminance errors on the picture, follow the procedure below.

These errors are defined by the ranges that you specify by setting Gamut Upper and Gamut Lower, Composite Upper and Composite Lower, and Luminance Upper and Luminance Lower in the status menu. If Gamut Error, Composite Gamut Error, or Level Error is set to OFF, the corresponding errors are not displayed.

[See also] Gamut Upper/Lower, Composite Upper/Lower → 16.2.3, "Error Setup 3"

Luminance Upper/Lower → 16.2.4, "Error Setup 4"

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•3

INDICATION SETTING → F•2

GAMUT ERR. DISPLAY: OFF /WHITE / RED / MESH

Settings

OFF:	Gamut errors are not displayed.
WHITE:	The picture intensity is halved, and gamut error are marked in white.
RED:	The picture intensity is halved, and gamut error are marked in red.
MESH:	Gamut errors are marked with a mesh pattern.

13. Picture Screen

13.3.2 Turning the Information On and Off

To turn on and off the display of the following information that you arranged in the layout, follow the procedure below.

This setting is valid on the display that appears when PIC is pressed. For multi display and other displays, it is fixed to ON.

• Sub tab items (FORMAT, INPUT, TIME, DATE)
• Option tab options (Format, Input, Time)

Procedure

PIC → F•1 PIC CONFIG → F•3 INDICATION SETTING → F•3 STATUS IMFORMATION: ON / OFF

STATUS INFO = ON

Figure 13-7 Turning the information on and off

13. Picture Screen

13.3.3 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display

When measuring 3G-B-DS, to select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

STREAM1: Stream 1 is displayed.

STREAM2: Stream 2 is displayed.

ALIGN: Streams 1 and 2 are displayed side by side.

3G-B-DS DISPLAY = ALIGN

Figure 13-8 Configuring the 3G-B-DS Display

13. Picture Screen

13.4 Configuring the Marker Settings

To configure the marker settings, press F•4 MARKER on the PIC CONFIG menu. This menu item does not appear when PICTURE MODE is set to a value other than FIT. [See also] PICTURE MODE → 13.1, "Selecting the Display Mode"

graph LR
    A["FRAME MARKER OFF"] --> B["CENTER MARKER OFF"]
    B --> C["ASPECT MARKER 14:9"]
    C --> D["ASPECT SHADOW 50"]
    D --> E["SAFETY ZONE"]
    E --> F["INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["up menu"]

Figure 13-9 MARKER menu

Figure 13-10 Horizontal marker display

13.4.1 Turning the Frame Marker On and Off

To turn the frame marker on and off, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

13.4.2 Turning the Center Marker On and Off

To turn the center marker on and off, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

13. Picture Screen

13.4.3 Setting the Aspect Marker

To display the aspect marker, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•4

MARKER → F•3

ASPECT MARKER: OFF / 17:9 / 16:9 / 14:9 / 13:9 / 4:3 / 2.39:1 / AFD

Settings

OFF: The aspect marker is not displayed.
17:9	A 17:9 aspect marker is displayed.This option cannot be selected when the input signal is a 17:9 frame signal or an SD signal.
16:9:	A 16:9 aspect marker is displayed.This option cannot be selected when the input signal is a 16:9 frame signal.
14:9:	A 14:9 aspect marker is displayed.
13:9:	A 13:9 aspect marker is displayed.
4:3:	A 4:3 aspect marker is displayed.This option cannot be selected when the input signal is SD.
2.39:1:	A 2.39:1 aspect marker is displayed.This option cannot be selected when the input signal is SD.
AFD:	The aspect marker included in the AFD (Active Format Description) packets is displayed. Also, abbreviations for SMPTE ST 2016-1-2007 standard AFD codes are displayed in the upper left of the screen.This option can be selected when the input signal is SD or HD.

13. Picture Screen

The AFD codes that are displayed in the upper left of the screen are displayed as shown below according to the coded frame and the AFD code. If there are no AFD packets embedded in the input signal, “----” is displayed.

Table 13-1 AFD display

Displayed Abbreviation	Coded Frame	AFD Code	Description
0000- UNDEFINED	0 (4:3)	0000	Undefined
0001- RESERVED	0 (4:3)	0001	Reserved
0010- 16:9LBTop	0 (4:3)	0010	Letterbox 16:9 image, at top of the coded frame
0011- 14:9LBTop	0 (4:3)	0011	Letterbox 14:9 image, at top of the coded frame
0100- >16:9LBox	0 (4:3)	0100	Letterbox image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9, vertically centered in the coded frame
0101- RESERVED	0 (4:3)	0101	Reserved
0110- RESERVED	0 (4:3)	0110	Reserved
0111- RESERVED	0 (4:3)	0111	Reserved
1000- FullFrame	0 (4:3)	1000	Full frame 4:3 image, the same as the coded frame
1001- Full Frame	0 (4:3)	1001	Full frame 4:3 image, the same as the coded frame
1010- 16:9LBox	0 (4:3)	1010	Letterbox 16:9 image, vertically centered in the coded frame with all image areas protected
1011- 14:9LBox	0 (4:3)	1011	Letterbox 14:9 image, vertically centered in the coded frame
1100- RESERVED	0 (4:3)	1100	Reserved
1101-4:3Full14:9	0 (4:3)	1101	Full frame 4:3 image, with alternative 14:9 center
1110-16:9LB14:9	0 (4:3)	1110	Letterbox 16:9 image, with alternative 14:9 center
1111-16:9LB4:3	0 (4:3)	1111	Letterbox 16:9 image, with alternative 4:3 center
0000w UNDEFINED	1 (16:9)	0000	Undefined
0001w RESERVED	1 (16:9)	0001	Reserved
0010w Full Frame	1 (16:9)	0010	Full frame 16:9 image, the same as the coded frame
0011w 14:9Pillbox	1 (16:9)	0011	Pillarbox 14:9 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
0100w >16:9LBox	1 (16:9)	0100	Letterbox image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9, vertically centered in the coded frame
0101w RESERVED	1 (16:9)	0101	Reserved
0110w RESERVED	1 (16:9)	0110	Reserved
0111w RESERVED	1 (16:9)	0111	Reserved
1000w FullFrame	1 (16:9)	1000	Full frame 16:9 image, the same as the coded frame
1001w 4:3Pillbox	1 (16:9)	1001	Pillarbox 4:3 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
1010w FullNoCrop	1 (16:9)	1010	Full frame 16:9 image, with all image areas protected
1011w14:9Pillbox	1 (16:9)	1011	Pillarbox 14:9 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
1100w RESERVED	1 (16:9)	1100	Reserved
1101w4:3PB14:9	1 (16:9)	1101	Pillarbox 4:3 image, with alternative 14:9 center
1110wFull14:9Safe	1 (16:9)	1110	Full frame 16:9 image, with alternative 14:9 center
1111wFull4:3Safe	1 (16:9)	1111	Full frame 16:9 image, with alternative 4:3 center

13. Picture Screen

13.4.4 Setting the Aspect Shadow

When F•3 ASPECT MARKER is set to a value other than OFF, to adjust the darkness of the aspect marker shadow, follow the procedure below. The larger the number, the darker the shadow. If you specify 0, the aspect marker will be indicated with a line.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (50).

Procedure

PIC → F•1 PIC CONFIG → F•4 MARKER → F•4 ASPECT SHADOW[%]: 0 - 50 - 100

ASPECT SHADOW = 50

Figure 13-11 Setting the aspect shadow

13. Picture Screen

13.4.5 Setting the Safe Action Marker

To configure safety marker settings, press F•5 SAFETY ZONE on the MARKER menu. When F•3 ASPECT MARKER is set to AFD, this menu item is not available.

graph LR
    A["PIC"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["PIC CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F•4"]
    D --> E["MARKER"]
    E --> F["F•5"]
    F --> G["SAFETY ZONE"]
    H["F1"] --> I["SAFE ACTION USER1"]
    I --> J["F2"]
    J --> K["SAFE TITLE USER2"]
    K --> L["F3"]
    L --> M["USER1/2 SET"]
    M --> N["F4"]
    N --> O["F5"]
    O --> P["F6"]
    P --> Q["INPUT SELECT A"]
    Q --> R["F7"]
    R --> S["up menu"]
    T["F-1"] --> U["F-2"]
    U --> V["F-3"]
    V --> W["F-4"]
    W --> X["F-5"]
    X --> Y["F-6"]
    Y --> Z["F-7"]

Figure 13-12 SAFETY ZONE menu

To display the safe action marker, follow the procedure below.

When an aspect marker is displayed, the safe action marker is displayed relative to the aspect marker.

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•4

MARKER → F•5

SAFETY ZONE → F•1

SAFE ACTION: ARIB / SMPTE / USER1 / OFF

Settings

ARIB:	An ARIB TR-B4 safe action marker is displayed.
	This setting cannot be selected when the input signal is 4K.
SMPTE:	An SMPTE RP-218 safe action marker is displayed.
	This setting cannot be selected when the input signal is 4K.
USER1:	A marker that has been set with F•1 USER1 WIDTH[%] and F•2 USER1 HEIGHT[%] for F•3 USER1/2 SET is displayed.
OFF:	A safe action marker is not displayed.

13.4.6 Setting the Safe Title Marker

To display the safe title marker, follow the procedure below.

When an aspect marker is displayed, the safe action marker is displayed relative to the aspect marker.

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•4

MARKER → F•5

SAFETY ZONE → F•2

SAFE TITLE: ARIB / SMPTE / USER2 / OFF

Settings

ARIB:	An ARIB TR-B4 safe title marker is displayed.
	This setting cannot be selected when the input signal is 4K.
SMPTE:	An SMPTE RP-218 safe title marker is displayed.
	This setting cannot be selected when the input signal is 4K.
USER2:	A marker that has been set with F•3 USER2 WIDTH[%] and F•4 USER2 HEIGHT[%] for F•3 USER1/2 SET is displayed.

OFF: A safe title marker is not displayed.

13.4.7 Setting User Markers

By setting F•1 SAFE ACTION to USER1 and F•2 SAFE TITLE to USER2, you can display up to two user-defined markers.

To configure user-defined marker settings, press F•3 USER1/2 SET on the SAFETY ZONE menu.

graph LR
    A["PIC"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["PIC CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F•4"]
    D --> E["MARKER"]
    E --> F["F•5"]
    F --> G["SAFETY ZONE"]
    G --> H["F•3"]
    H --> I["USER1/2 SET"]

    subgraph User1
        J["F1 USER1 WIDTH[%"] 90]
        K["F2 USER1 HEIGHT[%"] 90]
        L["F3 USER2 WIDTH[%"] 80]
        M["F4 USER2 HEIGHT[%"] 80]
        N["F5 USER1/2 ASPECT OFF"]
        O["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
        P["F7 up menu"]
    end

    subgraph Control
        Q["F•1"]
        R["F•2"]
        S["F•3"]
        T["F•4"]
        U["F•5"]
        V["F•6"]
        W["F•7"]
    end

Figure 13-13 USER1/2 SET menu

To set the width and height of a user marker and turn the aspect ratio display on and off, follow one of the procedures below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the width and height settings to their default value.

The aspect ratio display on/off setting applies both to USER1 and USER2.

Procedure

PIC → F•1 PIC CONFIG → F•4 MARKER → F•5 SAFETY ZONE → F•3 USER1/2 SET

→|F•1| USER1 WIDTH[%]: 0 - 90 - 100

→ F•2 USER1 HEIGHT[%]: 0 - 90 - 100

→ F•3 USER2 WIDTH[%]: 0 - 80 - 100

→ F•4 USER2 HEIGHT[%]: 0 - 80 - 100

→ F•5 USER1/2 ASPECT: ON / OFF

13.5 Setting the Superimpose Feature

The superimpose feature displays closed caption information on top of pictures.

To display the closed caption information, press F•5 SUPER IMPOSE on the PIC CONFIG menu.

graph LR
    A["F1 STANDARD ARIB"] --> B["F2 FORMAT HD"]
    B --> C["F3 LANGUAGE 1"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5 CS LOG"]
    E --> F["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]

Figure 13-14 SUPER IMPOSE menu

13.5.1 Selecting the Closed Caption Display

To select the closed caption to display over the picture, follow the procedure below. If you select OFF, no closed captions will be displayed.

Procedure
PIC → F•1	PIC CONFIG → F•5 SUPER IMPOSE → F•1 STANDARD : OFF / SMPTE / ARIB / TELETEXT

Settings

OFF: Closed captions are not displayed.

SMPTE: English closed captions are displayed.

ARIB: Simple Japanese closed captions are displayed.

TELETEXT: European closed captions are displayed.

On the Japanese closed caption display, if a clear screen command is received, "CS" is displayed in cyan for approximately 0.5 seconds in the upper right of the screen.

13.5.2 Selecting the Format of English Closed Captions

To select the English closed caption format from the four types below, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

608(708): CEA/EIA-608-B English closed caption information that is embedded in EIA-708-B CDP packets is displayed.

608(608): CEA/EIA-608-B English closed caption information is displayed.

VBI: CEA/EIA-608-B English closed caption information that is embedded in vertical blanking intervals is displayed.

708: EIA-708 English closed caption information that is embedded in EIA-708-B CDP packets is displayed.

13.5.3 Selecting the Display Details of English Closed Captions

When F•2 FORMAT is set to a value other than 708, to select the English closed caption content

13. Picture Screen

to display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F●1

PIC CONFIG → F●5

SUPER IMPOSE → F●3

LANGUAGE: CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / TEXT1 / TEXT2 / TEXT3 / TEXT4

When F•2 FORMAT is set to 708, to select the English closed caption content to display, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (1).

Procedure

PIC

→

F●1

PIC CONFIG →

F●5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F●4

SERVICE DATA: 1 - 63

13.5.4 Selecting the Format of Japanese Closed Captions

To select the ARIB Japanese closed caption information format from the four types below, follow the procedure below. A border is displayed around the name of the selected format of Japanese closed captions in the upper right of the screen.

The closed caption format names are displayed in green when packets of the corresponding closed caption format are being received and in white otherwise.

Procedure

PIC

→

F•1

PIC CONFIG →

F•5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F•2

FORMAT: HD / SD / ANALOG / CELLULAR

Settings

HD: Displays HD closed caption data

SD: Displays SD closed caption data

ANALOG: Displays analog closed caption data

CELLULAR: Displays porta closed caption data

13.5.5 Selecting the Japanese Closed Caption Data

To select the closed caption data type, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC

→

F•1

PIC CONFIG →

F•5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F•3

LANGUAGE: 1 / 2

Settings

1:	Language 1
2:	Language 2

13.5.6 Displaying the Clear Screen Log

You can detect the clear screen commands that are embedded in the broadcasts of programs with closed captions and display a log of these commands. In addition, using specified timecodes, you can check whether closed captions in TV commercial materials are displayed during the closed caption prohibited time.

Carry out the procedure below to display the clear screen command log.

Use the CS LOG menu to set the clear screen log.

graph LR
    A["PIC"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["PIC CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F•4"]
    D --> E["SUPER IMPOSE"]
    E --> F["F•5"]
    F --> G["CS LOG"]
    G --> H["F1"]
    H --> I["F2"]
    I --> J["LOG STOP"]
    J --> K["F3"]
    K --> L["CLEAR"]
    L --> M["F4"]
    M --> N["LOG MODE OVER WT"]
    N --> O["F5"]
    O --> P["TIMECODE SET"]
    P --> Q["F6"]
    Q --> R["USB MEMORY"]
    R --> S["F7"]
    S --> T["up menu"]
    T --> U["F-1"]
    U --> V["F-2"]
    V --> W["F-3"]
    W --> X["F-4"]
    X --> Y["F-5"]
    Y --> Z["F-6"]
    Z --> AA["F-7"]

Figure 13-15 CS LOG menu

Log screen

CS LOG LIST		SAMPLE No.10		<< NOW LOGGING >>
4:	LTC TC20:32:56:01	A	HD	1080i/59.94	T_DSP
3:	LTC TC20:32:56:01	A	HD	1080i/59.94	CS
2:	LTC TC20:32:54:01	A	HD	1080i/59.94	T_DSP
1:	LTC TC20:32:54:01	A	HD	1080i/59.94	CS
1	2	3	4	5	6

1. Generation Number
2. Time Code
3. Input channel
4. Closed caption format
5. Input format
6. Log Entry Contents

* Even if there are several of these units installed in the instrument, there is only one log file.
* The clear screen log can be recorded when the Japanese closed caption screen or the clear screen log screen is displayed. Use the multi screen display or other means to keep these screens from closing during measurement.
* If you rewind a VCR, reset the log buffer before starting the clear screen log. Use START/STOP of F•2 LOG or F•6 CLEAR (Japanese closed caption screen) on the F•3 CLEAR, SUPER IMPOSE menu to reset.
* The clear screen log recording period is approximately 83 minutes when the closed caption changes every 2 seconds.
* Closed caption codes and decoded closed captions cannot be logged.

13. Picture Screen

- General Display Description

- Generation Number

The clear screen log entries are listed in order with the most recent events listed first. By turning the function dial (F•D) to the right, you can scroll the screen to view older entries in the log. Press the function dial (F•D) to display the latest entries in the log.

- Time Code

In the clear screen log, entries are recorded using the time code specified on the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab of the SYS menu. Set the time code to LTC or VITC. D-VITC is not supported.

[See also] 7.2.5, "Configuring the Information Display"

- Log Entry Contents

The meanings of the displayed log contents are shown below.

CS: Detection of a clear screen command

T_DSP: Detection of closed caption display

- Starting or Stopping the Log

To start or stop the clear screen log, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•5

SUPER IMPOSE → F•5

CS LOG → F•2

LOG: START / STOP

- Clearing the Log

To clear the clear screen log, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC

→

F•1

PIC CONFIG →

F•5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F•5

CS LOG →

F•3

CLEAR

- Log Operation Mode

The clear screen log can record up to 5,000 entries.

To select the action to perform when more than 5,000 events occur, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•1	PIC CONFIG → F•5	SUPER IMPOSE → F•5	CS LOG → F•4	LOG MODE: OVER WT
/ STOP

Settings

OVER WT: Old logs are discarded and overwritten.

STOP: Logs after the 5,000 events are not recorded.

13. Picture Screen

- Configuring the Closed Caption Checking Function

Carry out the procedure below to check whether a closed caption is displayed during the closed caption prohibited time.

Procedure

PIC → F•1

PIC CONFIG → F•5

SUPER IMPOSE → F•5

CS LOG → F•5

TIMECODE SET

Settings

OFF:	Closed caption checking is disabled (log will be recorded).
Timecode:	Closed caption checking is enabled.

- Start Time and End Time

If you select Timecode, set the check period to 4 s or longer using Start Time and End Time. If Time Code on the SYS menu is set to Real Time, you cannot set the trigger.

• Non Caption Time

Under Non Caption Time, set the closed caption prohibited time. If closed captions are displayed between Start Time and Front seconds after Start Time or between Rear seconds before End Time to End Time, the check result will be NG.

13. Picture Screen

- Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

You can save the clear screen log to a USB memory device as a text file. To save a file with a name that you specify, follow the procedure below.

1. Used to connect USB memory.

2. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.

The file list screen appears.

This setting appears when a USB memory device is connected.

Figure 13-16 File list screen

1. Set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to OFF.

2. Press F•2 NAME INPUT.

The file name input display appears.

Figure 13-17 File name input screen

13. Picture Screen

5. Enter a file name using up to 14 characters.

The key operations that you can perform in the file name input display are as follows:

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

You can also copy the file name of an already saved file. To copy a file name, move the cursor to the file in the file list whose name you want to copy, and then press the function dial (F•D).

1. Press F•7 up menu.
2. Press F•3 STORE.

If a file with the same name that you have specified already exists on the USB memory device, an overwrite confirmation menu appears. To overwrite the existing preset, F•1 OVER WR YES. Otherwise, press F•3 OVER WR NO.

- Deleting the Clear Screen Log

To delete a clear screen log that has been saved to the USB memory device, select the log file on the file list display, and then press F•4 FILE DELETE. To delete the file, press F•1 DELETE YES. To cancel the delete operation, press F•3 DELETE NO.

• Automatic File Name Generation

If you set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to ON, the file name will be generated automatically in the format "YYYYMMDDhhmmss" when you save the file. In this situation, F•2 NAME INPUT is not displayed.

• USB Memory Device Folder Structure

Clear screen logs are saved in the LOG folder.

13. Picture Screen

• Measurement Example

As an example, this section describes how to perform closed caption checking on TV commercial material.

1. On the CAPTURE & DISPLAY tab of the SYS menu, set Time Code to LTC or VITC. After setting them, press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Set → 1 PIC CONFIG → 5 SUPER IMPOSE → 1 STANDARD to ARIB.
3. Set F•2 FORMAT and F•3 LANGUAGE.
4. Press F•5 CS LOG.
5. Press F•5 TIMECODE SET to set the time code.

Set Trigger to Timecode first, and then set the timecode and closed caption prohibited time. After setting them, press F•1 COMPLETE.

1. Press F•2 LOG to start the log.

From this point until the end of measurement, do not exit the clear screen log screen or Japanese closed caption screen.

1. Start the TV commercial material.

Closed caption checking will start at the specified time.

On the clear screen log screen, log entries are displayed in red when closed captions are displayed during the closed caption prohibited time and in green otherwise.

1. When the check result is displayed, press any key.

The caption check result is displayed as OK or NG.

1. If necessary, press F•6 USB MEMORY to save the measurement results to USB memory.

13.5.7 Clearing Japanese Closed Caption Data

To clear the displayed Japanese closed caption, follow the procedure below to press CLEAR.

Procedure

PIC → F•1 PIC CONFIG → F•5 SUPER IMPOSE → F•6 CLEAR

13. Picture Screen

13.5.8 Selecting the Multiplex System for European Closed Captions

To select the multiplex system for European closed captions from the two types below, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•1	PIC CONFIG → F•5	SUPER IMPOSE → F•2	WST TRANSPORT: VBI / OP47
Settings
VBI:	European closed caption information that is embedded in vertical blanking intervals is displayed.
OP47:	Closed captions in SMPTE RDD-08 SDP format are displayed.

13.5.9 Selecting the Magazine Number and Page Number for European Closed Captions

To select a magazine number for European closed captions, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC

→

F●1

PIC CONFIG →

F●5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F●3

MAGAZINE:1 - 7 - 8

To select a page number for European closed captions, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC

→

F●1

PIC CONFIG →

F●5

SUPER IMPOSE →

F●3

PAGE:00 - 77 - FF

13. Picture Screen

13.6 Configuring CINELITE Settings

CINELITE is a feature that displays luminance levels of video signals on the picture. To show the CINELITE display, press F•2 CINELITE on the PIC menu.

graph LR
    A["F1 CINELITE DISPLAY OFF"] --> B["F2"]
    B --> C["F3"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5"]
    E --> F["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]

Figure 13-18 CINELITE menu

To switch to the CINELITE display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY: OFF / f Stop / %DISPLAY / CINEZONE

Settings

OFF: CINELITE is not displayed.

f Stop: The f Stop screen is displayed.

This option cannot be selected in 3G-B-DS.

%DISPLAY: The %DISPLAY screen is displayed.

This option cannot be selected in 3G-B-DS.

CINEZONE: The CINEZONE screen is displayed.

This option cannot be selected in 3G-B-DS.

13. Picture Screen

13.6.1 f Stop Display Description

To set f Stop, press F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY to select f Stop and then press F•2 f STOP SETUP.

On the f Stop display, luminance levels are displayed using f-stop (exposure) values.

The measured f Stop value for a group of measured points is typically displayed using white, but it will be displayed using yellow when it corresponds to a luminance level of 80 % or more. Additionally, f Stop values that correspond to luminance levels equal to or less than 0 % cannot be measured. They are displayed in yellow as "****."

Figure 13-19 f Stop display

1 Reference Position

The position where the cursors intersected when F•4 18% REF SET was pressed is displayed in red. This is the reference position for f-stop measurement.

2 Cursor

Up to three cursors can be set. The cursor coordinates are indicated using sample numbers and line numbers. The f Stop value relative to the reference point is displayed at each point.

3 Gamma Correction Value

The gamma correction value that you selected using F•5 GAMMA → F•1 GAMMA SELECT is displayed.

4 Reference display

The f Stop value at the reference position is displayed. The value immediately after you have pressed F•4 18% REF-SET is zero, but it will change when the picture changes.

13. Picture Screen

13.6.2 Procedure for Displaying the f Stop Display

The following example shows how to display luminance levels as f Stop numbers relative to the luminance level of 18 % gray chart. Include an 18 % gray chart with the objects that you are filming.

1. Press PIC.
2. Press F•2 CINELITE.
3. Press F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY to select f Stop.
4. Press F•2 f STOP SETUP.
5. Press F•5 GAMMA and then F•1 GAMMA SELECT to select the gamma correction table type.

The default gamma correction value is 0.45, but you can also use a user-defined gamma correction table that matches the gamma characteristics of the camera that you are using. For details, see section 13.6.7, "Configuring User-Defined Correction Tables."

The selected gamma correction value is indicated in the upper left of the display.

1. Press F•7 up menu.

2. Make sure that the cursors are over the 18 % gray chart, and press F•4 18% REF SET.

The f Stop value for 18 % gray chart becomes 0.0 and is displayed in the upper part of the screen next to "REF:" The reference position is displayed with a red cursor.

1. Use the cursors to set the measurement points.

The f Stop value relative to 18 % gray chart appears next to each cursor. You can set up to three measurement points.

13. Picture Screen

13.6.3 %DISPLAY Screen Description

To set % DISPLAY, press F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY to select % DISPLAY and then press F•2 % DISPLAY SETUP.

On the %DISPLAY screen, you can display luminance levels using Y%, RGB%, RGB255, CODE VALUE, or CODE VALUE DEC. Use F•4 UNIT SELECT to select the display format.

The measured values are typically displayed in white, but they are displayed in yellow when the luminance level at a measurement point is 80 % or more or 0 % or less.

- Y% Display

Luminance levels are indicated as percentages.

Figure 13-20 Y% display

- RGB% Display

Each of the R, G, and B levels is indicated using a percentage. The levels are also indicated using bars on the left side of the display (the order is R, G, and then B).

Figure 13-21 RGB% display

13. Picture Screen

- RGB255 Display

Each of the R, G, and B levels is indicated using 256 steps from 0 to 255. The levels are also indicated using bars on the left side of the display (the order is R, G, and then B).

The value of an RGB level that is 100 % or greater is 255. The value of an RGB level that is 0 % or less is 0.

Figure 13-22 RGB255 display

• CV (CODE VALUE) Display, CV (CODE VALUE) (DEC) Display

When CV is selected, the SDI signal video data is displayed in hexadecimal.

When CA(DEC) is selected, the SDI signal video data is displayed in decimal.

When the input signal is YCbCr, the video is displayed in YCbCr, and when the input signal is RGB, the video is displayed in RGB.

You can select CV or CV(DEC) when F•3 MEAS SIZE is 1×1.

Figure 13-23 CODE VALUE DEC display

13.6.4 Selecting the Points to Display

You can set three points to measure: P1 to P3. To select the measured points that you want to display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure
PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•2 f STOP SETUP → F•1 MEASURE NUMBERS: P1 / P1+P2 / P1+P2+P3 → F•2 %DISPLAY SETUP → F•1 MEASURE NUMBERS: P1 / P1+P2 / P1+P2+P3

Settings
P1: P1 is displayed. P1+P2: P1 and P2 are displayed. P1+P2+P3: P1 to P3 are displayed.

13.6.5 Setting Measurement Points

Follow the procedure below to select which measurement point to set with the cursors, and then move the X cursor by using the H POS knob and the Y cursor by using the V POS knob. Press the H POS and V POS knobs at the same time to move the cursors to the center of the picture.

The cursors are not displayed if they are within the blanking interval. To display cursors that do not appear, move them within the screen.

The measurement point specified for f Stop and that specified for %DISPLAY are linked.

Procedure
PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•2 f STOP SETUP → F•2 MEASURE POSITION: P1 / P2 / P3 → F•2 %DISPLAY SETUP → F•2 MEASURE POSITION: P1 / P2 / P3

13.6.6 Setting the Measurement Size

To select the measurement size, follow the procedure below. This setting is applied to P1 to P3 and REF.

The measurement size specified for f Stop and that specified for %DISPLAY are linked.

Procedure
PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•2 f STOP SETUP → F•3 MEASURE SIZE: 1X1 / 3X3 / 9X9 → F•2 %DISPLAY SETUP → F•3 MEASURE SIZE: 1X1 / 3X3 / 9X9

Settings
1X1: The single pixel at the intersection of the cursors is measured. 3X3: The 3 × 3 area of pixels with its center at the intersection of the cursors is averaged and measured. 9X9: The luminance of the 9 × 9 area of pixels centered on the pixel at the intersection of the cursors is averaged and measured.

13.6.7 Configuring User-Defined Correction Tables

The default gamma correction value when measuring f Stop levels is 0.45, but you can also use a user-defined gamma correction table that matches the gamma characteristics of the camera that you are using.

There are two types of user-defined correction tables. The first type consists of tables that are created using the instrument and is made up of the USER1 to USER3 tables. The second type consists of tables that have been created externally using a device such as a PC and is made up of the USER_A to USER_E tables. These tables are not deleted even if you initialize the instrument.

- Creating User-Defined Correction Tables Using the instrument

You can create and store up to three user-defined correction tables.

As an example, the following procedure shows how to create a user-defined correction table that matches a camera's gamma characteristics.

Set the camera's f Stop value to F5.6 beforehand, and put an 18 % gray chart in the area that you will film.

1. Adjust the lighting so that the displayed luminance level of the 18 % gray chart is 45.0 % (for example) on a camera whose f Stop value is set to F5.6.

For details, see section 13.6.3, "%DISPLAY Screen Description."

1. Press F•7 up menu.
2. Press F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY to select f Stop.
3. Press F•2 f STOP SETUP.
4. Press F•5 GAMMA and then F•1 GAMMA SELECT to select USER1.

In this example, explanation will be given for USER1, but USER2 and USER3 can also be created in the same way.

1. Press F•2 GAMMA CAL.

A user-defined correction table appears in the lower left of the screen, and the luminance level appears as a 10-bit value (0% is displayed as 64, and 100% is displayed as 940) close to the cursor.

This setting is available when F•1 GAMMA SELECT is set to an option from USER1 to USER3.

13. Picture Screen

Figure 13-24 User-defined correction table creation screen

1. Press F•1 TABLE CLEAR.

All the values in the user-defined correction table that is currently being edited are initialized. Be sure to initialize the values first when you create a new user-defined correction table.

1. Press F•1 CLEAR YES.

To cancel the initialization of the user-defined correction table, F•3 CLEAR NO.

1. Place the cursors over the 18 % gray chart.

2. Press F•5 CAL F, and select 5.6.

3. Press F•4 CAL SET.

The luminance level when the camera f Stop value is F5.6 is input into Lev in the user-defined correction table. To delete a line of data, press F•3 1 DATA CLEAR.

1. Change F•5 CAL F and the camera f Stop value together in the following order: 4.0, 2.8, 2.0, 8.0, 11.0, 16.0, 22.0. F•4 CAL SET each time you change the value to input the luminance level for each value.

Do not change the lighting or the position of the 18 % gray chart.

Also, make sure that the Lev value for f Stop values 22.0 to 2.0 increases linearly.

13. Picture Screen

The REF value in the user-defined correction table is entered when you press F•4 18% REF-SET on the f Stop display.

For example, if you use the left-hand table shown below and press F•4 18% REF-SET when the luminance value at the intersection of the cursors is 416 (10-bit value), the f Stop value at that point (3.0) is displayed as the REF value.

Figure 13-25 User-defined correction tables

When the above user-defined correction tables are used, f Stop values are indicated as shown below. The values between specified values are interpolated linearly.

When Lv = 152 f Stop = -3.0

When Lv = 240 f Stop = -2.0

When Lv = 328 f Stop = -1.0

When Lv = 416 f Stop = 0.0

When Lv = 504 f Stop = 1.0

When Lv = 592 f Stop = 2.0

When Lv = 680 f Stop = 3.0

When Lv = 768 f Stop = 4.0

13. Picture Screen

- Loading a User-Defined Correction Table into the instrument

You can load up to five user-defined correction tables into the instrument.

To load a user-defined correction table into the instrument, follow the procedure below.

1. Create a user-defined correction table.

Example (TEST.CLT):

#######	Comment
NAME:SAMPLE_1	Keyword
TYPE:0	Keyword
#Input -7% 0	Comment
# 109% 4095	Comment
#Output 0% 0	Comment
# 1000% 65535	Comment
#Input Output	Comment
#######	Comment
0 0	Data
1 16	Data
2 32	Data
(Omitted)
4093 65488	Data
4094 65504	Data
4095 65520	Data
# EOF	Comment

When you create a correction table, make sure that it conforms to the specifications listed below.

Overall File Specifications

Description:	ASCII text file
Extension:	.CLT
End-of-line character:	CR+LF
Number of lines:	5000 or less
Number of characters per line:	255 or less (including CR+LF)
File name length:	20 characters or less (excluding the extension)
Permitted file name characters:	Letters of the alphabet (A to Z; uppercase and lowercase), numerals (0 to 9), and underscores (_).

Comment

If you start a line with the number sign (#), the line is treated as a comment and does not affect operations.

You can put comments anywhere.

13. Picture Screen

Keyword

Be sure to put the keyword lines before the data lines and to enter a keyword without anything preceding it at the beginning of each keyword line.

NAME: The instrument displays the eight characters that follow the separator (colon) as the name of the correction table. After the separator, enter the correction table name using letters of the alphabet (A to Z; uppercase and lowercase), numbers (0 to 9), and underscores (_). You can enter up to 10 characters.

TYPE: This is a code for identifying the file type. Enter a zero after the separator (colon).

Data

From the start of a line, enter the input value, a separator, and then the output value, in that order.

Input value: Enter values from 0 to 4095 (12 bits), increasing the value by one for each line.

A luminance level of 100 % is defined as 940 (10 bits) × 4 = 3760 (12 bits).

A luminance level of 0 % is defined as 64 (10 bits) × 4 = 256 (12 bits).

Separator: Enter a single tab code.

Output value: Enter a value from 0 to 65535 (16 bits).

1. Save the user-defined correction table to USB memory, and connect the USB memory to the instrument.

Save the correction table in the following directory.

USB memory device

LV5600_USER or LV7600_USER

L CLT

TEST.CLT (example)

1. Press PIC.

2. Press F•2 CINELITE.

3. Press |F•1| CINELITE DISPLAY to select f Stop.

4. Press F•2 f STOP SETUP.

5. Press F•5 GAMMA and then F•1 GAMMA SELECT to select USER_A.

In this example, a user-defined correction table is copied to USER_A, but user-defined correction tables can be copied to USER_B through USER_E in the same way.

1. Press F•2 GAMMA FILE.

This setting is available when F•1 GAMMA SELECT is set to an option from USER_A to USER_E.

1. Press F•1 FILE LIST.

The file list screen appears. This setting appears when a USB memory device is connected. To clear the table that has been copied to USER_A, press F•2 TABLE CLEAR.

13. Picture Screen

1. Turn the function dial (F•D) to select the copy source file from the USB memory device.

2. Press F•3 FILE LOAD.

The user-defined correction table that you selected is copied from the USB memory to USER_A. The copy operation is complete when the file list screen disappears and the display returns to the measurement screen.

If a file has already been stored to USER_A, an overwrite confirmation prompt appears. If you want to overwrite the current file, press F•1 OVER WRITE YES. Otherwise, press F•3 OVER WRITE NO.

After you have copied a user-defined correction table, you can select it by pressing F•1 GAMMA SELECT in the CINELITE menu. A loaded correction table is displayed using the name determined by its NAME keyword.

13.6.8 Displaying Link Markers

To synchronize the markers on the vector screen and video signal waveform screen to measurement points P1 to P3 and REF that you specify on the CINELITE screen, follow the procedure below.

Synchronized markers can be displayed only when an f Stop screen or % DISPLAY screen is shown in the same multi-screen display.

Markers cannot be displayed on the video signal waveform in the following situations.

• When SWEEP is set to V or H SWEEP is set to 2H in the video signal waveform menu
• When COLOR MATRIX in the video signal waveform menu is COMPOSIT

Marker display will not work properly when waveforms are being displayed using an external sync signal.

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•4 CINELITE ADVANCE: ON / OFF

CINELITE ADVANCE = ON

Figure 13-26 Displaying link markers

13.7 Configuring CINEZONE Settings

The CINEZONE display has a gradation (step) display mode, in which the picture luminance levels are converted into RGB colors and displayed and a search display mode, in which the specified luminance level is displayed using green.

To set either of these modes, on the picture menu, press F•2 CINELITE → F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY to select CINEZONE and then F•2 CINEZONE SETUP.

[See also] CINEZONE SETUP → 13.5, "Configuring CINELITE Settings"

13.7.1 Gradation Display

To display picture luminance levels through color gradation, follow the procedure below. In the gradation display mode, luminance levels are displayed using 1024 colors.

The picture is displayed such that luminance levels above F•2 UPPER are displayed using white, and levels below F•3 LOWER are displayed using black.

You can see what colors correspond to what luminance levels by looking at the scale on the right of the display.

If the difference between F•2 UPPER and F•3 LOWER is 1%, reducing F•2 UPPER will also reduce F•3 LOWER automatically to maintain the 1% difference. Likewise, increasing F•3 LOWER will also increase F•2 UPPER automatically to maintain the 1% difference.

F•2 UPPER and F•3 LOWER appear when you set F•1 CINEZONE FORM to GRADATE or STEP.

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY → F•2 CINEZONE SETUP → F•1 CINEZONE FORM and select GRADATE

→ F•2 UPPER: -6.3 - 100.0 - 109.4 → F•3 LOWER: -7.3 - 0.0 - 108.4

Picture Screen

Gradient background transitioning from green to pink (no text or symbols)

13. Picture Screen

Figure 13-27 Gradation display

13.7.2 Step Display Mode

To display picture luminance levels in steps, follow the procedure below.

In the step display mode, luminance levels are divided into 10 % steps and assigned to 12 different colors. For information about F•2 UPPER and F•3 LOWER, see section 13.7.1, "Gradation Display Mode."

Procedure

CINEZONE FORM = GRADATE

13. Picture Screen

Figure 13-28 Step display

13.7.3 Search Display Mode

In the search display mode, the specified luminance level ±0.5% is displayed using green on an otherwise monochrome picture display.

The picture is displayed such that luminance levels above F•2 UPPER are displayed using red, and levels below F•3 LOWER are displayed using blue.

To set the level that is displayed using green, follow the procedure below.

F•2 LEVEL appears when F•1 CINEZONE FORM is set to SEARCH.

Set F•2 UPPER and F•3 LOWER by setting F•1 CINEZONE FORM to GRADATE or STEP. See section 13.7.1, "Gradation Display."

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE → F•1 CINELITE DISPLAY → F•2 CINEZONE SETUP → F•1 CINEZONE

FORM and select SEARCH

→F•2 LEVEL: -7.3 - 40.0 - 109.4

CINEZONE FORM = SEARCH

Figure 13-29 Search display

13. Picture Screen

13.8 Focus Assist Display (SER25)

The focus assist display makes it easy to verify the focus by highlighting the image according to the amount of detected edges.

To configure the focus assist settings, press F•4 FOCUS on the PIC menu. This menu item does not appear when PICTURE MODE is set to FULL FRM.

[See also] SIZE → 13.1, "Selecting the Display Mode"

Figure 13-30 FOCUS menu

Close-up of two orange lily flowers with dew drops, surrounded by green foliage (no text or symbols)

Figure 13-31 Focus assist display

13.8.1 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the picture display mode, follow the procedure below. For details, see section 13.1, "Selecting the Display Mode."

Procedure

PIC → F•4 FOCUS → F•1 PICTURE MODE: FIT / REAL / X2

13.8.2 Turning Focus Assist On and Off

To turn the focus assist display on and off, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•4 FOCUS → F•2 FOCUS ASSIST: ON / OFF

13. Picture Screen

13.8.3 Selecting the Detection Sensitivity

When F•2 FOCUS ASSIST is set to ON, to select the edge detection sensitivity, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•4 FOCUS → F•3 SENSITIVE: LOW / MIDDLE / HIGH / V-HIGH / U-HIGH

13.8.4 Selecting the Luminance Level

When F•2 FOCUS ASSIST is set to ON, to select the picture luminance level as a percentage, follow the procedure below.

Select OFF to hide the picture. Select EMBOSS to emboss the edges.

Procedure

PIC → F•4 FOCUS → F•4 PICTURE LEVEL: OFF / EMBOSS / 25 / 50 / 75 / 100

PIC LEVEL = OFF

Black and white line drawing of a lotus flower with visible petals and stem (no text or symbols)

PIC LEVEL = EMBOSS

Line drawing of a lotus flower with visible petals and stem (no text or symbols)

Figure 13-32 Selecting the luminance level

13.8.5 Selecting the Highlight Color

When F•4 PIC LEVEL is 25, 50, 75, or 100, to select the edge display color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC → F•4 FOCUS → F•5 EDGE COLOR: WHITE / RED / GREEN / BLUE

13.9 Configuring the Line Selection Settings

To configure the line selection settings, press F•5 LINE SELECT on the PIC menu. This menu item does not appear when PICTURE MODE is set to a value other than FIT. [See also] PICTURE MODE → 13.1, "Selecting the Display Mode"

graph LR
    A["F1 LINE SELECT ON"] --> B["F2 FIELD FRAME"]
    B --> C["F3"]
    C --> D["F4 AV PHASE"]
    D --> E["F5"]
    E --> F["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]

Figure 13-33 LINE SELECT menu

13.9.1 Turning Line Selection On and Off

To display a marker at the selected line, follow the procedure below. You can use the function dial (F•D) to select a line. The number of the selected line appears in the upper left of the screen.

Changing this setting will also change the video-signal-waveform-display and vector-display line selection settings.

Procedure

LINE SELECT = ON

Figure 13-34 Turning line selection on and off

13.9.2 Setting the Line Selection Range

When F•1 LINE SELECT is set to ON and the input signal format is interlaced or segmented frame, to set the line selection range, follow the procedure below.

Changing this setting will also change the selected line on the video-signal-waveform, vector, and status (data dump) displays.

Procedure

PIC

→

F•5

LINE SELECT →

F•2

FIELD: FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME

Settings

FIELD1:	A line from field 1 can be selected. (Example: 1 to 563)
FIELD2:	A line from field 2 can be selected. (Example: 564 to 1125)

FRAME: All lines can be selected. (Example: 1 to 1125)

13.9.3 Setting the Lip Sync Measurement Range (SER03)

To set the lip sync measurement range, press F•4 AV PHASE on the LINE SELCT menu.

PIC → F•5 LINE SELECT → F•4 AV PHASE →

F1 AV MEASURE TOP 50	F2 AV MEASURE LEFT 0	F3 AV MEASURE RIGHT 0	F4 AV MEASURE LINK 1[A]	F5	F6 INPUT SELECT A - D	F7 up menu
F·1	F·2	F·3	F·4	F·5	F·6	F·7

Figure 13-35 AV PHASE menu

To set the lip sync measurement range, follow the procedure below. Markers are displayed at the specified lines.

You can also set these using AV PHASE SETUP of the STATUS menu, but here you can set them while viewing the picture. For details on the settings, section 16.7.3, "Setting the Measurement Range."

Procedure

PIC →	F•5	LINE SEL →	F•4	AV PHASE
→	F•1	AV MEASURE TOP: 0 - 50 - 100
→	F•2	AV MEASURE LEFT: 0 - 99
→	F•3	AV MEASURE RIGHT: 0 - 99
→	F•4	AV MEASURE LINK: 1[A] / 2[B] / 3[C] / 4[D]

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14. HDR DISPLAY (SER23)

HDR signals can be measured by installing SER23. HDR signal measurement supports all formats except for SD or XYZ.

To measure HDR signals, use SYS → F•1 SIGNAL IN OUT → HDR tab to select the HDR signal standard for each display channel. Also set SYSTEM GAMMA on or off.

[See also] HDR tab → 7.1.9, "Configuring the HDR Settings (SER23)"

Figure 14-1 HDR tab
- Scale Unit and Range

The scale unit and range used on HDR signal measurements are as follows depending on the settings on the HDR tab.

HDR Mode	System Gamma	Range	HLG Scale	Scale
OFF	-	-	-	None
HLG	OFF	Narrow	1200%	SDI code value: 64 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 1200%.
			100%	SDI code value: 64 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 100%.
		Full	1200%	SDI code value: 0 to 1023 is displayed as 0 to 1200%. (*1)
			100%	SDI code value: 0 to 1023 is displayed as 0 to 100%. (*1)
	ON Narrow		1200%	SDI code value: 64 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 1000cd/m 2 .
			100%	SDI code value: 64 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 1000cd/m 2 .
		Full	1200%	SDI code value: 0 to 1023 is displayed as 0 to 1000cd/m 2 . (*1)
			100%	SDI code value: 0 to 1023 is displayed as 0 to 1000cd/m 2 . (※1)
PQ -		Narrow	-	SDI code value: 64 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 10000cd/m 2 .
		Full	-	SDI code value: 0 to 1023 is displayed as 0 to 10000cd/m 2 . (※1)
S-Log3	OFF	-	-	SDI code value: 95 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 2055%.
	ON	-	-	SDI code value: 95 to 940 is displayed as 0 to 3000cd/m 2 .

*1 SDI code values: 0 to 1023 take on values from 4 to 1019.

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.1 Video Signal Waveform Display

On the video signal waveform display, scales and cursors for HDR signals can be displayed.

14.1.1 Scale Display

During HDR measurement, a scale corresponding to the HDR signal is displayed on the right side of the video signal waveform.

Note that the scale on the right side is not displayed when COLOR MATRIX is set to COMPOSITE.

The scale on the right side varies as follows depending on the settings on the HDR tab.

HDR Mode	System Gamma	HLG Scale	Scale
HLG OFF		1200%	0 to 1200 [%]
		100%	0 to 100 [%]
	ON	1200%	0 to 1000 [cd/m2]
		100%	0 to 1000 [cd/m2]
PQ	-	-	0 to 10000 [cd/m2]
S-Log3	OFF	-	0 to 2055 [%]
	ON	-	0 to 3000 [cd/m2]

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = OFF, Range = Narrow, HLG Scale = 1200%

14. HDR Display (SER23)

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = OFF, Range = Narrow, HLG Scale = 100%

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = OFF, Range = Full, HLG Scale = 1200%

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = OFF, Range = Full, HLG Scale = 100%

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = ON, Range = Narrow, HLG Scale = 1200% or 100%

HDR Mode = HLG, SYSTEM GAMMA = ON, Range = Full, HLG Scale = 1200% or 100%

HDR Mode = PQ, Range = Narrow

14. HDR Display (SER23)

HDR Mode = PQ, Range = Full

HDR Mode = S-Log3, SYSTEM GAMMA = OFF

HDR Mode = S-Log3, SYSTEM GAMMA = ON

Figure 14-2 Scale display

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.1.2 Selecting the Scale Display

During HDR measurement, to select the scale display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

OFF: The scale display is turned off.

MAIN: The normal scale is displayed.

HDR: An HDR scale for HDR signals is displayed.

BOTH: The normal scale and an HDR scale for HDR signals are displayed.

SCALE DISPLAY = OFF

SCALE DISPLAY = MAIN

14. HDR Display (SER23)

SCALE DISPLAY = HDR

SCALE DISPLAY = BOTH

Figure 14-3 Selecting the scale display

14.1.3 Setting the Reference Level

When VARIABLE is selected on the HDR tab for HDR measurement, to set the reference level, follow the procedure below.

This setting is shared with REF [%] of the CINEZONE display.

When HDR Mode is set to HLG or PQ on the HDR tab, the default value is set to the Ref.Level value. When HDR Mode is set to S-Log3, the default value is set to 50%.

[See also] VARIABLE → 7.1.9, "Configuring the HDR Settings (SER23)"

Procedure

WFM → F•1 WFM INTEN/CONFIG → F•5 WFM SCALE → F•3 SCALE SETTING

→|F•4| REF. LEVEL [%]: 0.0 - Ref.Level - 100

→ F•4 REF. LEVEL [%]: 0.0 - 61 - 100

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.1.4 Cursor Display

During cursor measurement, to display measured values for HDR signals, follow the procedure below.

The unit of measurement is \% when on the HDR tab, HDR Mode is HLG or S-Log3 and SYSTEM GAMMA is OFF and cd/m2 when HDR Mode is HLG or S-Log3 and SYSTEM GAMMA is ON or when HDR Mode is PQ.

Procedure

WFM → F•4 CURSOR → F•3 Y UNIT: HDR

Y UNIT = HDR

Figure 14-4 Cursor display (HDR Mode = PQ)

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.2 Vector Display

On the vector display, a histogram for HDR signals can be displayed.

14.2.1 Histogram Display

During histogram display, to select the horizontal scale, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

VECT

→

F•2

HISTGRAM SCALE: % / HDR

The scale for HDR varies as follows depending on the settings on the HDR tab.

HDR Mode	System Gamma	HLG Scale	Scale
HLG OFF		1200%	0 to 1200 [%]
		100%	0 to 100 [%]
	ON	1200%	0 to 1000 [cd/m2]
		100%	0 to 1000 [cd/m2]
PQ	-	-	0 to 10000 [cd/m2]
S-Log3	OFF	-	0 to 2055 [%]
	ON	-	0 to 3000 [cd/m2]

HISTGRAM SCALE = HDR

Figure 14-5 Histogram display (HDR Mode = PQ)

14.3 Picture Screen

The picture display can show CINELITE, CINEZONE, MAXFALL, and MAXCLL for HDR signals. During HDR measurement F•2 CINELITE of the PIC menu changes to F•2 CINELITE/HDR. You can use this to show CINELITE, CINEZONE, MAXFALL, and MAXCLL.

graph LR
    A["F1 CINELITE DISPLAY OFF"] --> B["F2"]
    B --> C["F3 MAX FALL/CLL"]
    C --> D["F4"]
    D --> E["F5"]
    E --> F["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]

Figure 14-6 CINELITE/HDR menu

14.3.1 CINELITE and CINEZONE Displays

To switch to the CINELITE or CINEZONE display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

OFF: CINELITE and CINEZONE is not displayed.

%DISPLAY: The %DISPLAY screen is displayed.

This option cannot be selected in 3G-B-DS.

CINEZONE: The CINEZONE screen is displayed.

This option cannot be selected in 3G-B-DS.

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.3.2 %DISPLAY

The %DISPLAY of HDR signals shows measured values for HDR signals. In addition, even if the brightness level is 80% or higher or 0% or lower, measured values are displayed in white, not yellow.

Use the %DISPLAY SETUP menu to configure the %DISPLAY settings.

[See also] %DISPLAY SETUP → 13.5.8, "Configuring CINELITE Settings"

PIC → F•2 CINELITE/HDR → F•2 %DISPLAY SETUP →

Figure 14-7 %DISPLAY

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.3.3 CINEZONE Display

On the CINEZONE display of HDR signals, to display the SDR area in monochrome and HDR area in color, follow the procedure below to select ON.

Note that if F•5 HDR ZONE is set to ON, STEP and SEARCH cannot be selected for F•1 CINEZONE FORM.

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE/HDR → F•5 HDR ZONE: OFF / ON

HDR ZONE = OFF

Thermal or heat map visualization of a mountainous region with color-coded temperature zones (no text or labels)

HDR ZONE = ON

Mountainous landscape with colorful temperature gradient overlay (no text or symbols)

Figure 14-8 CINEZONE display

14. HDR Display (SER23)

To set the display colors, follow the procedure below. If you set REF at boundary of the SDR area and HDR area, the SDR area can be displayed in monochrome and HDR area in color. When Variable is set to on on the HDR tab, you can set the REF value. If set to off, the default value is used.

This setting is shared with REF.LEVEL [%] of the video signal waveform display.

UPPER or higher: Magenta

REF or higher, UPPER or lower: Gradation from blue to red

LOWER or higher, REF or lower: Monochrome

LOWER or lower: Black

Procedure

PIC → F•2 CINELITE/HDR → F•2 CINEZONE SETUP

→ F•2 UPPER [%]

→ F•3 LOWER [%]

→ F•4 REF [%]

The values vary depending on the HDR tab settings as follows.

Set the values as percentages (0.0 to 100.0%) of the input video level.

If MAXFALL and MAXCLL displays are set to ON, HDR equivalent values are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

[See also] MAXFALL and MAXCLL displays → 14.4, "MAXFALL and MAXCLL Displays"

Figure 14-1 Display color values

HDR Mode	Setting range	Default UPPER value	Default LOWER value	Default REF value
HLG	0.0 to 100.0	100.0	0.0	Ref. Level
PQ	0.0 to 100.0	100.0	0.0	Ref. Level
S-Log3	3.5 to 109.4	100.0	3.5	61.0

14.3.4 Link Marker Display

Use F•4 CINELITE ADVANCE to configure the link marker display settings.

[See also] CINELITE ADVANCE → 13.6.8, "Displaying Link Markers"

PIC → F•2 CINELITE/HDR → F•4 CINELITE ADVANCE: ON / OFF

14.4 MAXFALL and MAXCLL Displays

MAXFALL (Maximum Frame Average Light Level) is a function that calculates the maximum value among the R, G, and B values in each pixel and sums the maximums of all pixels. The sum is divided by the number of pixels per frame to derive the average in the frame. The average of each frame is compared among all frames from the start of measurement, and the maximum value is displayed.

The R, G, and B values are converted linearly from the start of the calculation through OETF or InverseOETF.

MAXCLL (Maximum Content Light Level) is a function that displays the maximum value among the R, G, and B values from the start of measurement. The R, G, and B values are converted linearly.

The R, G, and B values are converted linearly from the start of the calculation through OETF or InverseOETF.

14.4.1 Turning the Display On and Off

To display MAXFALL and MAXCLL at the top of the screen, follow the procedure below to turn the function on. In addition, on the CINEZONE display, the HDR equivalents of the display color settings are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

Procedure

Figure 14-9 MAXFALL and MAXCLL displays

14.4.2 Starting and Stopping Measurements

To start or stop MAXFALL and MAXCLL measurements, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

14. HDR Display (SER23)

14.4.3 Clearing Measurements

To clear MAXFALL and MAXCLL measurements, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

PIC

→

F•2

CINELITE/HDR

→

F•3

MAX FALL/CLL

→

F•3

CLEAR

15. Audio Display

15. AUDIO DISPLAY

To display the audio screen, press AUDIO.

On the audio display, the embedded audio signal applied to SDI INPUT can be displayed on a meter. If SER03 is installed, Lissajous display, surround display, or status display can be shown with the meter display. External audio signals applied to DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT and ANALOG AUDIO can also be measured. DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT and ANALOG AUDIO can also be used as output terminals by switching them on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab.

When measuring embedded audio, switching to simul mode enables SDI inputs A to D to be displayed in combination with the audio. (They can be displayed even if F•1 A to F•4 D on the INPUT menu are set to OFF.)

Figure 15-1 Audio display
- Src

The Src line in the lower right of the display shows the following information in order from the left.

	Display	Description	Reference
1. Input signal display	AES	-	15.1
2. Meter response model display TRUE PEAK / PPM(I) /PPM(II) / VU+TRUE /VU+PPM(I) / VU+PPM(II)		- 15.5.2
3. Measurement signal display	EMB	Embedded audio	15.1
	AES	External digital audio
	ANA	External analog audio

15. Audio Display

15.1 Setting the Signals to Measure

To configure the measurement signal settings, press F•7 MAPPING on the AUDIO menu.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•7 MAPPING

15.1.1 Selecting the Measurement Signal

On the TARGET tab, select the measurement signal, select the audio group, and assign the headphone output.

Figure 15-2 TARGET tab
- Input

Set the input signal to EMB AUDIO, EXT AUDIO, or ANALOG. If SER03 is not installed, the input signal is fixed to EMB AUDIO.

EMB AUDIO:	The embedded audio signal applied to SDI INPUT is measured.
EXT AUDIO:	The external audio signal applied to DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT is measured.If both EXTERNAL AUDIO settings are set to OUTPUT on AUDIO IN/OUT tab, you cannot select EXT AUDIO.
ANALOG:	The external audio signal applied to ANALOG AUDIO is measured.If ANALOG AUDIO is set to OUTPUT on AUDIO IN/OUT tab, you cannot select ANALOG AUDIO.

- 3G-B Stream Select

If INPUT is set to EMB AUDIO, select the 3G-B stream. This is invalid when the input signal is not 3G-B.

1/2

15. Audio Display

- EXT Audio Input Group

If INPUT is set to EXT AUDIO and both EXTERNAL AUDIO settings are set to Input on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab, select the input group.

A / B

- CH Mode

Select the number of measurement channels.

If INPUT is set to EMB AUDIO and CH Mode is set to 8ch, CH9/10 to CH15/16 cannot be selected.

If INPUT is set to EXT AUDIO and either of the EXTERNAL AUDIO settings is set to Output on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab, you cannot select 16ch.

This cannot be selected when INPUT is set to ANALOG.

8ch / 16ch

15.1.2 Channel Assignment for the Lissajous Display (SER03)

On the LISSAJOU tab, assign channels from the audio group selected with GROUP SELECT and Lt and Rt (excluding some channels).

graph TD
    A["AUDIO → F•7"] --> B["MAPPING → F•2"]
    B --> C["PREV TAB or F•3"]
    C --> D["NEXT TAB →"]
    D --> E["TARGET"]
    E --> F["LISSAJOU"]
    F --> G["SURROUND"]
    G --> H["AUDIO INPUT"]
    H --> I["ANALOG OUT"]
    I --> J["ASSIGN(SINGLE)"]
    J --> K["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    K --> L["R INPUT-A:CH2"]
    L --> M["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    M --> N["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    N --> O["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    O --> P["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    P --> Q["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    Q --> R["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    R --> S["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    S --> T["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    T --> U["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    U --> V["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    V --> W["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    W --> X["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    X --> Y["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    Y --> Z["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    Z --> AA["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AA --> AB["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AB --> AC["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AC --> AD["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AD --> AE["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AE --> AF["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AF --> AG["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AG --> AH["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AH --> AI["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AI --> AJ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AJ --> AK["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AK --> AL["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AL --> AM["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AM --> AN["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AN --> AO["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AO --> AP["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AP --> AQ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AQ --> AR["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AR --> AS["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AS --> AT["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AT --> AU["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AU --> AV["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AV --> AW["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AW --> AX["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AX --> AY["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AY --> AZ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    AZ --> BA["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BA --> BB["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BB --> BC["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BC --> BD["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BD --> BE["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BE --> BF["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BF --> BG["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BG --> BH["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BH --> BI["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BI --> BJ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BJ --> BK["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BK --> BL["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BL --> BM["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BM --> BN["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BN --> BO["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BO --> BP["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BP --> BQ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BQ --> BR["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BR --> BS["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BS --> BT["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BT --> BU["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BU --> BV["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BV --> BW["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BW --> BX["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BX --> BY["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BY --> BZ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    BZ --> CA["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CA --> CB["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CB --> CC["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CC --> CD["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CD --> CE["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CE --> CF["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CF --> CG["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CG --> CH["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CH --> CI["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CI --> CJ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CJ --> CK["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CK --> CR["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CR --> CS["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CS --> CT["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CT --> CU["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CU --> CV["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CV --> CW["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CW --> CX["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CX --> CY["L INPUT-A:CH1"]
    CY --> CZ["L INPUT-A:CH1"]

Figure 15-3 LISSAJOU tab

15. Audio Display

15.1.3 Channel Assignment for the Surround Display (SER03)

On the SURROUND tab, assign channels from the audio group selected with GROUP SELECT.

graph TD
    A["INPUT-A:CH1"] --> B["C"]
    C["INPUT-A:CH2"] --> B
    D["INPUT-A:CH3"] --> B
    E["INPUT-A:CH4"] --> B
    F["INPUT-A:CH5"] --> B
    G["INPUT-A:CH6"] --> B
    H["INPUT-A:CH7"] --> B
    I["INPUT-A:CH8"] --> B
    J["Ls INPUT-A:CH5"] --> B
    K["Rs INPUT-A:CH6"] --> B
    L["LfLo(LL) INPUT-A:CH7"] --> B
    M["LFE INPUT-A:CH4"] --> B
    N["Rt/Ro(RR) INPUT-A:CH8"] --> B

Figure 15-4 SURROUND tab

15.1.4 Configuring Audio Input/Output Connectors (SER03)

Use the AUDIO IN/OUT tab to configure the DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT and ANALOG AUDIO connectors on the rear panel.

graph TD
    A["AUDIO"] --> B["F•7 MAPPING"]
    B --> C["F•2 PREV TAB or F•3 NEXT TAB"]
    D["TARGET"] --> E["LISSAJOU SURROUND AUDIO INPUT ANALOG OUT"]
    F["EXTERNAL AUDIO"] --> G["Group A <CH1-CHB> INPUT OUTPUT"]
    F --> H["Group B <CH1-CHB> INPUT OUTPUT"]
    I["ANALOG AUDIO"] --> J["Select INPUT OUTPUT"]

Figure 15-5 AUDIO IN/OUT tab

15. Audio Display

- EXTERNAL AUDIO

Select whether to use the DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT connectors of each group as input connectors or output connectors.

INPUT / OUTPUT

• ANALOG AUDIO

Select whether to use ANALOG AUDIO as input connectors or output connectors.

INPUT / OUTPUT

15.1.5 Channel Assignment for the Analog Audio Output Connector (SER03)

On the ANALOG OUT tab, if ANALOG AUDIO is set to OUTPUT on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab, assign channels to the ANALOG AUDIO connectors on the rear panel.

Figure 15-6 ANALOG OUT tab

15.2 Selecting the Display Mode (SER03)

To select the display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•1	DISPLAY MODE: LISSAJOU / SURROUND / METER / STATUS
Settings
LISSAJOU:	Lissajous curves are displayed. During 8-channel measurement, audio meters are also displayed.
SURROUND:	The surround display is shown on the left side of the screen, and the audio meter is displayed on the right side of the screen.This option cannot be selected when during 16-channel measurement or in simul mode during embedded audio measurement.
METER:	The audio meters are displayed. This option cannot be selected during 8-channel measurement.
STATUS:	Shows the status. During 8-channel measurement, audio meters are also displayed.
LOUDNESS:	The loudness values are displayed on a chart, on a meter, and as values.This option cannot be selected when during 16-channel measurement or in simul mode during embedded audio measurement.

15. Audio Display

DISPLAY MODE = LISSAJOU

DISPLAY MODE = SURROUND

DISPLAY MODE = METER

15. Audio Display

DISPLAY MODE = STATUS

DISPLAY MODE = LOUDNESS

Figure 15-7 Selecting the display mode

15. Audio Display

15.3 Configuring Error Detection Settings

To configure the error detection and meter display settings, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 15-8 ERROR SETUP tab

- Level Over

Turn the level error detection on or off.

An error is detected when the level set with OVER dBFS is exceeded.

[See also] OVER dBFS → 15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level"

OFF / ON

- Clip

Turn the clip error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

If set to ON, you can set the duration. An error is detected when the maximum signal extends beyond the number of samples set here.

1 - 100

- Mute

Turn the mute error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

If set to ON, you can set the duration. An error is detected when a mute signal lasts longer than the duration set here.

1 - 1000 - 5000

15. Audio Display

- Parity Error

Turn the parity error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

- Validity Error

Turn the validity error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

- CRC Error

Turn the CRC error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

- Code Violation

Turn the code violation error detection on or off.

OFF / ON

- Clip (METER INDICATION)

If Clip is set to ON, turn on or off the "CLIP" indication that appears when errors occur.

OFF / ON

- Mute (METER INDICATION)

If Mute is set to ON, turn on or off the "M" indication that appears when errors occur.

OFF / ON

15.4 Adjusting the Volume

To adjust the headphone volume, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

Procedure

AUDIO → F•5 PHONES VOLUME: 0 - 63

15. Audio Display

15.5 Meter Display

Meters are always displayed excluding the Lissajous display and status display during 16-channel management.

To configure meter display settings, press F•3 METER SETUP on the AUDIO menu.

Figure 15-9 Meter display

15.5.1 Selecting the Scale

To select the meter's scale, follow the procedure below.

However, if Input is set to ANALOG on the TARGET tab and ANALOG AUDIO is set to INPUT on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab, you cannot select 90DBFS.

Procedure

AUDIO

→

F•3

METER SETUP →

F•1

DYNAMIC RANGE: 60DBFS / 90DBFS / MAG

Settings

60DBFS:	The meter's scale is set to -60 to 0 (dBFS).
90DBFS:	The meter's scale is set to -90 to 0 (dBFS).
MAG:	The meter's scale is set to the level specified by F•5 LEVEL SETTING → F•3 REF dBFS ±3 dB.

15.5.2 Selecting the Response Model

To select the meter's response model, follow the procedure below. The selected response model is indicated in the lower right of the screen.

Procedure
AUDIO → F•3 METER SETUP → F•2 RESPONSE: TRUEPEAK / PPM / VU → F•3 PPM MODE: PPM(I) / PPM(II) (for PPM) → F•3 PEAK METER: TRUE / PPM(I) / PPM(II) (for VU)

The response model settings (typical) are detailed below.

F•2 RESPONSE	F•3 F•3 PPM MODE / PEAK METER	Display Delay time (*1)	Return time (*2)	Average time
TRUEPEAK	-	TRUE PEAK	0 msec	1.7 sec
PPM	PPM(I)	PPM(I)	10 msec	1.7 sec
	PPM(II)	PPM(II)	10 msec	2.8 sec
VU	TRUE	VU+TRUE	-	-
	PPM(I)	VU+PPM(I)	-	-
	PPM(II)	VU+PPM(II)	-	-

*1 The amount of time it takes for the meter to show -20 dBFS when a -20 dBFS/1 kHz sine-wave signal is applied with no input preceding it.
*2 The amount of time it takes for the meter to show -40 dBFS when a -20 dBFS/1 kHz sine-wave signal is removed from the input.

15.5.3 Setting the Peak Hold

When F•2 RESPONSE is set to VU, to set the peak hold time, follow the procedure below. The unit is seconds. You can set the value in 0.5-second steps.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0.5).

Procedure
AUDIO → F•3 METER SETUP → F•4 PEAK HOLD: 0.0 - 0.5 - 5.0 / HOLD

15. Audio Display

15.5.4 Setting the Reference Level

To set the reference level, press F•5 LEVEL SETTING on the METER SETUP menu.

graph LR
    A["AUDIO"] --> B["F•3"]
    B --> C["METER SETUP"]
    C --> D["F•5"]
    D --> E["LEVEL SETTING"]
    F["F1 OVER dBFS 0.0"] --> G["F2 WARNING dBFS -18.0"]
    G --> H["F3 REF dBFS -20.0"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["F5"]
    J --> K["F6"]
    K --> L["F7 up menu"]
    M["F•1"] --> N["F•2"]
    N --> O["F•3"]
    O --> P["F•4"]
    P --> Q["F•5"]
    Q --> R["F•6"]
    R --> S["F•7"]

Figure 15-10 LEVEL SETTING menu

To set the meter reference level, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

OVER dBFS: Set the threshold level for audio level errors. WARNING dBFS: The portion of the meter that exceeds the level specified here is displayed in red. The portion of the meter below this level is displayed in yellow. REF dBFS: The portion of the meter that exceeds the level specified here is displayed in yellow. The portion of the meter below this level is displayed in green.

15. Audio Display

15.6 Lissajous Display (SER03)

To display Lissajous curves, set F•1 DISPLAY MODE on the AUDIO menu to LISSAJOU. To configure the Lissajous display settings, press F•2 LISSAJOU SETUP. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to LISSAJOU.

Figure 15-11 Lissajous display

• Correlation Meter

The correlation meter indicates the phase difference between the two signals. A reading of +1 indicates that the signals are in-phase, a reading of -1 indicates that the signals are 180^irc out of phase, and a reading of 0 indicates that the signals are not correlated.

15.6.1 Adjusting the Lissajous Curve Intensity

To set the Lissajous curve intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

Procedure

15.6.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To adjust the intensity of the Lissajous and meter scales, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

15. Audio Display

15.6.3 Selecting the Lissajous Curve Display Format

To select the Lissajous curve display format, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•2	LISSAJOU SETUP → F•3	DISPLAY: MULTI / SINGLE
Settings
MULTI:	Eight channels of Lissajous waveforms and eight channels of audio meters are displayed or 16 channels of Lissajous waveforms are displayed.
SINGLE:	Two channels of Lissajous waveforms and eight channels of audio meters are displayed.This option cannot be selected in simul mode or 16-channel measurement.

DISPLAY = MULTI

DISPLAY = SINGLE

Figure 15-12 Selecting the Lissajous curve display format

15.6.4 Selecting the Scale Display Format

To select the scale display format, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•2	LISSAJOU SETUP → F•4	FORM: X-Y / MATRIX
Settings
X-Y:	R is assigned to the X-axis (horizontal), and L is assigned to the Y-axis (vertical).
MATRIX:	The R and L axes are positioned at 45° angles to the X and Y axes.

Symmetrical abstract line drawing with labeled axes (L, R, -1, 0, +1) and no readable text or symbols

Abstract 3D wireframe diagram with labeled axes L and R, no readable text or symbols

Figure 15-13 Selecting the scale display format

15. Audio Display

15.6.5 Setting the Lissajous Curve Gain

To select the Lissajous curve gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•4 LISSAJOU SETUP → F•5 AUTO GAIN: ON / OFF

Settings

ON: The gain is automatically adjusted so that the waveform fits the scale.

OFF: The waveform is displayed with a fixed gain.

AUTO GAIN = ON AUTO GAIN = OFF

Figure 15-14 Setting the Lissajous curve gain

15.7 Surround Display (SER03)

To show the surround display, set F•1 DISPLAY MODE on the AUDIO menu to SURROUND. To configure the surround display settings, press F•2 SURROUND SETUP. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to SURROUND.

AUDIO → F•1 DISPLAY MODE and select SURROUND → F•2 SURROUND SETUP →

Figure 15-15 Surround display

15. Audio Display

15.7.1 Adjusting the Surround Waveform Intensity

To adjust the surround waveform intensity, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

15.7.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To adjust the intensity of the surround and meter scales, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

AUDIO

→

F•2

SURROUND SETUP →

F•2

SCALE INTEN: -8 - 4 - 7

15. Audio Display

15.7.3 Selecting the Surround Display Format

To select the surround display format, follow the procedure below.

If adjacent channels (including Lch and Rch for PHANTOM) are of opposite phases, the scale between the channels is displayed in red.

Procedure

AUDIO

→

F•2

SURROUND SETUP →

F•3

SURROUND 5.1: NORMAL / PHANTOM

Settings

NORMAL:	A waveform that combines Lch, Rch, Lsch, Rsch, and Cch (hard center) is displayed.
PHANTOM:	A waveform that combines Lch, Rch, Lsch, Rsch, and phantom center and a Cch (hard center) waveform are displayed separately.

SURROUND 5.1 = NORMAL SURROUND 5.1 = PHANTOM

Figure 15-16 Selecting the surround display format

15.7.4 Setting the Surround Waveform Gain

To select the surround waveform gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO

→

F•2

SURROUND SETUP →

F•5

AUTO GAIN: ON / OFF

Settings

ON:	The gain is automatically adjusted so that the waveform fits the scale.
OFF:	The waveform is displayed with a fixed gain.

15. Audio Display

15.8 Status Display (SER03)

To display the status, set F•1 DISPLAY MODE on the AUDIO menu to STATUS.

To configure the status display settings, press F•3 STAUS SETUP. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to STATUS.

AUDIO → F•1 DISPLAY MODE and select STATUS → F•3 STAUS SETUP →

Figure 15-17 Status display

15.8.1 Status Screen Description

On the status display, the levels and the number of detected errors are displayed for the selected channels (up to 9999). Errors are only detected for the items that have been set to ON in section 15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings."

- Channel

Displays the channel. Each item below this item is displayed in two lines. The top line corresponds to the channel to the left of the slash, and the bottom line corresponds to the channel to the right of the slash.

- Level (dBFS)

Displays the level numerically.

- Level Over

Displays the number of times the level is greater than equal to the OVER dBFS value set in section 15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level."

- Clip

Displays the number of times that a received signal exceeds the maximum signal value for the number of consecutive samples specified in section 15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings."

15. Audio Display

- Mute (Silence)

Displays the number of times that a mute signal exceeding the duration specified in section 15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings" is received.

- Parity Error

Counts the number of times that the input signal's parity bit and the recalculated parity bit differ.

- Validity Error

Counts the number of times that the input signal's validity bit is 1.

- CRC Error

Counts the number of times that the CRC of the channel status bits and the calculated CRC are different.

- Code Violation

Counts the number of times that the state of the input signal's biphase modulation is abnormal.

- Reset

Displays the time that has elapsed since → F3 STATUS SETUP → F5 ERROR RESET were pressed.

15.8.2 Event Log Display

To view the event log, follow the procedure below.

This screen is the same as the event log screen of the status display. For details, see section 16.4, "Configuring Event Log Settings."

Procedure

Figure 15-18 Event log display

15. Audio Display

15.8.3 Channel Status Display

To display the status of the selected channel, follow the procedure below.

Use F•1 DISPLAY CHANNEL to select the channel. You can also use F•2 ALIGN to select the bit order.

Procedure

Figure 15-19 Channel status display

15. Audio Display

15.8.4 Displaying User Bits

To display the user bits of the selected channel, follow the procedure below.

Use F•1 DISPLAY CHANNEL to select the channel. You can also use F•2 ALIGN to select the bit order.

Procedure

Figure 15-20 Displaying user bits

15.8.5 Resetting Errors

To reset the error counts that appear on the status display to 0, follow the procedure below. Also, the Reset indication at the lower left of the screen will be reset to 00:00:00.

Procedure

15. Audio Display

15.9 Loudness Display (SER03)

On the loudness display, the loudness values are displayed on a chart, on a meter, and as values. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to LOUDNESS. Loudness display is not possible in 16-channel measurement or in simul mode during embedded audio measurement. To configure loudness display settings, press F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP on the audio menu. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to LOUDNESS.

15.9.1 Loudness Display Explanation

You can measure the loudness of one input or two inputs on the loudness display. To switch between one input and two inputs, press F•5 LOUDNESS SETTING, and use the CHANNEL SUB tab.

Figure 15-21 One input (MAIN) loudness display

Figure 15-22 Two input (MAIN and SUB) loudness display

15. Audio Display

1 Loudness Chart Display

One of the following values that you specified with F•5 LOUDNESS SETTING is displayed on a time-based chart.

• Integrated loudness and momentary loudness of one input (MAIN)
• Integrated loudness and short-term loudness of one input (MAIN)
• Integrated loudness of two inputs (MAIN and SUB)
• Momentary loudness of two inputs (MAIN and SUB)
• Short-term loudness of two inputs (MAIN and SUB)

You can press F•1 PERIOD to change the measurement time. You can press F•4 MAG to expand the level scale. The green line indicates the target level.

To start measuring, set F•3 MEASURE to START. You can also use pin 9 (/P8) of the remote connector or a time code.

To clear the loudness chart, press F•2 CHART CLEAR. You can also use pin 8 (/P7) of the remote connector.

[See also] 15.9.6, "Configuring Loudness Settings," and 18, "Remote Control"

2 OVER

If dBTP Over Mark is set to ON on the LOUDNESS2 tab that appears when the peak level of a channel is greater than or equal to the level specified by OVER dBFS, a red ▼ is displayed at the top of the chart. An OVER mark is also displayed.

Neither mark is displayed when Level Over under ERROR SETUP is set to OFF.

[See also] OVER dBFS →15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level."

ERROR SETUP →15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings."

3 PEAK(dBTP)

This displays the peak levels of the channels that have been assigned on the CHANNEL MAIN, CHANNEL SUB tab. You can press F•2 CHART CLEAR to clear the peak levels.

The values are normally displayed in white, but when a value is greater than or equal to the value specified by OVER dBFS, it is displayed in red.

[See also] OVER dBFS →15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level."

4 LEVEL OVER

The level specified by OVER dBFS is displayed when Level Over under ERROR SETUP is set to ON and dBTP Over Mark is set to ON on the LOUDNESS SETTING tab.

[See also] OVER dBFS →15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level."

ERROR SETUP →15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings."

5 MEAS / STOP / READY

"MEAS" is displayed during loudness measurement, and "STOP" is displayed when measurement is stopped, "READY" is displayed when the instrument is standing by.

6 Meter Display

The levels of the channels that you selected in section 15.1, "Setting the Signals to Measure" are displayed on a meter. In addition, correlation meters of adjacent channels are displayed at the top area of the meter. The correlation meter indicates the phase difference between the two signals. The right edge indicates in-phase, the left edge indicates 180^irc out of phase, and the center indicates no correlation.

15. Audio Display

7 Loudness Meter Display (only for one input measurement)

The short-term loudness or the momentary loudness selected using Loudness Response on the LOUDNESS2 tab is displayed using meters. The level is normally displayed in green, but it is displayed in red if it exceeds the target level.

8 CH-MODE

This displays the channel mode that was selected on the CHANNEL MAIN, CHANNEL SUB tab.

9 INTEGRATED

The integrated loudness is displayed as values. The top value is an absolute value. The bottom value is a relative value with the target level as the reference. These values are normally displayed in white, but they are displayed in red when:

• The measurement mode is ARIB or EBU and the loudness level is outside the range defined by the target level ± 1 (LU).
• The measurement mode is ATSC and the loudness level is outside the range defined by the target level ± 2 (LK).

10 SHORTTERM / MOMENTARY

The short-term loudness or the momentary loudness selected using Loudness Response on the LOUDNESS2 tab is displayed as values.

The top value is an absolute value. The bottom value is a relative value with the target level as the reference.

11 MAX

The maximum value of the short-term loudness or momentary loudness selected using Loudness Response on the LOUDNESS2 tab is displayed as a value.

12 TARGET LV

This displays the target level. The target level varies according to the measurement mode as shown below.

• When the measurement mode is not EBU: -24.0 (LKFS)
• When the measurement mode is EBU: -23.0 (LUFS)

13 RELATIVE

This indication appears when the input signal is applicable for relative gating. This is displayed when Relative Gating Lamp is set to ON on the LOUDNESS2 tab.

14 INTEGRATED / SHORTTERM / MOMENTARY (only for two input measurement)

This displays the loudness type that was selected on the LOUDNESS SETTING tab Chart Setting.

15. Audio Display

15 LOUDNESS SETUP

To configure loudness display settings, press F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP on the audio menu. This setting is available when F•1 DISPLAY MODE is set to LOUDNESS.

graph LR
    A["AUDIO"] --> B["F•3"]
    B --> C["LOUDNESS SETUP"]
    C --> D["F1 PERIOD 2MIN"]
    C --> E["F2 CHART CLEAR"]
    C --> F["F3 MEASURE STOP"]
    C --> G["F4 MAG OFF"]
    C --> H["F5 LOUDNESS SETTING"]
    C --> I["F6"]
    C --> J["F7 up menu"]

Figure 15-23 LOUDNESS SETUP menu

15.9.2 Selecting the Measurement Time

To select the measurement time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP → F•1 PERIOD: 2MIN / 10MIN / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 2HOUR / 6HOUR / 12HOUR / 24HOUR

15.9.3 Clearing the Loudness Measurement

To clear the loudness chart, peak level, and numeric displays, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP → F•2 CHART CLEAR

15.9.4 Starting and Stopping Measurements

To start and stop measurements, follow the procedure below. When measurements are being performed, "MEAS" is displayed in the center of the screen. When measurements are stopped, "STOP" is displayed. "READY" is displayed when measurement is in standby.

This menu item does not appear when Trigger on the LOUDNESS2 tab is set to REMOTE.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP → F•3 MEASURE: STOP / START

15.9.5 Selecting the Scale

To select the loudness chart display scale, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

AUDIO → F•3 LOUDNESS SETUP → F•4 MAG: OFF / ON

Settings

OFF:	The target level is displayed on the scale that you selected with DYNAMIC RANGE on the METER SETUP menu.
ON:	The target level is displayed on a scale that has a full scale ranging from -18 to +9 (LK/LU).

15. Audio Display

15.9.6 Configuring Loudness Settings

To configure loudness settings, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 15-24 LOUDNESS1 tab

- Measure Mode

Select the measurement mode.

BS1770 / ARIB / EBU / ATSC / CUSTOM

Depending on the measurement mode, the parameters vary as shown below.

Table 15-1 Selecting the measurement mode

	Measure Mode
	BS1770	ARIB	EBU	ATSC	CUSTOM
Corresponding Standard	ITU-RBS.1770	ARIBTR-B32	EBU R128	ATSC A/85 -
Target Level	-24.0 [LKFS]	-24.0[LKFS]	-23.0[LUFS]	-24.0[LKFS]	-25.0 to -23.0[LKFS]
Block Size (ms)	400	400	400	400	400
Overlap Size (%)	75	75	75	0	75
Absolute Gating	-70 [LKFS]	-70 [LKFS]	-70 [LUFS]	-	-70 [LKFS]
Relative Gating	-10 [LKFS]	-10 [LKFS]	-10 [LUFS]	-	-10 [LKFS]

15. Audio Display

- LFE Gain

When Measure Mode is set to CUSTOM on the CHANNEL MAIN tab, select whether to measure LFEch. When this is set to ON, you can set the LFEch gain to a value from 0 to 10.

OFF / ON

- ShortTerm Loudness

Set the time that is used to calculate the short-term loudness.

200 - 3000 - 10000

• Momentary Loudness

Set the time that is used to calculate the momentary loudness.

200 - 400 - 10000

Figure 15-25 LOUDNESS2 tab

- Loudness Response

Select the response model.

When MODE on the CHANNEL SUB tab is set to MONO (ARIB) or STEREO, setting Loudness Response to ShortTerm also sets Chart Setting to ShortTerm, and setting Loudness Response to Momentary also sets Chart Setting to Momentary.

ShortTerm / Momentary

15. Audio Display

- Chart Setting

When MODE on the CHANNEL SUB tab is set to MONO (ARIB) or STEREO, select the type of loudness to display on the loudness chart.

Setting Chart Setting to ShortTerm also sets Loudness Response to ShortTerm, and setting Chart Setting to Momentary also sets Loudness Response to Momentary.

Integrated / ShortTerm / Momentary

- Trigger

Select the automatic loudness measurement mode from the available settings below.

OFF:	Automatic measurement is disabled. You must set the loudness measurement on the LOUDNESS SETUP menu.
REMOTE:	Measurement start, stop, and clear are executed through the remote control connector. See chapter 18, “REMOTE CONTROL.”You have to press → •2 SYSTEM SETUP, and then set Remote Select to Recall and Loudness on the REMOTE SETUP tab.
Timecode:	Measurement start and stop are executed on the basis of the time codes embedded in the SDI signals. Set Start Time and End Time first, and then set •3 MEASURE on the LOUDNESS SETUP menu to START. “STOP” in the center of the screen changes to “READY.” When the time specified by Start Time arrives, measurement starts automatically.You need to select the time code using → •2 SYSTEM SETUP →CAPTURE&DISPLAY tab → Time.
Mute:	Measurement start, stop, and clear and storage to USB memory are executed through input signals.

If you select Mute, on the LOUDNESS SETUP menu, press F•3 MEASURE to select START, and then apply the material to measure. "READY" appears in the center of the display.

graph LR
    A["No sound"] --> B["Audio (leader)"]
    B --> C["No sound"]
    C --> D["Audio (body)"]
    D --> E["No sound"]
    E --> F["Audio (leader)"]
    F --> G["No sound"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Figure 15-26 Mute explanation

a) When and audio (leader) is received, loudness measurement is cleared.
b) Loudness measurement starts 1 second after the detection of no sound. "MEAS" appears in the center of the display.
c) Loudness measurement stops 3 seconds after the detection of no sound. If a USB memory device is connected, the loudness data is automatically saved to the device. "READY" appears in the center of the display.

You can measure multiple materials in succession by applying subsequent materials.

15. Audio Display

- dBTP Over Mark

Select whether to display a ▼ mark and the "OVER" mark when the peak level of a channel is greater than or equal to the level specified by OVER dBFS.

Neither mark is displayed when Level Over under ERROR SETUP is set to OFF.

[See also] OVER dBFS →15.5.4, "Setting the Reference Level."

ERROR SETUP →15.3, "Configuring Error Detection Settings."

OFF / ON

- Relative Gating Lamp

Select whether to display "R" when the input signal is applicable for relative gating.

OFF / ON

Figure 15-27 CHANNEL MAIN tab

- MODE

Select the main loudness measurement channel.

MONO(ARIB): The channel that you select for L-Rch is measured.

STEREO: The channels that you select for Lch and Rch are measured.

5.1: The channels that you select for Lch, Rch, Cch, LFEch, Lsch, and Rsch are measured.

CUSTOM: The channels that you select for Lch, Rch, Cch, LFEch, Lsch, and Rsch are measured. N.C. can be selected during embedded audio measurement.

Channels set to N.C. are not measured.

15. Audio Display

Figure 15-28 CHANNEL SUB tab

- MODE

Select the sub loudness measurement channel.

OFF: Sub loudness is not measured.

MONO(ARIB): The channel that you select for L-Rch is measured.

STEREO: The channels that you select for Lch and Rch are measured.

15. Audio Display

15.9.7 Saving to a USB Memory Device

You can save the loudness data to a USB memory device as a .csv file and as a text file. To save a file with a name that you specify, follow the procedure below.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the instrument.
2. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.

The file list display appears.

This setting appears when a USB memory device is connected to the instrument.

Figure 15-29 File list display

1. Set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to OFF.
2. Press F•2 NAME INPUT.

The file name input display appears.

Figure 15-30 File name input display

15. Audio Display

5. Enter a file name using up to 14 characters.

The key operations that you can perform on the file name input display are as follows:

F•1	CLEAR ALL	: Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	: Deletes the character at the cursor
F•4	<=	: Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	: Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	: Enters the character

Function Dial (F•D) : Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

You can copy the file name of an already saved file. To copy a file name, move the cursor to the file in the file list whose name you want to copy, and then press the function dial (F•D).

6. Press F•7 up menu.

7. Press F•3 STORE.

When the message "Saving file - Please wait." disappears, the file has been successfully saved.

If a file with the same name already exists on the USB memory device, an overwrite confirmation menu appears. To overwrite the current file, press F•1 OVER WR YES. To cancel the save operation, press F•3 OVER WR NO.

- Deleting a Loudness Data

To delete a loudness data that has been saved to the USB memory device, select the log file on the file list display, and then press F•4 FILE DELETE. To delete the file, press F•1 DELETE YES. To cancel the delete operation, press F•3 DELETE NO.

• Automatic File Name Generation

If you set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to ON, the file name will be generated automatically in the format "YYYYMMDDhhmmss" when you save the file. In this situation, F•2 NAME INPUT is not displayed.

- USB Memory Device Folder Structure

Loudness data is saved in the LOUDNESS folder.

USB memory device

LV5600_USER or LV7600_USER

LOUDNESS

YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt

- Loudness Data Explanation

In txt data, the contents set using F•5 LOUDNESS SETTING and integrated loudness values are stored. Judgment ([OK] or [NG]) on the basis of THRESHOLD is also stored.

In csv data, the current time, timecodes, main loudness values, and sub loudness values are stored. Data values of about 10 points are stored per second.

txt data example csv data example

2012/07/12 10:32:31 << SETTING DATA and RESULT >>

LOUDNESS SETTING

MEASURE MODE : ARIB

TARGET LEVEL : -24.0 LKFS

THRESHOLD : -25.0 \~ -23.0 LKFS

BLOCK SIZE : 400 msec

OVERLAP SIZE : 75 %

ABS GATING LV : -70.0 LKFS

REL GATING LV : -10.0 LKFS

LFE GAIN : OFF

LOUDNESS RESPONSE

RESPONSE : MOMENTARY

10:30:33	0:09:38	-20.6	-25.2
10:30:33	0:09:38	-100	-100
10:30:34	0:09:39	-22.6	-27.3
10:30:34	0:09:39	-19	-23.6
10:30:34	0:09:39	-17	-21.6
10:30:34	0:09:39	-15.6	-20.3
10:30:34	0:09:39	-14.9	-19.5
10:30:34	0:09:39	-14.4	-19
10:30:34	0:09:39	-13.9	-18.5
10:30:34	0:09:39	-13.7	-18.4
10:30:34	0:09:39	-15	-19.6
10:30:34	0:09:39	-16.9	-21.6
10:30:34	0:09:39	-20.6	-25.2
10:30:35	0:09:40	-22.6	-27.3
10:30:35	0:09:40	-19	-23.6
10:30:35	0:09:40	-17	-21.6
10:30:35	0:09:40	-15.2	-19.8
10:30:35	0:09:40	-14.4	-19
10:30:35	0:09:40	-14.2	-18.8
10:30:35	0:09:40	-15.1	-19.8
10:30:35	0:09:40	-16.9	-21.6
10:30:35	0:09:40	-19.8	-24.4
10:30:35	0:09:40	-20.4	-25
10:30:36	0:09:41	-17.9	-22.5
10:30:36	0:09:41	-16.1	-20.7

16. STATUS DISPLAY

To display the status, press STATUS.

Figure 16-1 Status display

16.1 Status Screen Description

- SIGNAL

If the instrument is receiving an SDI signal, "DETECT" is displayed. Otherwise, "NO SIGNAL" is displayed.

If "NO SIGNAL" is displayed, the following items are not displayed.

• FORMAT/SUB IMAGE FORMAT

The input signal format is indicated. It is normally displayed in light blue, but if the input is not appropriate, it turns red.

- Freq

The sampling frequency deviation is displayed.

Normally, this is displayed in light blue. If Frequency Error on the ERROR SETUP1 tab is set to ON, the color changes to red when ±10 ppm is exceeded.

The display range is "<-100 ppm, -100 to +100 ppm, >+100 ppm," and the accuracy is ±2 ppm.

[See also] ERROR SETUP1 tab → section 16.2.1, "Error Setup 1"

16. Status Display

- Cable

The input signal attenuation is converted into a cable length that you selected and displayed. Normally the value is displayed in light blue, but by setting Cable Error on the ERROR SETUP1 tab to ON, if the value exceeds the specified Warning value, it will change to yellow. If the value exceeds the Error value, it will change to red.

The display range, accuracy, and resolution are shown below.

[See also] ERROR SETUP1 tab → section 16.2.1, "Error Setup 1"

- Display Range

12G	< 10 m, 10 to 80 m, > 80 m	(5 m steps)
3G	< 10 m, 10 to 100 m, > 100 m	(5 m steps)
HD	< 10 m, 10 to 130 m, > 130 m	(5 m steps)
SD	< 50 m, 50 to 200 m, > 200 m	(5 m steps)

- Accuracy

1 2 G, 3 G, HD ± 2 0 m

SD ± 3 0 m

- Resolution 10 m

- Embedded Audio

The channels of the audio packets embedded in the input signal are displayed.

If the input signal is 3G-B-DL, only stream 1 is displayed. (When measuring 3G-B-DS, stream 2 is also displayed.)

- ERROR

The counts of the errors for the items whose detection setting was set to ON with F•5 STATUS SETUP are displayed. Errors are counted once per second or once per field. The maximum number of errors that can be counted is 999999.

Switching video formats or input channels may cause disturbances in the signal that will cause errors to be detected.

- CRC (other than SD)

An error is counted when the CRC embedded in the input signal is different from the CRC that the instrument calculates.

- EDH (SD only)

An error is counted when the EDH packet contains an ancillary data error flag, an active picture error flag, or a full-field error flag and when the CRC in the EDH packet is different from the CRC that the instrument calculates from the video data.

- TRS Pos

Input signal TRS (Timing Reference Signal) errors are displayed.

An error is counted when the position of the header word (3FFh, 000h, 000h) of EAV (End of Active Video) and SAV (Start of Active Video) is not correct or when the F, V, or H TRS protection bit is outside the video specifications (such as when the blanking period is different).

- TRS Code

Input signal TRS (Timing Reference Signal) protection bit errors are displayed.

16. Status Display

An error is counted when the correspondence between F, V, and H in the protection bits (XYZ) of EAV (End of Active Video) and SAV (Start of Active Video) and error correction flags P3, P2, P1, and P0 is outside the video specifications.

- ILLEGAL Code

An error is counted when the input signal data is outside the timing reference signal (TRS) range or the range specified for the ancillary data flag (ADF) and "000h to 003h" or "3FCh to 3FFh" is detected.

In SDI signals, 000h to 003h and 3FCh to 3FFh (expressed as 10 bit data) are designed to be used as timing reference signals and ancillary data flags, they cannot be used as video signal data or ancillary data. An error is counted when data other than timing reference signal or ancillary data flag is present in this area.

• Line Number (other than SD)

An error is counted when the line number that is embedded in the input signal does not match the line number that has been counted by the instrument.

- Check Sum

The instrument uses the checksum in the input signal's ancillary data header to count errors.

- Parity

The instrument uses the parity bit in the input signal's ancillary data header to count errors.

- BCH (other than SD)

The instrument counts the errors in the BCH code in the input signal's embedded audio.

- Parity (other than SD)

The instrument counts the parity errors in the input signal's embedded audio.

• DBN

The instrument counts the continuity errors in the input signal's embedded audio. Embedded audio packets contain data block number words (DBN), which indicate packet continuity. A serial number between 1 and 255 is assigned to each packet. An error is counted when this DBN is not continuous between packets.

16. Status Display

- Inhibit

An error is counted when embedded audio packets are found in lines where they should not be embedded. The embedding inhibit lines are as follows.

However, for 3G-B-DL 60p, 59.94p, 50p, 48p, and 47.95p, the transmission scanning mode is interlace. For 12G, the line numbers are those of the sub images divided into the 3G data structure.

Table 16-1 Embedding inhibit lines

Format		Transmission Scanning Mode
		Progressive	Interlace
12G	3840(4096)×2160	Line 8	-
HD/3G	1280×720	Line 8	-
	1920×1080	Line 8	Lines 8, 570
SD	720×487	-	Lines 11, 274
	720×576	-	Lines 7, 320

- Audio Sample

An error is counted when audio that is asynchronous to the video is embedded. For the video and audio to be synchronized, there is a specific number of audio data samples that need to be embedded in a given number of video frames. If this rule is not met, it is considered an error.

- Freeze

An error is counted when the video data is the same between video frames. Specify an area of the video to use for detection and the number of continuous frames that is required for the condition to be detected as an error.

Video data is compared using checksums.

- Black

An error is counted when the video luminance level is less than the specified value.

Set the luminance level for detecting error pixels, the ratio of error pixels in a frame, and the number of continuous frames that is required for the condition to be detected as an error.

• Gamut

Gamut errors are counted.

Set the upper and lower limits for detecting errors, the ratio of error pixels in a frame, and the number of continuous frames that is required for the condition to be detected as an error.

- Comp Gamut

Composite gamut errors are counted.

Set the upper and lower limits for detecting errors, the ratio of error pixels in a frame, and the number of continuous frames that is required for the condition to be detected as an error.

- Level Y

An error is counted when the luminance level is outside the specified range.

Set the upper and lower limits for detecting errors.

- Level C

An error is counted when the chrominance level is outside the specified range.

Set the upper and lower limits for detecting errors.

16. Status Display

- SinceReset

The time that has elapsed since F•7 ERROR CLEAR was pressed, the instrument was initialized, or the instrument was restarted is displayed.

16. Status Display

16.2 Configuring Error Detection Settings

To configure the error detection settings, use F•5 STATUS SETUP.

When error detection is set to ON, the following actions are performed when an error occurs.

• Counts errors on the status display.
• Displays errors in the event log of the status display
• Displays "ERROR" in the upper right of the display.
  • Transmits a signal from the alarm output remote terminal

16.2.1 Error Setup 1

Use the ERROR SETUP1 tab to configure error detection settings for SDI signals.

Figure 16-2 ERROR SETUP1 tab

• Error Counter

Sec:	Errors are counted in units of seconds. Even if multiple errors occur within the same second, only a single error is counted.
Field:	Errors are counted in units of fields (frames). Even if multiple errors occur within the same field (frame), only a single error is counted.

- TRS Error

Select whether to detect TRS Pos and TRS Code errors.

OFF / ON

• Line Number Error(Except SD)

Select whether to detect line number errors. This setting is valid when the input signal is not SD.

OFF / ON

16. Status Display

- CRC Error(Except SD)

Select whether to detect CRC errors. This setting is valid when the input signal is not SD.

OFF / ON

- EDH Error(SD)

Select whether to detect EDH errors. This setting is valid when the input signal is SD.

OFF / ON

- Illegal Code Error

Select whether to detect illegal code errors.

OFF / ON

- Frequency Error

Select whether to detect frequency deviation errors.

Even when this is set to OFF, the frequency deviation is still shown in the status display.

OFF / ON

- Cable Error

Select whether to detect cable errors.

Even when this is set to OFF, the cable length is still shown in the status display.

OFF / ON

• 12G Cable Error / Warning

Set the upper cable error limit and the upper cable warning limit for 12G input signals. If the value on the left side is exceeded, an error will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in red.

If the value on the right side is exceeded, a warning will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in yellow.

The cable used in cable length measurement is L-5.5CUHD.

10 - 80 m

- 3G Cable

Select the cable to use for cable length measurements when the input signal is 3G.

LS-5CFB / 1694A

• 3G Cable Error / Warning

Set the upper cable error limit and the upper cable warning limit for 3G input signals. If the value on the left side is exceeded, an error will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in red.

If the value on the right side is exceeded, a warning will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in yellow.

10 - 100 m

16. Status Display

- HD Cable

Select the cable to use for cable length measurements when the input signal is HD.

LS-5CFB / 1694A

• HD Cable Error / Warning

Set the upper cable error limit and the upper cable warning limit for HD input signals. If the value on the left side is exceeded, an error will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in red.

If the value on the right side is exceeded, a warning will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in yellow.

10 - 130 m

- SD Cable

Select the cable to use for cable length measurements when the input signal is SD.

L-5C2V / 8281

• SD Cable Error / Warning

Set the upper cable error limit and the upper cable warning limit for SD input signals. If the value on the left side is exceeded, an error will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in red.

If the value on the right side is exceeded, a warning will occur, and the measured value on the status display will be displayed in yellow.

50 - 200 m

16.2.2 Error Setup 2

Use the ERROR SETUP2 tab to configure ancillary data and embedded audio error detection settings.

Figure 16-3 ERROR SETUP2 tab

16. Status Display

- Parity Error

Select whether to detect parity errors in the ancillary data.

OFF / ON

- Checksum Error

Select whether to detect checksum errors in the ancillary data.

OFF / ON

- BCH Error(Except SD)

Select whether to detect BCH errors in the embedded audio. This setting is valid when the input signal is not SD.

OFF / ON

- DBN Error

Select whether to detect DBN errors in the embedded audio.

OFF / ON

- Parity Error(Except SD)

Select whether to detect parity errors in the embedded audio. This setting is valid when the input signal is not SD.

OFF / ON

- Inhibit Line Error

Select whether to detect embedding errors in the embedded audio.

OFF / ON

- Sample Count Error

Select whether to detect sample number errors in the embedded audio.

An error is counted when audio that is asynchronous to the video is embedded. If a certain number of audio data samples are not embedded in a certain number of video frames, it will be considered and error (as defined in SMPTE ST 299 and SMPTE ST 272).

OFF / ON

16.2.3 Error Setup 3

In the ERROR SETUP3 tab, configure gamut error settings.

Figure 16-4 ERROR SETUP3 tab

- LowPass Filter

Select the frequency response of the low-pass filter used for gamut error and composite gamut error detection. Set this to remove transient errors caused by overshoot and other anomalies.

HD/SD:1MHz / HD:2.8MHz SD:1MHz / OFF

- Gamut Error

Select whether to detect gamut errors.

ON / OFF

- Gamut Upper

Set the gamut error upper limit. An error occurs when the input signal level exceeds the specified value.

In the 5-bar GBR display, levels that are greater than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

90.8 - 109.4%

- Gamut Lower

Set the gamut error lower limit. An error occurs when the input signal level goes below the specified value.

In the 5-bar GBR display, levels that are less than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

-7.2 - 6.1%

16. Status Display

- Area

Specify the percentage of the active picture area over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error. You cannot configure this setting when Gamut Error is set to OFF.

0.0 - 1.0 - 5.0%

- Duration

Set the number of consecutive video frames over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error. You cannot configure this setting when Gamut Error is set to OFF.

1 - 60 Frames

- Composite Gamut Error

Select whether to detect composite gamut errors.

ON / OFF

- Setup

Select the setup level to add when converting component signals to composite signals.

0%: No setup level is added.

7.5%: A setup level of 7.5 % is added.

- Composite Upper

Set the composite gamut error upper limit. An error occurs when the input signal level exceeds the specified value.

In the 5-bar CMP display, levels that are greater than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

90.0 - 135.0%

- Composite Lower

Set the composite gamut error lower limit. An error occurs when the input signal level goes below the specified value.

In the 5-bar CMP display, levels that are less than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

-40.0 - 20.0%

- Area

Specify the percentage of the active picture area over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error. You cannot configure this setting when Composite Gamut Error is set to OFF.

0.0 - 1.0 - 5.0%

16. Status Display

- Duration

Set the number of consecutive video frames over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error. You cannot configure this setting when Composite Gamut Error is set to OFF.

1 - 60 Frames

16.2.4 Error Setup 4

On the ERROR SETUP4 tab, configure freeze error, black error, and level error settings.

Figure 16-5 ERROR SETUP4 tab

- Freeze Error

Select whether to detect freeze errors. If you set this to OFF, you cannot configure the following settings.

ON / OFF

16. Status Display

• Area Upper / Area Lower / Area Left / Area Right

Set what percent of each active picture area (the upper, lower, left, and right areas) will not be subject to error detection.

0 - 100%

- Duration

Set the number of consecutive video frames over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error.

2 - 300 Frames

- Black Error

Select whether to detect black errors. If you set this to OFF, you cannot configure the following settings.

ON / OFF

- Level

Set the black error level. Any signals that are less than or equal to the specified value will be detected as errors.

0 - 100%

- Area

Specify the percentage of the active picture area over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error.

1 - 100%

- Duration

Set the number of consecutive video frames over which errors must occur to be recognized as an error.

1 - 300 Frames

16. Status Display

- Level Error

Select whether to detect level errors. If you set this to OFF, you cannot configure the following settings.

ON / OFF

- Luminance Upper

Set the luminance level error upper limit. An error occurs when the input signal level exceeds the specified value.

In the 5-bar Y display, levels that are greater than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

-51 - 766mV

- Luminance Lower

Set the luminance level error lower limit. An error occurs when the input signal level goes below the specified value.

In the 5-bar Y display, levels that are less than or equal to the specified value are displayed in red.

-51 - 766mV

- Chroma Upper

Set the chroma level error upper limit. An error occurs when the input signal level exceeds the specified value.

-400 - 399mV

- Chroma Lower

Set the chroma level error lower limit. An error occurs when the input signal level goes below the specified value.

-400 - 399mV

16. Status Display

16.3 Clearing Error Counts

To clear the error counts and SinceReset, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

16.4 Configuring Event Log Settings

To display the event log, follow the procedure below.

The event log displays a list of the events that have occurred.

The applicable event-detection channels are all channels in A to D. However, when measuring 3G-B-DS, 3G(DL)-4K, or 12G, events are detected only on the currently displayed channel.

Procedure

Figure 16-6 Event log display

16.4.1 Event Log Screen Description

Events are listed on the event log screen by the time of their occurrence.

Turn the function dial (F•D) to the right to scroll the screen and view older events in the log. Press the function dial (F•D) to display the latest events.

- Notes

- When the same event occurs successively and when multiple events occur at the same time, they are treated as a single event.

- When multiple events occur at the same time, you may not be able to check all the events on the screen. When this happens, you can view all the events by saving them to a USB memory device.

- The event display is cleared when you turn the power off.

- Switching video formats or input channels may cause disturbances in the signal that will cause errors to be displayed.

16. Status Display

- Time Display

The time is displayed in the format specified by Time that you select by pressing SYS → F•2 SYSTEM SETUP.

- Channel display

The input channel is displayed.

A "-" is displayed for audio events detected by SER03.

- Format Display

The input format is displayed.

If there is no input signal, "NO SIGNAL" is displayed.

- Event Display

Events are displayed one line at a time in rectangular frames. In the frame, the event occurrence state is shown for the number that you selected with the function dial (F•D). Further, for audio events detected by SER03, the corresponding channels are shown. The colors are used in frames to indicate different states. Gray indicates not applicable for counting. White indicates no event. Red indicates that an event is occurring. Green indicates that an event occurred in the past (not occurring currently).

The events that are displayed in the event log are listed below.

Of the items listed below, only those whose detection settings have been set to ON on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab of the SYS menu, STATUS SETUP of the STATUS menu, ERROR SETUP of the EYE menu, and ERROR SETUP of the AUDIO menu are displayed.

Table 16-2 Events

Applicable Options Event Name (in frame)		Event Name (one line display)	Description
SER01/SER02/SER29	CRC	CRC	CRC Error(Except SD)
	EDH	EDH	EDH Error(SD)
	TRS Position	TRS Position	TRS Position Error
	TRS_Code	TRS_Code	TRS Code Error
	Illegal Code	Illegal Code	Illegal Code Error
	Line Number	Line Number	Line Number Error(Except SD)
	Cable Error	Cable Error	Cable Error
	Cable Warning	Cable Warning	Cable Warning
	Check Sum	Check Sum	Ancillary Data Checksum Error
	Parity	Parity	Ancillary Data Parity Error
	Gamut	Gamut	Gamut Error
	Gamut ST1	Gamut ST1	Gamut Error Stream 1
	Gamut ST2	Gamut ST2	Gamut Error Stream 2
	Cmp. Gamut	Cmp. Gamut	Composite Gamut Error
	Cmp. Gamut ST1	Cmp. Gamut ST1	Composite Gamut Error Stream 1
	Cmp. Gamut ST2	Cmp. Gamut ST2	Composite Gamut Error Stream 2
	Freeze	Freeze	Freeze Error
	Freeze ST1	Freeze ST1	Freeze Error Stream 1
	Freeze ST2	Freeze ST2	Freeze Error Stream 2
	Black	Black	Black Error

1. Status Display

Applicable Options Event Name(in frame)		Event Name(one line display)	Description
	Black ST1	Black ST1	Black Error Stream 1
	Black ST2	Black ST2	Black Error Stream 2
	Level Y	Level Y	Luminance Error
	Level Y ST1	Level Y ST1	Luminance Error Stream 1
	Level Y ST2	Level Y ST2	Luminance Error Stream 2
	Level C	Level C	Chroma Error
	Level C ST1	Level C ST1	Chroma Error Stream 1
	Level C ST2	Level C ST2	Chroma Error Stream 2
	Audio BCH	Audio BCH	Embedded Audio BCH Error(Except SD)
	Audio Parity	Audio Parity	Embedded Audio Parity Error(Except SD)
	Audio DBN	Audio DBN	Embedded Audio DBN Error
	Audio Inhibit	Audio Inhibit	Embedded Audio Inhibit Line Error
	Audio Sample	Audio Sample	Embedded Audio Sample Count Error
	Frequency	Frequency	Frequency Error
	Format Alarm	Format Alarm	Format Alarm
SER02 (other than 12G)SER02+SER29 (12G)	EYE Jitter	EYE 12G Jitter	12G Jitter Error
		EYE 3G Jitter	3G Jitter Error
		EYE HD Jitter	HD Jitter Error
		EYE SD Jitter	SD Jitter Error
	EYE T Jitter	EYE 12G T Jitter	12G Timing Jitter Error
		EYE 3G T Jitter	3G Timing Jitter Error
		EYE HD T Jitter	HD Timing Jitter Error
		EYE SD T Jitter	SD Timing Jitter Error
	EYE Tr_Tf	EYE 12G Tr_Tf	12G Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)
		EYE 3G Tr_Tf	3G Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)
		EYE HD Tr_Tf	HD Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)
		EYE SD Tr_Tf	SD Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)
	EYE Tf	EYE 12G Tf	12G Falltime Error
		EYE 3G Tf	3G Falltime Error
		EYE HD Tf	HD Falltime Error
		EYE SD Tf	SD Falltime Error
	EYE Tr	EYE 12G Tr	12G Risetime Error
		EYE 3G Tr	3G Risetime Error
		EYE HD Tr	HD Risetime Error
		EYE SD Tr	SD Risetime Error
	EYE Amp.	EYE 12G Amp.	12G Amplitude Error
		EYE 3G Amp.	3G Amplitude Error
		EYE HD Amp.	HD Amplitude Error
		EYE SD Amp.	SD Amplitude Error
	EYE Or	EYE 12G Or	12G OverShoot Rising Error
		EYE 3G Or	3G OverShoot Rising Error
		EYE HD Or	HD OverShoot Rising Error
		EYE SD Or	SD OverShoot Rising Error
	EYE Of	EYE 12G Of	12G OverShoot Falling Error

1. Status Display

Applicable Options Event Name (in frame)		Event Name (one line display)	Description
		EYE 3G Of	3G OverShoot Falling Error
		EYE HD Of	HD OverShoot Falling Error
		EYE SD Of	SD OverShoot Falling Error
SER03	Validity	Validity	Validity Error
	CRC	CRC	CRC Error
	Clip	Clip	Clip
	Mute	Mute	Mute
	Level Ov.	Level Ov.	Level Over
	Parity	Parity	Parity Error
	Code Vil.	Code Vil.	Code Violation

16. Status Display

16.4.2 Starting the Event Log

To start the event log, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS	→	F•1	EVENT LOG →	F•1	LOG: START / STOP
Settings
START:			The event log is started. "NOW LOGGING" appears in the upper right of the event log.
STOP:			The event log is stopped. "LOGGING STOPPED" appears in the upper right of the event log.

16.4.3 Clearing the Event Log

To delete the event log, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•1

EVENT LOG →

F•2

CLEAR

16.4.4 Selecting the Overwrite Mode

Up to 1000 events can be displayed. To select the action to perform when more than 1000 events occur, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•1

EVENT LOG →

F•3

LOG MODE: OVER WRT / STOP

Settings

OVER WRT:	Oldest events are overwritten.
STOP:	Additional events are not recorded.

16. Status Display

16.4.5 Saving to a USB Memory Device

You can save the event log to a USB memory device as a text file.

To save a file with a name that you specify, follow the procedure below.

1. Used to connect USB memory.
2. Press F•6 USB MEMORY.

The file list screen appears.

This setting appears when a USB memory device is connected.

Figure 16-7 File list screen

1. Set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to OFF.
2. Press F•2 NAME INPUT.

The file name input display appears.

Figure 16-8 File name input screen

16. Status Display

1. Enter a file name using up to 14 characters.

The key operations that you can perform in the file name input display are as follows:

F•1	CLEAR ALL	Deletes all characters
F•2	DELETE	Deletes the character at the cursor
F•4	<=	Moves the cursor to the left
F•5	=>	Moves the cursor to the right
F•6	CHAR SET	Enters the character
Function dial (F•D)		Turn to select a character, and press to enter the character.

You can also copy the file name of an already saved file. To copy a file name, move the cursor to the file in the file list whose name you want to copy, and then press the function dial (F•D).

1. Press F•7 up menu.
2. Press F•3 STORE.

If a file with the same name that you have specified already exists on the USB memory device, an overwrite confirmation menu appears. To overwrite the existing preset, F•1 OVER WR YES. Otherwise, press F•3 OVER WR NO.

- Deleting an Event Log

To delete an event log that has been saved to the USB memory device, select the log file on the file list display, and then press F•4 FILE DELETE. To delete the file, press F•1 DELETE YES. To cancel the delete operation, press F•3 DELETE NO.

• Automatic File Name Generation

If you set F•1 AUTO FILENAME to ON, the file name will be generated automatically in the format "YYYYMMDDhhmmss" when you save the file. In this situation, F•2 NAME INPUT is not displayed.

• USB Memory Device Folder Structure

Event logs are saved in the LOG folder.

16.5 Configuring the Data Dump Settings

To view the data dump, follow the procedure below.

In the data dump, the data of the selected line is listed. You can change the line number using the V POS knob and the sample number using the H POS knob. (You can also use the function dial (F•D).

Changing this setting will also change the selected line on the video-signal-waveform, vector, and picture displays (excluding some of the 4K settings).

When an SER05 is installed, the SDI ANALYSIS becomes the SDI/IP ANALYSIS menu. Further, during an IP measurement when the signal standard is ST 2110, data dump cannot be displayed.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•1 DATA DUMP

Figure 16-9 Data dump display

16.5.1 Data Dump Display Description

• Detection Code Display

The input signal's embedded ancillary data is detected, and the following detection codes are displayed.

Table 16-3 Detection code display

Detection Code	Display Colors	Description
ADF	Cyan	Ancillary data flags (000h, 3FFh, and 3FFh)
DID	Cyan	Data identification (the data after ADF)
SDID	Cyan	SECONDARY DATA IDENTIFICATION(the secondary format data when the DID is smaller than 80h)
DBN	Cyan	DATA BLOCK NUMBERS(the primary data format when the DID is larger than 80h)
DC	Cyan	Data count (the data after the SDID/DBN)
UDW	Cyan	User data words (the user data words of the data count length after ADF)
CS	Magenta	Checksum (the data immediately after UDW)
AP	Yellow	ACTIVE PICTURE (From after the SAV to just before the EAVwhen the selected line is within the active video area)

- Line Number Display

Pictures sent in SDI signals are assigned line numbers as part of the transmission format. The line number is displayed in one of the following formats at the top of the screen.

Figure 16-4 Line number display

Line number display	Description
LINE No.	The picture scan line numbers and the line numbers during transmission are matched.
I/F LINE No.	The picture scan line numbers and the line numbers during transmission are not matched.Line numbers during transmission are displayed.
PIC LINE No.	The picture scan line numbers and the line numbers during transmission are not matched.Picture scan line numbers are displayed.

Normally, the picture scan line numbers and the line numbers for storing those line numbers during transmission are matched. However, they do not match when the following format is received.

If this is the case, you can switch between the picture scan line number (PICTURE) and line numbers during transmission.

Table 16-5 Format

Format	Frame Rate	Switching operation
3G-B-DL	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P	F•4	DISPLAY (PICTURE/STREAM1/STREAM2)
HD(DL)	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P	F•5	LINK (PICTURE/A/B)
3G(DL)-2K	60/59.94/50/48/47.95/P	F•5	LINK (PICTURE/1/2)

16. Status Display

As an example, the switching procedure for setting the picture scan line number to 42 when 3G-B-DL (1920×1080/59.94P) is applied is shown below.

1. Data dump is displayed.
2. Set F•4 DISPLAY to PICTURE.
3. Use the V POS knob to set PIC LINE No. to 42.
4. Set F•4 DISPLAY to STREAM1.

The line number display changes to I/F LINE No.21.

This indicates that the line number in which the picture scan line number 42 is stored for transmission is 21.

The relationship of other 3G-B-DL line numbers is shown below.

Table 16-6 3G-B-DL line number relationship

Picture scan line number (PIC LINE No.)	Line number during transmission (I/F LINE No.)
PICTURE	STREAM1	STREAM2
1	563	1125
2	1	563
n (odd number)	(n+1)/2+562	(n-1)/2
m (even number)	m/2	m/2+562

16.5.2 Moving the Display Position

To configure data dump operation settings, press F•1 DUMP OPERATION on the DATA DUMP menu.

graph LR
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F•2"]
    B --> C["SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS"]
    C --> D["F•1"]
    D --> E["DATA DUMP"]
    E --> F["F•2"]
    F --> G["DUMP OPERATION"]
    H["F1"] --> I["JUMP"]
    I --> J["EAV"]
    J --> K["F2"]
    K --> L["FD 1CLICK 1"]
    L --> M["F3"]
    M --> N["FD FUNCTION LINE"]
    N --> O["F4"]
    O --> P["DISPLAY SERIAL"]
    P --> Q["F5"]
    Q --> R["F6"]
    R --> S["USB MEMORY"]
    S --> T["F7"]
    T --> U["up menu"]
    V["F•1"] --> W["F•2"]
    W --> X["F•3"]
    X --> Y["F•4"]
    Y --> Z["F•5"]
    Z --> AA["F•6"]
    AA --> AB["F•7"]

Figure 16-10 DUMP OPERATION menu

To move the data dump sample number to a specific location, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•1 DATA DUMP → F•2 DUMP OPERATION → F•1 JUMP

: EAV / SAV

: END / START (when the input signal is 4K and F•5 LINK or F•5 SUB is set to PICTURE)

Settings

EAV: The display starts with the EAV sample number.

SAV: The display starts with the SAV sample number.

END: The last sample number is displayed.

START: The display starts with sample number 0.

16.5.3 Selecting the Adjustment Step Resolution

To select the line or sample number adjustment step resolution for when the function dial (F•D) is turned, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS	→	F•2	SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS →	F•1	DATA DUMP →	F•2	DUMP
OPERATION →		F•2	FD 1CLICK: 1 / 10 / 50

16.5.4 Selecting What the Function Dial Controls

To select whether the line number or sample number is controlled with the function dial (F•D), follow the procedure below. You can also change the line number using the V POS knob and the sample number using the H POS knob.

Procedure

STATUS	→	F•2	SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS →	F•1	DATA DUMP →	F•2	DUMP
OPERATION →		F•3	FD FUNCTION: LINE / SAMPLE

Settings

LINE: Turning the function dial (F•D) changes the line number. If you press the function dial (F•D), the data of line number 0 or 1 is displayed.
SAMPLE:	Turning the function dial (F•D) changes the sample number. If you press the function dial (F•D), EAV or sample number 0 is displayed.

16.5.5 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the data dump display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•2

SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS

→

F•1

DATA DUMP

→

F•1

MODE: RUN / HOLD / FRM CAP

Settings

RUN:	The input signal data is automatically updated and displayed.
HOLD:	The input signal data is displayed statically.
FRM CAP:	The frame data is displayed. If frame data has not been captured in the instrument, nothing is displayed. This setting can be selected in frame capture mode.

16. Status Display

16.5.6 Selecting the Display Format

To select the data dump display format, follow the procedure below.

This menu appears both in the DATA DUMP menu and DUMP OPERATION menu. However, when F•5 LINK or F•5 SUB is set to PICTURE, it does not appear.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•1 DATA DUMP → (F•2 DUMP OPERATION →) F•4 DISPLAY
: SERIAL / COMPO / BINARY (for HD, SD, 3G-A, HD (QL), 3G (QL) and 3G-A, 12G)
: PICTURE / STREAM1 / STREAM2 (for 3G-B-DL, 3G(QL) and 3G-B-DL)
: STREAM12 / STREAM1 / STREAM2 (for 3G(DL)-2K and 3G-B-DL)
: S1 SERIAL / S1 COMPO / S1 BINARY / S2 SERIAL / S2 COMPO / S2 BINARY (for 3G(DL)-4K, 3G-B-DS) 

Settings

SERIAL: The parallel converted data sequences are displayed.
COMPO: The parallel converted data sequences are divided into each component and displayed.
BINARY: The parallel converted data sequences are displayed in binary.
PICTURE: Links or streams 1 and 2 are combined and displayed in a picture structure.
STREAM1: Stream 1 is displayed.
STREAM2: Stream 2 is displayed.
STREAM12: Streams 1 and 2 are combined and displayed.
S1 SERIAL: Stream 1 is displayed serially.
S1 COMPO: Stream 1 is separated and displayed.
S1 BINARY: Stream 1 is displayed in binary.
S2 SERIAL: Stream 2 is displayed serially.
S2 COMPO: Stream 2 is separated and displayed.
S2 BINARY: Stream 2 is displayed in binary. 

DISPLAY = SERIAL

1920x1080/59.941 YCbCr(422) 10bit HD				SDI A	TIME: 16:50:11
DATA DUMP		LINE No.1
		SAMPLE	Y	Cb/Cr
[EAV]		<1920>	3FF	3FF
[EAV]		<1921>	000	000
[EAV]		<1922>	000	000
[EAV]		<1923>	2D8	2D8
LN	LN	<1924>	204	204
LN	LN	<1925>	200	200
CRC	CRC	<1926>	2BB	2F7
CRC	CRC	<1927>	23C	1E8
	ADF	<1928>	040	000
	ADF	<1929>	040	3FF
	ADF	<1930>	040	3FF
	DID	<1931>	040	2E7
	DBN	<1932>	040	1A2
	DC	<1933>	040	218
	UDW	<1934>	040	18F
	UDW	<1935>	040	102
	UDW	<1936>	040	250
	UDW	<1937>	040	2D2
	UDW	<1938>	040	2C5
	UDW	<1939>	040	200

16. Status Display

DISPLAY = COMPO

1920x1080/58.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD				SDI A		TIME: 16:52:13
DATA DUMP		LINE No.1
		SAMPLE	Y	Cb	Cr
[EAV]		<1920>	3FF	3FF
[EAV]		<1921>	000		000
[EAV]		<1922>	000	000
[EAV]		<1923>	2D8		2D8
LN	LN	<1924>	204	204
LN	LN	<1925>	200		200
CRC	CRC	<1926>	2BB	2F7
CRC	CRC	<1927>	23C		1E8
	ADF	<1928>	040	000
	ADF	<1929>	040		3FF
	ADF	<1930>	040	3FF
	DID	<1931>	040		2E7
	DBN	<1932>	040	2BE
	DC	<1933>	040		218
	UDW	<1934>	040	1C4
	UDW	<1935>	040		203
	UDW	<1936>	040	260
	UDW	<1937>	040		2A0
	UDW	<1938>	040	2B1
	UDW	<1939>	040		20F

DISPLAY = BINARY

1920x1080/59.941 YCbCr(422) 10bit HD				SDI A	TIME: 16:52:56
DATA DUMP		LINE No.1
		SAMPLE	Y	Cb/Cr
[EAV]		<1920>	1111111111	1111111111
[EAV]		<1921>	0000000000	0000000000
[EAV]		<1922>	0000000000	0000000000
[EAV]		<1923>	1011011000	1011011000
LN	LN	<1924>	1000000100	1000000100
LN	LN	<1925>	1000000000	1000000000
CRC	CRC	<1926>	1010111011	1011110111
CRC	CRC	<1927>	1000111100	0111101000
	ADF	<1928>	0001000000	0000000000
	ADF	<1929>	0001000000	1111111111
	ADF	<1930>	0001000000	1111111111
	DID	<1931>	0001000000	1011100111
	DBN	<1932>	0001000000	1000111100
	DC	<1933>	0001000000	1000011000
	UDW	<1934>	0001000000	1000100100
	UDW	<1935>	0001000000	1000000000
	UDW	<1936>	0001000000	1010100000
	UDW	<1937>	0001000000	1010011001
	UDW	<1938>	0001000000	1010011001
	UDW	<1939>	0001000000	1000001111

Figure 16-11 Selecting the display format

16.5.7 Selecting the Content to Display

When the link format is set to multi or 12G, to select which content to display the data dump of, follow the procedure below. Links or streams 1 and 2 are combined and displayed in a picture structure.

This menu appears both in the DATA DUMP menu and DUMP OPERATION menu.

Procedure (for multi link)

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•1 DATA DUMP → (F•2 DUMP OPERATION →) F•5 LINK
: PICTURE / A[A] / B[B] or PICTURE / A[C] / B[D] (for HD(DL))
: PICTURE / 1[A] / 2[B] or PICTURE / 1[C] / 2[D] (for 3G(DL))
: PICTURE / 1[A] / 2[B] / 3[C] / 4[D] (for 3G(QL), HD(QL)) 

Procedure (for 12G)

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•1 DATA DUMP → (F•2 DUMP OPERATION →) F•5 SUB: PICTURE / A / B / C / D 

16.5.8 Saving to a USB Memory Device

You can save the data dump to a USB memory device as a text file. The procedure to follow to save data is the same as the procedure that was given for the event log. See section 16.4.5, "Saving to a USB Memory Device."

Data dumps are saved in the DUMP folder.

USB memory device

LV5600_USER or LV7600_USER

L DUMP

YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt

16. Status Display

16.6 Configuring Phase Difference Measurement Settings

To show the phase difference measurement display, follow the procedure below.

You can use the phase difference measurement display to measure the phase difference between an SDI signal and an external sync signal or the phase difference between a pair of SDI signals.

During an IP measurement, phase difference measurement screen cannot be displayed.

Procedure

Figure 16-12 Phase difference measurement screen

• Measuring the Phase Difference between an SDI Signal and an External Sync Signal

You can measure the phase difference between an SDI signal and an external sync signal by setting F•1 REF SELECT to EXT. Apply the external sync signal.

Note that the following input formats are not supported.

• 3G 720/30P, 720/29.97P, 720/25P, 720/24P, 720/23.98P
• Frame frequency 48P, 47.95P

• Measuring the Phase Difference between SDI Signals

You can measure the phase difference between SDI signals by setting F•3 REF SELECT to SDI. This measurement is not possible when SDI System is set to 3G-B-DS on the SYS > F•1 SIGNAL IN OUT > SDI IN SETUP1 tab.

The reference signal varies depending on the input signal as shown below.

Figure 16-7 Reference signal

Input Signal	Reference Signal
SD, HD, 3G	Ach
HD(DL)	Link A
3G(DL)-2K, 3G(DL)-4K, 3G(QL), HD(QL)	Link 1

16.6.1 Phase Difference Measurement Screen Description

- CURRENT PHASE

V PHASE: The phase difference is displayed in units of lines.

H PHASE: The phase difference is displayed in units of time and in units of pixels or clocks. ^*1

TOTAL PHASE: The total of the V PHASE and H PHASE differences is displayed in units of time.

*1 When the input signal is HD(DL) 1080/60P, 1080/59.94P, 1080/50P or SD, the unit is clocks. Pixels are in units of the video's sampling frequency. Clocks are in units of the parallel video's transmission clock frequency.

• REF

This displays the reference signal as shown below.

Table 16-8 REF indications

F•1 REF SELECT	Display	Description
EXT	EXT BB : DEFAULT	When the reference signal is BB and the phase difference is at the default value
	EXT BB : USER REF	When the reference signal is BB and the phase difference is at the user reference value
	EXT HD : DEFAULT When the reference signal is HD3 and the phase difference is at the default value
	EXT HD : USER REF	When the reference signal is HD3 and the phase difference is at the user reference value
	NO SIGNAL	When no external sync signal is being applied
SDI	SDI A	When the input signal is SD, HD, or 3G and the reference signal is A
	LINK A	When the input signal is HD(DL) and the reference signal is link A
	LINK 1	When the input signal is 3G(DL)-2K, 3G(DL)-4K, 3G(QL), or HD(QL) and the reference signal is link 1
	NO SIGNAL	Indicates that the reference SDI signal is not being received.

- Setting the User-Defined Phase Difference Reference

When F•1 REF SELECT is set to EXT, you can set the current phase difference to zero by pressing F•2 REF SET USER. You can change the reference to match the system that you are using. (During multi link, the phase difference of link A or link 1 is set to zero.)

To reset the phase difference to its default value (see below), press F•3 REF SET DEFAULT.

16. Status Display

- Default Phase Difference Setting

If the input signal is HD or SD and F•1 REF SELECT is set to EXT, you can use F•4 0H TIMING to select the reference where the phase difference is assumed to be zero.

When using a LEADER signal generator that allows you to select LEGACY or SERIAL, this setting must be matched to the setting selected on the instrument. In addition, depending on the output accuracy of the signal generator and measurement accuracy of the instrument, there may be an offset of around 0 ± 4 clocks in the display.

LEGACY: The phase difference is assumed to be zero when an external sync signal without a timing offset transmitted from a LEADER signal generator and an SDI signal are received.

SERIAL: The phase difference is zero when the external sync signal and the SDI signal are received at the times defined in the signal standard.

- Graphical Display

The vertical axis represents the V phase difference in lines. The horizontal axis represents the H phase time difference. When the circles that represent V and H overlap with each other in the center, there is no phase difference.

The circles are normally displayed in white, but they will be displayed in green under the following circumstances.

Horizontal: When the circle is within ±3 clocks of the center.

Vertical: When the circle is within ±0 clocks of the center.

When the signal is behind the reference signal, the circle is displayed on the Delay (+) side. When the signal is ahead of the reference signal, the circle is displayed on the Advance (-) side. For both the V and H axes, differences of up to approximately +1/2 frames from the center are displayed on the Delay axis and differences of up to approximately -1/2 frames from the center are displayed on the Advance axis. See the following table for details.

When the phase difference between an SDI signal and an external sync signal is being measured, the H axis phase difference may vary within a range of ±1 clock in cases such as when the signal is switched. When the phase difference between SDI signals is being measured, the H difference may vary within a range of ±2 clock in cases such as when the signal is switched.

16. Status Display

Table 16-9 Delay and Advance axis display ranges (3G-A, 3G-B, HD, SD)

3G-A, 3G-B, HD, SD Format		Displayed on the Advance Axis
		Displayed on the Delay Axis
		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]
3G-A	1080/59.94P	-562	-14.822	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/60P	-562	-14.808	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/50P	-532	-17.771	to	0	0	to	562	0
3G-B	1080/59.94P	-1124	-14.822	to	0	0	to	1125	0
	1080/60P	-1124	-14.808	to	0	0	to	1125	0
	1080/50P	-1124	-17.771	to	0	0	to	1125	0
3G-A3G-BHD	1080/59.94I, 1080/29.97P, 1080/29.97PsF	-562	-29.645	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/60I, 1080/30P, 1080/30PsF	-562	-29.616	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/50I, 1080/25P, 1080/25PsF	-562	-35.542	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/23.98P, 1080/23.98PsF	-562	-37.060	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/24P, 1080/24PsF	-562	-37.023	to	0	0	to	562	0
	720/59.94P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	22.230
	720/60P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	22.208
	720/50P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	26.653
	720/29.97P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	44.475
	720/30P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	44.430
	720/25P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	53.319
	720/23.98P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	55.597
	720/24P	-375	0	to	0	0	to	374	55.542
SD	525/59.94I	-262	-63.518	to	0	0	to	262	0
	625/50I	-312	-63.962	to	0	0	to	312	0

Table 16-10 Delay and Advance axis display ranges (12G)

12G Sub Image Format		Displayed on the Advance Axis
					Displayed on the Delay Axis
		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]		V PHASE [Lines]	H PHASE [us]
12G	1080/59.94P	-562	-14.822	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/60P	-562	-14.808	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/50P	-532	-17.771	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/29.97P	-562	-29.645	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/30P	-562	-29.616	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/25P	-562	-35.542	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/23.98P	-562	-37.060	to	0	0	to	562	0
	1080/24P	-562	-37.023	to	0	0	to	562	0

16.7 Setting the Lip Sync Measurement (SER03)

To show the lip sync measurement screen, follow the procedure below.

By combining a Leader signal generator that supports lip syncing with this instrument, you can use the lip sync measurement screen to measure the offset between the video signal and the audio signal that occurs in the transfer route.

When an SER05 is installed, the SDI ANALYSIS becomes the SDI/IP ANALYSIS menu. Further, during an IP measurement when the signal standard is ST 2110, lip sync measurement screen cannot be displayed.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•3 AV PHASE

Figure 16-13 Lip sync measurement screen

As an example, we will show a procedure that uses the LT 4400 (the LT 4400SER01 must be installed) as the signal generator that supports lip syncing.

1. Turn the LT 4400 lip sync feature on.

SDI SETTING→LIPSYNC to turn this feature on. For details, see the LT 4400 instruction manual.

1. Send the signal generated from the LT 4400 SDI output connector to the transfer route. Apply the signal received from the transfer route to the SDI connector of this instrument. If the output audio is external audio, apply the video signal to the SDI input connector and the audio signal to the digital audio I/O connector.

2. Select the audio signal.

On the instrument's → •7 MAPPING → TARGET tab, set the audio signal to EMB AUDIO (for embedded audio) or EXT AUDIO (for digital audio I/O connector). For EXT AUDIO, EXTERNAL AUDIO on the AUDIO IN/OUT tab must be set to INPUT.

16. Status Display

1. The lip sync measurement screen is displayed.

Press STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•3 AV PHASE.

The time difference when the luminance level of the video signal (the G signal level when the input signal is RGB) exceeds the specified value or when the audio level signal exceeds the specified value is measured, and the results are displayed numerically and graphically for each channel.

The measured value is displayed in units of time and frames. If the audio signal cannot be detected, "UNLOCK" is displayed. If the audio signal cannot be measured correctly, "MISSING" is displayed. Further, when the measured value is updated, an asterisk is displayed next to the channel.

You can set the video signal measurement range, video signal luminance level, and audio signal level using F•6 AV PHASE SETUP.

16.7.1 Selecting the Measurement Range

To select the graph measurement range, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•3 AV PHASE → F•1 SCALE MAX: 50ms / 100ms / 500ms / 1.0s / 2.5s

16.7.2 Updating the Measurement Screen

To update the measurement screen, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•2

SDI ANALYSIS or SDI / IP ANALYSIS →

F•3

AV PHASE →

F•2

REFRESH

16.7.3 Setting the Measurement Range

To set the measurement range, follow the procedure below. Use the AV PHASE SETUP tab to configure these settings.

Procedure

Figure 16-14 AV PHASE SETUP tab

- AV MES TOP

Set the video signal measurement line with the top edge of the picture taken to be 0 % and the bottom edge to be 100 %.

You can also set this using LINE SELECT on the PIC menu while viewing the picture.

[See also] 13.9.3, "Setting the Lip Sync Measurement Range (SER03)"

0 - 50 - 100%

- AV MES LEFT

Set the video signal measurement range (left side) with the left edge of the picture taken to be 0 % and the right edge to be 100 %. You cannot set this to the right of the line set with AV MES RIGHT.

You can also set this using LINE SELECT on the PIC menu while viewing the picture.

[See also] 13.9.3, "Setting the Lip Sync Measurement Range (SER03)"

0 - 99%

- AV MES RIGHT

Set the video signal measurement range (right side) with the right edge of the picture taken to be 0 % and the left edge to be 100 %. You cannot set this to the left of the line set with AV MES LEFT.

You can also set this using LINE SELECT on the PIC menu while viewing the picture.

[See also] 13.9.3, "Setting the Lip Sync Measurement Range (SER03)"

0 - 99%

1. Status Display
   

Figure 16-15 Setting the measurement range (video signal)

- Video Level

Set the video signal luminance level. The time difference from the audio signal is measured when the luminance level of the measurement range specified with AV MES exceeds the level specified here.

25 - 75 - 100%

- Audio Level

Set the audio signal level. The time difference from the video signal is measured when the audio signal level exceeds the level specified here.

-30 - 0dBFS

- MES Gate

Select whether to specify the measurement range of the audio signal. Set this to ON such as when using a pattern containing multiple audio signals for a single video signal.

OFF / ON

- Gate Time

When MES Gate is set to ON, set the measurement range of the audio signal. The measurement range is "the rise time of the video signal ± the time set with Gate Time."

100 - 300 - 1500

Figure 16-16 Setting the measurement range (audio signal)

16. Status Display

- Link

When the input signal is 3G(QL) and square format, select the link for setting the measurement range.

1[A] / 2[B] / 3[C] / 4[D]

16. Status Display

16.8 Configuring the IP Screen (SER05)

16.8.1 Displaying the IP Status Screen

To view the IP status screen, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP

Figure 16-17 IP status screen

- IP Stream List

Up to 100 streams contained in the IP input signal are displayed.

By turning the function dial (F•D) to the right, you can scroll the screen to view all the streams. Also, if you press the function dial (F•D), the first stream is displayed.

Streams that are currently being received are displayed in white. Streams that were being received in the past are displayed in gray. You can clear past streams by pressing F•2 LIST CLEAR.

• No

The data number (1 to 100) is displayed.

- IP Stream

The IP stream number (1 to 4) is displayed.

- Input

The channel that the selected stream is assigned to (A to D) is displayed.

- Port

The port number (1 or 2) is displayed.

- Protocol

The protocol is displayed.

- Src. Address: Port

The source IP address and port number are displayed.

16. Status Display

- Dst. Address: Port

The destination IP address and port number are displayed.

- Info

VLAN availability and RTP payload type are displayed.

- Bitrate

The IP 1/2 bit rate is plotted in a chart. IP 1 and IP 2 are displayed in blue and green, respectively.

- SinceReset

The time that has elapsed since F•2 CHART CLEAR was pressed, the instrument was initialized, or the instrument was restarted is displayed.

• IP 1/2

"LINK UP" is displayed in green when communication is up. Otherwise, "LINK DOWN" is displayed in red.

- Bitrate

The bit rate is displayed numerically.

- FCS Error count

The number of FCS errors is displayed.

- IP CS Error count

The number of IP checksum errors is displayed.

- UDP CS Error count

The number of UDP checksum errors is displayed.

16.8.2 Configuring the IP Status Screen

- Selecting the Measurement Time

To select the chart measurement time (horizontal axis), follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•4 CHART SETUP → F•1 PERIOD: 2MIN / 10MIN / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 2HOUR / 6HOUR / 12HOUR / 24HOUR / 72HOUR 

- Clearing the Chart

To clear the chart, error counts, and SinceReset, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•4 CHART SETUP → F•2 CHART CLEAR 

- Assigning IP Signals

To assign Src. Address: Port and Dst. Address: Port of the stream selected with the function dial (F•D) to the stream selected with F•5 IP STREAM SELECT, follow the procedure below. When you press F•1 SET IP STREAM, Source Address, Destination Address, and Destination Port check boxes on the SYS menu are selected, and the values are set automatically.

[See also] 7.1.10, "Configuring the IP Signal Settings (SER05)"

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•5 IP STREAM SETUP → F•1 SET IP STREAM 

- Clearing the List

To clear the IP stream list, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•5 IP STREAM SETUP → F•2 LIST CLEAR 

16. Status Display

16.8.3 Displaying the Packet Jitter Screen

To display the packet jitter screen, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 16-18 Packet jitter screen

• IP Stream List
  The IP stream (1 to 4) data is displayed. Use F•5 IP STREAM SELECT to select the IP stream.

- Packet Arrival Interval Time

The packet arrival intervals are plotted on a chart. The maximum and minimum values within the last second are indicated in green and the average in blue.

- Current (/ sec)

The packet arrival intervals within the last second are displayed. Max, Min, and Avg indicate maximum, minimum, and average values, respectively.

- Total

The packet arrival intervals from when the measurement was started to the present are displayed. Max and Min indicate maximum and minimum values, respectively.

16.8.4 Configuring the Packet Jitter Screen

- Selecting the Measurement Time

To select the chart measurement time (horizontal axis), follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•2 PACKET JITTER → F•1 PERIOD: 2MIN / 10MIN / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 2HOUR / 6HOUR / 12HOUR / 24HOUR / 72HOUR 

- Clearing the Chart

To clear the chart and measurement values, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•2 PACKET JITTER → F•2 CHART CLEAR 

- Selecting the IP Stream

To select the IP stream to be measured, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•2 PACKET JITTER → F•5 IP STREAM
SELECT: STREAM1 / STREAM2 / STREAM3 / STREAM4 

16. Status Display

16.8.5 Displaying the PTP Status Screen

To view the PTP status screen, follow the procedure below.

The PTP status screen has two modes: delay mode and offset mode. Press F•4 MODE to switch between the two.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•2

SDI / IP ANALYSIS →

F•4

IP →

F•3

PTP

MODE = DELAY TIME

MODE = TIME OFFSET

Figure 16-19 PTP status screen

16. Status Display

- PTP Packet List

PTP packet data is displayed.

- Delay Time / Time Offset

The delay time or time difference is plotted on a chart. The maximum and minimum values within the last second are indicated in green. The measurement values for each second are displayed in blue.

• Timing
• State

The PTP lock state is indicated as "LOCK" or "UNLOCK."

- Time(UTC)

The UTC time is displayed.

- ΔT2 - T1 / ΔT4 - T3

The time for a message to be sent from the master to the slave ( ΔT2-T1 ) and the time for a message to be sent from the slave to the master ( ΔT4-T3 ) are displayed.

graph TD
    A["PTP Master"] -->|ΔT2-T1| B["T1"]
    A -->|ΔT4-T3| C["T4"]
    D["PTP Slave"] -->|T2| E["T2"]
    D -->|T3| F["T3"]
    A -->|T1| G["T1"]
    A -->|T4| H["T4"]

- Current / Max / Min

Based on the following equations, the delay time or time difference is displayed. Current indicates the measured values for each second. Max and Min indicate the maximum and minimum values within the past second, respectively.

Delay time = (ΔT2-T1) + (ΔT4-T3) / 2

Time difference = (ΔT2-T1) - (ΔT4-T3) / 2

- Packet count (/ sec)

Measured values for Sync, Follow up, Delay request, Delay response, Announce, and Management packets are displayed for each second.

16.8.6 Configuring the PTP Status Screen

- Selecting the Measurement Time

To select the chart measurement time (horizontal axis), follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•3 PTP → F•1 PERIOD: 2MIN / 10MIN / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 2HOUR / 6HOUR / 12HOUR / 24HOUR / 72HOUR 

- Clearing the Chart

To clear the chart and measurement values, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•3 PTP → F•2 CHART CLEAR 

- Selecting the Measurement Mode

To select the measurement mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•2 SDI / IP ANALYSIS → F•4 IP → F•3 PTP → F•4 MODE: DELAY TIME / TIME OFFSET 

Settings

DELAY TIME: The delay time is displayed.

TIME OFFSET: The time difference is displayed.

16.9 Displaying a List of Ancillary Data

To display a list of ancillary data, follow the procedure below.

During an IP measurement when the signal standard is ST 2110, ancillary data cannot be displayed.

Procedure

STATUS → F•3 ANC DATA VIEWER

Figure 16-20 Ancillary data screen

16.9.1 Ancillary Data Display Description

On the ancillary data screen, data is displayed as a list for each standard. If data is detected, "DETECT" is displayed in the STATUS column. If data is not detected, "MISSING" is displayed in the STATUS column.

- Data Viewing

By turning the function dial (F•D) to the right, you can scroll the screen to view all the data. You can also press F•2 PAGE UP and F•3 PAGE DOWN to move between pages. In the upper right of the screen, the "page number/total number of pages" is displayed.

If you press the function dial (F•D), the cursor returns to the first data entry.

- Selecting the Displayed Stream

When the input signal is 3G or 12G, to set the display stream to STREAM1 or STREAM2, press F•4 STREAM SELECT.

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

16. Status Display

16.9.2 Displaying a Dump of Ancillary Data

To display a dump of the data that you have selected on the ancillary data display, follow the procedure below.

By turning the function dial (F•D) to the right, you can scroll the screen to view all the data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the cursor returns to the first data entry.

Procedure

STATUS → F•3 ANC DATA VIEWER → F•1 ANC DUMP

Figure 16-21 Ancillary dump screen

16.9.3 Updating the Dump Display

When the selected data is embedded in multiple lines, the line number that is displayed on the ANC dump screen is switched at a regular interval. (However, the order in which the line numbers are switched is irregular.)

To select the dump display update time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•3 ANC DATA VIEWER → F•1 ANC DUMP → F•2 HOLD TIME: HOLD / 1s / 3s

Settings

HOLD: The screen is not updated.

1s: The screen is updated once per second.

3s: The screen is updated once every 3 seconds.

16. Status Display

16.9.4 Selecting the Dump Mode

To select the dump mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS

→

F•3

ANC DATA VIEWER →

F•1

ANC DUMP →

F•3

DUMP MODE: HEX / BINARY

Settings

HEX: Data is displayed in hexadecimal format.

BINARY: Data is displayed in binary format.

DUMP MODE = HEX

1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD				SDI A			TIME: 17:02:11
ANC DUMP
STANDARD				$299M ctrl G4
TYPE				1
STREAM				Y
LINE No.				9
		DID		1E0
		DBN		200
		DC		10B
		1		202
		2		200
		3		20F
		4		200
		5		200
		6		200
		7		200
		8		200
		9		200
		10		200
		11		200
		CHECKSUM		2FC

DUMP MODE = BINARY

1920x1080/59.94I YCbCr(422) 10bit HD			SDI A			TIME: 17:02:59
ANC DUMP
STANDARD			$299M ctrl G4
TYPE			1
STREAM			Y
LINE No.			571
	DID		0111100000
	DBN		1000000000
	DC		0100001011
1			1000000010
2			1000000000
3			1000001111
4			1000000000
5			1000000000
6			1000000000
7			1000000000
8			1000000000
9			1000000000
10			1000000000
11			1000000000
	CHECKSUM		1011111100

Figure 16-22 Selecting the dump mode

16. Status Display

16.10 Detecting Ancillary Packets

To display the ancillary packet display, follow the procedure below.

If an ancillary packet is detected, "DETECT" appears. If not, "MISSING" appears. If a dummy packet is detected, "DUMMY" appears.

During an IP measurement when the signal standard is ST 2110, ancillary data cannot be displayed.

Procedure

Figure 16-23 Ancillary packet screen

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

16.10.1 Ancillary Packet Screen Description

• AUDIO CONTROL PACKET

The embedded audio consists of 4 groups that each contain 4 channels. This makes for a total of 16 channels. A single audio control packet is embedded in each group.

[See also] 16.10.4, "Displaying Audio Control Packets"

- EDH (Error detection and handling; when the input signal is SD)

This packet is used for detecting transmission errors. When multiple devices are connected, this packet can be used to determine which device caused an error. Both full-field and active picture errors are detected.

[See also] 16.10.2, "Displaying EDH Packets"

• LTC (Linear/Longitudinal Time Code)

This is a type of timecode. One packet is embedded per frame.

• VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code)

This is a type of timecode. One packet is embedded per field.

16. Status Display

- PAYLOAD ID

This is a packet that is used to identify the video format. It conforms to SMPTE ST 352. [See also] 16.10.3, "Displaying Payload IDs"

• AFD

It is embedded in the V-ANC area.

[See also] 16.10.11, "Displaying AFD Packets"

- CLOSED CAPTION 1 to 3 (When the input signal is HD or SD)

This is a closed caption information packet that is embedded in the V-ANC area. Up to three closed caption data entries can be embedded. [See also] 16.10.6, "Displaying Closed Caption Packets"

• NET-Q (When the input signal is HD or SD)

This is an inter-stationary control signal.

[See also] 16.10.7, "Displaying the Inter-Stationary Control Signal"

- TRIGGER PACKET (When the input signal is HD or SD)

This is the data transmission trigger signal.

[See also] 16.10.8, "Displaying the Data Broadcast Trigger Signal"

- USER DATA 1 and 2 (When the input signal is HD or SD)

Up to two packets of user-defined data.

[See also] 16.10.9, "Displaying User Data"

16. Status Display

16.10.2 Displaying EDH Packets

When the input signal is SD, to display the EDH packet screen, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•4 ANC PACKET → F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS → F•1 EDH 

- Selecting the Display Format

You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display) or DUMP (dump display).

If you select DUMP, the dump display appears, and you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

16.10.3 Displaying Payload IDs

To show the payload ID display, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

STATUS → F•4 ANC PACKET → F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS → F•2 PAYLOAD ID 

Figure 16-24 Payload ID display

- Selecting the Displayed Stream

When the input signal is 3G or 12G, to set the display stream to STREAM1 or STREAM2, press F•4 STREAM SELECT.

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

16. Status Display

16.10.4 Displaying Audio Control Packets

To display audio control packets, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 16-25 Audio control packet screen

- Selecting the Display Format

You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display) or DUMP (dump display).

If you select DUMP, the dump display appears, and you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

- Selecting the Group to Display

You can use F•3 GROUP to set the group to display to a group from groups 1 to 4. A single group in the audio signal consists of four channels.

- Selecting the Displayed Stream

When the input signal is 12G or 3G-B, to set the display stream to STREAM1 or STREAM2, press F•4 STREAM SELECT.

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

16. Status Display

16.10.5 V-ANC ARIB Display

To display the V blanking ancillary packets defined in the ARIB standard, use the ARIB menu. When the input signal is 3G or 12G, this menu item is not displayed.

graph LR
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F•4 ANC PACKET"]
    B --> C["F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS"]
    C --> D["F•4 V-ANC"]
    D --> E["F•1 ARIB"]

    F1["CLOSED CAPTION"] --> G["F2 NET-Q"]
    G --> H["F3 DATA TRIGGER"]
    H --> I["F4 USER DATA 1"]
    I --> J["F5 USER DATA 2"]
    J --> K["F6 INPUT SELECT A"]
    K --> L["F7 up menu"]

    F1 --> M["F•1"]
    G --> N["F•2"]
    H --> O["F•3"]
    I --> P["F•4"]
    J --> Q["F•5"]
    K --> R["F•6"]
    L --> S["F•7"]

Figure 16-26 V-ANC ARIB menu

16.10.6 Displaying Closed Caption Packets

To display closed caption packets, follow the procedure below.

graph LR
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F•4"]
    B --> C["ANC PACKET"]
    C --> D["F•1"]
    D --> E["PACKET ANALYSIS"]
    E --> F["F•4"]
    F --> G["V-ANC"]
    G --> H["F•1"]
    H --> I["ARIB"]
    J["CLOSED CAPTION"] --> K["F•1"]

Figure 16-27 Closed caption packet screen

• Selecting the Closed Caption Type
  You can use F•2 TYPE to set the closed caption type to HD, SD, ANALOG, or CELLULAR.

- Selecting the Display Format

You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display) or DUMP (dump display).

If you select DUMP, the dump display appears, and you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•3 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

16. Status Display

- Selecting the Content to Display

When the input signal is HD(DL) or HD(QL), you can use F•5 LINK to select the displayed content.

16.10.7 Displaying the Inter-Stationary Control Signal

To display the inter-stationary control signal, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 16-28 Inter-stationary control signal screen (TEXT)

- Selecting the Display Format

You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display), DUMP (dump display), Q LOG (Q-signal log display), or FORMAT (format ID display).

If you select DUMP, the dump display appears. If you select Q LOG, the log display appears. In either case, you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

16. Status Display

DISPLAY = DUMP

DISPLAY = QLOG

DISPLAY = FORMAT

Figure 16-29 Selecting the display format

16. Status Display

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

- Clearing the Q-Signal Log

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to Q LOG, press F•2 Q LOG CLEAR to clear the Q-signal log.

- Setting the Bit Mask

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to TEXT, you can use F•3 BIT MASK to mask the Q and status signals independently.

Press F•4 ALL ON to select all the check boxes. Press F•5 ALL OFF to clear all the check boxes.

- Selecting the Content to Display

When the input signal is HD(DL) or HD(QL), you can use F•5 LINK to select the displayed content.

- Saving data to a USB memory device

If F•1 DISPLAY is set to Q LOG, you can press F•6 USB MEMORY to save the Q signal log to a USB memory device in CSV format. The procedure to follow to save data is the same as the procedure that was given for the event log. See section 16.4.5, "Saving to a USB Memory Device."

Q signal logs are saved in the NETQ folder.

16. Status Display

16.10.8 Displaying the Data Broadcast Trigger Signal

To display the data broadcast trigger signal, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Figure 16-31 Data broadcast trigger signal screen

- Selecting the Display Format

You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display) or DUMP (dump display).

If you select DUMP, the dump display appears, and you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

- Selecting the Content to Display

When the input signal is HD(DL) or HD(QL), you can use F•5 LINK to select the displayed content.

16. Status Display

16.10.9 Displaying User Data

To display user data 1 or 2, follow the procedure below.

You can use the function dial (F•D) to view all the data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

Procedure

STATUS → F•4 ANC PACKET → F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS → F•4 V-ANC → F•1 ARIB
→ F•4 USER DATA 1
→ F•5 USER DATA 2 

Figure 16-32 User data display

• Selecting the Dump Mode
  You can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).
• Selecting the Content to Display
  When the input signal is HD(DL) or HD(QL), you can use F•5 LINK to select the displayed content.

16. Status Display

16.10.10 V-ANC SMPTE Display

To display the V blanking ancillary packets defined in the SMPTE standard, use the SMPTE menu.

graph LR
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F•4"]
    B --> C["ANC PACKET"]
    C --> D["F•1"]
    D --> E["PACKET ANALYSIS"]
    E --> F["F•4"]
    F --> G["V-ANC"]
    G --> H["F•2"]
    H --> I["SMPTE"]
    J["F1"] --> K["F2"] --> L["F3"] --> M["F4"] --> N["F5"] --> O["AFD"] --> P["F6"] --> Q["F7"] --> R["up menu"]
    S["F•1"] --> T["F•2"] --> U["F•3"] --> V["F•4"] --> W["F•5"] --> X["F•6"] --> Y["F•7"]

Figure 16-33 SMPTE menu

16.10.11 Displaying AFD Packets

To display AFD packets, follow the procedure below.

graph LR
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F•4"]
    B --> C["ANC PACKET"]
    C --> D["F•1"]
    D --> E["PACKET ANALYSIS"]
    E --> F["F•4"]
    F --> G["V-ANC"]
    G --> H["F•2"]
    H --> I["SMPTE"]
    A --> J["F•5"]
    J --> K["AFD"]

Figure 16-34 AFD packet display

• Selecting the Display Format
  You can use F•1 DISPLAY to set the display format to TEXT (text display) or DUMP (dump display).
  If you select DUMP, the dump display appears, and you can use the function dial (F•D) to view the entire data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

- Selecting the Dump Mode

When F•1 DISPLAY is set to DUMP, you can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

16. Status Display

- Selecting the Displayed Stream

When the input signal is 3G-B, to set the display stream to STREAM1 or STREAM2, press F•4 STREAM SELECT.

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

16.10.12 Performing Custom Searches

To show the custom search screen, follow the procedure below.

You can use the function dial (F•D) to view all the data. If you press the function dial (F•D), the first data entry is displayed.

Procedure

STATUS → F•4 ANC PACKET → F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS → F•5 CUSTOM SEARCH

Figure 16-35 Custom search screen

• Detecting Ancillary Packets

You can search ancillary packets by using F•1 ID SET in the CUSTOM SEARCH menu.

STATUS → F•4 ANC PACKET → F•1 PACKET ANALYSIS → F•5 CUSTOM SEARCH → F•1 ID SET →

Figure 16-36 ID SET menu

16. Status Display

Set F•1 DID and F•2 SDID/DBN to display ancillary packets on the basis of the combination of the DID and SDID/DBN.

You can set F•1 DID in the range of 00 to FF. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (00).

You can set F•2 SDID/DBN in the range of 00 to FF or select “--” to not specify a value. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (--).

Press F•3 SET to clear the blue cursor assigned to F•1 DID or F•2 SDID/DBN. Use this key when you want to view all the data using the function dial (F•D).

- Selecting the Dump Mode

You can use F•2 DUMP MODE to set the dump mode to HEX (hexadecimal display) or BINARY (binary display).

- Selecting Which Signal to Display

When the input signal is not SD, you can use F•3 Y/C SELECT to set the signal to display to Y signal or C signal.

- Selecting the Displayed Stream

When the input signal is 3G or 12G, to set the display stream to STREAM1 or STREAM2, press F•4 STREAM SELECT.

- Selecting the Content to Display

You can select the displayed content using F•5 LINK when the input signal is multi link and F•5 SUB when the input signal is 12G.

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17. EYE PATTERN DISPLAY (SER02)

To display the eye pattern, press EYE.

On the eye pattern display you can use F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•1 EYE/JITTER MODE to display the eye pattern or jitter.

The SDI signal applied to SDI INPUT 1 is displayed.

If F•6 INPUT SELECT is set to a signal other than what is applied to SDI INPUT 1, the message "Not Supported" appears, and the eye pattern nor jitter is displayed. Simul mode is not supported.

Figure 17-1 Eye pattern display

Figure 17-2 Jitter display

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Displaying the Eye Pattern and Jitter Simultaneously

By using the customized layout feature (SER26) or enhanced layout feature (SER26), you can display the eye pattern and jitter simultaneously.

[See also] 6.5, "Customized Layout (SER26)," 6.6, "Enhanced Layout (SER26)"

Figure 17-3 Eye pattern and jitter display

17.1 Eye Pattern Display Description

• Automatic Measurement

On the eye pattern display, values such as the amplitude of the eye pattern and the jitter are measured automatically and displayed. Measured values are normally displayed in white, but they are displayed in yellow until they stabilize and in red if they exceed the values that you have specified in the error setup. If automatic measurements cannot be performed due to noise in the waveform or other reason, measured values are displayed as "----." If this occurs, use cursors to measure manually.

[See also] Reference 17.7, "Configuring Error Detection Settings"

The timing jitter and jitter measurement items show the values that were measured in jitter display mode. The instrument uses the phase demodulator method.

Other measurement items show the measured values calculated from the eye pattern waveform. Therefore, if the waveform degrades significantly, the difference between the automatically measured values and the cursor-measured values may become large.

• Measurement items

The items that can be automatically measured are shown below.

Table 17-1 Measurement items

Symbol	Display	Description
a	Amp	Eye-pattern amplitude
b	Tr	Rise time (time from 20% to 80% of amplitude)
c	Tf	Fall time (time from 80% to 20% of amplitude, figure omitted)
d	T. J	Timing Jitter
e	JIT	Jitter (jitter value when the currently selected filter is applied)
f	Or	Overshoot of the rising edge
g	Of	Overshoot of the falling edge

Figure 17-4 Explanation of measurement items

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Unit interval

This unit uses unit intervals (UI) as jitter measurement units.

One cycle of the eye pattern is 1 UI. The time that corresponds to 1 UI varies depending on the input signal, as shown below.

Table 17-2 Time that corresponds to 1 UI

Input Signal	Bit Rate	Time That Corresponds to 1 UI
3G	2.970/1.001 Gbps	337.0 ps
	2.970 Gbps	336.7 ps
HD	1.485/1.001 Gbps	674.1 ps
	1.485 Gbps	673.4 ps
SD	270 Mbps	3.7 ns

Figure 17-5 Unit interval

17.2 Jitter Display Description

- Measurement

In the jitter display mode, the jitter component is extracted from the input signal and plotted on a time graph. The time (horizontal) axis can be displayed in different ways depending on the data interval of the lines, fields, or frames, which are being transmitted in the SDI signal.

• Automatic Measurement

Timing jitter (T.J) and jitter (JIT) are automatically measured and displayed on the jitter display screen. The measurement range is 0.00 to 9.60 UI.

SMPTE defines two methods of measuring jitter. One method uses an eye pattern, and the other method uses a phase demodulator.

The eye pattern method has disadvantages not only that measurements are difficult when the eye is not open but that measurements are prone to errors because the distinction between waveform distortion (such as noise and sags) and jitter is difficult.

In contrast, the phase demodulator method makes jitter measurements with small errors possible even when the eye pattern is closed and even when the amount of jitter is 1 UI or more.

The unit use the phase demodulator method.

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

Measured values are normally displayed in white, but they are displayed in red if they exceed the values that you have specified in the error setup. If 10.00 UI is exceeded, "OVER" is displayed.

[See also] Reference 17.7, "Configuring Error Detection Settings"

17.3 Setting the Waveform Display Position

Use the V POS and H POS knobs to adjust the display position of the waveform.

On the multi display, these are valid when you press F•7 MULTI EYE on the MULTI menu.

Figure 17-6 V POS and H POS knobs

• V POS Knob

Adjusts the vertical position of the waveform.

Pressing the knob returns the waveform to its default position.

• H POS Knob

Adjusts the horizontal position of the waveform.

Pressing the knob returns the waveform to its default position.

17.4 Switching between Eye Pattern and Jitter

To switch between eye pattern and jitter, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE → F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•1 EYE/JITTER: EYE / JITTER

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.5 Setting the Intensity

Use F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•3 INTENSITY on the EYE menu to set the intensity. You can configure these settings separately for the eye pattern and jitter.

graph LR
    A["EYE"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG"] --> D["F•3"]
    D --> E["INTENSITY"]
    F["F1"] --> G["EYE INTENSITY θ"]
    G --> H["F2"]
    H --> I["F3"]
    I --> J["EYE SCALE INTENSITY 4"]
    J --> K["F4"]
    K --> L["F5"]
    L --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["INPUT SELECT A"]
    N --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["up menu"]
    Q["F·1"] --> R["F·2"]
    R --> S["F·3"]
    S --> T["F·4"]
    T --> U["F·5"]
    U --> V["F·6"]
    V --> W["F·7"]

Figure 17-7 INTENSITY menu

17.5.1 Adjusting the Waveform Intensity

To adjust the intensity of the eye pattern and jitter, follow the procedure below. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (0).

17.5.2 Adjusting the Scale Intensity

To adjust the scale intensity, follow the procedure below.

Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (4).

Procedure

|EYE |→ |F•1 | INTEN/SCALE → |F•3 | SCALE INTEN: -8 - 4 - 7

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.6 Selecting the Display Colors

Use F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•4 COLOR on the EYE menu to set the display colors. You can configure these settings separately for the eye pattern and jitter.

graph LR
    A["EYE"] --> B["F•1"]
    B --> C["EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG"] --> D["F•4"]
    D --> E["COLOR"]
    subgraph F1
        F1_1["EYE COLOR WHITE"] --> F2
        F2 --> F3["EYE SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    end
    subgraph F2
        F2_1 --> F3
        F3 --> F4
        F4 --> F5
        F5 --> F6
        F6 --> F7
        F7 --> F7A["INPUT SELECT A"]
        F7A --> F7B["up menu"]
    end
    subgraph F3_1
        F3_1 --> F4_1
        F4_1 --> F5_1
        F5_1 --> F6_1
        F6_1 --> F7_1
        F7_1 --> F7B
    end

Figure 17-8 COLOR menu

17.6.1 Selecting the Waveform Color

To select the color of the eye-pattern and jitter, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

17.6.2 Selecting the Scale Color

To select the scale color, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.7 Configuring Error Detection Settings

Use F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•4 ERROR SETUP on the EYE menu to set error detection.

When error detection is set to ON, the following actions are performed when an error occurs.

• Displays errors in the event log of the status display
• Displays "ERROR" in the upper right of the display.
  • Transmits a signal from the alarm output remote terminal

- Displays measured values on the eye pattern display and jitter display in red

[See also] Section 16.4.1, "Event Log Screen Description"

17.7.1 Configuring 12G Error Settings

Use the 12G-SDI ERROR SETUP tab to configure error detection settings for 12G signals.

You can set the threshold values when you set the error detection to ON. Measured values given in SMPTE ST 2082-1 are used as 100 %.

Figure 17-9 12G-SDI ERROR SETUP tab

A configuration example showing threshold values that correspond to SMPTE ST 2082-1 is given below.

Table 17-3 12G-SDI ERROR SETUP configuration example

Parameter		Setting Example	Corresponding Value
Amplitude Error	Upper	110%	880 mV
	Lower	90%	720 mV
Risetime Error	Max	100%	45.0 ps
Falltime Error	Max	100%	45.0 ps
Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)	Max	100%	18 ps
Timing Jitter Error	Max	100%	8.00 UI (672.0 ps)
Jitter Error	Max	100%	0.30 UI (25.2 ps)
Overshoot Rising Error	Max	100%	10.0%
Overshoot Falling Error	Max	100%	10.0%

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Amplitude Error

Turns the eye pattern's amplitude error detection on and off.

You cannot set Lower to a value that is greater than Upper, even if the value is within the selectable range.

Upper:	80 - 140% (640 - 1120 mV)
Lower:	40 - 100% (320 - 800 mV)

- Risetime Error

Turns the eye pattern's rise time (the time for the signal to rise from 20 to 80 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (18.0 - 63.0 ps)

- Falltime Error

Turns the eye pattern's fall time (the time for the signal to fall from 80 to 20 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (18.0 - 63.0 ps)

- Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)

Turns the eye pattern's time difference (between the rise and fall times) error detection on and off. When the measured values exceed the specified value, Tr and Tf are displayed in red.

Max:	40 - 140% (7 - 25 ps)

- Timing Jitter Error

Turns the eye pattern and jitter's timing jitter error detection on and off.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.80 - 16.00 UI, 67.2 - 1344.0 ps)

- Jitter Error

Turns jitter error detection for eye pattern and jitter.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.03 - 0.60 UI, 2.5 - 50.4 ps)

- Overshoot Rising Error

Turns the rising edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

- Overshoot Falling Error

Turns the falling edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.7.2 Configuring 3G Error Settings

Use the 3G-SDI ERROR SETUP tab to configure error detection settings for 3G signals.

You can set the threshold values when you set the error detection to ON. Measured values given in SMPTE ST 424 are used as 100 %.

Figure 17-10 3G-SDI ERROR SETUP tab

A configuration example showing threshold values that correspond to SMPTE ST 424 is given below.

Table 17-4 3G-SDI ERROR SETUP configuration example

Parameter		Setting Example	Corresponding Value
Amplitude Error	Upper	110%	880 mV
	Lower	90%	720 mV
Risetime Error	Max	100%	135.0 ps
Falltime Error	Max	100%	135.0 ps
Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)	Max	100%	50 ps
Timing Jitter Error	Max	100%	2.00 UI (674.0 ps)
Jitter Error	Max	100%	0.30 UI (101.2 ps)
Overshoot Rising Error	Max	100%	10.0%
Overshoot Falling Error	Max	100%	10.0%

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Amplitude Error

Turns the eye pattern's amplitude error detection on and off.

You cannot set Lower to a value that is greater than Upper, even if the value is within the selectable range.

Upper:	80 - 140% (640 - 1120 mV)
Lower:	40 - 100% (320 - 800 mV)

- Risetime Error

Turns the eye pattern's rise time (the time for the signal to rise from 20 to 80 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (54.0 - 189.0 ps)

- Falltime Error

Turns the eye pattern's fall time (the time for the signal to fall from 80 to 20 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (54.0 - 189.0 ps)

- Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)

Turns the eye pattern's time difference (between the rise and fall times) error detection on and off. When the measured values exceed the specified value, Tr and Tf are displayed in red.

Max:	40 - 140% (20 - 70 ps)

- Timing Jitter Error

Turns the eye pattern and jitter's timing jitter error detection on and off.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.20 - 4.00 UI, 67.4 - 1348.0 ps)

- Jitter Error

Turns jitter error detection for eye pattern and jitter.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.03 - 0.60 UI, 10.1 - 202.5 ps)

- Overshoot Rising Error

Turns the rising edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

- Overshoot Falling Error

Turns the falling edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.7.3 Configuring HD Error Settings

Use the HD-SDI ERROR SETUP tab to configure error detection settings for HD signals.

You can set the threshold values when you set the error detection to ON. Measured values given in SMPTE ST 292 are used as 100 %.

Figure 17-11 HD-SDI ERROR SETUP tab

A configuration example showing threshold values that correspond to SMPTE ST 292 is given below.

Table 17-5 HD-SDI ERROR SETUP configuration example

Parameter		Setting Example	Corresponding Value
Amplitude Error	Upper	110%	880 mV
	Lower	90%	720 mV
Risetime Error	Max	100%	270.0 ps
Falltime Error	Max	100%	270.0 ps
Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)	Max	100%	100 ps
Timing Jitter Error	Max	100%	1.00 UI (674.0 ps)
Jitter Error	Max	100%	0.20 UI (135.0 ps)
Overshoot Rising Error	Max	100%	10.0%
Overshoot Falling Error	Max	100%	10.0%

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Amplitude Error

Turns the eye pattern's amplitude error detection on and off.

You cannot set Lower to a value that is greater than Upper, even if the value is within the selectable range.

Upper:	80 - 140% (640 - 1120 mV)
Lower:	40 - 100% (320 - 800 mV)

- Risetime Error

Turns the eye pattern's rise time (the time for the signal to rise from 20 to 80 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (108.0 - 378.0 ps)

- Falltime Error

Turns the eye pattern's fall time (the time for the signal to fall from 80 to 20 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (108.0 - 378.0 ps)

- Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)

Turns the eye pattern's time difference (between the rise and fall times) error detection on and off. When the measured values exceed the specified value, Tr and Tf are displayed in red.

Max:	40 - 140% (40 - 140 ps)

- Timing Jitter Error

Turns the eye pattern and jitter's timing jitter error detection on and off.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.10 - 2.00 UI, 67.4 - 1348.0 ps)

- Jitter Error

Turns jitter error detection for eye pattern and jitter.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.02 - 0.40 UI, 13.5 - 270.0 ps)

- Overshoot Rising Error

Turns the rising edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

- Overshoot Falling Error

Turns the falling edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.7.4 Configuring SD Error Settings

Use the SD-SDI ERROR SETUP tab to configure error detection settings for SD signals.

You can set the threshold values when you set the error detection to ON. Measured values given in SMPTE ST 259 are used as 100 %.

Figure 17-12 SD-SDI ERROR SETUP tab

A configuration example showing threshold values that correspond to SMPTE ST 259 is given below.

Table 17-6 SD-SDI ERROR SETUP configuration example

Parameter		Setting Example	Corresponding Value
Amplitude Error	Upper	110%	880 mV
	Lower	90%	720 mV
Risetime Error	Max	100%	1.50 ns
Falltime Error	Max	100%	1.50 ns
Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)	Max	100%	0.50 ns
Timing Jitter Error	Max	100%	0.20 UI (0.74 ns)
Jitter Error	Max	100%	0.20 UI (0.74 ns)
Overshoot Rising Error	Max	100%	10.0%
Overshoot Falling Error	Max	100%	10.0%

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

- Amplitude Error

Turns the eye pattern's amplitude error detection on and off.

You cannot set Lower to a value that is greater than Upper, even if the value is within the selectable range.

Upper:	80 - 140% (640 - 1120 mV)
Lower:	40 - 100% (320 - 800 mV)

- Risetime Error

Turns the eye pattern's rise time (the time for the signal to rise from 20 to 80 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (0.60 - 2.10 ns)

- Falltime Error

Turns the eye pattern's fall time (the time for the signal to fall from 80 to 20 % of its amplitude) error detection on and off.

Max:	40 - 140% (0.60 - 2.10 ns)

- Deltatime Error(Tr-Tf)

Turns the eye pattern's time difference (between the rise and fall times) error detection on and off. When the measured values exceed the specified value, Tr and Tf are displayed in red.

Max:	40 - 140% (0.20 - 0.70 ns)

- Timing Jitter Error

Turns the eye pattern and jitter's timing jitter error detection on and off.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.02 - 0.40 UI, 0.07 - 1.48 ns)

- Jitter Error

Turns jitter error detection for eye pattern and jitter.

Max:	10 - 200% (0.02 - 0.40 UI, 0.07 - 1.48 ns)

- Overshoot Rising Error

Turns the rising edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

- Overshoot Falling Error

Turns the falling edge overshoot error detection on and off.

Max:	0 - 100 - 200% (0.0 - 20.0%)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8 Configuring Eye Pattern Display Settings

To configure eye pattern display settings, press F•2 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP on the EYE menu. This menu appears when F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•1 EYE/JITTER MODE is set to EYE.

graph LR
    A["EYE"] --> B["F•2"]
    B --> C["GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    C --> F["F3"]
    C --> G["F4"]
    C --> H["F5"]
    C --> I["F6"]
    C --> J["F7"]
    K["UPMenu"] --> L["F•1"]
    K --> M["F•2"]
    K --> N["F•3"]
    K --> O["F•4"]
    K --> P["F•5"]
    K --> Q["F•6"]
    K --> R["F•7"]

Figure 17-13 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP menu

17.8.1 Adjusting the Gain

To adjust the eye-pattern gain, follow the procedure below.

Procedure
EYE → F•2	GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → F•1 GAIN VARIABLE: CAL / VARIABLE
Settings
CAL:	The eye pattern is shown without gain.
VARIABLE:	The eye pattern is shown with the specified gain (×0.50 to ×2.00). The gain value appears in the upper right of the screen.Turn the function dial (F•D) to adjust the gain. Press the function dial (F•D) to return the setting to its default value (1.00).

17.8.2 Selecting the Filter

To select the filter that is used during jitter measurement, follow the procedure below. The selected filter is indicated at the bottom of the display.

If you change this setting, the filter that you selected for jitter display also changes.

[See also] 17.9.2, "Selecting the Filter"

Procedure

EYE → F•2 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → F•3 FILTER: 100kHz / 1kHz / 100Hz / 10Hz / TIMING / ALIGNMENT

Settings
100kHz:	Jitter at 100 kHz or higher is measured.
1kHz:	Jitter at 1 kHz or higher is measured.
100Hz:	Jitter at 100 Hz or higher is measured.
10Hz:	Jitter at 10 Hz or higher is measured.
TIMING:	Timing jitter is measured. Jitter at 10 Hz or higher is measured.
ALIGNMENT:	Alignment jitter is measured. When the input signal is not SD, jitter at 100 kHz and higher is measured. When the input signal is SD, jitter at 1 kHz and higher is measured.

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.3 Selecting the Sweep Time

To select the eye pattern sweep time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE → F•2	GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → F•2	SWEEP: 2UI / 4UI / 16UI
Settings
2UI:	Two cycles of the eye pattern are shown.
4UI:	Four cycles of the eye pattern are shown.
16UI:	Sixteen cycles of the eye pattern are shown.

SWEEP = 2UI

SWEEP = 16UI

Figure 17-14 Selecting the sweep time

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.4 Turning the Peak Hold On and Off

To configure the peak hold settings, press F•3 PEAK HOLD on the EYE menu. Measurement is possible regardless of whether F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•2 EYE/JITTER is set to EYE or JITTER.

graph LR
    A["EYE"] --> B["F•3"]
    B --> C["PEAK HOLD"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["PEAK HOLD ON"]
    E --> F["F2"]
    F --> G["CLEAR"]
    G --> H["F3"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["F5"]
    J --> K["F6"]
    K --> L["INPUT SELECT A"]
    L --> M["F7"]
    M --> N["up menu"]
    N --> O["F•7"]
    O --> P["F•6"]
    P --> Q["F•5"]
    Q --> R["F•4"]
    R --> S["F•3"]
    S --> T["F•2"]
    T --> U["F•1"]

Figure 17-15 PEAK HOLD menu

To measure the peak values of the timing jitter (T.J) and the jitter (JIT), follow the procedure below.

When you set F•1 PEAK HOLD to ON, the peak values T.J.PEAK and J.PEAK are displayed in the lower part of the screen next to "PEAK." The peak values are retained until you press F•2 CLEAR. If a peak value exceeds 10.00UI, "OVER" is displayed.

Procedure

EYE → F•3 PEAK HOLD → F•1 PEAK HOLD: ON / OFF

PEAK HOLD = ON

Figure 17-16 Peak hold display

17.8.5 Clearing the Peak Hold

When F•1 PEAK HOLD is set to ON, to clear the peak hold, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE → F•3 PEAK HOLD → F•2 CLEAR

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.6 Turning Cursors On and Off

To configure the cursor settings, press F•4 CURSOR on the EYE menu.

Figure 17-17 CURSOR menu

To turn cursors on and off, follow the procedure shown below.

When the cursors are turned on, the REF cursors are displayed in yellow (X) and light blue (Y), and the DELTA cursors are displayed in purple (X) and green (Y). The values of DELTA-REF appear as measured values in the upper part of the screen.

Procedure

EYE → F•4 CURSOR → F•1 CURSOR: ON / OFF

CURSOR = ON

Figure 17-18 Cursor display

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.7 Selecting the Cursor

The X-axis and Y-axis cursors are displayed at the same time, but you can only use the function dial (F•D) to move one set of cursors at a time. To select which cursors you want to move, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•2

XY SEL: X / Y / Tr,Tf

If you select Tr,Tf, you can measure the rise time (Tr) and fall time (Tf). Follow the procedure below.

1. Set F•2 XY SEL to Tr,Tf.

This selects the Y-axis cursors.

1. Use the function dial (F•D) to align the cursors with the amplitude of the eye pattern. This is the 100% amplitude position.

Figure 17-19 Tr,Tf measurement (1)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

3. Press F•5 REF SET.

The Y-axis cursors move to the 20 % and 80 % positions of the amplitude, and then F•2 XY SEL is automatically set to X.

Figure 17-20 Tr,Tf measurement (2)

1. Align the X-axis cursors with the intersections of the Y-axis cursors and the eye pattern. Align with the rising edge of the pattern to measure Tr and the falling edge to measure Tf. The measured value is displayed next to X in the upper part of the screen.

Figure 17-21 Tr, Tf measurement 3 (example of Tr)

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.8 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SEL is set to X, to select the X-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•3

X UNIT: sec / Hz / UIp-p

Settings

sec:	The measurement unit is seconds.
Hz:	The measurement unit is frequency, with the length of one period set to the distance between the two cursors.
UIp-p:	The measurement unit is UIp-p, with one UIp-p set to one cycle of the eye pattern.

17.8.9 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SEL is set to Y, to select the Y-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•3

Y UNIT: / %

Settings

V: The measurement unit is volts.
%:	The amplitude will be measured as a percentage of the amplitude at the time when you pressed F•5 REF SET.

17.8.10 Moving the Cursors

To move a cursor, follow the procedure shown below to select a cursor. Then, move the cursor by turning the function dial (F•D). Triangles appear on both ends of the selected cursor.

You can also select a cursor by pressing the function dial (F•D). Each time you press the function dial (F•D), the selected cursor switches from REF, to DELTA, to TRACK, and then back to REF.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•4

FD VALUE: REF / DELTA / TRACK

Settings

REF: The REF cursor (yellow or light blue) is selected.
DELTA:	The DELTA cursor (purple or green) is selected.
TRACK:	The REF cursor and DELTA cursor are both selected.

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.8.11 Resetting Cursors

To reset the cursor positions, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

17.8.12 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the eye pattern display mode, follow the procedure below.

If the eye pattern and jitter are displayed simultaneously, the setting specified here also applies to the jitter.

Procedure

Settings

RUN: The input signal is automatically updated and displayed.

STOP: The input signal is displayed statically. This is convenient for cursor measurement.

Even if STOP is selected, if you change the measurement conditions, such as switching to jitter, the mode switches to RUN.

17.8.13 Selecting the 2-Screen Display Mode

To select the eye pattern's 2-screen display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

Settings

SINGLE: Displays the eye pattern of the selected filter in a single screen

DUAL: Displays the timing filter and eye pattern of the selected filter in two screens

17.9 Configuring the Jitter Display Settings

To configure the jitter display settings, press F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG on the EYE menu. This menu appears when F•1 EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG → F•1 EYE/JITTER MODE is set to JITTER.

F1	F2	GAIN MAG X8	F3	FILTER 100kHz	F4	SWEEP 1H	F5	F6	INPUT SELECT A	F7	up menu
	F·1		F·2		F·3		F·4		F·5		F·6

Figure 17-22 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP menu

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.9.1 Selecting the Magnification

To select the jitter display magnification, follow the procedure below.

Procedure
→ 2 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → 2 GAIN MAG : X1 / X2 / X8 (for formats other than 12G) : X1 / X2 / X4 / X16 (for 12G)

17.9.2 Selecting the Filter

To select the filter that is used during jitter measurement, follow the procedure below. The selected filter is indicated at the bottom of the display.

If you change this setting, the filter that you selected for the eye pattern display also changes.

[See also] 17.8.2, "Selecting the Filter"

Procedure

EYE → F•2 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → F•3 FILTER: 100kHz / 1kHz / 100Hz / 10Hz / TIMING / ALIGNMENT

17.9.3 Selecting the Sweep Time

To select the sweep time, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE → F•2 GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP → F•4 SWEEP: 1H / 2H / 1V / 2V

Settings

1H: The jitter from a period of one line is shown.
2H: The jitter from a period of two lines is shown.
1V: When the input signal is interlace or segmented frame, the jitter from a period of one field is shown. When the input signal is progressive, the jitter from a period of one frame is shown.
2V: When the input signal is interlace or segmented frame, the jitter from a period of one frame is shown. When the input signal is progressive, the jitter from a period of two frames is shown.
This option cannot be selected when the input signal is progressive except for 60/59.94/50P of HD(DL). 

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.9.4 Turning the Peak Hold On and Off

To configure the peak hold settings, press F•3 PEAK HOLD on the EYE menu.

graph LR
    A["EYE"] --> B["F•3"]
    B --> C["PEAK HOLD"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["PEAK HOLD ON"]
    E --> F["F2"]
    F --> G["CLEAR"]
    G --> H["F3"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["F5"]
    J --> K["F6"]
    K --> L["INPUT SELECT A"]
    L --> M["F7"]
    M --> N["up menu"]
    N --> O["F•7"]
    O --> P["F•6"]
    P --> Q["F•5"]
    Q --> R["F•4"]
    R --> S["F•3"]
    S --> T["F•2"]
    T --> U["F•1"]

Figure 17-23 PEAK HOLD menu

To measure the peak values of the timing jitter (T.J) and the jitter (JIT), follow the procedure below.

When you set F•1 PEAK HOLD to ON, the peak values T.J.PEAK and J.PEAK are displayed in the lower part of the screen next to "PEAK." The peak values are retained until you press F•2 CLEAR. If a peak value exceeds 10.00UI, "OVER" is displayed.

Procedure

PEAK HOLD = ON

Figure 17-24 Peak hold display

17.9.5 Clearing the Peak Hold

When F•1 PEAK HOLD is set to ON, to clear the peak hold, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.9.6 Turning Cursors On and Off

To configure the cursor settings, press F•4 CURSOR on the EYE menu.

Figure 17-25 CURSOR menu

To turn cursors on and off, follow the procedure shown below.

When the cursors are turned on, the REF cursors are displayed in yellow (X) and light blue (Y), and the DELTA cursors are displayed in purple (X) and green (Y). The values of DELTA-REF appear as measured values in the upper part of the screen.

Procedure

CURSOR = ON

Figure 17-26 Cursor display

17.9.7 Selecting the Cursor

The X-axis and Y-axis cursors are displayed at the same time, but you can only use the function dial (F•D) to move one set of cursors at a time. To select which cursors you want to move, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.9.8 Selecting the X-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SEL is set to X, to select the X-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR

→

F•3

X UNIT: sec / Hz

Settings

sec:	The measurement unit is seconds.
Hz:	The measurement unit is frequency, with the length of one period set to the distance between the two cursors.

17.9.9 Selecting the Y-Axis Measurement Unit

When F•2 XY SEL is set to Y, to select the Y-axis cursor measurement unit, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•3

Y UNIT: sec / UIp-p

Settings

sec: The measurement unit is seconds.
UIp-p:	The measurement unit is UIp-p, with one UIp-p set to one cycle of the eye pattern.

17.9.10 Moving the Cursors

To move a cursor, follow the procedure shown below to select a cursor. Then, move the cursor by turning the function dial (F•D). Triangles appear on both ends of the selected cursor.

You can also select a cursor by pressing the function dial (F•D). Each time you press the function dial (F•D), the selected cursor switches from REF, to DELTA, to TRACK, and then back to REF.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•4

FD VAR: REF / DELTA / TRACK

Settings

REF:	The REF cursor (yellow or light blue) is selected.
DELTA:	The DELTA cursor (purple or green) is selected.
TRACK:	The REF cursor and DELTA cursor are both selected.

17. Eye Pattern Display (SER02)

17.9.11 Resetting Cursors

To reset the cursor positions, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•4

CURSOR →

F•6

CURSOR RESET

17.9.12 Selecting the Display Mode

To select the jitter display mode, follow the procedure below.

If the eye pattern and jitter are displayed simultaneously, the setting specified here also applies to the eye pattern.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•5

TRIGGER: RUN / STOP

Settings

RUN:	The input signal is automatically updated and displayed.
STOP:	The input signal is displayed statically. This is convenient for cursor measurement.Even if STOP is selected, if you change the measurement conditions, such as switching to eye pattern, the mode switches to RUN.

17.9.13 Selecting the 2-Screen Display Mode

To select the jitter's 2-screen display mode, follow the procedure below.

Procedure

EYE

→

F•7

DISPLAY MODE: SINGLE / DUAL

Settings

SINGLE:	Displays the jitter waveform of the selected filter in a single screen
DUAL:	Displays the timing jitter and the jitter waveform of the selected filter in two screens

18. Remote Control

18. REMOTE CONTROL

You can use the remote connector on the rear panel to load presets, transmit alarm signals, and perform other operations. Use the supplied 15-pin D-sub connector to control the instrument.

- Remote Connector Diagram

The remote connector diagram as viewed from the rear panel is shown below.

Figure 18-1 Remote connector (female, inch screws)

- Configuring the instrument

To configure the remote control connector, use the SYS menu. See section 7.2.8, "Setting the Remote Connector."

To display tallies through the remote connector, an SER27 must be installed and Tally Control Select must be set to Remote.

Figure 18-2 REMOTE tab

Each mode on the REMOTE tab is described below. Depending on the selected mode, the items that can be controlled vary as follows.

Table 18-1 Mode

	Bit	Binary	Command	Tally
Load presets	P	Y	Y	N
Switch the display channel	Y	Y	Y	N
Alarm output	Y	Y	Y	Y
Tally display (SER27)	N	N	P	Y
Loudness control (SER03)	Y	Y	N	N

(Y: supported; P: partially supported N: not supported)

18.1 Bit Mode

This section describes the control method when Mode on the SYS menu is set to Bit.

- Pinout

Table 18-2 Pinout

Pin No.	Name	I/O (*1)	Description
1	OPEN	-	Open (*2)
2	/P1	I	Loads preset 1
3	/P2	I	Loads preset 2
4	/P3	I	Loads preset 3
5	/P4	I	Loads preset 4
6	/P5	I	Loads preset 5
7	/P6	I	Loads preset 6
8	/P7	I	Loads preset 7 / clears loudness measurement (SER03) (*3)
9	/P8	I	Loads preset 8 / starts/stops the loudness measurement (SER03) (*3)
10	/ACH	I	Selects Ach / Tally1 (*4)
11	/BCH	I	Selects Bch / Tally2 (*4)
12	/CCH	I	Selects Cch / Tally3 (*4)
13	/DCH	I	Selects Dch / Tally4 (*4)
14	ALARM	O	Alarm output
15	GND	-	Ground

*1 Is (inputs) are all pulled up to +3.3 V but can also receive +5 V.
*2 Do not connect anything.
*3 On the REMOTE tab of the SYS menu, when Select is set to Recall, preset recalling 7/8 is enabled. When it is set to Recall&Loudness, loudness measurement control is enabled.
*4 On the REMOTE tab of the SYS menu, when Select is set to Recall, the pins are for Input Select A to Dch. When Select is set to Recall&Tally, the pins are for Tally 1 to 4.

- Control

The input connectors respond to active-low signals. Do not apply negative voltages or voltages that exceed +5 V. The active-low signal must be stable for at least 350 ms. After that, wait at least 1 second before applying the next signal.

Figure 18-3 Control timing 1

After a setting is made, it may take about 3 seconds for the operation to finish. If you configure subsequent settings before the initial operation finishes, only the last setting will take effect. All settings in between will be discarded. (In the following example, control 2 will be discarded.)

Figure 18-4 Control timing 2

- Recalling a Preset

You can use pins 2 to 9 of the remote connector to load presets.

In Bit mode, presets 1 to 8 can be recalled out of presets 1 to 60. Set the number to recall to low level.

- Switching Display Channels

You can use pins 10 to 13 of the remote connector to switch the display channel.

Channels that you set to low will be turned on, and channels that you set to high will be turned off. However, in single input mode, you cannot turn multiple channels on.

- Alarm output

An alarm is transmitted from pin 14 of the remote connector in the following situations. The alarm output applies to all channels (A to D). However, when measuring 3G-B-DS or 3G(DL)-4K, alarms are output only for the currently displayed channels.

18. Remote Control

• When a format other than that specified on the SDI IN SETUP2 tab of the SYS menu is received
• When an error occurs in the item that you have set to ON using F•5 STATUS SETUP on the STATUS menu
• When a fan error occurs
• When the internal temperature rises to an abnormal level (When Temperature of F•3 SYSTEM INFO on the SYS menu turns yellow)

- Loudness control measurement (SER03)

To control loudness measurement, set Select to Recall&Loudness, and use pins 8 and 9 of the remote connector. See section 15.9.6, "Configuring Loudness Settings"

Table 18-3 Loudness control

	9p (/P8)	8p (/P7)
Clears loudness measurement	-	L
Starts loudness measurement	L	-
Stops loudness measurement	H	-

18.2 Binary Mode

This section describes the control method when Mode on the SYS menu is set to Binary.

• Pinout
• Control
• Switching Display Channels
• Alarm output
• Loudness control measurement (SER03)

These are the same as Bit mode. See section 18.1, "Bit Mode."

- Recalling a Preset

You can use pins 2 to 7 of the remote connector to load presets.

Table 18-4 Loading presets

PresetNo.	7p	6p	5p	4p	3p	2p
	/P6	/P5	/P4	/P3	/P2	/P1
1	H	H	H	H	H	L
2	H	H	H	H	L	H
3	H	H	H	H	L	L
4	H	H	H	L	H	H
5	H	H	H	L	H	L
6	H	H	H	L	L	H
7	H	H	H	L	L	L
8	H	H	L	H	H	H
9	H	H	L	H	H	L
10	H	H	L	H	L	H
11	H	H	L	H	L	L
12	H	H	L	L	H	H
13	H	H	L	L	H	L
14	H	H	L	L	L	H
15	H	H	L	L	L	L
16	H	L	H	H	H	H
17	H	L	H	H	H	L
18	H	L	H	H	L	H
19	H	L	H	H	L	L
20	H	L	H	L	H	H
21	H	L	H	L	H	L
22	H	L	H	L	L	H
23	H	L	H	L	L	L
24	H	L	L	H	H	H
25	H	L	L	H	H	L
26	H	L	L	H	L	H
27	H	L	L	H	L	L
28	H	L	L	L	H	H
29	H	L	L	L	H	L

1. Remote Control

PresetNo.	7p	6p	5p	4p	3p	2p
	/P6	/P5	/P4	/P3	/P2	/P1
30	H	L	L	L	L	H
31	H	L	L	L	L	L
32	L	H	H	H	H	H
33	L	H	H	H	H	L
34	L	H	H	H	L	H
35	L	H	H	H	L	L
36	L	H	H	L	H	H
37	L	H	H	L	H	L
38	L	H	H	L	L	H
39	L	H	H	L	L	L
40	L	H	L	H	H	H
41	L	H	L	H	H	L
42	L	H	L	H	L	H
43	L	H	L	H	L	L
44	L	H	L	L	H	H
45	L	H	L	L	H	L
46	L	H	L	L	L	H
47	L	H	L	L	L	L
48	L	L	H	H	H	H
49	L	L	H	H	H	L
50	L	L	H	H	L	H
51	L	L	H	H	L	L
52	L	L	H	L	H	H
53	L	L	H	L	H	L
54	L	L	H	L	L	H
55	L	L	H	L	L	L
56	L	L	L	H	H	H
57	L	L	L	H	H	L
58	L	L	L	H	L	H
59	L	L	L	H	L	L
60	L	L	L	L	H	H

18.3 Command Mode

This section describes the control method when Mode on the SYS menu is set to Command.

- Pinout

Table 18-5 Pinout

Pin No.	Name	I/O (*1)	Description
1	OPEN	-	Open (*2)
2	/F1	I	Function 1
3	/F2	I	Function 2
4	/F3	I	Function 3
5	/F4	I	Function 4
6	/F5	I	Function 5
7	/F6	I	Function 6
8	/F7	I	Function 7
9	/F8	I	Function 8
10	CMD1	I	Command 1
11	CMD2	I	Command 2
12	CMD3	I	Command 3
13	/STR	I	Strobe
14	ALARM	O	Alarm output
15	GND	-	Ground

*1 Is (inputs) are all pulled up to +3.3 V but can also receive +5 V.
*2 Do not connect anything.

The functions that can be assigned to pins 2 to 9 of the remote connector vary depending on the setting specified by pins 10 to 12 as follows.

Table 18-6 Command mode functions

Pin No.	Function
	Preset recall (Bit)	Preset recall (Binary)	Switch the display channel	Tally display (SER27)
10	H	L	L	H
11	H	H	L	H
12	H	H	H	L
2	Recall 1	Recall 1 (LSB)	Selects channel A	Channel A tally 1 display
3	Recall 2	Recall 2	Selects channel B	Channel A tally 2 display
4	Recall 3	Recall 3	Selects channel C	Channel B tally 1 display
5	Recall 4	Recall 4	Selects channel D	Channel B tally 2 display
6	Recall 5	Recall 5	-	Channel C tally 1 display
7	Recall 6	Recall 6 (MSB)	-	Channel C tally 2 display
8	Recall 7	-	-	Channel D tally 1 display
9	Recall 8	-	-	Channel D tally 2 display

- Control

Strobe signals are used for Command mode control. Data is retrieved when the strobe signal is at low level. Strobe signals should maintain a stable state for at least 350 ms.

Be careful because changing a command or function setting while the strobe signal is at low level can result in unexpected settings. (The correct setting will return after some time.)

Figure 18-5 Control timing

• Loading presets (Bit)
• Switching Display Channels
• Alarm output

These are the same as Bit mode. See section 18.1, "Bit Mode."

- Loading presets (Binary)

This is the same as Binary mode. See section 18.2, "Binary Mode."

- Tally display (SER27)

You can use pins 2 to 9 of the remote connector to display tallies.

Tallies that you set to low will be turned on, and those that you set to high will be turned off. To display tallies, you must place TALLY items in the layout or turn Tally Frame on.

Figure 18-6 Tally display

18. Remote Control

18.4 Tally Mode (SER27)

This section describes the control method when Mode on the SYS menu is set to Tally.

- Pinout

Table 18-7 Pinout

Pin No.	Name	I/O (*1)	Description
1	OPEN	-	Open (*2)
2	/AT1	I	Channel A tally 1 display
3	/AT2	I	Channel A tally 2 display
4	/ATE	I	Channel A tally EX display
5	/BT1	I	Channel B tally 1 display
6	/BT2	I	Channel B tally 2 display
7	/BTE	I	Channel B tally EX display
8	/CT1	I	Channel C tally 1 display
9	/CT2	I	Channel C tally 2 display
10	/CTE	I	Channel C tally EX display
11	/DT1	I	Channel D tally 1 display
12	/DT2	I	Channel D tally 2 display
13	/DTE	I	Channel D tally EX display
14	ALARM	O	Alarm output
15	GND	-	Ground

*1 Is (inputs) are all pulled up to +3.3 V but can also receive +5 V.
*2 Do not connect anything.

18. Remote Control

- Control

The input connectors respond to active-low signals. Tallies light at low level and turns off at high level.

Set the low level period to at least 32 ms.

Figure 18-7 Control timing

- Alarm output

These are the same as Bit mode. See section 18.1, "Bit Mode."

- Tally Display

You can use pins 2 to 13 of the remote connector to display tallies.

Tallies that you set to low will be turned on, and those that you set to high will be turned off. To display tallies, you must place TALLY items in the layout or turn Tally Frame on.

Figure 18-8 Tally display

19. RS-422/485 (SER27)

You can recall presets, switch display channels, display tallies, and display camera IDs through the RS-422/485 connector on the rear panel.

• RS-422/485 Connector

The RS-422/485 connector as viewed from the rear panel is shown below.

Figure 19-1 RS-422/485 connector

- Interface System

Table 19-1 Interface system

Synchronization mode	Asynchronous start-stop
Data transfer time	9600 to 115200 bps
Data length	8 bit
Parity	None
Stop bits	1 bit
Transmission order	LSB First
Error Detection	Detection through checksum only
Output method	RS485 4-wire
Output connector	RJ-45

- Pinout

Table 19-2 Pinout

Pin No.	Name	Pin No.	Name
1	TX+	5	OPEN
2	TX-	6	RX-
3	RX+	7	GND
4	OPEN	8	GND

- Connection Example

An example is shown below of a connection for controlling two instruments from a PC.

PC		1st LV5600 or LV7600 (*1)					2nd LV5600 or LV7600 (*2)
		INPUT		(→)(←)(←)	OUTPUT		INPUT		(→)(←)(←)	OUTPUT
Pin No.	Name	Pin No.	Name		Pin No.	Name	Pin No.	Name		Pin No.	Name
1	TX+	3	RX+		3	RX+	3	RX+		3	RX+
2	TX-	6	RX-		6	RX-	6	RX-		6	RX-
3	RX+	1	TX+		1	TX+	1	TX+		1	TX+
4	OPEN	4	OPEN		4	OPEN	4	OPEN		4	OPEN
5	OPEN	5	OPEN		5	OPEN	5	OPEN		5	OPEN
6	RX-	2	TX-		2	TX-	2	TX-		2	TX-
7	GND	7	GND		7	GND	7	GND		7	GND
8	GND	8	GND		8	GND	8	GND		8	GND

*1 Set Termination Setting on the SYS menu to off.
*2 Set Termination Setting on the SYS menu to on.

- Configuring the instrument

To configure the RS-422/485, use the RS485 tab of the SYS menu.

[See also] 7.2.12, "Configuring the RS-422/485 Settings (SER27)"

To set the camera ID through the RS-422/485 connector, ID Control Select must be set to RS485 on the CAMERA ID tab of the SYS menu.

[See also] 7.2.13, "Setting the Camera ID (SER27)"

To display the tally through the RS-422/485 connector, Tally Control Select must be set to RS485 on the REMOTE tab of the SYS menu.

[See also] 7.2.8, "Configuring the Remote Control Settings"

19.1 Transmission Commands

The transmission command format is shown below.

Table 19-3 Transmission commands

byte LV5600TransmissionCommands	LV7600TransmissionCommands	Description Reference
0	02h	02h	STX
1	35h	37h	Header 1
2	36h	36h	Header 2
3	30h	30h	Header 3
4	30h	30h	Header 4
5	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 1
6	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 2
7	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 1
8	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 2
9	30h	30h	RESERVED
10	30h	30h	RESERVED
11	30h/31h	30h/31h	Keyword 1
12	30h to 32h	30h to 32h	Keyword 2
13 and above	- - Parameter
- 30h to 39h/41h to 46h	30h to 39h/41h to 46h	Checksum 1	19.1.3, "Setting the Checksum"
- 30h to 39h/41h to 46h	30h to 39h/41h to 46h	Checksum 2
-	03h	03h	ETX

- Notes

• If there is a gap of 100 ms or longer in the middle of a command, the command up to that point will be discarded.
• If an incorrect address or format is sent, the command will be ignored.
• After sending a command, verify that it has been acknowledged before sending the next command.

19.1.1 Setting the Address

Set the address in the range of 00 to 99 using a 4 byte ASCII code.

To set the LV5600 or LV7600 address, use Device Address on the RS485 tab of the SYS menu.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
5	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 1
6	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 2
7	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 1
8	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 2

Example: To specify "sender address: 28, LV5600 or LV7600 address: 35," set "32h 38h 33h 35h."

19.1.2 Setting Keywords and Parameters

Keyword and parameter settings vary depending on the function to be controlled. The command for each function is described below.

- Recalling a Preset

Set the preset in the range of 1 to 60 using a 2 byte ASCII code.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	30h	Keyword 1
12	30h	Keyword 2
13	30h to 36h	Preset 1
14	30h to 39h	Preset 2

Example: To recall preset number 28, set "30h 30h 32h 38h."

- Switching Display Channels

Collectively set the on and off states of channels A to D.

You can omit the command for channels that do not need to be changed.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	30h	Keyword 1
12	31h	Keyword 2
13	41h	Ach
14	30h	OFF
	31h	ON
15	2Ch	Separator
16	42h	Bch
17	30h	OFF
	31h	ON
18	2Ch	Separator
19	43h	Cch
20	30h	OFF
	31h	ON
21	2Ch	Separator
22	44h	Dch
23	30h	OFF
	31h	ON
24	2Ch	Separator

Example: To specify "Ach: ON, Bch: OFF, Cch: no change, Dch: ON," set "30h 31h 41h 31h 2Ch 42h 30h 2Ch 44h 31h 2Ch." Ach Bch Dch

- Tally Display

Collectively set the tally display of channels A to D.

You can omit the command for channels that do not need to be changed.

To display tallies, you must place TALLY items in the customized layout or enhanced layout or set Tally Frame to Tally.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	30h	Keyword 1
12	32h	Keyword 2
13	41h	Ach
14	30h	TALLY-1: OFF	TALLY-2: OFF	TALLY-EXT: OFF
	31h	TALLY-1: ON	TALLY-2: OFF	TALLY-EXT: OFF
	32h	TALLY-1: OFF	TALLY-2: ON	TALLY-EXT: OFF
	33h	TALLY-1: ON	TALLY-2: ON	TALLY-EXT: OFF
	34h	TALLY-1: OFF	TALLY-2: OFF	TALLY-EXT: ON
	35h	TALLY-1: ON	TALLY-2: OFF	TALLY-EXT: ON
	36h	TALLY-1: OFF	TALLY-2: ON	TALLY-EXT: ON
	37h	TALLY-1: ON	TALLY-2: ON	TALLY-EXT: ON
15	2Ch	Separator
16	42h	Bch
17	30h to 37h	Tally on/off (see byte 14)
18	2Ch	Separator
19	43h	Cch
20	30h to 37h	Tally on/off (see byte 14)
21	2Ch	Separator
22	44h	Dch
23	30h to 37h	Tally on/off (see byte 14)
24	2Ch	Separator

Example: To specify "Ach: all ON, Bch: all OFF, Cch: no change, Dch: all ON,"
set "30h 32h 41h 31h 2Ch 42h 30h 2Ch 44h 31h 2Ch."
Ach Bch Dch

- Camera ID Display (collectively setting)

Collectively set the camera ID display of channels A to D.

You can omit the command for channels or labels that do not need to be changed.

To display camera IDs, you must place LABEL-1, LABEL-2, and IRIS items in the customized layout or enhanced layout.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	31h	Keyword 1
12	30h	Keyword 2
13	41h	Ach
14	31h	LABEL-1
15	30h	No change
	31h	Left justified
	32h	Center justified
	33h	Right justified
16 to 31 ASCII code: 1 byte (20h to 7Eh)Shift JIS code: 2byte		• 16 bytes max.• Two channels not allowed• Default value (CAM A) if not set
32	2Ch	Separator
33	32h	LABEL-2
34	30h to 33h	Placement (see byte 15)
35 to 50	ASCII/Shift JIS	Character string (see bytes 16 to 31)
51	2Ch	Separator
52	33h	IRIS
53	30h to 33h	Placement (see byte 15)
54 to 69	ASCII/Shift JIS	Character string (see bytes 16 to 31)
70	2Ch	Separator
71	2Ch	Separator
72	42h	Bch
73 to 130	-	Channel B data (see bytes 14 to 71)
131	43h	Cch
132 to 189	-	Channel C data (see bytes 14 to 71)
190	44h	Dch
191 to 248	-	Channel D data (see bytes 14 to 71)

Example: To specify "Ach: LABEL-1=Tokyo1, LABEL-2=Tokyo2, IRIS=(delete), all left justified

Bch: LABEL-1=Osaka1, LABEL-2=Osaka2, IRIS=(no change), all center justified

Cch: all no change

Dch: all delete, set

"31h 30h

41h 31h 31h 93h 8Ch 8Bh 9Eh 31h 2Ch 32h 31h 93h 8Ch 8Bh 9Eh 32h 2Ch 33h 2Ch 2Ch

Ach LABEL-1 LABEL-2 IRIS

42h 31h 32h 91h E5h 8Dh E3h 31h 2Ch 32h 32h 91h E5h 8Dh E3h 32h 2Ch 2Ch

Bch LABEL-1 LABEL-2

44h 31h 2Ch 32h 2Ch 33h 2Ch 2Ch."

Dch LABEL-1 LABEL-2 IRIS

- Camera ID Display (collective channel setting)

Set the camera ID display collectively for each channel.

You can omit the command for settings that do not need to be changed.

To display camera IDs, you must place LABEL-1, LABEL-2, and IRIS items in the customized layout or enhanced layout.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	31h	Keyword 1
12	31h	Keyword 2
13	41h	Ach
	42h	Bch
	43h	Cch
	44h	Dch
14	31h	LABEL-1
15	30h	No change
	31h	Left justified
	32h	Center justified
	33h	Right justified
16 to 31 ASCII code: 1 byte (20h to 7Eh)Shift JIS code: 2 bytes		• 16 bytes max.• Two channels not allowed• Default value (CAM A/B/C/D) if not set
32	2Ch	Separator
33	32h	LABEL-2
34	30h to 33h	Placement (see byte 15)
35 to 50	ASCII/Shift JIS	Character string (see bytes 16 to 31)
51	2Ch	Separator
52	33h	IRIS
53	30h to 33h	Placement (see byte 15)
54 to 69	ASCII/Shift JIS	Character string (see bytes 16 to 31)
70	2Ch	Separator

Example: To specify "Cch: LABEL-1=Tokyo1, LABEL-2=(no change), IRIS=4.0, do not change any of the placements," set "31h 31h 43h 31h 30h 93h 8Ch 8Bh 9Eh 31h 2Ch 33h 30h 34h 2Eh 30h 2Ch." Cch LABEL-1 IRIS

- Camera ID Display (partial setting)

Set the camera ID display for each item.

To display camera IDs, you must place LABEL-1, LABEL-2, and IRIS items in the customized layout or enhanced layout.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
11	31h	Keyword 1
12	32h	Keyword 2
13	41h	Ach
	42h	Bch
	43h	Cch
	44h	Dch
14	31h	LABEL-1
	32h	LABEL-2
	33h	IRIS
15	30h	No change
	31h	Left justified
	32h	Center justified
	33h	Right justified
16 to 31	ASCII code: 1 byte (20h to 7Eh)Shift JIS code: 2 bytes	• 16 bytes max.• Two channels not allowed• Default value (CAM A/B/C/D) if not set
32	2Ch	Separator

Example: To specify "Dch: LABEL-2=Tokyo1, left justified," set "31h 32h 44h 32h 31h 93h 8Ch 8Bh 9Eh 31h 2Ch."

19.1.3 Setting the Checksum

Add the data from the header to the parameters, and set the lower two digits using a 2 byte ASCII code.

As an example, the checksum for the following command will be calculated on the LV5600.

Sender IP address: 01

LV5600: 00

Function: Recall preset number 1

When we add the data from the header to the parameters, we obtain

3 5 h + 3 6 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 1 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 0 h + 3 1 h = 2 ADh

Therefore, we set A→41h for checksum1 and D→44h for checksum2.

byte	Transmission Commands	Description
0	02h	STX
1	35h	Header 1
2	36h	Header 2
3	30h	Header 3
4	30h	Header 4
5	30h	Sender IP address 1
6	31h	Sender IP address 2
7	30h	LV5600 address 1
8	30h	LV5600 address 2
9	30h	RESERVED
10	30h	RESERVED
11	30h	Keyword 1
12	30h	Keyword 2
13	30h	Parameter 1
14	31h	Parameter 2
15	(41h)	Checksum 1
16	(44h)	Checksum 2
17	03h	ETX

19.2 Response Messages

The following three response messages are available. The format of each is shown below.

Table 19-4 Response messages

byte	LV5600 Response Command			LV7600 Response Command			Description
	Normal	Format error	Checksum error	Normal	Format error	Checksum error
0	02h	02h	02h	02h	02h	02h	STX
1	35h	35h	35h	37h	37h	37h	Header 1
2	36h	36h	36h	36h	36h	36h	Header 2
3	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	Header 3
4	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	Header 4
5	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 1
6	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	Sender IP address 2
7	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 1
8	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	30h to 39h	LV5600 or LV7600 address 2
9	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	RESERVED
10	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	30h	RESERVED
11	38h	38h	38h	38h	38h	38h	Keyword 1
12	30h	31h	31h	30h	31h	31h	Keyword 2
13	30h	30h	31h	30h	30h	31h	Parameter 1
14	30h	31h	30h	30h	31h	30h	Parameter 2
15	03h	03h	03h	03h	03h	03h	ETX

- Notes

• Response messages are returned for recalling presets, switching display channels, and displaying tallies when the LV5600 or LV7600 completes the configuration and for displaying camera IDs when the LV5600 or LV7600 receives the command.
• The BUS is set to drive only when a response is returned for a setting command.

20. NETWORK CONTROL

The instrument can be remotely controlled through its Ethernet port on the rear panel.

Controlling the instrument remotely through its Ethernet interface has only been confirmed to work in a local network environment. LEADER does not guarantee that this feature will work in any network environment.

20.1 SNTP Client Function

The instrument can display time that is synchronized to an NTP server on the network.

20.1.1 How to Use

1. Configure the Ethernet settings on the NETWORK tab of the SYS menu.

Set SNTP Client Select to On, and set the IP address, server IP address, and time zone adjustment. For details on time zone adjustment, see the next section.

[See also] 7.2.6, "Setting the Network IP"

Figure 20-1 NETWORK tab

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Connect the instrument's Ethernet port to the external network device.

The instrument connects to the NTP server at the following times.

• When you press F•1 COMPLETE in SYSTEM SETUP
  • Once every approximately 10 minutes

When the instrument connects normally to an NTP server, the time is displayed at the upper right of the screen.

If a connection cannot be established, "NTP ERROR" is displayed in red in the TIME box.

20.1.2 Time Adjustment Value

The date and time exchanged with an NTP (SNTP) are basically Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Therefore, the time must be adjusted in accordance with the country or region where the device is used in. On the NETWORK tab, set Time Zone Adjust to one of the following values.

Table 20-1 Time adjustment values

Country or region	Time Zone Adjust
Eniwetok, Kwajalein	-12:0
Midway Island, Samoa	-11:0
Hawaii	-10:0
Alaska	-9:0
Pacific Time (US & Canada), Tijuana	-8:0
Mountain Time (US & Canada), Arizona	-7:0
Central Time (US & Canada), Central America, Saskatchewan, Mexico City	-6:0
Eastern Time (US & Canada), Indiana (East), Bogota, Lima, Quito	-5:0
Atlantic Time (Canada), La Paz, Santiago	-4:0
Greenland, Buenos Aires, Georgetown, Brasilia	-3:0
Mid-Atlantic	-2:0
Azores, Cape Verde Is.	-1:0
Greenwich Mean Time (Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London), Casablanca, Monrovia	-/+0:0
Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Sarajevo, Skopje, Sofija, Vilnius, Warsaw, Zagreb, Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris, Belgrade Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague, West Central Africa	+1:0
Athens, Istanbul, Minsk, Jerusalem, Cairo Harare, Pretoria, Bucharest, Isinki, Riga, Tallinn	+2:0
Kuwait, Riyadh, Nairobi, Baghdad, Moscow, Volgograd, St. Petersburg	+3:0
Abu Dhabi, Muscat, Baku, Tbilisi, Yerevan	+4:0
Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent, Ekaterinburg	+5:0
Astana, Dhaka, Almaty, Novosibirsk	+6:0
Krasnoyarsk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta	+7:0
Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Perth, Taipei, Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong SAR, Urumqi	+8:0
Seoul, Yakutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo	+9:0
Vladivostok, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Guam, Port Moresby, Brisbane, Hobart	+10:0
Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia	+11:0
Auckland, Wellington, Fiji Islands, Kamchatka, Marshall Is.	+12:0

20.2 TELNET

From a PC connected to the same network as the instrument, you can remotely control most of the operations that can be controlled from the panel.

If you are using the LV7600, read LV5600 and lv5600 as LV7600 and lv7600.

20.2.1 How to Use

1. Configure the Ethernet settings on the NETWORK tab of the SYS menu.

Set the IP address, and set Telnet to On.

You cannot use the LV7290 REMOTE CONTROLLER while using TELNET. Conversely, if you set LV7290 to On, you cannot use TELNET.

[See also] 7.2.8, "Configuring the Server"

Figure 20-2 NETWORK tab

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Connect the instrument's Ethernet port to the external network device.
3. On the PC, start a TELNET client.

On Windows 7, on the taskbar, click Start, and then click Run. Type "TELNET" and the IP address that you set in step 1. Then, click OK.

(To use TELNET, open Control Panel, click Turn Windows features on or off under Program and Features, and select the Telnet Client check box.)

20. Network Control

5. Type the login name and password.

The login name and password are "LV5600". Use uppercase for all characters.

When the login name and password are entered correctly, "LV5600@LV5600:\~\$" appears.

LV5600 login: LV5600

Password: *****

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$

6. Enter TELNET commands.

Enter commands by referring to sections 20.2.2, "How to Enter Commands," and 20.2.3, "TELNET Commands."

To end a TELNET session, type "exit" in lowercase letters.

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$ exit

20.2.2 How to Enter Commands

The command syntax is explained below. (Some commands do not have parameters.) To query a current setting, use a question mark as the parameter.

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$ [Command] + [Space] + [Parameter]

Examples of how to enter commands are shown below.

• Showing the Status Display

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$ STATUS

- Displaying the Center Marker in the Picture Display

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$ PIC:MARKER:CENTER ON

- Querying the Vector Intensity

LV5600@LV5600:\~\$ VECTOR:INTEN ?

* You can enter commands using uppercase or lowercase letters.
* Because the display channel selection command is different depending on the display mode (single or simul) and SDI signal input settings, check the INPUT KEY command.
* To query the measured value or detected value, you must use the INPUT KEY command to show the measurement screen of the appropriate channel.
Further, for 4K 3G QUAD LINK, 4K 3G DUAL LINK, 4K HD QUAD LINK, 3G DUAL LINK, and HD DUAL LINK settings, you must also select the link according to the link selection command of each measurement item.

20.2.3 TELNET Commands

TELNET commands follow the instrument or the option menu structure. Some of the descriptions do not apply depending on the installed options or the current settings.

• INPUT KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
-	INP:SIMUL	SINGLE / SIMUL / ?
-	INP_SINGLE:A	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel A selected) / OFF (not selected))	SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL, 3G-B-DS setting, Select the display channel in single input mode.
-	INP_SINGLE:B	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel B selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP_SINGLE:C	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel C selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP_SINGLE:D	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel D selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP:SIMUL:A	OFF / ON / ? (Return value:Channel A display on/off)	SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DL, 3G-B-DS setting, Select the display channel in simul mode.
-	INP:SIMUL:B	OFF / ON / ? (Return value:Channel B display on/off)
-	INP:SIMUL:C	OFF / ON / ? (Return value:Channel C display on/off)
-	INP:SIMUL:D	OFF / ON / ? (Return value:Channel D display on/off)
-	INP_12G:A	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel A selected) / OFF (not selected))	4K 12G setting, Select the display channel.
-	INP_12G:B	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel B selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP_12G:C	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel C selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP_12G:D	ON / ? (Return value:ON (Channel D selected) / OFF (not selected))
-	INP:D_SINGLE:AB	ON / ? (Return value: Channel A-B pair display on/off)	4K 3G Dual Link, HD Dual Link, 3G Dual Link setting, Select the display channel in single input mode.
-	INP:D_SINGLE:CD	ON / ? (Return value: Channel C-D pair display on/off)
-	INP:D_SIMUL:AB	OFF / ON / ? (Return value: Channel A-B pair display on/off)	HD Dual Link, 3G Dual Link setting, Select the display channel in simul mode.
-	INP:D_SIMUL:CD	OFF / ON / ? (Return value:Channel C-D pair display on/off)
-	INP_OPERATE	COM / INDIVIDUAL / ?

• EXT KEY

r/wLimitation	Command Parameter
-	EXT	INT / EXT / ?

•CAP KEY

r/w Limitation	Command	Parameter
-	CAP:TRIGGER	MANUAL / ERROR / ?
WO	CAP:REFRESH	None
-	CAP:DISPLAY	REAL / HOLD / BOTH / ?
-	CAP:FILE:BMP	OFF / ON / ?
-	CAP:FILE:BSG	OFF / ON / ?
-	CAP:FILE : DPX	OFF / ON / ?
-	CAP:FILE : TIF	OFF / ON / ?
-	CAP:FILE : FRM	OFF / ON / ?

1. Network Control

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
WO	STORE	None
WO	MAKE	CAP_BMP / CAP_BSG / CAP_DPX_A / CAP_DPX_B / CAP_DPX_C / CAP_DPX_D / CAP_TIF_A / CAP_TIF_B / CAP_TIF_C / CAP_TIF_D / CAP_FRM_A / CAP_FRM_B / CAP_FRM_C / CAP_FRM_D / LOG / DUMP / LOUDNESS* File make command. Use FTP to retrieve created files.
-	CAP:FRM:CAPNUM	1 / 16 / ?

• PRESET KEY

r/wLimitation	Command Parameter
WO	RCLL	1 to 60

• MULTI KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
-	MULTI	OFF / ON / ?
WO	USER:LYT	USER1/ USER2 / USER3 / USER4 / USER5 / USER6

• SYS KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
-	SYS:LCD:BACKLIGHT	1 to 32 / ?
WO	SYS:LCD:ON	None
WO	SYS:LCD:OFF	None
WO	SYS:INITIALIZE:PARAM	None
WO	SYS:INITIALIZE:LAYOUT	None
WO	SYS:INITIALIZE:OPERATE	None
WO	SYS:INITIALIZE:ALL	None
- SYS	SDI:SYSTEM 4K_12G / 4K_3G_QLINK / 4K_3G	DLINK /4K_HD_QLINK / SINGLE_LINK / HD_DLINK /3G_DLINK / 3GB_DSTREAM / ?* Correspondence between parameters and settings4K_12G : 4K 12G4K_3G_QLINK : 4K 3G QUAD LINK4K_3G_DLINK : 4K 3G DUAL LINK4K_HD_QLINK : 4K HD QUAD LINKSINGLE_LINK : SD/HD/3G-A/3G-B-DLHD_DLINK : HD DUAL LINK3G_DLINK : 3G DUAL LINK3GB_DSTREAM : 3G-B-DS
-	SYS:SDI:COLORIMETRY	PAYLOAD_ID / BT709 / BT2020 / DCI / ?
-	SYS:XYZ_GAMMA	BOTTOM_ZERO / DCI / ?

• WFM KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
WO	WFM	None
-	WFM:MODE	OVERLAY / PARADE / ?
-	WFM:MODE:YCBCR:Y	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:YCBCR:CB	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:YCBCR:CR	ON / OFF / ?

1. Network Control

-	WFM:MODE:GBR:G	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:GBR:B	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:GBR:R	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:RGB:R	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:RGB:G	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:RGB:B	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:XYZ:X	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:XYZ:Y	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:XYZ:Z	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:4Y_PARADE	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MODE:3G-B-DS	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / MIX / ALIGN / ?
-	WFM:EXT_SYNC	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:EXT_SYNC:INTEN	-128 to 127 / ?
-	WFM:EXT_SYNC:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	WFM:INTEN	-128 to 127 / ?
-	WFM:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI / ?
-	WFM:COLOR:S1	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI / ?
-	WFM:COLOR:S2	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:UNIT	HDV_SDP / HDV_SDV / HDP_SDP / CV_DEC / CV_HEX / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:UNIT:NTSC	P / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:UNIT:PAL	V / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:UNIT:FULL	HDP_SDP / CV_DEC / CV_HEX / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:75_COLOR	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:SCALE:DISPLAY	ON / OFF / BOTH / MAIN / HDR / ?
-	WFM:GAIN:VARIABLE	CAL / VAR / ?
-	WFM:GAIN:MAG	X1 / X5 / X10 / ?
-	WFM:GAIN:VALUE	20 to 200 / ?* MAG value × 0.200 (20) - 2.000 (200)
-	WFM:GAIN:SCALE_JUMP	OP / 10P / 20P / 30P / 40P / 50P / 60P / 70P / 80P / 90P / 100P / CURSOR / ?
-	WFM:FILTER:NORMAL	FLAT / LOWPASS / ?
-	WFM:FILTER:COMPOSITE	FLAT / LUM / FLAT_LUM / LUM_CRMA / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP	H / V / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP:H_SWEEP	1H / 2H / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP:V_SWEEP	1V / 2V / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP:H_MAG	X1 / X10 / X20 / ACTIVE / BLANK / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP:V_MAG	X1 / X20 / X40 / ?
-	WFM:SWEEP:FIELD	FIELD1 / FIELD2 / ?
-	WFM:BLANKING:NORMAL	REMOVE / H_VIEW / V_VIEW / ALL_VIEW / ?
-	WFM:BLANKING:COMPOSITE	REMOVE / V_VIEW / ?
-	WFM:CURSOR	WFM:CURSOR
-	WFM:CURSOR:SELECT	WFM:CURSOR:SELECT
-	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:X	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:X
-	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:Y	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:Y
-	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:Y:COMPOSITE	WFM:CURSOR:UNIT:Y:COMPOSITE
-	WFM:CURSOR:REF	0 to 927 (when X is selected)-5000 to 15000 (when Y is selected)
-	WFM:CURSOR:DELTA	0 to 927 (when X is selected)-5000 to 15000 (when Y is selected)

1. Network Control

-	WFM:CURSOR:TRACK	0 to 927 (when X is selected)-15000 to 15000 (when Y is selected)
WO	WFM:CURSOR:REFSET	None
-	WFM:CURSOR:VAL	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:LINE_SELECT	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:LINE_NUMBER	0 to 32767 / ?
-	WFM:LINE_FIELD	FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:YCBCR	YCBCR / GBR / RGB / COMPOSITE / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:RGB	GBR / RGB / COMPOSITE / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:YGBR	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:YRGB	ON / OFF / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:COMPOSITE:FORMAT	AUTO / NTSC / PAL / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:COMPOSITE:SETUP	OP / 7.5P / ?
-	WFM:MATRIX:XYZ	XYZ / GBR / RGB / COMPOSITE / ?

• VECTOR KEY

r/w Limitation	Command	Parameter
WO	VECTOR	None
-	VECTOR:LINE_SELECT	ON / OFF / CINELITE / ?
-	VECTOR:LINE_NUMBER	0 to 32767 / ?
-	VECTOR:LINE_FIELD	FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME / ?
-	VECTOR:MATRIX:CB	100P / 75P / ?
-	VECTOR:MATRIX:COLOR_MATRIX	COMPONENT / COMPOSITE / ?
-	VECTOR:MATRIX:COMPOSITE:FORMAT	AUTO / NTSC / PAL / ?
-	VECTOR:MATRIX:COMPOSITE:SETUP	0P / 7_5P / ?
- VECTOR:VECTOR:MODE		VECTOR / RGBVECTOR / YCBCRVECTOR / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:INTEN	-128 to 127 / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:COLOR:S1	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:COLOR:S2	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:3G-B-DS	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / MIX / ALIGN / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:SCALE:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:SCALE:IQ_AXIS	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:SCALE:VEC_SCALE	AUTO / BT601 / BT709 / BT2020 / DCI / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:GAIN:VARIABLE	CAL / VAR / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:GAIN:MAG	X1 / X5 / IQ / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:GAIN:VALUE	200 to 2000 / ?* X11000 to 10000 / ?* X5580 to 5840 / ?* IQ-MAG or SD, composite display620 to 6240 / ?* not IQ-MAG or SD, component display520 to 5260 / ?* IQ-MAG or SD, for pseudo-composite display570 to 5700 / ?* not IQ-MAG or SD, for pseudo-composite display
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:MARKER	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:VAR_MKR:FOLLOW_MKR	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:VAR_MKR:RADIUS_CTRL	ON / OFF / ?

1. Network Control

-	VECTOR:VECTOR:VAR_MKR:D_DEG_SEL	D / DEG / ?
-	VECTOR:VECTOR:VAR_MKR:MKR_SIZE	5 to 10 / ?
-	VECTOR:RGBVECTOR:SCALE:ADJ_TARGET	GB / GR / ?
-	VECTOR:RGBVECTOR:SCALE:H	-500 to 500 / ?
-	VECTOR:RGBVECTOR:SCALE:V	-500 to 500 / ?
-	VECTOR:RGBVECTOR:GAIN:H 200 to 2000 / ?	* 0.200 (200) - 2.000 (2000)
-	VECTOR:RGBVECTOR:GAIN:V 200 to 2000 / ?	* 0.200 (200) - 2.000 (2000)
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:SCALE:TIM_MKR	AUTO / HD / SD / ?
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:SCALE:VEC_SCALE	AUTO / BT601 / BT709 / BT2020 / DCI / ?
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:GAIN:VARIABLE	CAL / VAR / ?
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:GAIN:MAG	X1 / X5 / ?
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:GAIN:VALUE 200 to 2000 / ?	* MAG value × 0.200 (200) - 2.000 (2000)
-	VECTOR:YCBCRVECTOR:GAIN:OBS_POINT BY_WH	/ BY_YL / BY_CY / BY_G / BY_TM / BY_MG / BY_R / BY_B / BL / RY_B / RY_R / RY_MG / RY_TM / RY_G / RY_CY / RY_YL / RY_WH / ?
-	VECTOR:5BAR:SCALE	P / MV / HEX / DEC / ?
-	VECTOR:5BAR:SEQUENCE	GBR / RGB / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:SCALE	P / HDR / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:FORM	SINGLE / TILE / ALIGN_H / ALIGN_V / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:Y	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:R	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:G	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:HIST:B	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:COLOR	BG_COLOR / BG_WHITE / BG_BLACK / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:TRIANGLE1	OFF / BT601_525 / BT601_625 / BT709 / DCI / BT2020 / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:TRIANGLE2	OFF / BT601_525 / BT601_625 / BT709 / DCI / BT2020 / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE	1 / 2 / OFF / ?
- VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE:COLO R	G / B / R / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE1:X	0 to 1000 / ?* 0(0.000) - 1000(1.000)
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE1:Y	0 to 1000 / ?* 0(0.000) - 1000(1.000)
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE2:X	0 to 1000 / ?* 0(0.000) - 1000(1.000)
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:USER_TRIANGLE2:Y	0 to 1000 / ?* 0(0.000) - 1000(1.000)
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:SUB:TEMP_SCALE	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:SUB:GRID	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:SUB:D65	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:SCALE:SUB:CAP	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:MODE	DIAGRAM / TEMP / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:STANDARD	CIE1931 / CIE1976 / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:CLIP	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:FILTER	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:MANUAL	ON / OFF / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:MANUAL:COLORIMETRY	BT601_525 / BT610_625 / BT709 / DCI / BT2020 / ?
-	VECTOR:CIE:MANUAL:GAMMA	150 to 300 / ?* 150(1.50) - 300(3.00)
-	VECTOR:CIE:CURSOR	ON / OFF / ?

• PICTURE KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
WO	PICTURE	None
-	PIC:MODE	FIT / REAL / X2 / FULL_FRAME / ?
-	PIC:COLOR	MONO / COLOR / ?
-	PIC:CHROMA	UP / NORMAL / ?
-	PIC:BRIGHTNESS	-500 to 500 / ?* -500(-50.0%) - 500(50.0%)
- PIC:CONTRAST 0 to 2000 / ?		* 0(0%) - 2000(200.0%)
-	PIC:GAIN:R	0 to 2000 / ?* 0(0%) - 2000(200.0%)
-	PIC:GAIN:G	0 to 2000 / ?* 0(0%) - 2000(200.0%)
-	PIC:GAIN:B	0 to 2000 / ?* 0(0%) - 2000(200.0%)
-	PIC:GAIN:CHROMA	0 to 2000 / ?* 0(0%) - 2000(200.0%)
-	PIC:BIAS:R	-500 to 500 / ?* -500(-50.0%) - 500(50.0%)
-	PIC:BIAS:G	-500 to 500 / ?* -500(-50.0%) - 500(50.0%)
-	PIC:BIAS:B	-500 to 500 / ?* -500(-50.0%) - 500(50.0%)
-	PIC:DISP:GAMUT	OFF / WHITE / RED / MESH / ?
-	PIC:DISP:STATUS_INFO	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:DISP:3G-B-DS	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ALIGN / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:FRAME	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:CENTER	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:ASPECT	OFF / 17_9 / 16_9 / 14_9 / 13_9 / 4_3 / 2.93_1 / AFD / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:ASPECT:SHADOW	0 to 100 / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:ACTION	ARIB / SMPTE / USER1 / OFF / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:TITLE	ARIB / SMPTE / USER2 / OFF / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:USER1:WIDTH	0 to 100 / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:USER1:HEIGHT	0 to 100 / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:USER2:WIDTH	0 to 100 / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:USER2:HEIGHT	0 to 100 / ?
-	PIC:MARKER:SAFE:USER1_2:ASPECT	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE	OFF / CC_SMPTE / CC_ARIB / TELETEXT_B / ?
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:FORMAT	608_708 / 608_608 / VBI / 708 / ?* CC_SMPTE
-	PIC:CINELITE:ADVANCE	SD / HD / ANALOG / CELLUAR / ?* CC_ARIB
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:LANGUAGE	CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / TEXT1 / TEXT2 / TEXT3 /TEXT4 / ?* CC_SMPTE1 / 2 / ?* CC_ARIB
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:PAGE	100 to 8FF / ?
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:SERVICE_DATA	1 to 63 / ?
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:CS_LOG	START / STOP / ?
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:CS_LOG:LOUDNESS	ON / OFF / ?
WO	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:CS_LOG:CLEAR	None
-	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:CS_LOG:MODE	OVER_WRITE / STOP / ?
WO	PIC:SUPER_IMPOSE:CLEAR	None

1. Network Control

-	PIC:CINELITE:DISPLAY	OFF / FSTOP / P_DISPLAY / CINEZONE / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:ADVANCE	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:MEASURE_NUMBERS	P1 / P1+P2 / P1+P2+P3 / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:MEASURE_POSITION	P1 / P2 / P3 / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:MEASURE_SIZE	1X1 / 3X3 / 9X9 / ?
RO	PIC:CINELITE:P1_DATA	?
RO	PIC:CINELITE:P2_DATA	?
RO	PIC:CINELITE:P3_DATA	?
-	PIC:CINELITE:MAX_FALL_CLL	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:MAX_FALL_CLL:MEASURE	STOP / START / ?
WO	PIC:CINELITE:MAX_FALL_CLL:CLEAR	None
WO	PIC:CINELITE:FSTOP:18P_REF_SET	None
-	PIC:CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA_SELECT	0.45 / USER1 / USER2 / USER3 / USER_A / USER_B / USER_C / USER_D / USER_E / ?
WO PIC	CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA:CAL:TABLE_CLEAR	None
WO PIC	CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA:CAL:1_DATA_CLEAR	None
WO	PIC:CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA:CAL:SET	None
-	PIC:CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA:CAL:F	22.0 / 16.0 / 11.0 / 8.0 / 5.6 / 4.0 / 2.8 / 2.0 / ?
WO PIC	CINELITE:FSTOP:GAMMA:FILE:TABLE_CLEAR	None
-	PIC:CINELITE:P_DISPLAY:UNIT_SELECT	Y_P / RGB_P / RGB255 / ?* MEASURE SIZE : not 1x1Y_P / RGB_P / RGB255 / CV_HEX / CV_DEC / ?* MEASURE SIZE : 1x1, input signal: not XYZY_P / RGB_P / RGB255 / CV_XYZ_HEX /CV_XYZ_DEC / CV_RGB_HEX / CV_RGB_DEC / ?* MEASURE SIZE : 1x1, input signal : XYZ
-	PIC:CINELITE:CINEZONE:FORM	GRADATE / STEP / SEARCH / ?
-	PIC:CINELITE:CINEZONE:UPPER	-63 to 1094 / ?※ -63(-6.3%) - 1094(109.4%)
-	PIC:CINELITE:CINEZONE:LOWER	-73 to 1084 / ?※ -73(-7.3%) - 1084(108.4%)
-	PIC:CINELITE:CINEZONE:LEVEL	-73 to 1094 / ?※ -73(-7.3%) - 1094(109.4%)
-	PIC:FOCUS:PICTURE_MODE	FIT / REAL / X2 / ?
-	PIC:FOCUS:ASSIST	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:FOCUS:SENSITIVE	LOW / MIDDLE / HIGH / V_HIGH / U_HIGH / ?
-	PIC:FOCUS:PICTURE_LEVEL	OFF / EMBOSS / 25 / 50 / 75 / 100 / ?
-	PIC:FOCUS:EDGE_COLOR	WHITE / RED / GREEN / BLUE / ?
-	PIC:LINE_SELECT	ON / OFF / ?
-	PIC:LINE_NUMBER	-32768 to 32767 / ?
-	PIC:LINE_FIELD	FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME / ?

• AUDIO KEY

r/w Limitation	Command	Parameter
WO	AUDIO	None
-	AUDIO:MODE	LISSAJOU / SURROUND / STATUS / LOUDNESS / ?※ CH MODE : 8CH LISSAJOU / METER / STATUS / ?※ CH MODE : 16CH
-	AUDIO:METER:RANGE	60DBFS / 90DBFS / MAG / ?
-	AUDIO:METER:RESPONSE	TRUEPEAK / PPM / VU / ?
-	AUDIO:METER:RESPONSE:PPM	PPM_I / PPM_II / ?
-	AUDIO:METER:RESPONSE:VU	TRUE / PPM_I / PPM_II / ?

1. Network Control

-	AUDIO:METER:PEAK_HOLD	0.0 / 0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 / 2.5 / 3.0 / 3.5 / 4.0 / 4.5 / 5.0 / HOLD / ?
-	AUDIO:METER:LEVEL_SET:OVER_LEVEL	-400 to 0 / ?※ -40.0 (-400) - 0.0 (0)
-	AUDIO:METER:LEVEL_SET:WARNING_LEVEL	-400 to 0 / ?※ -40.0 (-400) - 0.0 (0)
-	AUDIO:METER:LEVEL_SET:REF_LEVEL	-400 to 0 / ?※ -40.0 (-400) - 0.0 (0)
-	AUDIO:LISSAJOU:LISSAJOU:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	AUDIO:LISSAJOU:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	AUDIO:LISSAJOU:DISPLAY	MULTI / SINGLE / ?
-	AUDIO:LISSAJOU:FORM	X_Y / MATRIX / ?
-	AUDIO:SURROUND:SURROUND:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	AUDIO:SURROUND:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	AUDIO:SURROUND:5.1	NORMAL / PHANTOM / ?
-	AUDIO:SURROUND:AUTO_GAIN	ON / OFF / ?
WO	AUDIO:DISP:LOG	None
-	AUDIO:STATUS:EVENT_LOG	START / STOP / ?
WO	AUDIO:STATUS:EVENT_LOG:CLEAR	None
-	AUDIO:STATUS:EVENT_LOG:MODE	OVER_WRT / STOP / ?
WO	AUDIO:DISP:CH_STATUS	None
-	AUDIO:STATUS:CH_STATUS:CH	CH1 / CH2 / CH3 / CH4 / CH5 / CH6 / CH7 / CH8 / CH9 / CH10 / CH11 / CH12 / CH13 / CH14 / CH15 / CH16 /A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 / A5 / A6 / A7 / A8 / A9 / A10 / A11 / A12 / A13 / A14 / A15 / A16 /B1 / B2 / B3 / B4 / B5 / B6 / B7 / B8 / B9 / B10 / B11 / B12 / B13 / B14 / B15 / B16 /C1 / C2 / C3 / C4 / C5 / C6 / C7 / C8 / C9 / C10 / C11 / C12 / C13 / C14 / C15 / C16 /D1 / D2 / D3 / D4 / D5 / D6 / D7 / D8 / D9 / D10 / D11 / D12 / D13 / D14 / D15 / D16 / ?
-	AUDIO:STATUS:CH_STATUS:ALIGN	LSB / MSB / ?
WO	AUDIO:DISP:USER_BIT	None
-	AUDIO:STATUS:USER_BIT:CH	CH1 / CH2 / CH3 / CH4 / CH5 / CH6 / CH7 / CH8 / CH9 / CH10 / CH11 / CH12 / CH13 / CH14 / CH15 / CH16 /A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 / A5 / A6 / A7 / A8 / A9 / A10 / A11 / A12 / A14 / A15 / A16 /B1 / B2 / B3 / B4 / B5 / B6 / B7 / B8 / B9 / B10 / B11 / B12 / B13 / B14 / B15 / B16 /C1 / C2 / C3 / C4 / C5 / C6 / C7 / C8 / C9 / C10 /C11 / C12 / C13 / C14 / C15 / C16 /D1 / D2 / D3 / D4 / D5 / D6 / D7 / D8 / D9 / D10 / D11 / D12 / D13 / D14 / D15 / D16 / ?
-	AUDIO:STATUS:USER_BIT:ALIGN	LSB / MSB / ?
WO	AUDIO:STATUS:ERROR_RESET	None
-	AUDIO:LOUD:PERIOD	2MIN / 10MIN / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 2HOUR / 6HOUR / 12HOUR / 24HOUR / ?
WO	AUDIO:LOUD:CHART_CLEAR	None
-	AUDIO:LOUD:MEASURE	START / STOP / ?
-	AUDIO:LOUD:MAG	OFF / ON / ?

• STATUS KEY

r/wLimitation	Command	Parameter
WO	STATUS	None

1. Network Control

WO	STS:DUMP	None
WO	STS:EXT_REF	None
WO	STS:AVPHASE	None
WO	STS:ANCVIEW	None
WO	STS:ANCVIEW:DUMP	None
WO	STS:LOG	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:EDH	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:PAYLOAD	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CTRL_PKT	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:TRIG	None
WO STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER 1	None
WO STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER 2	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:60 8	None
WO STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:70 8	None
WO STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:AF D	None
WO STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:PRO OG	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:VBI	None
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:SEARCH	None
WO	STS:ERROR:CLEAR	None
-	STS:LOG:LOG	START / STOP / ?
-	STS:LOG:MODE	OVER_WRT / STOP / ?
WO	STS:LOG:CLEAR	None
-	STS:SDI_ANLYS:DUMP:MODE	RUN / HOLD / ?
-	STS:SDI_ANLYS:DUMP:MODE_CAP	RUN / HOLD / FRMCAP / ?
-	STS:SDI_ANLYS:DUMP:OPE:JUMP	EAV / SAV / ?
WO	STS:SDI_ANLYS:EXT_REF:USER_REF	None
WO	STS:SDI_ANLYS:EXT_REF:DEFAULT	None
WO	STS:SDI_ANLYS:EXT_REF:SELECT	EXT / SDI / ?
-	STS:SDI_ANLYS:EXT_REF:TIMING	LEGACY / SERIAL / ?
-	STS:AV_PHASE:SCALE	50MS / 100MS / 500MS / 1000MS / 2500MS / ?
WO	STS:AVPHASE:REFRESH	None
-	STS:ANCVIEW:DUMP:HOLD	HOLD / 1S / 3S / ?
-	STS:ANCVIEW:DUMP:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCVIEW:DUMP:SAMPLE	0 to 258 / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:EDH:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:EDH:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCVIEW:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
- STS: ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:PAYLOAD_ID:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
- STS: ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CTRL_PKT:DISPLAY	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CTRL_PKT:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CTRL_PKT:GROUP	GROUP1 / GROUP2 / GROUP3 / GROUP4 / ?
- STS: ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CTRL_PKT:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?

1. Network Control

-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC:TYPE	HD / SD / ANALOG / CELLULAR / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:CC:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / Q_LOG / FORMAT / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:LOG	-50 to 50 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:CLEAR	None
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:TRIG:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:TRIG:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:TRIG:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:TRIG:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER1:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER1:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER1:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER2:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER2:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:USER2:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:708:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:708:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:708:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:708:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:608:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:608:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:608:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:608:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:PROG:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?

1. Network Control

-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:VBI:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:AFD:DISP	TEXT / DUMP / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:AFD:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:SMPTE:AFD:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:ID_SET:DID	0 to FF / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:ID_SET:SDID	-1 to FF / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:MODE	HEX / BINARY / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:YC	Y / C / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:STREAM	STREAM1 / STREAM2 / ?
WO	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:ID_SET:SET	None
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:CSTM:SMPL	0 to 258 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:COUNTER	SEC / FIELD / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:TRS	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:HD_LINE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:HD_CRC	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:SD_EDH	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:ILLEGAL_CODE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:FREQ	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_12G	L_55UCHD / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_3G	LS_5CFB / 1694A / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_HD	LS_5CFB / 1694A / L_7CDH / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_SD	L_5C2V / 8281SD / 1505A / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_ERR_12G	10 to 80 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_WAR_12G	10 to 80 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_ERR_3G	10 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_WAR_3G	10 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_ERR_HD	10 to 130 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_WAR_HD	10 to 130 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_ERR_SD	50 to 200 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:SDI:CABLE_WAR_SD	50 to 200 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:ANC:PARITY	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:ANC:CHECKSUM	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:AUDIO:BCH	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:AUDIO:DBN	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:AUDIO:PARITY	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:AUDIO:INHIBIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:AUDIO:SAMPLE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:LPF	OFF / HD1M_SD1M / HD28M_SD1M / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:UPPER	908 to 1094 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:LOWER	-72 to 61 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:UPPER_MV	6356 to 7658 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:LOWER_MV	-504 to 427 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:AREA	0 to 50 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:DURATION	1 to 60 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:SETUP	0% / 7.5% / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:UPPER	900 to 1350 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:LOWER	-400 to 200 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:UPPER_MV	6300 to 9640 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:LOWER_MV	-2860 to 1430 / ?

1. Network Control

-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:AREA	0 to 50 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:C_GAMUT:DURATION	1 to 60 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE:UPPER	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE:LOWER	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE:LEFT	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE:RIGHT	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:FREEZE:DURATION	2 to 300 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:BLACK	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:BLACK:LEVEL	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:BLACK:AREA	1 to 100 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:BLACK:DURATION	1 to 300 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:LEVEL	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ERROR:LEVEL:LUMA:UPPER	-51 to 766 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:LEVEL:LUMA:LOWER	-51 to 766 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:LEVEL:CHROMA:UPPER	-400 to 399 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:LEVEL:CHROMA:LOWER	-400 to 399 / ?
-	STS:ERROR:GAMUT:UPPER	908 to 1094 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:4K_SQD	1A / 2B / 3C / 4D / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:TOP	0 to 100 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:LEFT	0 to 99 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:RIGHT	0 to 99 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:VIDEO	25 to 100 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:AUDIO	-30 to 0 / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:MESGATE	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:AVPHASE:GATETIME	100 to 1500 / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q1	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q2	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q3	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q4	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q5	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q6	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q7	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q8	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q9	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q10	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q11	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q12	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q13	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q14	ON / OFF / ?
- STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:Q15	ON / OFF / ?

1. Network Control

-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q16	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q17	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q18	ON/OFF/?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q19	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q20	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q21	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q22	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q23	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q24	ON/OFF/?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q25	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q26	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q27	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q28	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q29	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q30	ON/OFF/?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q31	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:Q32	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S1	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S2	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S3	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S4	ON/OFF/?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S5	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S6	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S7	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S8	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S9	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S10	ON/OFF/?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S11	ON/OFF/?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ:BIT:S12	ON/OFF/?

1. Network Control

-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:S13	ON / OFF / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:S14	ON / OFF / ?
-STS:	ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:S15	ON / OFF / ?
-	STS:ANCPKT:PKT_ANLYS:V_ANC:ARIB:NETQ :BIT:S16	ON / OFF / ?
RO	STS:DATA: SIGNAL_A	?
RO	STS:DATA: SIGNAL_B	?
RO	STS:DATA: SIGNAL_C	?
RO	STS:DATA: SIGNAL_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:LINK_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:LINK_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:LINK_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:LINK_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:FORMAT_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:FORMAT_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:FORMAT_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:FORMAT_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:AUDIO_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:AUDIO_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:AUDIO_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:AUDIO_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_STAT_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HTIME_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HPIX_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_VLINE_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_TOTAL_A	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_STAT_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HTIME_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HPIX_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_VLINE_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_TOTAL_B	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_STAT_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HTIME_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HPIX_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_VLINE_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_TOTAL_C	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_STAT_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HTIME_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_HPIX_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_VLINE_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:EXTREF_TOTAL_D	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:AUDIO_CTRL1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:AUDIO_CTRL2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:EDH	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:LTC1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:LTC2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:VLTC1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:VLTC2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PAYLOAD1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PAYLOAD2	?

1. Network Control

RO	STS:DATA:ANC:EIA:708_708	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:EIA:708_608	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:EIA:608	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PROGRAM	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:BROADCAST	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:VBI	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:AFD1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:AFD2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:JPN_CC1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:JPN_CC2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:JPN_CC3	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:NETQ1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:NETQ2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:TRIGGER	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:USER1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:USER2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:PAYLOAD	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:STATION	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:VCURR	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:VNEXT	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:ACURR	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:ANEXT	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:DCURR	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:ARIB:NETQ:DNEXT	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:SMPTE:AFD:CODE	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:SMPTE:AFD:FRAME	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:SMPTE:AFD:BAR:FLG	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:SMPTE:AFD:BAR:VAL1	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:PKT:SMPTE:AFD:BAR:VAL2	?
RO	STS:DATA:ANC:FREQ	?

• EYE KEY

r/w Limitation	Command Parameter
WO	EYE	None
-	EYE:MODE	EYE / JITTER / ?
-	EYE:EYE:INTEN	-128 to 127 / ?
-	EYE:EYE:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SCALE:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:GAIN:VAR	CAL / VAR / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:GAIN:VAL	50 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:SWEEP	2UI / 4UI / 16UI / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:FILTER	100kHz / 10KHZ / 1KHZ / 100Hz / 10HZ / TIMING / ALIGNMENT / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:TILE	SINGLE / DUAL / ?
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:CURSOR	ON / OFF / ?
WO	EYE:EYE:SETUP:CURSOR:RESET	None
-	EYE:EYE:SETUP:CURSOR:XY_SEL	X / Y / TR_TF / ?
-	EYE:JIT:INTEN	-128 to 127 / ?
-	EYE:JIT:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SCALE:INTEN	-8 to 7 / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SCALE:COLOR	WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / ?

1. Network Control

-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:GAIN_SWEEP:MAG	X1 / X2 / X8 / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:GAIN_SWEEP:12G:MAG	X1 / X2 / X4 / X16 / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:GAIN_SWEEP:SWEEP	1H / 2H / 1V / 2V / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:FILTER	100kHz / 10KHZ / 1KHZ / 100HZ / 10HZ / TIMING / ALIGNMENT / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:PEAK_HOLD	ON / OFF / ?
WO	EYE:JIT:SETUP:PEAK_CLEAR	None
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:TILE	SINGLE / DUAL / ?
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:CURSOR	ON / OFF / ?
WO	EYE:JIT:SETUP:CURSOR:RESET	None
-	EYE:JIT:SETUP:CURSOR:XY_SEL	X / Y / ?
WO	EYE:ERROR:SETUP:COMPLETE	None
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:AMP	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:AMP:UPPER	80 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:AMP:LOWER	40 to 100 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:RISE:MAX	40 to 110 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:FALL:MAX	40 to 110 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:DELTA	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:DELTA:MAX	40 to 110 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:TIMING_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:TIMING_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:CURRENT_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:CURRENT_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:OVERSHOOT_RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:OVERSHOOT_RISE:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:OVERSHOOT_FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:OVERSHOOT_FALL:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:AMP	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:AMP:UPPER	80 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:AMP:LOWER	40 to 100 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:RISE:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:FALL:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:DELTA	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:DELTA:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:TIMING_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:TIMING_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:CURRENT_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:CURRENT_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:OVERSHOOT_RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:OVERSHOOT_RISE:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:OVERSHOOT_FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:3G:OVERSHOOT_FALL:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:AMP	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:AMP:UPPER	80 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:AMP:LOWER	40 to 100 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:RISE:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:FALL:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:DELTA	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:DELTA:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:TIMING_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:TIMING_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?

1. Network Control

-	EYE:ERROR:HD:CURRENT_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:CURRENT_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:OVERSHOOT_RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:OVERSHOOT_RISE:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:OVERSHOOT_FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:HD:OVERSHOOT_FALL:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:AMP	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:AMP:UPPER	80 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:AMP:LOWER	40 to 100 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:RISE:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:FALL:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:DELTA	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:DELTA:MAX	40 to 140 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:TIMING_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:TIMING_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:CURRENT_JIT	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:CURRENT_JIT:MAX	10 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:OVERSHOOT_RISE	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:OVERSHOOT_RISE:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:OVERSHOOT_FALL	ON / OFF / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:SD:OVERSHOOT_FALL:MAX	0 to 200 / ?
-	EYE:ERROR:12G:AMP	ON / OFF / ?
RO	EYE:TRIGGER	RUN / STOP / ?
RO	EYE:DATA:AMP	?
RO	EYE:DATA:TR	?
RO	EYE:DATA:TF	?
RO	EYE:DATA:TJ	?
RO	EYE:DATA:CJ	?
RO	EYE:DATA:OR	?
RO	EYE:DATA:OF	?
RO	EYE:DATA:PEAK:TJ	?
RO	EYE:DATA:PEAK:JIT	?

20.3 FTP

The files that are generated by the instrument can be transferred to a PC connected to the same network.

If you are using the LV7600, read LV5600 and lv5600 as LV7600 and lv7600.

20.3.1 How to Use

1. Configure the Ethernet settings on the NETWORK tab of the SYS menu.

Set the IP address, and set FTP to ON.

[See also] 7.2.8, "Configuring the Server"

Figure 20-3 NETWORK tab

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Connect the instrument's Ethernet port to the external network device.
3. On the PC, start an FTP client.

On Windows 7, on the taskbar, click Start, and then click Run. Type "FTP" and the IP address that you set in step 1. Then, click OK.

1. Type the login name and password.

The login name and password are "LV5600". Use uppercase for all characters. When the login name and password are entered correctly, "ftp>" appears.

Connected to ***.***.***.***.
220 Welcome to LV5600 FTP service.
User (***,***,***,***:(none)): LV5600..... User name
331 Please specify the password.
Password: LV5600 .... Password (The password is not actually displayed.)
230 Login successful
ftp> 

6. Enter FTP commands.

Enter commands while referring to sections 20.3.2, "How to Enter Commands," and 20.3.3, "FTP Commands." You must generate files using the TELNET "MAKE" command before you use FTP commands.

To end an FTP session, type "bye" in lowercase letters.

ftp> bye 

20.3.2 How to Enter Commands

The command syntax is explained below.

ftp> [Command] + [Space] + [Parameter 1] + [Space] + [Parameter 2] 

Examples of how to enter commands are shown below.

ftp> get log.txt D:¥log.txt......Transfer the event log file to the PC.
200 PORT Command successful ......Return value
:
ftp> 

20.3.3 FTP Commands

Table 20-2 FTP commands

Command	Parameter 1	Parameter 2
get	log.txt	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥log.txt)
	dump.txt	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥dump.txt)
	cap_bmp.bmp	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture.bmp)
	cap_bsg.bsg	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture.bsg)
	cap_frm_a.frm	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_a.frm)
	cap_dpx_a.dpx	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_a.dpx)
	cap_tif_a.tif	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_a.tif)
	cap_frm_b.frm	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_b.frm)
	cap_dpx_b.dpx	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_b.dpx)
	cap_tif_b.tif	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_b.tif)
	cap_frm_c.frm	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_c.frm)
	cap_dpx_c.dpx	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_c.dpx)
	cap_tif_c.tif	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_c.tif)
	cap_frm_d.frm	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_d.frm)
	cap_dpx_d.dpx	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_d.dpx)
	cap_tif_d.tif	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥capture_d.tif)
	lv5600.my	Storage location on the PC and file name (example: D:¥lv5600.my)

20.4 HTTP

You can use this feature to control the instrument from a web browser on a PC in the same manner as you would control the instrument from the panel.

20.4.1 Operating Environment

The following web browsers have been confirmed to work.

• Internet Explorer Ver.11
  • Google Chrome Ver. 4 6

20.4.2 Notes

• Enable JavaScript and pop-up on the WEB browser in advance.
• After you press a key in the web browser interface, wait for the screen to update before you perform the next operation. The screen cannot redraw fast enough to keep up with consecutive key presses. In this situation, a completely gray screen may be displayed temporarily. (After a few seconds the screen will return to normal.)
• When you are using the HTTP server feature, perform as few panel operations on the instrument as possible. The instrument's internal processing load increases when it is redrawing the web browser screen, so there is a lag of 1 to 2 seconds from the time that you perform panel operations on the instrument to the time that the operations are actually carried out.
• The number of simultaneous PC connections to the HTTP server feature is 1. Multiple connections are not supported.
• User layout and enhanced layout features (SER26) cannot be used.

20.4.3 How to Use

1. Configure the Ethernet settings on the NETWORK tab of the SYS menu.

Set the IP address, and set HTTP to ON.

[See also] 7.2.8, "Configuring the Server"

Figure 20-4 NETWORK tab

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Connect the instrument's Ethernet port to the external network device.
3. Start the web browser on your PC.
4. In the address box, enter "http://(the IP address that you set in step 1):8080."

Figure 20-5 Entering the IP address

1. From the HTTP server menu, select the display mode.

HTTP SERVER MENU

MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY

REMOTE CONTROL

EVENT LOG VIEWER

Figure 20-6 HTTP server menu
Table 20-3 HTTP server menu description

Name	Description
MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY	A measurement screen and control buttons are displayed.
REMOTE CONTROL	Only control buttons are displayed.Select this mode when you want to control the instrument while looking at its screen.
EVENT LOG VIEWER	The event log is displayed.The log can also be saved in text format.

If you select MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY, the measurement screen appears, but responses to operations can take 4 to 10 seconds, and auto display updating is every 10 seconds.

If you select REMOTE CONTROL, a screen is not displayed, but the response time is reduced to 2 to 3 seconds.

Select the mode that meets your needs.

20.4.4 MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY

On the MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY tab, the instrument is controlled by clicking the control buttons.

The measurement screen is updated automatically at a given interval. It may take some time for the screen to be updated after you click a control button depending on the operating environment.

Figure 20-7 MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY

Table 20-4 MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY description

No.	Name	Description
1	Tabs	Switches the display mode.
2 Measurement screen		This is the measurement screen.You cannot click this area. Set the tab menu using the F•D button.
3	Function key menu	Click to control the menu.Double-click slowly to change to the next item.Use the F•D button to change values.
4	SELECT	This button corresponds to holding down the MULTI key (layout selection).
5	MEM	This button corresponds to holding down the PRESET key (preset registration).
6 V POS H POS F•D		“>” and “<” correspond to turning the knob to the right and left respectively. The number of “<” or “>” corresponds to the amount of change.The V•POS, H•POS, and F•D buttons correspond to the behavior performed when the corresponding button is pressed.
7	CAPTURE	Click this button after selecting the file format (BMP or JPG) to display a measurement screen in a separate window.Right-click the screen and click “Save picture as” to save the image in the specified file format. If this method does not work, use “DOWNLOAD” in the upper left of the screen to save it.
8 MENU CLEAR Hides the menu.To show it again, click the function menu area.
9	SCREEN REFRESH	Set the screen’s auto update interval to FAST, NORMAL, or SLOW.

20.4.5 REMOTE CONTROL

On the REMOTE CONTROL tab, the instrument is controlled by clicking the control buttons. As this mode does not display a measurement screen, select this mode when you want to control the instrument while looking at its screen.

The descriptions of the control buttons are the same as in section 20.4.4, "MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY."

graph TD
    A["MEASUREMENT WITH DISPLAY"] --> B["REMOTE CONTROL"]
    B --> C["EVENT LOG VIEWER"]
    C --> D["FUNCTION-"]
    D --> E["P1"]
    D --> F["P2"]
    D --> G["P3"]
    D --> H["P4"]
    D --> I["P5"]
    D --> J["P6"]
    D --> K["P7"]
    D --> L["SETUP-"]
    L --> M["INPUT"]
    L --> N["EXT"]
    L --> O["MULTI"]
    L --> P["LAYOUT"]
    L --> Q["SYSTEM"]
    L --> R["PRESET"]
    L --> S["MEM"]
    L --> T["AVIO"]
    L --> U["STATUS"]
    L --> V["EVE"]
    L --> W["SHORTOUT"]
    L --> X["FILTER"]
    L --> Y["NAG"]
    L --> Z["NAG"]
    L --> AA["V PO 1"]
    L --> AB["<<"]
    L --> AC["<<"]
    L --> AD["<<"]
    L --> AE[">="]
    L --> AF[">="]
    L --> AG[">="]
    L --> AH[">="]
    L --> AI[">="]
    L --> AJ[">="]
    L --> AK[">="]
    L --> AL[">="]
    L --> AM[">="]

Figure 20-8 REMOTE CONTROL

20.4.6 EVENT LOG VIEWER

The EVENT LOG VIEWER tab displays the event log of the status display.

Nothing is displayed at first. You can display the log entries by setting LOG VIEWER to UPDATE.

The screen is updated automatically at a given interval.

Set LOG to START on the EVENT LOG menu in advance.

[See also] 16.4, "Configuring Event Log Settings"

Figure 20-9 EVENT LOG VIEWER

Table 20-5 EVENT LOG VIEWER description

No.	Name	Description
1	Tabs	Switches the display mode.
2	UPDATE	The screen is updated automatically. LOG LIST shows the latest log.
3	PAUSE	The screen is not automatically updated. Past log entries can be displayed in LOG LIST.
4	LIST LINE	Select the number of entries to display on a screen from 10 to 50 (in 5 steps).
5	REFRESH	Set the screen's auto update interval to FAST, NORMAL, or SLOW.
6	GET LOG FILE	The event log is displayed in a separate window.From the File menu, choose Save As to save the log in text format.
7	|<	The latest log entries are displayed when LOG VIEWER is set to PAUSE.
8	<<	The next newer log page appears when LOG VIEWER is set to PAUSE.
9	>>	The next older log page appears when LOG VIEWER is set to PAUSE.
10	>|	The oldest log entries are displayed when LOG VIEWER is set to PAUSE.

20.5 SNMP

By using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), you can control the instrument from SNMP managers. Additionally, you can notify the SNMP managers of errors that the instrument generates.

This product supports SNMPv2.

If you are using the LV7600, read LV5600 and lv5600 as LV7600 and lv7600.

The descriptions in this section follow the instrument or the option menu structure. Some of the descriptions do not apply depending on the installed options or the current settings.

20.5.1 SMI Definitions

INPORTS

MODULE-IDENTITY, OBJECT-TYPE, NOTIFICATION-TYPE, enterprises

FROM SNMPv2-SMI

DisplayString

FROM SNMPv2-TC

OBJECT-GROUP, MODULE-COMPLIANCE

FROM SNMPv2-CONF;

20.5.2 How to Use

1. Configure the SNMP settings on the SNMP tab of the SYS menu.

Set the IP Address, and set SNMP Client to ReadWrite and SNMP Trap to ON. [See also] 7.2.9, "Configuring SNMP"

Figure 20-10 SNMP tab

1. Press F•1 COMPLETE.
2. Connect the instrument's Ethernet port to the external network device.
3. On the PC, start an SNMP manager.

You must provide the SNMP manager yourself.

The default community names are shown below.

20. Network Control

ReadOnly and ReadWrite can be changed with the SNMP Community parameter.

[See also] SNMP Community → 7.2.9, "Configuring SNMP"

ReadOnly : LDRUser

ReadWrite : LDRAdm

TRAP : LDRUser

1. Check that the SNMP managers can perform GET and SET operations.

2. From the SNMP manager, set the following MIB items to the SNMP managers' IP addresses.

Up to four locations can be set.

[IP address of TRAP transmission destination 1]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp1TBL(1).l40trapManagerIp1(1).0

[IP address of TRAP transmission destination 2]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).Iv5600(40).Iv5600ST1(1).I40trapTBL(9).I40trapIpTBL(1).I40trapIp2TBL(2).I40trapManagerIp1(1).0

[IP address of TRAP transmission destination 3]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp3TBL(3).l40trapManagerIp1(1).0

[IP address of TRAP transmission destination 4]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp4TBL(4).l40trapManagerIp1(1).0

1. Enable the TRAP transmission destinations.

To alleviate communication load, disable the transmission destinations that you are not using. This setting is disabled by factory default.

[Enable (1) or disable (2) TRAP transmission destination 1]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).Iv5600(40).Iv5600ST1(1).I40trapTBL(9).I40trapIpTBL(1).I40trapIp1TBL(1).I40trapManagerIp1Act(2).0

[Enable (1) or disable (2) TRAP transmission destination 2]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp2TBL(2).l40trapManagerIp1Act(2).0

[Enable (1) or disable (2) TRAP transmission destination 3]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp3TBL(3).l40trapManagerIp1Act(2).0

[Enable (1) or disable (2) TRAP transmission destination 4]

1.3.6.1.4.1.leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40trapTBL(9).l40trapIpTBL(1).l40trapIp4TBL(4).l40trapManagerIp1Act(2).0

1. Restart the LV5600.

2. When the LV5600 starts, it transmits the standard TRAP "coldStart(0)." Check that this is received by the SNMP managers.

20.5.3 Standard MIBs

The instrument uses the following standard MIBs:

• RFC1213 (MIB-II)
  • RFC1354 (IP Forwarding Table MIB)

In the tables, "ACCESS" and "SUPPORT" indicate the following:

	Indication	Description
ACCESS	R/O	Information that can be read from the SNMP managers.
	R/W	Information that can be read and written from the SNMP managers
SUPPORT	Y	Supports the MIB object as defined by the standard.
	R/O	Reading and writing are possible according to the standard, but the instrument only supports reading.
	N	Not supported.

- system group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
sysDescr	system.1	DisplayString	R/O	Y
sysObjectID	system.2	ObjectID	R/O	Y
sysUpTime	system.3	TimeTicks	R/O	Y
sysContact	system.4	DisplayString	R/W	Y
sysName	system.5	DisplayString	R/O	R/O
sysLocation	system.6	DisplayString	R/W	Y
sysServices	system.7	INTEGER	R/O	Y

- interface group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
ifNumber	interfaces.1	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ifTable	interfaces.2	Aggregate	-	-
ifEntry	ifTable.1	Aggregate	-	-
ifIndex	ifEntry.1	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ifDescr	ifEntry.2	DisplayString	R/O	Y
i fType	ifEntry.3	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ifMtu	ifEntry.4	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ifSpeed	ifEntry.5	Gauge	R/O	Y
ifPhysAddress	ifEntry.6	OctetString	R/O	Y
ifAdminStatus	ifEntry.7	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ifOperStatus	ifEntry.8	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ifLastChange	ifEntry.9	TimeTicks	R/O	Y
ifInOctets	ifEntry.10	Counter	R/O	Y
ifInUcastPkts	ifEntry.11	Counter	R/O	Y
ifInNUcastPkts	ifEntry.12	Counter	R/O	Y
ifInDiscards	ifEntry.13	Counter	R/O	Y
ifInErrors	ifEntry.14	Counter	R/O	Y
ifInUnknownProtos	ifEntry.15	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutOctets	ifEntry.16	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutUcastPkts	ifEntry.17	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutNUcastPkts	ifEntry.18	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutDiscards	ifEntry.19	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutErrors	ifEntry.20	Counter	R/O	Y
ifOutQLen	ifEntry.21	Gauge	R/O	Y
ifSpecific	ifEntry.22	ObjectID	R/O	Y

• ip group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
ipForwarding	ip.1	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipDefaultTTL	ip.2	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipInReceives	ip.3	Counter	R/O	Y
ipInHdrErrors	ip.4	Counter	R/O	Y
ipInAddrErrors	ip.5	Counter	R/O	Y
ipForwDatagrams	ip.6	Counter	R/O	Y
ipInUnknownProtos	ip.7	Counter	R/O	Y
ipInDiscards	ip.8	Counter	R/O	Y
ipInDelivers	ip.9	Counter	R/O	Y
ipOutRequests	ip.10	Counter	R/O	Y
ipOutDiscards	ip.11	Counter	R/O	Y
ipOutNoRoutes	ip.12	Counter	R/O	Y
ipReasmTimeout	ip.13	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipReasmReqds	ip.14	Counter	R/O	Y
ipReasmOKs	ip.15	Counter	R/O	Y
ipReasmFails	ip.16	Counter	R/O	Y
ipFragOKs	ip.17	Counter	R/O	Y
ipFragFails	ip.18	Counter	R/O	Y
ipFragCreates	ip.19	Counter	R/O	Y
ipAddrTable	ip.20	Aggregate	-	-
ipAddrEntry	ipAddrTable.1		R/O	Y
ipAdEntAddr	ipAddrEntry.1	IpAddress	R/O	Y
ipAdEntIfIndex	ipAddrEntry.2	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipAdEntNetMask	ipAddrEntry.3	IpAddress	R/O	Y
ipAdEntBcastAddr	ipAddrEntry.4	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipAdEntReasmMaxSize	ipAddrEntry.5	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipRouteTable	ip.21	Aggregate	-	-
ipRouteEntry	ipRouteTable.1	Aggregate	-	-
ipRouteDest	ipRouteEntry.1	IpAddress	R/O	R/O
ipRouteIfIndex	ipRouteEntry.2	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteMetric1	ipRouteEntry.3	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteMetric2	ipRouteEntry.4	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteMetric3	ipRouteEntry.5	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteMetric4	ipRouteEntry.6	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteNextHop	ipRouteEntry.7	IpAddress	R/O	R/O
ipRouteType	ipRouteEntry.8	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRouteProto	ipRouteEntry.9	INTEGER	R/O	Y
ipRouteAge	ipRouteEntry.10	INTEGER	-	N
ipRouteMask	ipRouteEntry.11	IpAddress	R/O	R/O
ipRouteMetric5	ipRouteEntry.12	INTEGER	-	N
ipRouteInfo	ipRouteEntry.13	ObjectID	R/O	Y
ipNetToMediaTable	ip.22	Aggregate	-	-
ipNetToMediaEntry	ipNetToMediaTable.1	Aggregate	-	-
ipNetToMediaIfIndex	ipNetToMediaEntry.1	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipNetToMediaPhysAddress	ipNetToMediaEntry.2	OctetString	R/O	R/O
ipNetToMediaNetAddress	ipNetToMediaEntry.3	IpAddress	R/O	R/O
ipNetToMediaType	ipNetToMediaEntry.4	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
ipRoutingDiscards	ip.23	Counter	R/O	Y

• icmp group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
icmpInMsgs	icmp.1	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInErrors	icmp.2	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInDestUnreachs	icmp.3	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInTimeExcds	icmp.4	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInParmProbs	icmp.5	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInSrcQuenchs	icmp.6	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInRedirects	icmp.7	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInEchos	icmp.8	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInEchoReps	icmp.9	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInTimestamps	icmp.10	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInTimestampReps	icmp.11	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInAddrMasks	icmp.12	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpInAddrMaskReps	icmp.13	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutMsgs	icmp.14	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutErrors	icmp.15	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutDestUnreachs	icmp.16	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutTimeExcds	icmp.17	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutParmProbs	icmp.18	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutSrcQuenchs	icmp.19	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutRedirects	icmp.20	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutEchos	icmp.21	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutEchoReps	icmp.22	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutTimestamps	icmp.23	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutTimestampReps	icmp.24	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutAddrMasks	icmp.25	Counter	R/O	Y
icmpOutAddrMaskReps	icmp.26	Counter	R/O	Y

• tcp group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
tcpRtoAlgorithm	tcp.1	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpRtoMin	tcp.2	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpRtoMax	tcp.3	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpMaxConn	tcp.4	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpActiveOpens	tcp.5	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpPassiveOpens	tcp.6	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpAttemptFails	tcp.7	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpEstabResets	tcp.8	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpCurrEstab	tcp.9	Gauge	R/O	Y
tcpInSegs	tcp.10	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpOutSegs	tcp.11	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpRetransSegs	tcp.12	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpConnTable	tcp.13	Aggregate	-	-
tcpConnEntry	tcpConnTable.1	Aggregate	-	-
tcpConnState	tcpConnEntry.1	INTEGER	R/O	R/O
tcpConnLocalAddress	tcpConnEntry.2	IpAddress	R/O	Y
tcpConnLocalPort	tcpConnEntry.3	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpConnRemAddress	tcpConnEntry.4	IpAddress	R/O	Y
tcpConnRemPort	tcpConnEntry.5	INTEGER	R/O	Y
tcpInErrs	tcp.14	Counter	R/O	Y
tcpOutRsts	tcp.15	Counter	R/O	Y

20. Network Control

• udp group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
udpInDatagrams	udp.1	Counter	R/O	Y
udpNoPorts	udp.2	Counter	R/O	Y
udpInErrors	udp.3	Counter	R/O	Y
udpOutDatagrams	udp.4	Counter	R/O	Y
udpTable	udp.5	Aggregate	-	-
udpEntry	udpTable.1	Aggregate	-	-
udpLocalAddress	udpEntry.1	IpAddress	R/O	Y
udpLocalPort	udpEntry.2	INTEGER	R/O	Y

• snmp group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	SUPPORT
snmpInPkts	snmp.1	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutPkts	snmp.2	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInBadVersions	snmp.3	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInBadCommunityNames	snmp.4	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInBadCommunityUses	snmp.5	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInASNParseErrs	snmp.6	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInTooBigs	snmp.7	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInNoSuchNames	snmp.8	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInBadValues	snmp.9	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInReadOnly	snmp.10	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInGenErrs	snmp.11	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInTotalReqVars	snmp.12	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInTotalSetVars	snmp.13	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInGetRequests	snmp.14	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInGetNexts	snmp.15	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInSetRequests	snmp.16	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInGetResponses	snmp.17	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpInTraps	snmp.18	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutTooBigs	snmp.19	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutNoSuchNames	snmp.20	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutBadValues	snmp.21	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutGenErrs	snmp.22	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutGetRequests	snmp.23	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutGetNexts	snmp.24	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutSetRequests	snmp.25	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutGetResponses	snmp.26	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpOutTraps	snmp.27	Counter	R/O	Y
snmpEnableAuthenTraps	snmp.28	IpAddress	R/W	Y

20.5.4 Enterprise MIB

- Enterprise Number

The Enterprise Number of LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP. is 20111. iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).leader(20111)

- Enterprise MIB File

Save the file from instrument to a USB memory device or use FTP to obtain it from the instrument.

The file name is "lv5600.my."

[See also] 7.2.9, "Configuring SNMP", 7.2.8, "Configuring the Server"

- Enterprise MIB Structure

The enterprise MIB structure is shown below. On products that do not have units installed, the MIBs for the units cannot be controlled.

leader	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { enterprises 20111 }
lv5600	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { leader 40 }
lv5600ST1	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600 1 }
l40notificationTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 0 }
l40basicTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 1 }
l40systemTBL OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 2 }
l40wfmTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 3 }
l40vectorTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 4 }
l40pictureTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 5 }
l40statusTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 6 }
l40eyeTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 7 }
l40audioTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 8 }
l40trapTBL	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lv5600ST1 9 }

- ACCESS

In the tables, "ACCESS" indicates the following:

	Indication	Description
ACCESS	R/O	Information that can be read from the SNMP managers.
	R/W	Information that can be read and written from the SNMP managers
	R/WO	Information that can be read and written from the SNMP managers (However, the retrieved data consists of meaningless fixed values.)

• l40basicTBL(1) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40basInputTBL	I40basicTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40basInputCh	I40basInputTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = a2 = b3 = c4 = d
I40basInputSimul	I40basInputTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basInputOperate	I40basInputTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = com2 = individual
I40basInputExtref	I40basInputTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = int2 = ext
I40basDispTBL	I40basicTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40basDispMulti	I40basDispTBL.1	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignWfm	I40basDispTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignVec	I40basDispTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignPic	I40basDispTBL.4	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignSts	I40basDispTBL.5	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignEye	I40basDispTBL.6	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basDispAssignAud	I40basDispTBL.7	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basPresetTBL	I40basicTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40basPresetStore	I40basPresetTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 to 60
I40basPresetDelete	I40basPresetTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 to 60
I40basPresetCopyUsbInt	I40basPresetTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basPresetCopyIntUsb	I40basPresetTBL.4	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basPresetRecall	I40basPresetTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 to 60
I40basCaptureTBL	I40basicTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40basCaptureMode	I40basCaptureTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = screen2 = frame-sdi (Sdi Code Value)3 = frame-converted (Converted)
I40basCaptureTrigger	I40basCaptureTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = manual2 = error
I40basCaptureRefresh	I40basCaptureTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basCaptureDisplay	I40basCaptureTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = real2 = replay (video frame only)3 = both4 = hold
I40basCaptureFileBmp	I40basCaptureTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basCaptureFileBsg	I40basCaptureTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basCaptureFileDpx	I40basCaptureTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basCaptureFileTif	I40basCaptureTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basCaptureFileFrm	I40basCaptureTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40basCaptureFileStore	I40basCaptureTBL.10	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40basMakeTBL	I40basicTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40basMakeFile	I40basMakeTBL.1	INTEGER	R/WO	1 = cap-bmp2 = cap-bsg3 = cap-frm-a4 = cap-dpx-a

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				5 = cap-tif-a6 = cap-frm-b7 = cap-dpx b8 = cap-tif-b9 = cap-frm-c10 = cap-dpx-c11 = cap-tif-c12 = cap-frm-d13 = cap-dpx-d14 = cap-tif-d15 = log16 = dump17 = loud

• I40systemTBL(2) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40sysInputTBL	I40systemTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysSdiIn	I40sysInputTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sys-4k-3g-qlink2 = sys-4k-3g-dlink3 = sys-4k-hd-qlink4 = sys-single-link5 = sys-hd-dlink6 = sys-3g-dlink7 = sys-3gb-dstream11 = sys-4k-12g
I40sysSdiColorimetry	I40sysInputTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = pid2 = bt7093 = bt20204 = dci
I40sysOutTBL	I40systemTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysMonitorOutTBL	I40systemTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysHdrTBL	I40systemTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysHdrInputAMode	I40sysHdrTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = hlg3 = pq4 = slog3
I40sysHdrInputBMode	I40sysHdrTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = hlg3 = pq4 = slog3
I40sysHdrInputCMode	I40sysHdrTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = hlg3 = pq4 = slog3
I40sysHdrInputDMode	I40sysHdrTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = hlg3 = pq4 = slog3
I40sysHdrInputASysGamma	I40sysHdrTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputBSysGamma	I40sysHdrTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputCSysGamma	I40sysHdrTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputDSysGamma	I40sysHdrTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputAHlgScale	I40sysHdrTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				2 = on
I40sysHdrInputBHlgScale	I40sysHdrTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputCHlgScale	I40sysHdrTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputDHlgScale	I40sysHdrTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40sysHdrInputARange	I40sysHdrTBL.13	INTEGER	R/W	1 = narrow2 = full
I40sysHdrInputBRange	I40sysHdrTBL.14	INTEGER	R/W	1 = narrow2 = full
I40sysHdrInputCRange	I40sysHdrTBL.15	INTEGER	R/W	1 = narrow2 = full
I40sysHdrInputDRange	I40sysHdrTBL.16	INTEGER	R/W	1 = narrow2 = full
I40sysSetupTBL	I40systemTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysDateTime	I40sysSetupTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Date and Time
I40sysInfoTBL	I40systemTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40sysInfoFirmware	I40sysInfoTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Firmware Version
I40sysInfoSer01	I40sysInfoTBL.2	INTEGER	R/O	1 = notavailable2 = available
I40sysInfoSer02	I40sysInfoTBL.3	INTEGER	R/O	1 = notavailable2 = available
I40sysInfoSer03	I40sysInfoTBL.4	INTEGER	R/O	1 = notavailable2 = available
I40sysInfoSer05	I40sysInfoTBL.5	INTEGER	R/O	1 = notavailable2 = available

• 140wfmTBL(3) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40wfmIntenConfigTBL	I40wfmTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmModeTBL	I40wfmIntenConfigTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmModeMode	I40wfmModeTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = parade2 = overlay
I40wfmModeCh1Y	I40wfmModeTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh2Cb	I40wfmModeTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh3Cr	I40wfmModeTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh1G	I40wfmModeTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh2B	I40wfmModeTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh3R	I40wfmModeTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh1R	I40wfmModeTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh2G	I40wfmModeTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh3B	I40wfmModeTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmMode3gbds	I40wfmModeTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream23 = mix4 = align

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40wfmModeYParade	I40wfmModeTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh1X	I40wfmModeTBL.13	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh2Y	I40wfmModeTBL.14	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmModeCh3Z	I40wfmModeTBL.15	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmIntenTBL	I40wfmIntenConfigTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmInten	I40wfmIntenTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	-128 to 127
I40wfmColor	I40wfmIntenTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue8 = multi
I40wfmColorS1	I40wfmIntenTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue8 = multi
I40wfmColorS2	I40wfmIntenTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue8 = multi
I40wfmScaleTBL	I40wfmIntenConfigTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmScaleInten	I40wfmScaleTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40wfmScaleColor	I40wfmScaleTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40wfmScaleUnit	I40wfmScaleTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = unit-hdv-sdp2 = unit-hdv-sdv3 = unit-hdp-sdp4 = unit-cv-dec5 = unit-cv-hex
I40wfmScaleUnitNtsc	I40wfmScaleTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	3 = unit-hdp-sdp
I40wfmScaleUnitPal	I40wfmScaleTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	2 = unit-hdv-sdv
I40wfmScaleUnitFullRange	I40wfmScaleTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	3 = unit-hdp-sdp4 = unit-cv-dec5 = unit-cv-hex
I40wfmScale75perCol	I40wfmScaleTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmScaleDisplay	I40wfmScaleTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				2 = main (SER23)3 = hdr (SER23)4 = both (SER23)
I40wfmGainTBL	I40wfmTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmGainVar	I40wfmGainTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = cal2 = variable
I40wfmGainMag	I40wfmGainTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = x12 = x5
I40wfmGainValue	I40wfmGainTBL.3	DisplayString	R/W	0.2 to 2.000
I40wfmGainFilter	I40wfmGainTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = lowpass2 = flat
I40wfmGainFilterCmp	I40wfmGainTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	2 = flat3 = lum4 = flatlum5 = lumchroma
I40wfmGainScaleJump	I40wfmGainTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = pos-02 = pos-103 = pos-204 = pos-305 = pos-406 = pos-507 = pos-608 = pos-709 = pos-8010 = pos-9011 = pos-10012 = cursor
I40wfmSweepTBL	I40wfmTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmSweep	I40wfmSweepTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = h2 = v
I40wfmSweepMagH	I40wfmSweepTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = x12 = x103 = x204 = blank5 = active
I40wfmSweepMagV	I40wfmSweepTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = x12 = x203 = x40
I40wfmSweepH	I40wfmSweepTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sweep-1h2 = sweep-2h
I40wfmSweepV	I40wfmSweepTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sweep-1v2 = sweep-2v
I40wfmSweepField	I40wfmSweepTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = field12 = field2
I40wfmBlanking	I40wfmSweepTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = remove2 = v3 = h4 = all
I40wfmBlankingCmp	I40wfmSweepTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = remove2 = v
I40wfmMatrixTBL	I40wfmTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmMatrix	I40wfmMatrixTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = ycbcr2 = gbr3 = rgb4 = composite
I40wfmMatrixRgb	I40wfmMatrixTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	2 = gbr3 = rgb

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				4 = composite
I40wfmMatrixYgbr	I40wfmMatrixTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmMatrixYrgb	I40wfmMatrixTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmCmpFormat	I40wfmMatrixTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = auto2 = ntsc3 = pal
I40wfmCmpSetup	I40wfmMatrixTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = setup-0p2 = setup-75p
I40wfmMatrixXyz	I40wfmMatrixTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	2 = gbr3 = rgb4 = composite5 = xyz
I40wfmMatrixTBL	I40wfmTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmCursorMode	I40wfmCursorTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = single3 = both
I40wfmCursorSel	I40wfmCursorTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = xf2 = y
I40wfmCursorUnitX	I40wfmCursorTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sec2 = hz
I40wfmCursorUnitY	I40wfmCursorTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = mv2 = per3 = r-per4 = dec5 = hex6 = hdr
I40wfmCursorUnitYCmp	I40wfmCursorTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = mv2 = per3 = r-per
I40wfmCursorRefset	I40wfmCursorTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 (fixed)
I40wfmCursorRefX	I40wfmCursorTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 927
I40wfmCursorDeltaX	I40wfmCursorTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 927
I40wfmCursorTrackX	I40wfmCursorTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	-927 to 927
I40wfmCursorRefY	I40wfmCursorTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	-5000 to 15000
I40wfmCursorDeltaY	I40wfmCursorTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	-5000 to 15000
I40wfmCursorTrackY	I40wfmCursorTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	-15000 to 15000
I40wfmLineselTBL	I40wfmTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmLinesel	I40wfmLineselTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40wfmLineselNo	I40wfmLineselTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40wfmLineselField	I40wfmLineselTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = frame2 = field13 = field2
I40wfmExtSyncTBL	I40wfmTBL.7	Aggregate	-	-
I40wfmExtSyncMode	I40wfmExtSyncTBL.1	INTEGER R/W		1 = off2 = on
I40wfmExtSyncInten	I40wfmExtSyncTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-128 to 127
I40wfmExtSyncColor	I40wfmExtSyncTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue

• I40vectorTBL(4) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40vectorIntenConfigTBL	I40vectorTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispMode I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.1	INTEGER R/W	1 = vector	2 = fivebar3 = histogram4 = cie-diagram
I40vectorInten	I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-128 to 127
I40vectorColor I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.3	INTEGER R/W	1 = white	2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40vectorColorS1	I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40vectorColorS2 I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.5	INTEGER R/W	1 = white	2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40vectorDisp3gbds	I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream23 = mix4 = align
I40vectorVectorMode I40vectorIntenConfigTBL.7	INTEGER R/W	1 = vector	2 = rgb-vector3 = ycbcr-vector
I40vectorDispVecTBL	I40vectorTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL	I40vectorDispVecTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispVecScaleInten	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40vectorDispVecScaleColor I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.2	INTEGER R/W	1 = white	2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40vectorDispVecScaleIq	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40vectorDispVecVectorScale	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.4	INTEGER R/W	1 = auto	2 = bt6013 = bt7094 = dci5 = bt2020
I40vectorDispRGBVecAdjustTarget	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = gb2 = gr

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40vectorDispRGBVecAdjustPosH	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	-500 to 500
I40vectorDispRGBVecAdjustPosV	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	-500 to 500
I40vectorDispYCbCrVecTimingMarker	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = auto2 = hd3 = sd
I40vectorDispYCbCrVecVectorScale	I40vectorDispVecScaleTBL.9	INTEGER R/W		1 = auto2 = bt6013 = bt7094 = dci5 = bt2020
I40vectorDispVecGainTBL	I40vectorDispVecTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispVecGainVar I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.1	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.1	INTEGER R/W	1 = cal	2 = variable
I40vectorDispVecGainMag I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.2	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.2	INTEGER R/W	1 = x1	2 = x53 = iq
I40vectorDispVecGainValue I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.3	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.3	DisplayString	R/W	0.2 to 2.000
I40vectorDispRGBVecGainH	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.4	DisplayString	R/W	0.2 to 2.000
I40vectorDispRGBVecGainV I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.5	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.5	DisplayString	R/W	0.2 to 2.000
I40vectorDispYCbCrVecGainVar	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.6	INTEGER R/W	1 = cal	2 = variable
I40vectorDispYCbCrVecGainMag	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.7	INTEGER R/W	1 = x1	2 = x5
I40vectorDispYCbCrVecObsPoint	I40vectorDispVecGainTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = by-wh2 = by-yl3 = by-cy4 = by-g5 = by-timing6 = by-mg7 = by-r8 = by-b9 = bl10 = ry-b11 = ry-r12 = ry-mg13 = ry-timing14 = ry-g15 = ry-cy16 = ry-yl17 = ry-wh
I40vectorDispVecMarker	I40vectorDispVecTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40vectorColorSystemTBL	I40vectorDispVecTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorColorSysMatrix I40vectorColorSystemTBL.1	I40vectorColorSystemTBL.1	INTEGER R/W	1 = component	2 = composite
I40vectorColorSysColorBar	I40vectorColorSystemTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = cb-100p2 = cb75p
I40vectorColorSysCmpFormat	I40vectorColorSystemTBL.3	INTEGER R/W	1 = auto	2 = ntsc

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				3 = pal
I40vectorColorSysSetup I40vectorColorSystemTBL.4	l40vectorDisp5barTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = setup-0p2 = setup-75p
I40vectorDisp5barTBL	l40vectorDisp5barTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDisp5barScale	l40vectorDisp5barTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = p2 = mv3 = hex4 = dec
I40vectorDisp5barSeq	l40vectorDisp5barTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = gbr2 = rgb
I40vectorDispHistTBL	l40vectorTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispHistScale	l40vectorDispHistTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = per2 = hdr
I40vectorDispHistForm	l40vectorDispHistTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = single2 = tile3 = align-h4 = align-v
I40vectorDispHistSetupTBL	l40vectorDispHistTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispHistSetupY l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.1	l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.1	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispHistSetupR l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.2	l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.2	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispHistSetupG l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.3	l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.3	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispHistSetupB l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.4	l40vectorDispHistSetupTBL.4	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieTBL	l40vectorTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispCieScaleTBL	l40vectorDispCieTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispCieColor l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.1	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = bg-white2 = bg-color3 = bg-black
I40vectorDispCieTriangle1 l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.2	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.2	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	4 = bt601-5255 = bt601-6256 = bt7097 = dci8 = bt2020
I40vectorDispCieTriangle2 l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.3	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.3	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	4 = bt601-5255 = bt601-6256 = bt7097 = dci8 = bt2020
I40vectorDispCieUserTriangle	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.4	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = one3 = two
I40vectorDispCieUserPrimaryColor	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.5	INTEGER R/W	1 = g	2 = b3 = r
I40vectorDispCieUserTriangleX	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.6	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 1.000
I40vectorDispCieUserTriangleY	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.7	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 1.000
I40vectorDispCieTempScale	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.8	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieGrid	l40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.9	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40vectorDispCieD65 I40vector	DispCieScaleTBL.10	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieTriangleCaption	I40vectorDispCieScaleTBL.11	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieSettingTBL	I40vectorDispCieTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorDispCieMode I40vector	orDispCieSettingTBL.1	INTEGER R/W	1 = diagram	am2 = temp
I40vectorDispCieStandard I40vector	vectorDispCieSettingTBL.2	INTEGER R/W	5 = cie13916 = cie1976
I40vectorDispCieClip I40vector	DispCieSettingTBL.3	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieFilter I40vector	DispCieSettingTBL.4	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieManualSetup	I40vectorDispCieSettingTBL.5	INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = on
I40vectorDispCieColorimetrySetup	I40vectorDispCieSettingTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = bt601-5252 = bt601-6253 = bt7094 = dci5 = bt2020
I40vectorDispCieGammaSetup	I40vectorDispCieSettingTBL.7	DisplayString	R/W	1.50 to 3.00
I40vectorDispCieCursor	I40vectorDispCieTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40vectorLineselTBL	I40vectorTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40vectorLinesel	I40vectorLineselTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40vectorLineselNo	I40vectorLineselTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40vectorLineselField	I40vectorLineselTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = frame2 = field13 = fiedl2

• I40pictureTBL(5) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40pictureConfigTBL	I40pictureTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureMode	I40pictureConfigTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = fit2 = real3 = x24 = full
I40pictureAdjustTBL	I40pictureConfigTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureAdjustColor	I40pictureAdjustTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = color2 = mono
I40pictureChroma	I40pictureAdjustTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = normal2 = up
I40pictureBrightness	I40pictureAdjustTBL.3	DisplayString	R/W	-50.0 to 50.0
I40pictureContrast	I40pictureAdjustTBL.4	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 200.0
I40pictureGainR	I40pictureAdjustTBL.5	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 200.0
I40pictureGainG	I40pictureAdjustTBL.6	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 200.0
I40pictureGainB	I40pictureAdjustTBL.7	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 200.0
I40pictureGainCroma	I40pictureAdjustTBL.8	DisplayString	R/W	0 to 200.0
I40pictureBiasR	I40pictureAdjustTBL.9	DisplayString	R/W	-50.0 to 50.0
I40pictureBiasG	I40pictureAdjustTBL.10	DisplayString	R/W	-50.0 to 50.0
I40pictureBiasB	I40pictureAdjustTBL.11	DisplayString	R/W	-50.0 to 50.0
I40pictureDispGamut	I40pictureConfigTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = white3 = red

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				4 = mesh
I40pictureDispStatusInfo	I40pictureConfigTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureDisp3gbds	I40pictureConfigTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = Stream12 = Stream23 = Mix4 = Align
I40pictureDispPosH	I40pictureConfigTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	-32768 to 32767
I40pictureDispPosV	I40pictureConfigTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	-32768 to 32767
I40pictureMarkerTBL	I40pictureConfigTBL.8	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureMarkerFrame	I40pictureMarkerTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureMarkerCenter	I40pictureMarkerTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureMarkerAspect	I40pictureMarkerTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = asp-17x93 = asp-16x94 = asp-14x95 = asp-13x96 = asp-4x37 = asp-239x18 = asp-afd
I40pictureAspectShadow	I40pictureMarkerTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 100
I40pictureSafeAction	I40pictureMarkerTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = arib3 = smpte4 = user
I40pictureSafeTitle	I40pictureMarkerTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = arib3 = smpte4 = user
I40pictureSafeUser1Width	I40pictureMarkerTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 100
I40pictureSafeUser1Height	I40pictureMarkerTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 100
I40pictureSafeUser2Width	I40pictureMarkerTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 100
I40pictureSafeUser2Height	I40pictureMarkerTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 100
I40pictureSafeUserAspect	I40pictureMarkerTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureSuperImposeTBL	I40pictureConfigTBL.9	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureStandard I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.1		INTEGER R/W	1 = off	2 = smpte3 = arib4 = teletext
I40pictureSmpteFormat I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.2		INTEGER	R/W	1 = fmt-608-7082 = fmt-608-6083 = fmt-vbi4 = fmt-708
I40pictureSmpteLanguage	I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = cc12 = cc23 = cc34 = cc45 = text16 = text27 = text38 = text4
I40pictureSmpte708Service I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.4		INTEGER	R/W	1 to 63
I40pictureAribFormat	I40pictureSuperImposeT	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hd

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
	BL.5 2 = sd			3 = analog4 = cellular
I40pictureAribLanguage I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.6		INTEGER	R/W	1 = one2 = two
I40pictureTeletextWst	I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = vbi2 = op47
I40pictureTeletextMagazin I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.8		INTEGER R/W	1 to 8
I40pictureTeletextPage I40pictureSuperImposeTBL.9		INTEGER	R/W	0 to 255
I40pictureCITBL	I40pictureTBL.7	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureCIDisplay	I40pictureCITBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = fstop3 = perdisplay4 = cinezone
I40pictureCIAdvance	I40pictureCITBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureCIMeasureNums	I40pictureCITBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = p12 = p1p23 = p1p2p3
I40pictureCIMeasurePos	I40pictureCITBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = p12 = p23 = p3
I40pictureCIMeasureSize	I40pictureCITBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = size-1x12 = size-3x33 = size-9x9
I40pictureCIUnit	I40pictureCITBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = yper2 = rgbper3 = rgb2554 = codevalue5 = codevaluedec6 = hdr
I40pictureCIFstopRefSet	I40pictureCITBL.7	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40pictureCIFstopGammaSel	I40pictureCITBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = gamma-0452 = user13 = user24 = user35 = usera6 = userb7 = userc8 = userd9 = usere
I40pictureCISample	I40pictureCITBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40pictureCLLine	I40pictureCITBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40pictureCICzTBL	I40pictureCLTBL.11	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureCICzHdrZone	I40pictureCICzTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureCICzForm	I40pictureCICzTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = gradate2 = step3 = search
I40pictureCICzUpper	I40pictureCICzTBL.3	DisplayString	R/W	-6.3 to 109.4
I40pictureCICzLower	I40pictureCICzTBL.4	DisplayString	R/W	-7.3 to 108.4
I40pictureCICzRef	I40pictureCICzTBL.5	DisplayString	R/W	-7.3 to 109.4
I40pictureCICzLevel	I40pictureCICzTBL.6	DisplayString	R/W	-7.3 to 109.4
I40pictureMaxFallCITBL	I40pictureTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureMaxFallCITDisplay	I40pictureMaxFallCITBLL	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
	.1			2 = on
I40pictureMaxFallCllMeasure I40pictureMaxFallCllTBLL .2		INTEGER	R/W	1 = stop2 = start
I40pictureMaxFallCllClear	I40pictureMaxFallCllTBLL .3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40pictureEdgeTBL	I40pictureTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureEdgeDetect	I40pictureEdgeTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureEdgeSensitive	I40pictureEdgeTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = low2 = middle3 = high4 = v-high5 = u-high
I40pictureEdgeLevel	I40pictureEdgeTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = lvl-off2 = lvl-253 = lvl-504 = lvl-755 = lvl-1006 = lvl-emboss
I40pictureEdgeColor	I40pictureEdgeTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white4 = green6 = red7 = blue
I40pictureLineselTBL	I40pictureTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureLinesel	I40pictureLineselTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40pictureLineselNo	I40pictureLineselTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40pictureLineselField	I40pictureLineselTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = frame2 = field13 = field2
I40pictureDataTBL	I40pictureTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40pictureDataCineliteP1	I40pictureDataTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Cinelite Data
I40pictureDataCineliteP2	I40pictureDataTBL.2	DisplayString	R/O	Cinelite Data
I40pictureDataCineliteP3	I40pictureDataTBL.3	DisplayString	R/O	Cinelite Data

• I40statusTBL(6) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40statusModeTBL	I40statusTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusModeTop	I40statusModeTBL.1	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeDump	I40statusModeTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeExtref	I40statusModeTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAvPhase	I40statusModeTBL.4	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAncView	I40statusModeTBL.5	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAncViewDump	I40statusModeTBL.6	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeLog	I40statusModeTBL.7	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAncPkt	I40statusModeTBL.8	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeEdh	I40statusModeTBL.9	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModePayload	I40statusModeTBL.10	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeCtrlPkt	I40statusModeTBL.11	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAribCc	I40statusModeTBL.12	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusAribNetq	I40statusModeTBL.13	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAribTrig	I40statusModeTBL.14	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAribUser1	I40statusModeTBL.15	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeAribUser2	I40statusModeTBL.16	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeSmpte608	I40statusModeTBL.17	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeSmpte708	I40statusModeTBL.18	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40statusModeSmpteAfd	I40statusModeTBL.19	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeSmpteProg	I40statusModeTBL.20	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeSmpteVbi	I40statusModeTBL.21	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeSearch	I40statusModeTBL.22	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusModeErrClear	I40statusModeTBL.23	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusLogTBL	I40statusTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusLogging	I40statusLogTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stop2 = start
I40statusLogMode	I40statusLogTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = overwrt2 = stop
I40statusLogClear	I40statusLogTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusDumpTBL	I40statusTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusDumpMode	I40statusDumpTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = run2 = hold
I40statusDumpModeCap	I40statusDumpTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = run2 = hold3 = frmcap
I40statusDumpDisp	I40statusDumpTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = serial2 = compo3 = binary4 = linka5 = linkb6 = linkab7 = stream18 = stream29 = stream1210 = s1serial11 = s1compo12 = s1binary13 = s2serial14 = s2compo15 = s2binary
I40statusDumpJump	I40statusDumpTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = eav2 = sav
I40statusDumpSample	I40statusDumpTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40statusDumpLine	I40statusDumpTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 32767
I40statusExtrefTBL	I40statusTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusExtrefSel	I40statusExtrefTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = ext2 = sdi
I40statusExtrefUserRef	I40statusExtrefTBL.1	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusExtrefDefaultRef	I40statusExtrefTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusExtrefTiming	I40statusExtrefTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = legacy2 = serial
I40statusAvPhaseTBL	I40statusTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusAvPhaseScaleMax	I40statusAvphaseTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = scale-50ms2 = scale-100ms3 = scale-500ms4 = scale-1000ms5 = scale-2500ms
I40statusAvPhaseRefresh	I40statusAvphaseTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusAncTBL	I40statusTBL.6	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusAncDumpHold	I40statusAncTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hold-hold2 = hold-1s3 = hold-3s
I40statusAncDumpMode	I40statusAncTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAncDumpSample	I40statusAncTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40statusAncEdhDisp	I40statusAncTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusAncEdhMode	I40statusAncTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAncEdhSample	I40statusAncTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 19
I40statusAncViewStream	I40statusAncTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAncPayloadStream	I40statusAncTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAncCtrlDisp	I40statusAncTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusAncCtrlMode	I40statusAncTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAncCtrlGroup	I40statusAncTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	1 = group12 = group23 = group34 = group4
I40statusAncCtrlStream	I40statusAncTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAribTBL	I40statusTBL.7	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusAribCcDisp	I40statusAribTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusAribCcType	I40statusAribTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hd2 = sd3 = analog4 = cellular
I40statusAribCcMode	I40statusAribTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAribCcSample	I40statusAribTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusAribCcStream	I40statusAribTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAribNetqDisp	I40statusAribTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump3 = qlog4 = format
I40statusAribNetqMode	I40statusAribTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAribNetqSample	I40statusAribTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusAribNetqLogPos	I40statusAribTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	-50 to 50
I40statusAribNetqStream	I40statusAribTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAribNetqClear	I40statusAribTBL.11	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusAribTriggerDisp	I40statusAribTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusAribTriggerMode	I40statusAribTBL.13	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAribTriggerSample	I40statusAribTBL.14	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusAribTriggerStream	I40statusAribTBL.15	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusAribTriggerUser1Mode	I40statusAribTBL.16	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAribTriggerUser1Sample	I40statusAribTBL.17	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusAribTriggerUser1Stream	I40statusAribTBL.18	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40statusAribTriggerUser2Mode	I40statusAribTBL.19	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusAribTriggerUser2Sample	I40statusAribTBL.20	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusAribTriggerUser2Stream	I40statusAribTBL.21	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusSmpteTBL	I40statusTBL.8	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusSmpte608Disp	I40statusSmpteTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusSmpte608Mode	I40statusSmpteTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusSample608Sample	I40statusSmpteTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusSample608Stream	I40statusSmpteTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusSmpte708Disp	I40statusSmpteTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusSmpte708Mode	I40statusSmpteTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusSmpte708Sample	I40statusSmpteTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusSmpte708Stream	I40statusSmpteTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusSmpteProgStream	I40statusSmpteTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusSmpteVbiStream	I40statusSmpteTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusSmpteAfdDisp	I40statusSmpteTBL.11	INTEGER	R/W	1 = text2 = dump
I40statusSmpteAfdMode	I40statusSmpteTBL.12	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusSmpteAfdStream	I40statusSmpteTBL.13	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusCustomTBL	I40statusTBL.9	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusCustomSearchDid	I40statusCustomTBL.1	DisplayString	R/W	0 to FF
I40statusCustomSearchSdid	I40statusCustomTBL.2	DisplayString	R/W	-1 to FF
I40statusCustomSearchMode	I40statusCustomTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = hex2 = binary
I40statusCustomSearchYc	I40statusCustomTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = y2 = c
I40statusCustomSearchStream	I40statusCustomTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stream12 = stream2
I40statusCustomSearchSet	I40statusCustomTBL.6	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40statusCustomSearchSample	I40statusCustomTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 258
I40statusDataTBL	I40statusTBL.10	Aggregate	-	-
I40statusDataSignalA	I40statusDataTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Signal Data
I40statusDataSignalB	I40statusDataTBL.2	DisplayString	R/O	Signal Data
I40statusDataSignalC	I40statusDataTBL.3	DisplayString	R/O	Signal Data
I40statusDataSignalD	I40statusDataTBL.4	DisplayString	R/O	Signal Data
I40statusDataLinkA	I40statusDataTBL.5	DisplayString	R/O	Link Data
I40statusDataLinkB	I40statusDataTBL.6	DisplayString	R/O	Link Data
I40statusDataLinkC	I40statusDataTBL.7	DisplayString	R/O	Link Data
I40statusDataLinkD	I40statusDataTBL.8	DisplayString	R/O	Link Data
I40statusDataFormatA	I40statusDataTBL.9	DisplayString	R/O	Format Data
I40statusDataFormatB	I40statusDataTBL.10	DisplayString	R/O	Format Data
I40statusDataFormatC	I40statusDataTBL.11	DisplayString	R/O	Format Data

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40statusDataFormatD	I40statusDataTBL.12	DisplayString	R/O	Format Data
I40statusDataAudioA	I40statusDataTBL.13	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Data
I40statusDataAudioB	I40statusDataTBL.14	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Data
I40statusDataAudioC	I40statusDataTBL.15	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Data
I40statusDataAudioD	I40statusDataTBL.16	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Data
I40statusDataExtrefA	I40statusDataTBL.17	INTEGER	R/O	1 = userref2 = default
I40statusDataExtrefStatA	I40statusDataTBL.18	INTEGER	R/O	1 = int2 = sdi1a3 = sdi2a4 = sdi1c5 = sdi2c6 = linkA7 = link18 = exthd9 = extbb10 = normal
I40statusDataExtrefHtimeA	I40statusDataTBL.19	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [us]
I40statusDataExtrefHpixA	I40statusDataTBL.20	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [pix/dot]
I40statusDataExtrefVlineA	I40statusDataTBL.21	DisplayString	R/O	V Phase
I40statusDataExtrefTotalA	I40statusDataTBL.22	DisplayString	R/O	Total Phase
I40statusDataExtrefB	I40statusDataTBL.23	INTEGER	R/O	1 = userref2 = default
I40statusDataExtrefStatB	I40statusDataTBL.24	INTEGER	R/O	1 = int2 = sdi1a3 = sdi2a4 = sdi1c5 = sdi2c6 = linkA7 = link18 = exthd9 = extbb10 = nosignal
I40statusDataExtrefHtimeB	I40statusDataTBL.25	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [us]
I40statusDataExtrefHpixB	I40statusDataTBL.26	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [pix/dot]
I40statusDataExtrefVlineB	I40statusDataTBL.27	DisplayString	R/O	V Phase
I40statusDataExtrefTotalB	I40statusDataTBL.28	DisplayString	R/O	Total Phase
I40statusDataExtrefC	I40statusDataTBL.29	INTEGER	R/O	1 = userref2 = default
I40statusDataExtrefStatC	I40statusDataTBL40	INTEGER	R/O	1 = int2 = sdi1a3 = sdi2a4 = sdi1c5 = sdi2c6 = linkA7 = link18 = exthd9 = extbb10 = normal
I40statusDataExtrefHtimeC	I40statusDataTBL.31	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [us]
I40statusDataExtrefHpixC	I40statusDataTBL.32	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [pix/dot]
I40statusDataExtrefVlineC	I40statusDataTBL.33	DisplayString	R/O	V Phase
I40statusDataExtrefTotalC	I40statusDataTBL.34	DisplayString	R/O	Total Phase
I40statusDataExtrefD	I40statusDataTBL.35	INTEGER	R/O	1 = userref2 = default
I40statusDataExtrefStatD	I40statusDataTBL.36	INTEGER	R/O	1 = int2 = sdi1a

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				3 = sdi2a4 = sdi1c5 = sdi2c6 = linkA7 = link18 = exthd9 = extbb10 = normal
I40statusDataExtrefHtimeD	I40statusDataTBL.37	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [us]
I40statusDataExtrefHpixD	I40statusDataTBL.38	DisplayString	R/O	H Phase [pix/dot]
I40statusDataExtrefVlineD	I40statusDataTBL.39	DisplayString	R/O	V Phase
I40statusDataExtrefTotalD	I40statusDataTBL.40	DisplayString	R/O	Total Phase
I40statusDataAncAudioCtrl1	I40statusDataTBL.41	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncAudioCtrl2	I40statusDataTBL.42	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncEdh	I40statusDataTBL.43	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncLtc1	I40statusDataTBL.44	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncLtc2	I40statusDataTBL.45	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncVitc1	I40statusDataTBL.46	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncVitc2	I40statusDataTBL.47	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncPayload1	I40statusDataTBL.48	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncPayload2	I40statusDataTBL.49	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncEia708708	I40statusDataTBL.50	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncEia708608	I40statusDataTBL.51	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncEia608	I40statusDataTBL.52	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncProgram	I40statusDataTBL.53	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncBroadcast	I40statusDataTBL.54	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncVbi	I40statusDataTBL.55	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncAfd1	I40statusDataTBL.56	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncAfd2	I40statusDataTBL.57	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncJpnCc1	I40statusDataTBL.58	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncJpnCc2	I40statusDataTBL.59	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncJpnCc3	I40statusDataTBL.60	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncNetq1	I40statusDataTBL.61	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncNetq2	I40statusDataTBL.62	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncTrigger	I40statusDataTBL.63	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				2 = missing
I40statusDataAncUser1	I40statusDataTBL.64	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncUser2	I40statusDataTBL.65	INTEGER	R/O	1 = detect2 = missing
I40statusDataAncPktPayload	I40statusDataTBL.66	DisplayString	R/O	Payload ID
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqStation	I40statusDataTBL.67	DisplayString	R/O	Station Code
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqVcurr	I40statusDataTBL.68	DisplayString	R/O	Video Current
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqVNext	I40statusDataTBL.69	DisplayString	R/O	Video Next
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqACurr	I40statusDataTBL.70	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Current
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqANext	I40statusDataTBL.71	DisplayString	R/O	Audio Next
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqDCurr	I40statusDataTBL.72	DisplayString	R/O	Downmix Current
I40statusDataAncPktAribNetqDNext	I40statusDataTBL.73	DisplayString	R/O	Downmix Next
I40statusDataAncPktSmpteAfdCode	I40statusDataTBL.74	DisplayString	R/O	AFD Code
I40statusDataAncPktSmpteAfdFrame	I40statusDataTBL.75	DisplayString	R/O	Coded Frame
I40statusDataAncPktSmpteAfdBarFlg	I40statusDataTBL.76	DisplayString	R/O	Bar Data Flags
I40statusDataAncPktSmpteAfdBarVal1	I40statusDataTBL.77	DisplayString	R/O	Bar Data Value1
I40statusDataAncPktSmpteAfdBarVal2	I40statusDataTBL.78	DisplayString	R/O	Bar Data Value2
I40statusDataFreqDev	I40statusDataTBL.79	DisplayString	R/O	<-100ppm, -100 to +100ppm, >+100ppm

• I40eyeTBL(7) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40eyeConfigTBL	I40eyeTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40eyeMode	I40eyeConfigTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = eye2 = jit
I40eyeInten	I40eyeConfigTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-128 to 127
I40eyeScaleInten	I40eyeConfigTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40eyeColor	I40eyeConfigTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				6 = red7 = blue
I40eyeScaleColor	I40eyeConfigTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40eyeJitInten	I40eyeConfigTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	-128 to 127
I40eyeJitScaleInten	I40eyeConfigTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40eyeJitColor	I40eyeConfigTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40eyeJitScaleColor	I40eyeConfigTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue
I40eyeGainTBL	I40eyeTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40eyeGainMode	I40eyeGainTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = cal2 = variable
I40eyeGainVar	I40eyeGainTBL.2	DisplayString	R/W	0.50 to 2.00
I40eyeFilter	I40eyeGainTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = filter-100khz2 = filter-10khz3 = filter-1khz4 = filter-100hz5 = filter-10hz6 = filter-timing7 = filter-alignment
I40eyeSweep	I40eyeGainTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sweep-2ui2 = sweep-4ui3 = sweep-16ui
I40eyeJitGainMag	I40eyeGainTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = x12 = x23 = x8
I40eyeJitGainMag12g	I40eyeGainTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = x12 = x23 = x44 = x16
I40eyeJitFilter	I40eyeGainTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = filter-100khz2 = filter-10khz3 = filter-1khz4 = filter-100hz5 = filter-10hz6 = filter-timing7 = filter-alignment
I40eyeJitSweep	I40eyeGainTBL.8	INTEGER	R/W	1 = sweep-1h2 = sweep-2h3 = sweep-1v4 = sweep-2v
I40eyePeakHoldTBL	I40eyeTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40eyePeakHoldMode	I40eyePeakHoldTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40eyePeakHoldClear	I40eyePeakHoldTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40eyeTrigger	I40eyePeakHoldTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = run2 = stop
I40eyeDisplayMode	I40eyePeakHoldTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = single2 = dual
I40eyeJitDisplayMode	I40eyePeakHoldTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = single2 = dual
I40eyeDataTBL	I40eyeTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40eyeDataAmp	I40eyeDataTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Amp
I40eyeDataTr	I40eyeDataTBL.2	DisplayString	R/O	Tr
I40eyeDataTf	I40eyeDataTBL.3	DisplayString	R/O	Tf
I40eyeDataTj	I40eyeDataTBL.4	DisplayString	R/O	Tj
I40eyeDataJ	I40eyeDataTBL.5	DisplayString	R/O	Jitter
I40eyeDataOr	I40eyeDataTBL.6	DisplayString	R/O	Or
I40eyeDataOf	I40eyeDataTBL.7	DisplayString	R/O	Of
I40eyeDataPeakTj	I40eyeDataTBL.8	DisplayString	R/O	Peak Tj
I40eyeDataPeakJit	I40eyeDataTBL.9	DisplayString	R/O	Peak Jitter
I40eyeHistogramTBL	I40eyeTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40eyeHistogramMode	I40eyeHistogramTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40eyeHistogramInten	I40eyeHistogramTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40eyeHistogramColor	I40eyeHistogramTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = white2 = yellow3 = cyan4 = green5 = magenta6 = red7 = blue

• I40audioTBL(8) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40audioDispMode	I40audioTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = lissajou2 = surround3 = meter4 = status5 = loudness
I40audioMeterTBL	I40audioTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioMeterRange	I40audioMeterTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = range-60dBFS2 = range-90dBFS3 = mag
I40audioMeterResponse	I40audioMeterTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = truepeak2 = ppm3 = vu
I40audioMeterPpmMode	I40audioMeterTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = mode12 = mode2
I40audioMeterPeakMeter	I40audioMeterTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = true2 = ppm13 = ppm2
I40audioMeterPeakHold	I40audioMeterTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	0 = hold-05 = hold-500ms10 = hold-1000ms15 = hold-1500ms20 = hold-2000ms25 = hold-2500ms30 = hold-3000ms

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				35 = hold-3500ms40 = hold-4000ms45 = hold-4500ms50 = hold-5000ms55 = hold
I40audioMeterOverLevel	I40audioMeterTBL.6	DisplayString	R/W	-40.0 to 0
I40audioMeterWarningLevel	I40audioMeterTBL.7	DisplayString	R/W	-40.0 to 0
I40audioMeterRefLevel	I40audioMeterTBL.8	DisplayString	R/W	-40.0 to 0
I40audioLissajouTBL	I40audioTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioLissajouInten	I40audioLissajouTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40audioLissajouScaleInten	I40audioLissajouTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40audioLissajouDisplay	I40audioLissajouTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = multi2 = single
I40audioLissajouForm	I40audioLissajouTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = xy2 = matrix
I40audioLissajouAutoGain	I40audioLissajouTBL.5	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40audioSurroundTBL	I40audioTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioSurroundInten	I40audioSurroundTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40audioSurroundScaleInten	I40audioSurroundTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	-8 to 7
I40audioSurroundMode	I40audioSurroundTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = normal2 = phantom
I40audioSurroundAutoGain	I40audioSurroundTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on
I40audioStatusTBL	I40audioTBL.5	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioStatusLog	I40audioStatusTBL.1	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioStatusLogging	I40audioStatusTBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stop2 = start
I40audioStatusLogClear	I40audioStatusTBL.3	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioStatusLogMode	I40audioStatusTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = overwrt2 = stop
I40audioStatusDisplayChStatus	I40audioStatusTBL.5	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioStatusChStatus	I40audioStatusTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	1 = ch12 = ch23 = ch34 = ch45 = ch56 = ch67 = ch78 = ch89 = ch910 = ch1011 = ch1112 = ch1213 = ch1314 = ch1415 = ch1516 = ch16101 = A1 (A:CH1)102 = A2 (A:CH2)103 = A3 (A:CH3)104 = A4 (A:CH4)105 = A5 (A:CH5)106 = A6 (A:CH6)107 = A7 (A:CH7)108 = A8 (A:CH8)

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				109 = A9110 = A10111 = A11112 = A12113 = A13114 = A14115 = A15116 = A16201 = B1 (B:CH1)202 = B2 (B:CH2)203 = B3 (B:CH3)204 = B4 (B:CH4)205 = B5 (B:CH5)206 = B6 (B:CH6)207 = B7 (B:CH7)208 = B8 (B:CH8)209 = B9210 = B10211 = B11212 = B12213 = B13214 = B14215 = B15216 = B16301 = C1302 = C2303 = C3304 = C4305 = C5306 = C6307 = C7308 = C8309 = C9310 = C10311 = C11312 = C12313 = C13314 = C14315 = C15316 = C16401 = D1402 = D2403 = D3404 = D4405 = D5406 = D6407 = D7408 = D8409 = D9410 = D10411 = D11412 = D12413 = D13414 = D14415 = D15416 = D16
I40audioStatusChStatusAlign	I40audioStatusTBL.7	INTEGER	R/W	1 = lsb2 = msb

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40audioStatusDisplayUserBit	I40audioStatusTBL.8	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioStatusUserBit	I40audioConfigTBL.9	INTEGER	R/W	1 = ch12 = ch23 = ch34 = ch45 = ch56 = ch67 = ch78 = ch89 = ch910 = ch1011 = ch1112 = ch1213 = ch1314 = ch1415 = ch1516 = ch16101 = A1 (A:CH1)102 = A2 (A:CH2)103 = A3 (A:CH3)104 = A4 (A:CH4)105 = A5 (A:CH5)106 = A6 (A:CH6)107 = A7 (A:CH7)108 = A8 (A:CH8)109 = A9110 = A10111 = A11112 = A12113 = A13114 = A14115 = A15116 = A16201 = B1 (B:CH1)202 = B2 (B:CH2)203 = B3 (B:CH3)204 = B4 (B:CH4)205 = B5 (B:CH5)206 = B6 (B:CH6)207 = B7 (B:CH7)208 = B8 (B:CH8)209 = B9210 = B10211 = B11212 = B12213 = B13214 = B14215 = B15216 = B16301 = C1302 = C2303 = C3304 = C4305 = C5306 = C6307 = C7308 = C8309 = C9

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				310 = C10311 = C11312 = C12313 = C13314 = C14315 = C15316 = C16401 = D1402 = D2403 = D3404 = D4405 = D5406 = D6407 = D7408 = D8409 = D9410 = D10411 = D11412 = D12413 = D13414 = D14415 = D15416 = D16
I40audioStatusUserBitAlign	I40audioStatusTBL.10	INTEGER	R/W	1 = lsb2 = msb
I40audioStatusErrorReset	I40audioStatusTBL.11	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioPhonesVolume	I40audioTBL.6	INTEGER	R/W	0 to 63
I40audioDataTBL	I40audioTBL.7	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh1	I40audioDataTBL.1	DisplayString	R/O	Ch1 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh2	I40audioDataTBL.2	DisplayString	R/O	Ch2 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh3	I40audioDataTBL.3	DisplayString	R/O	Ch3 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh4	I40audioDataTBL.4	DisplayString	R/O	Ch4 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh5	I40audioDataTBL.5	DisplayString	R/O	Ch5 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh6	I40audioDataTBL.6	DisplayString	R/O	Ch6 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh7	I40audioDataTBL.7	DisplayString	R/O	Ch7 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh8	I40audioDataTBL.8	DisplayString	R/O	Ch8 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh9	I40audioDataTBL.9	DisplayString	R/O	Ch9 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh10	I40audioDataTBL.10	DisplayString	R/O	Ch10 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh11	I40audioDataTBL.11	DisplayString	R/O	Ch11 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh12	I40audioDataTBL.12	DisplayString	R/O	Ch12 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh13	I40audioDataTBL.13	DisplayString	R/O	Ch13 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh14	I40audioDataTBL.14	DisplayString	R/O	Ch14 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh15	I40audioDataTBL.15	DisplayString	R/O	Ch15 Level
I40audioDataStatusLevelCh16	I40audioDataTBL.16	DisplayString	R/O	Ch16 Level
I40audioLoudnessTBL	I40audioTBL.8	Aggregate	-	-
I40audioLoudnessPeriod	I40audioLoudnessTBL.1	INTEGER	R/W	1 = period-2min2 = period-10min3 = period-30min4 = period-1hour5 = period-2hour

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
				6 = period-6hour7 = period-12hour8 = period-24hour
I40audioLoudnessChartClear	I40audioLoudnessTBL.2	INTEGER	R/WO	1 (fixed)
I40audioLoudnessMeasure	I40audioLoudnessTBL.3	INTEGER	R/W	1 = stop2 = start
I40audioLoudnessMag	I40audioLoudnessTBL.4	INTEGER	R/W	1 = off2 = on

• I40trapTBL(9) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
l40trapIpTBL	l40trapTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
l40trapIp1TBL	l40trapIpTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
l40trapManagerIp1	l40trapIp1TBL.1	IpAddress	R/W	IP Address
l40trapManagerIp1Act	l40trapIp1TBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = enable2 = disable
l40trapIp2TBL	l40trapIpTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
l40trapManagerIp2	l40trapIp2TBL.1	IpAddress	R/W	IP Address
l40trapManagerIp2Act	l40trapIp2TBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = enable2 = disable
l40trapIp3TBL	l40trapIpTBL.3	Aggregate	-	-
l40trapManagerIp3	l40trapIp3TBL.1	IpAddress	R/W	IP Address
l40trapManagerIp3Act	l40trapIp3TBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = enable2 = disable
l40trapIp4TBL	l40trapIpTBL.4	Aggregate	-	-
l40trapManagerIp4	l40trapIp4TBL.1	IpAddress	R/W	IP Address
l40trapManagerIp4Act	l40trapIp4TBL.2	INTEGER	R/W	1 = enable2 = disable

20.5.5 Extended TRAP (Variable Binding List)

- index 1

OID: iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).mgmt(2).mib-2(1).system(1).sysUpTime(3).0

Syntax: TimeTicks

Range: 1 to 4294967295 (overflow occurs if this range is exceeded)

Description: Elapsed time after starting the agent

- index 2

OID: iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).snmpV2(6).snmpModules(3).snmpMIB(1).snmpMIBObjects(1).snmpTrap(4).snmpTrapOID(1).0

Syntax: OBJECT IDENTIFIER

Range: ---

Description: Trap OID

- index 3

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).l40trapStrTBL(2).l40trapCounter(1)

Syntax: Counter32

Range: 1 to 4294967295

Description: The total number of enterprise traps sent after starting up

- index 4

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).l40trapStrTBL(2).l40trapInternalTimestamp(2)

Syntax: DisplayString

Range: Up to 20 characters

Description: Date and time of error occurrence

- index 5

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).l40trapStrTBL(2).l40trapInputCh(3)

Syntax: INTEGER

Range: a(1), b(2), c(3), d(4)

Description: Input channel where the error occurred (A/B/C/D)

- index 6

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).l40trapStrTBL(2).l40trapInputSignal(4)

Syntax: DisplayString

Range: Up to 20 characters

Description: Format information

20. Network Control

- index 7

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).
l40trapContentTBL(1).l40trapErrorTBL(1).X
or
leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).
l40trapContentTBL(1).l40trapNormalTBL(2).X 

Syntax: DisplayString

Range: Up to 16 characters

Description: OID indicating the error and error information character string (see the table below)
When an error occurs, OID and error information character string of I40notificationTBL(0).I40trapContentTBL(1).I40trapErrorTBL(1).X (see the table below)
When an error recovers, OID and error information character string of I40notificationTBL(0).I40trapContentTBL(1). I40trapNormalTBL(2).X (see the table below) 

- index 8

OID: leader(20111).lv5600(40).lv5600ST1(1).l40notificationTBL(0).l40trapStrTBL(2).l40trapCableLen(5) 

Syntax: INTEGER

Range: 1 to 32767

Description: Cable length
Output only when index7 is l40trapContentTBL(1).l40TrapErrorTBL(1).l40trapErrorCableWarn(5). 

• I40notificationTBL(0) group

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40trapContentTBL	I40notificationTBL.1		-	-
I40trapErrorTBL	I40trapContentTBL.1	Aggregate	-	-
I40trapErrorFan	I40TrapErrorTBL.1	-	-	FAN_STOP
I40trapErrorNoSignal	I40TrapErrorTBL.2	-	-	NO_SIGNAL
I40trapErrorUnknown	I40TrapErrorTBL.3	-	-	FORMAT_UNKNOWN
I40trapErrorNTP	I40TrapErrorTBL.5	-	-	NTP_ERROR
I40trapErrorSdiCrc	I40TrapErrorTBL.20	-	-	CRC
I40trapErrorSdiEdh	I40TrapErrorTBL.21	-	-	EDH
I40trapErrorSdiTrsPosition	I40TrapErrorTBL.22	-	-	TRS_POSITION
I40trapErrorSdiTrsCode	I40TrapErrorTBL.23	-	-	TRS_CODE
I40trapErrorSdiIllegalCode	I40TrapErrorTBL.24	-	-	ILLEGAL_CODE
I40trapErrorSdiLineNumber	I40TrapErrorTBL.25	-	-	LINE_NUMBER
I40trapErrorCableError	I40TrapErrorTBL.26	-	-	CABLE_ERROR
I40trapErrorCableWarning	I40TrapErrorTBL.27	-	-	CABLE_WARNING
I40trapErrorSdiAncChecksum	I40TrapErrorTBL.28	-	-	CHECK_SUM
I40trapErrorSdiAncParity	I40TrapErrorTBL.29	-	-	PARITY
I40trapErrorSdiGamut	I40TrapErrorTBL.30	-	-	GAMUT
I40trapErrorSdiGamutSt2	I40TrapErrorTBL.31	-	-	GAMUT_ST2
I40trapErrorSdiCompGamut	I40TrapErrorTBL.32	-	-	CMP_GAMUT
I40trapErrorSdiCompGamutSt2	I40TrapErrorTBL.33	-	-	CMP_GAMUT_ST2
I40trapErrorSdiFreeze	I40TrapErrorTBL.34	-	-	FREEZE
I40trapErrorSdiFreezeSt2	I40TrapErrorTBL.35	-	-	FREEZE_ST2
I40trapErrorSdiBlack	I40TrapErrorTBL.36	-	-	BLACK
I40trapErrorSdiBlackSt2	I40TrapErrorTBL.37	-	-	BLACK_ST2
I40trapErrorSdiLevelY	I40TrapErrorTBL.38	-	-	LEVEL_Y
I40trapErrorSdiLevelYST2	I40TrapErrorTBL.39	-	-	LEVEL_Y_ST2
I40trapErrorSdiLevelC	I40TrapErrorTBL.40	-	-	LEVEL_C
I40trapErrorSdiLevelCSt2	I40TrapErrorTBL.41	-	-	LEVEL_C_ST2
I40trapErrorAudioBch	I40TrapErrorTBL.42	-	-	AUDIO_BCH
I40trapErrorAudioParity	I40TrapErrorTBL.43	-	-	AUDIO_PARITY
I40trapErrorAudioDbn	I40TrapErrorTBL.44	-	-	AUDIO_DBN
I40trapErrorAudioInhibit	I40TrapErrorTBL.45	-	-	AUDIO_INHIBIT
I40trapErrorAudioSample	I40TrapErrorTBL.46	-	-	AUDIO_SAMPLE
I40trapErrorSdiFrequency	I40TrapErrorTBL.47	-	-	FREQUENCY
I40trapErrorSdiFormatAlarm	I40TrapErrorTBL.48	-	-	FORMAT_ALARM
I40trapErrorEye12GCurrentJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.60	-	-	EYE_12G_JITTER
I40trapErrorEye3GCurrentJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.62	-	-	EYE_3G_JITTER
I40trapErrorEyeHdCurrentJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.63	-	-	EYE_HD_JITTER
I40trapErrorEyeSdCurrentJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.64	-	-	EYE_SD_JITTER
I40trapErrorEye12GTimingJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.65	-	-	EYE_12G_T_JITTER
I40trapErrorEye3GTimingJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.67	-	-	EYE_3G_T_JITTER
I40trapErrorEyeHdTimingJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.68	-	-	EYE_HD_T_JITTER
I40trapErrorEyeSdTimingJitter	I40TrapErrorTBL.69	-	-	EYE_SD_T_JITTER
I40trapErrorEye12GDeltaTimeTrTf	I40TrapErrorTBL.70	-	-	EYE_12G_TR_TF
I40trapErrorEye3GDeltaTimeTrTf	I40TrapErrorTBL.72	-	-	EYE_3G_TR_TF
I40trapErrorEyeHdDeltaTimeTrTf	I40TrapErrorTBL.73 - - EYE_HD_TR_TF
I40trapErrorEyeSdDeltaTimeTrTf	I40TrapErrorTBL.74	-	-	EYE_SD_TR_TF
I40trapErrorEye12GFalltime	I40TrapErrorTBL.75	-	-	EYE_12G_TF
I40trapErrorEye3GFalltime	I40TrapErrorTBL.77	-	-	EYE_3G_TF

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40trapErrorEyeHdFalltime	I40TrapErrorTBL.78	-	-	EYE_HD_TF
I40trapErrorEyeSdFalltime	I40TrapErrorTBL.79	-	-	EYE_SD_TF
I40trapErrorEye12GRisetime	I40TrapErrorTBL.80	-	-	EYE_12G_TR
I40trapErrorEye3GRisetime	I40TrapErrorTBL.82	-	-	EYE_3G_TR
I40trapErrorEyeHdRisetime	I40TrapErrorTBL.83	-	-	EYE_HD_TR
I40trapErrorEyeSdRisetime	I40TrapErrorTBL.84	-	-	EYE_SD_TR
I40trapErrorEye12GAMP	I40TrapErrorTBL.85	-	-	EYE_12G_AMP
I40trapErrorEye3GAMP	I40TrapErrorTBL.87	-	-	EYE_3G_AMP
I40trapErrorEyeHdAmp	I40TrapErrorTBL.88	-	-	EYE_HD_AMP
I40trapErrorEyeSdAmp	I40TrapErrorTBL.89	-	-	EYE_SD_AMP
I40trapErrorEye12GOverShoot Rising	I40TrapErrorTBL.90	-	-	EYE_12G_OR
I40trapErrorEye3GOverShootRising	I40TrapErrorTBL.92	-	-	EYE_3G_OR
I40trapErrorEyeHdOverShootRising	I40TrapErrorTBL.93 - - EYE_HD_OR
I40trapErrorEyeSdOverShootRising	I40TrapErrorTBL.94	-	-	EYE_SD_OR
I40trapErrorEye12GOverShoot Falling	I40TrapErrorTBL.95	-	-	EYE_12G_OF
I40trapErrorEye3GOverShootFalling	I40TrapErrorTBL.97	-	-	EYE_3G_OF
I40trapErrorEyeHdOverShootFalling	I40TrapErrorTBL.98 - - EYE_HD_OF
I40trapErrorEyeSdOverShootFalling	I40TrapErrorTBL.99	-	-	EYE_SD_OF
I40trapErrorLogAudioValidity	I40TrapErrorTBL.120	-	-	VALIDITY:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioCrc	I40TrapErrorTBL.121	-	-	CRC:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioClip	I40TrapErrorTBL.122	-	-	CLIP:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioMute	I40TrapErrorTBL.123	-	-	MUTE:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioLevelOver	I40TrapErrorTBL.124	-	-	LEVEL_OV:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioParity	I40TrapErrorTBL.125	-	-	PARITY:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapErrorLogAudioCodeViolation	I40TrapErrorTBL.126	-	-	CODE_VIL:XX (where XX is the channel on which the error is occurring in hexadecimal notation)
I40trapNormalTBL	I40trapContentTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40trapNormalDetect	I40TrapNormalTBL.4	-	-	FORMAT_DETECT
I40trapNormalSdiCrc	I40TrapNormalTBL.20	-	-	CRC

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40trapNormalSdiEdh	I40TrapNormalTBL.21	-	-	EDH
I40trapNormalSdiTrsPosition	I40TrapNormalTBL.22	-	-	TRS_POSITION
I40trapNormalSdiTrsCode	I40TrapNormalTBL.23	-	-	TRS_CODE
I40trapNormalSdiIllegalCode	I40TrapNormalTBL.24	-	-	ILLEGAL_CODE
I40trapNormalSdiLineNumber	I40TrapNormalTBL.25	-	-	LINE_NUMBER
I40trapNormalCableError	I40TrapNormalTBL.26	-	-	CABLE_ERROR
I40trapNormalCableWarning	I40TrapNormalTBL.27	-	-	CABLE_WARNING
I40trapNormalSdiAncChecksum	I40TrapNormalTBL.28 - -	CHECK_SUM
I40trapNormalSdiAncParity	I40TrapNormalTBL.29	-	-	PARITY
I40trapNormalSdiGamut	I40TrapNormalTBL.30	-	-	GAMUT
I40trapNormalSdiGamutSt2	I40TrapNormalTBL.31	-	-	GAMUT_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiCompGamut	I40TrapNormalTBL.32	-	-	CMP_GAMUT
I40trapNormalSdiCompGamutSt2	I40TrapNormalTBL.33 - -	CMP_GAMUT_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiFreeze	I40TrapNormalTBL.34	-	-	FREEZE
I40trapNormalSdiFreezeSt2	I40TrapNormalTBL.35	-	-	FREEZE_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiBlack	I40TrapNormalTBL.36	-	-	BLACK
I40trapNormalSdiBlackSt2	I40TrapNormalTBL.37	-	-	BLACK_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiLevelY	I40TrapNormalTBL.38	-	-	LEVEL_Y
I40trapNormalSdiLevelYST2	I40TrapNormalTBL.39	-	-	LEVEL_Y_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiLevelC	I40TrapNormalTBL.40	-	-	LEVEL_C
I40trapNormalSdiLevelCSt2	I40TrapNormalTBL.41	-	-	LEVEL_C_ST2
I40trapNormalSdiAudioBch	I40TrapNormalTBL.42	-	-	AUDIO_BCH
I40trapNormalSdiAudioParity	I40TrapNormalTBL.43	-	-	AUDIO_PARITY
I40trapNormalSdiAudioDbn	I40TrapNormalTBL.44	-	-	AUDIO_DBN
I40trapNormalSdiAudioInhibit	I40TrapNormalTBL.45	-	-	AUDIO_INHIBIT
I40trapNormalSdiAudioSample	I40TrapNormalTBL.46	-	-	AUDIO_SAMPLE
I40trapNormalSdiFrequency	I40TrapNormalTBL.47	-	-	FREQUENCY
I40trapNormalSdiFormatAlarm	I40TrapNormalTBL.48	-	-	FORMAT_ALARM
I40trapNormalEye12GCurrentJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.60 - -	EYE_12G_JITTER
I40trapNormalEye3GCurrentJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.62	-	-	EYE_3G_JITTER
I40trapNormalEyeHdCurrentJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.63	-	-	EYE_HD_JITTER
I40trapNormalEyeSdCurrentJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.64 - -	EYE_SD_JITTER
I40trapNormalEye12GTimingJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.65	-	-	EYE_12G_T_JITTER
I40trapNormalEye3GTimingJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.67 - -	EYE_3G_T_JITTER
I40trapNormalEyeHdTimingJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.68 - -	EYE_HD_T_JITTER
I40trapNormalEyeSdTimingJitter	I40trapNormalTBL.69 - -	EYE_SD_T_JITTER
I40trapNormalEye12GDeltaTimeTrTf	I40trapNormalTBL.70	-	-	EYE_12G_TR_TF
I40trapNormalEye3GDeltaTimeTrTf	I40trapNormalTBL.72 - -	EYE_3G_TR_TF
I40trapNormalEyeHdDeltaTimeTrTf	I40trapNormalTBL.73	-	-	EYE_HD_TR_TF
I40trapNormalEyeSdDeltaTimeTrTf	I40trapNormalTBL.74 - -	EYE_SD_TR_TF
I40trapNormalEye12GFalltime	I40trapNormalTBL.75	-	-	EYE_12G_TF
I40trapNormalEye3GFalltime	I40trapNormalTBL.77	-	-	EYE_3G_TF

1. Network Control

MIB	OID	SYNTAX	ACCESS	VALUE/RANGE
I40trapNormalEyeHdFalltime	I40trapNormalTBL.78	-	-	EYE_HD_TF
I40trapNormalEyeSdFalltime	I40trapNormalTBL.79	-	-	EYE_SD_TF
I40trapNormalEye12GRisetime	I40trapNormalTBL.80	-	-	EYE_12G_TR
I40trapNormalEye3GRisetime	I40trapNormalTBL.82	-	-	EYE_3G_TR
I40trapNormalEyeHdRisetime	I40trapNormalTBL.83	-	-	EYE_HD_TR
I40trapNormalEyeSdRisetime	I40trapNormalTBL.84	-	-	EYE_SD_TR
I40trapNormalEye12GAmp	I40trapNormalTBL.85	-	-	EYE_12G_AMP
I40trapNormalEye3GAmp	I40trapNormalTBL.87	-	-	EYE_3G_AMP
I40trapNormalEyeHdAmp	I40trapNormalTBL.88	-	-	EYE_HD_AMP
I40trapNormalEyeSdAmp	I40trapNormalTBL.89	-	-	EYE_SD_AMP
I40trapNormalEye12GOverShootRising	I40trapNormalTBL.90 - -	EYE_12G_OR
I40trapNormalEye3GOverShootRising	I40trapNormalTBL.92 - -	EYE_3G_OR
I40trapNormalEyeHdOverShootRising	I40trapNormalTBL.93 - -	EYE_HD_OR
I40trapNormalEyeSdOverShootRising	I40trapNormalTBL.94 - -	EYE_SD_OR
I40trapNormalEye12GOverShootFalling	I40trapNormalTBL.95	-	-	EYE_12G_OF
I40trapNormalEye3GOverShootFalling	I40trapNormalTBL.97 - -	EYE_3G_OF
I40trapNormalEyeHdOverShootFalling	I40trapNormalTBL.98 - -	EYE_HD_OF
I40trapNormalEyeSdOverShootFalling	I40trapNormalTBL.99 - -	EYE_SD_OF
I40trapNormalLogAudioValidity	I40trapNormalTBL.120	-	-	VALIDITY
I40trapNormalLogAudioCrc	I40trapNormalTBL.121	-	-	CRC
I40trapNormalLogAudioClip	I40trapNormalTBL.122	-	-	CLIP
I40trapNormalLogAudioMute	I40trapNormalTBL.123	-	-	MUTE
I40trapNormalLogAudioLevelOver	I40trapNormalTBL.124	-	-	LEVEL_OV
I40trapNormalLogAudioParity	I40trapNormalTBL.125	-	-	PARITY
I40trapNormalLogAudioCodeViolation	I40trapNormalTBL.126 - -	CODE_VIL
I40trapStrTBL	I40notificationTBL.2	Aggregate	-	-
I40trapCounter	I40trapStrTBL.1	INTEGER	R/O	1 to 4294967295
I40trapInternalTimestamp	I40trapStrTBL.2	DisplayString	R/O	Date and time
I40trapInputCh	I40trapStrTBL.3	INTEGER	R/O	1 = a2 = b3 = c4 = d5:no-assignment
I40trapInputSignal	I40trapStrTBL.4	DisplayString	R/O	Signal format
I40trapCableLen	I40trapStrTBL.5	INTEGER	R/O	0 to 32767

• Trap Information Table

Trap No. (*1)	Trap Information Character String	Description	trapControl		Type "NO_ERROR" Judgment
			Error	Normal
1 FAN	STOP Fan stop status	detection Y N Notifica			tion	N
2	NO_SIGNAL	No input signal detection	Y	N	Notifica tion	N
3	FORMAT_UNKNOWN	Unknown signal format detection	Y	N	Notifica tion	N
4	FORMAT_DETECT	Unprocessable signal format detection	N	Y	Notifica tion	N
5	NTP_ERROR	NTP connection status detection	Y	N	Notifica tion	N
20	CRC	CRC error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
21	EDH	EDH error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
22	TRS_POSITION	TRS Pos error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
23	TRS_CODE	TRS Code error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
24	ILLEGAL_CODE	Illegal command error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
25	LINE_NUMBER	Line number error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
26	CABLE_ERROR	Cable length measurement error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
27	CABLE_WARNING	Cable length measurement warning detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
28	CHECK_SUM	Checksum error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
29	PARITY	Parity error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
30	GAMUT	Gamut error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
31	GAMUT_ST2	Gamut error detection (stream2)	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
32	CMP_GAMUT	Composite gamut error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
33	CMP_GAMUT_ST2	Composite gamut error detection (stream2)	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y
34	FREEZE	Freeze error detection	Y	Y	Status monitor ing	Y

1. Network Control

Trap No. (*1)	Trap Information Character String	Description	trapControl		Type "NO_ERROR" Judgment
			Error	Normal
35	FREEZE_ST2	Freeze error detection (stream2)	Y	Y	Status monitoring
36	BLACK	Black error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
37	BLACK_ST2	Black error detection (stream2)	Y	Y	Status monitoring
38	LEVEL_Y	Luminance level error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
39	LEVEL_Y_ST2	Luminance level error detection (stream2)	Y Y	Status monitoring	Y
40	LEVEL_C	Chrominance level error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
41	LEVEL_C_ST2	Chrominance level error detection (stream2)	Y Y	Status monitoring	Y
42	AUDIO_BCH	(EMB AUDIO) BCH error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
43	AUDIO_PARITY	(EMB AUDIO) PARITY error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
44	AUDIO_DBN	(EMB AUDIO) DBN error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
45	AUDIO_INHIBIT	(EMB AUDIO) INH error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
46	AUDIO_SAMPLE	(EMB AUDIO) SAMPLE error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
47	FREQUENCY	FREQUENCY error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
48	FORMAT_ALARM	Format alarm detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
60	EYE_12G_JITTER	(EYE) Current jitter error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
62	EYE_3G_JITTER	(EYE) Current jitter error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
63	EYE_HD_JITTER	(EYE) Current jitter error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
64	EYE_SD_JITTER	(EYE) Current jitter error detection SD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
65	EYE_12G_T_JITTER	(EYE) Timing jitter error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitor

1. Network Control

Trap No. (*1)	Trap Information Character String	Description	trapControl		Type "NO_ERROR" Judgment
			Error	Normal
					ing
67	EYE_3G_T_JITTER	(EYE) Timing jitter error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
68	EYE_HD_T_JITTER	(EYE) Timing jitter error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
69	EYE_SD_T_JITTER	(EYE) Timing jitter error detection SD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
70	EYE_12G_TR_TF	(EYE) Delta Time error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
72	EYE_3G_TR_TF	(EYE) Delta Time error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
73	EYE_HD_TR_TF	(EYE) Delta Time error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
74	EYE_SD_TR_TF	(EYE) Delta Time error detection SD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
75	EYE_12G_TF	(EYE) Fall Time error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
77	EYE_3G_TF	(EYE) Fall Time error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
78	EYE_HD_TF	(EYE) Fall Time error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
79	EYE_SD_TF	(EYE) Fall Time error detection SD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
80	EYE_12G_TR	(EYE) Rise Time error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
82	EYE_3G_TR	(EYE) Rise Time error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
83	EYE_HD_TR	(EYE) Rise Time error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
84	EYE_SD_TR	(EYE) Rise Time error detection SD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
85	EYE_12G_AMP	(EYE) Amplitude error detection 12G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
87	EYE_3G_AMP	(EYE) Amplitude error detection 3G	Y	Y	Status monitoring
88	EYE_HD_AMP	(EYE) Amplitude error detection HD	Y	Y	Status monitoring
89	EYE_SD_AMP	(EYE) Amplitude error detection SD	Y	Y	Status

1. Network Control

Trap No. (*1)	Trap Information Character String	Description	trapControl		Type "NO_ERROR" Judgment
			Error	Normal
					monitoring
90	EYE_12G_OR	(EYE) Overshoot Rising error detection 12G	Y Y	Status	monitoring
92	EYE_3G_OR	(EYE) Overshoot Rising error detection 3G	Y Y	Status	monitoring
93	EYE_HD_OR	(EYE) Overshoot Rising error detection HD	Y Y	Status	monitoring
94	EYE_SD_OR	(EYE) Overshoot Rising error detection SD	Y Y	Status	monitoring
95	EYE_12G_OF	(EYE) Overshoot Falling error detection 12G	Y Y	Status	monitoring
97	EYE_3G_OF	(EYE) Overshoot Falling error detection 3G	Y Y	Status	monitoring
98	EYE_HD_OF	(EYE) Overshoot Falling error detection HD	Y Y	Status	monitoring
99	EYE_SD_OF	(EYE) Overshoot Falling error detection SD	Y Y	Status	monitoring
120	VALIDITY	(AUDIO) VALIDITY error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
121	CRC	(AUDIO) CRC error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
122	CLIP	(AUDIO) CLIP error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
123	MUTE	(AUDIO) MUTE error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
124	LEVEL_OV	(AUDIO) LEVEL error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
125	PARITY	(AUDIO) PARITY error detection	Y	Y	Status monitoring
1000 (*2)	NO_ERROR	(AUDIO) CODE VIOLATION error detection	N	Y	-

*1 Each OID number of I40TrapErrorTBL(1) and I40TrapNormalTBL(2) of I40trapContentTBL(1)
*2 I40trapNormalNoError(60) is only defined for I40trapNormalTBL(2) and is not available for I40trapErrorTBL(1).

21. MENU TREE

21. MENU TREE

This chapter shows the menu trees that correspond to each key.

The default settings are underlined.

The menus and default values that are displayed vary depending on the instrument's settings, the configuration of options, and whether a USB memory device is connected to the instrument.

21.1 INPUT Menu

graph TD
    INPUT --> F1
    F1 --> A["ON"]
    A --> (ON/OFF)
    F2 --> B["OFF"]
    B --> (ON/OFF)
    F3 --> C["OFF"]
    C --> (ON/OFF)
    F4 --> D["OFF"]
    D --> (ON/OFF)
    F1 --> A-B["ON"]
    A-B --> (ON/OFF)
    F2 --> C-D["OFF"]
    C-D --> (ON/OFF)
    F1 --> A-D["ON"]
    A-D --> (ON)
    F6 --> OPERATE
    F6 --> CHMODE
    F6 --> COMMON
    F7 --> DISPLAY
    F7 --> SINGLE
    DISPLAY --> SINGLE["SINGLE/SIMUL"]

21.2 SYS Menu

graph TD
    A["SYS"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["SIGNAL IN OUT"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    C --> E["COMPLETE"]
    C --> F["F2"]
    F --> G["PREV TAB"]
    C --> H["F3"]
    H --> I["NEXT TAB"]
    C --> J["F7"]
    J --> K["up menu"]
    A --> L["F2"]
    L --> M["SYSTEM SETUP"]
    M --> N["F1"]
    M --> O["COMPLETE"]
    M --> P["F2"]
    P --> Q["PREV TAB"]
    M --> R["F3"]
    R --> S["NEXT TAB"]
    M --> T["F4"]
    T --> U["READ ONLY COMMUNITY"]
    U --> V["F1"]
    U --> W["CLEAR ALL"]
    U --> X["F2"]
    X --> Y["DELETE"]
    U --> Z["F3"]
    Z --> AA["INSERT"]
    U --> AB["F4"]
    AB --> AC["<="]
    U --> AD["F5"]
    AD --> AE["=>"]
    U --> AF["F6"]
    AF --> AG["CHAR SET"]
    U --> AH["F7"]
    AH --> AI["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F5"] --> B["READ WRITE COMMUNITY"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["CLEAR ALL"]
    B --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["DELETE"]
    B --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["INSERT"]
    B --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["<="]
    B --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["=>"]
    B --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["CHAR SET"]
    B --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["up menu"]
    A --> Q["F5"] --> R["CAMERA ID LOCAL LABEL INPUT"]
    R --> S["F1"]
    S --> T["CLEAR ALL"]
    R --> U["F2"]
    U --> V["DELETE"]
    R --> W["F3"]
    W --> X["INSERT"]
    R --> Y["F4"]
    Y --> Z["<="]
    R --> AA["F5"]
    AA --> AB["=>"]
    R --> AC["F6"]
    AC --> AD["CHAR SET"]
    R --> AE["F7"]
    AE --> AF["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F5"] --> B["TALLY EXT COMMENT INPUT"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["CLEAR ALL"]
    B --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["DELETE"]
    B --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["INSERT"]
    B --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["<="]
    B --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["=>"]
    B --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["CHAR SET"]
    B --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["up menu"]
    A --> Q["F5"] --> R["REMOTE LABEL INPUT"]
    R --> S["F1"]
    S --> T["CLEAR ALL"]
    R --> U["F2"]
    U --> V["DELETE"]
    R --> W["F3"]
    W --> X["INSERT"]
    R --> Y["F4"]
    Y --> Z["<="]
    R --> AA["F5"]
    AA --> AB["=>"]
    R --> AC["F6"]
    AC --> AD["CHAR SET"]
    R --> AE["F7"]
    AE --> AF["up menu"]
    A --> AG["F6"] --> AH["USB MEMORY"]
    AH --> AI["F1"]
    AI --> AJ["MIB FILE COPY"]
    AJ --> AK["F1"] --> AL["OVER WRITE YES"]
    AJ --> AM["F3"] --> AN["OVER WRITE NO"]
    A --> AO["F7"] --> AP["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3"] --> B["SYSTEM INFO"]
    C["F4"] --> D["LICENSE"]
    B --> E["F7"]
    D --> F["F1"]
    E --> G["up menu"]
    F --> H["CLEAR"]
    D --> I["F3"]
    I --> J["REGISTER"]
    D --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["REMOVE"]
    D --> M["F7"]
    M --> N["up menu"]
    O["F5"] --> P["LCD BACK LIGHT 28"]
    Q["F6"] --> R["LCD OFF"]
    S["F7"] --> T["INITIALIZE"]
    T --> U["F1"]
    U --> V["PARAMETER INIT YES"]
    T --> W["F2"]
    W --> X["LAYOUT INIT YES"]
    T --> Y["F3"]
    Y --> Z["OPERATE INIT YES"]
    T --> AA["F4"]
    AA --> AB["ALL INIT YES"]
    T --> AC["F5"]
    AC --> AD["INIT CANCEL"]

21. MENU TREE

21.3 CAP Menu

graph TD
    A["CAP"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["TRIGGER MANUAL (MANUAL/ERROR)"]
    B --> D["F2"]
    B --> E["REFRESH"]
    C --> F["F3"]
    C --> G["DISPLAY REAL (REAL/BOTH/HOLD)"]
    D --> H["F3"]
    D --> I["DISPLAY REAL (REAL/REPLAY/BOTH/HOLD)"]
    E --> J["F3"]
    E --> K["DISPLAY REAL (REAL/BOTH/HOLD)"]
    F --> L["F6"]
    F --> M["USB MEMORY"]
    M --> N["F1"]
    M --> O["AUTO FILENAME ON (ON/OFF)"]
    N --> P["F2"]
    N --> Q["NAME INPUT"]
    Q --> R["F1"]
    Q --> S["CLEAR ALL"]
    R --> T["F2"]
    S --> U["DELETE"]
    T --> V["F4"]
    U --> W["<="]
    V --> X["F5"]
    W --> Y["=>"]
    X --> Z["F6"]
    Y --> AA["CHAR SET"]
    Z --> AB["F7"]
    AA --> AC["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3 STORE"] --> B["F1 OVER WR YES"]
    C["F3 STORE"] --> D["F3 OVER WR NO"]
    E["F4 DELETE FILE"] --> F["F1 DELETE YES"]
    G["F5 RECALL"] --> H["F3 DELETE NO"]
    I["F6 SELECT CH"] --> J["F4 DELETE FILE"]
    K["F7 up menu"] --> L["F7 up menu"]
    M["F7 SELECT CH"] --> N["F7 SELECT CH"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

21.4 MEM Menu

graph TD
    A["MEM"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["COMMENT INPUT"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    C --> F["F3"]
    C --> G["F4"]
    C --> H["F5"]
    C --> I["F6"]
    C --> J["F7"]
    C --> K["UP menu"]
    B --> L["F2"]
    B --> M["STORE"]
    M --> N["F1"]
    M --> O["F3"]
    M --> P["F7"]
    M --> Q["OVER WR YES"]
    M --> R["OVER WR NO"]
    M --> S["up menu"]
    L --> T["F3"]
    L --> U["DELETE"]
    U --> V["F1"]
    U --> W["F3"]
    U --> X["DELETE YES"]
    U --> Y["DELETE NO"]
    T --> Z["F5"]
    T --> AA["ALL COPY USB->INT"]
    AA --> AB["F1"]
    AA --> AC["F3"]
    AA --> AD["COPY USB->INT YES"]
    AA --> AE["COPY USB->INT NO"]
    T --> AF["F6"]
    T --> AG["ALL COPY INT->USB"]
    AG --> AH["F1"]
    AG --> AI["F3"]
    AG --> AJ["COPY INT->USB YES"]
    AG --> AK["COPY INT->USB NO"]

21.5 RECALL Menu

graph TD
    A["RECALL"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["F3"]
    A --> E["F4"]
    A --> F["F5"]
    A --> G["F6"]
    A --> H["F7"]
    B --> I["No.1"]
    C --> J["No.2"]
    D --> K["No.3"]
    E --> L["No.4"]
    F --> M["No.5"]
    G --> N["No.6"]
    H --> O["more"]
    H --> P["..."]
    P --> Q["F1"]
    P --> R["F2"]
    P --> S["F3"]
    P --> T["F4"]
    P --> U["F5"]
    P --> V["F6"]
    P --> W["F7"]
    Q --> X["No.55"]
    R --> Y["No.56"]
    S --> Z["No.57"]
    T --> AA["No.58"]
    U --> AB["No.59"]
    V --> AC["No.60"]
    W --> AD["more"]

21. MENU TREE

21.6 WFM Menu

graph TD
    A["WFM"] --> B["F1"]
    B --> C["WFM INTEN/CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["EXTERNAL SYNC OFF (ON/OFF)"]
    E --> F["F2"]
    F --> G["WFM MODE"]
    G --> H["F1"]
    H --> I["WFM MODE PARADE (OVERLAY/PARADE)"]
    H --> J["F2"]
    J --> K["Y ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> L["F2"]
    L --> M["G ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> N["F2"]
    N --> O["R ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> P["F2"]
    P --> Q["X ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> R["F3"]
    R --> S["Cb ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> T["F3"]
    T --> U["B ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> V["F3"]
    V --> W["G ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> X["F3"]
    X --> Y["Y ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> Z["F4"]
    Z --> AA["Cr ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> AB["F4"]
    AB --> AC["R ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> AD["F4"]
    AD --> AE["B ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> AF["F4"]
    AF --> AG["Z ON (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> AH["F5"]
    AH --> AI["4Y PARADE OFF (ON/OFF)"]
    H --> AJ["F5"]
    AJ --> AK["3G-B-DS DISPLAY ALIGN (STREAM1/STREAM2/MIX/ALIGN)"]
    H --> AL["F6"]
    AL --> AM["INPUT SELECT"]
    H --> AN["F7"]
    AN --> AO["up menu"]

    C --> AP["F3"]
    AP --> AQ["WFM INTENSITY 0 (-128 ~ 0 ~ 127)"]
    C --> AR["F3"]
    AR --> AS["EXT.SYNC INTENSITY 0 (-128 ~ 0 ~ 127)"]
    C --> AT["F4"]
    AT --> AU["WFM COLOR"]
    AU --> AV["F1"]
    AV --> AW["STREAM1 COLOR WHITE (WHITE/YELLOW/CYAN/GREEN/MAGENTA/RED/BLUE/MULTI)"]
    AU --> AX["F2"]
    AX --> AY["STREAM2 COLOR WHITE (WHITE/YELLOW/CYAN/GREEN/MAGENTA/RED/BLUE/MULTI)"]
    AU --> AZ["F6"]
    AZ --> BA["INPUT SELECT"]
    AU --> BB["F7"]
    BB --> BC["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["EXT.SYNC COLOR WHITE"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["F3"]
    A --> E["F6"]
    A --> F["F7"]
    B --> G["SCALE INTEN Δ"]
    C --> H["SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    D --> I["SCALE SETTING"]
    E --> J["INPUT SELECT"]
    F --> K["up menu"]
    G --> L["F1"]
    H --> M["F2"]
    I --> N["F3"]
    J --> O["F4"]
    K --> P["F5"]
    L --> Q["SCALE UNIT V"]
    M --> R["75% COLOR SCALE OFF"]
    N --> S["SCALE DISPLAY MAIN"]
    O --> T["REF. LEVEL [%"] 50.0]
    P --> U["REF. LEVEL [%"] 50.0]
    Q --> V["ON / OFF / MAIN / HDR / BOTH"]
    R --> W["ON / OFF / MAIN / HDR / BOTH"]
    S --> X["ON / OFF / MAIN / HDR / BOTH"]
    T --> Y["ON / OFF / MAIN / HDR / BOTH"]
    U --> Z["ON / OFF / MAIN / HDR / BOTH"]
    V --> AA["0.0 ~ Ref.level ~ 100.0"]
    W --> AB["0.0 ~ 50.0 ~ 100.0"]
    X --> AC["0.0 ~ 50.0 ~ 100.0"]
    Y --> AD["INPUT SELECT"]
    Z --> AE["up menu"]

    F["GAIN"] --> F1["F1"]
    F --> F2["F2"]
    F --> F3["F3"]
    F --> F4["F4"]
    F --> F5["F5"]
    F --> F6["F6"]
    F --> F7["F7"]

    G["GAIN VARIABLE CAL"] --> G1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    H["GAIN MAG x1"] --> H1["(x1 / x5 / x10)"]
    I["GAIN VARIABLE CAL"] --> I1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    J["GAIN MAG x1"] --> J1["(x1 / x5 / x10)"]
    K["GAIN VARIABLE CAL"] --> K1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    L["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> L1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    M["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> M1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    N["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> N1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    O["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> O1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    P["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> P1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    Q["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> Q1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    R["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> R1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    S["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> S1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    T["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> T1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    U["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> U1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    V["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> V1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    W["GAIN VARIABLE Select"] --> W1["(CAL / VARIABLE)"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3"] --> B["Sweep"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["H SWEEP"]
    C --> E["1H"]
    C --> F["V SWEEP"]
    C --> G["IV"]
    C --> H["Sweep MAG x1"]
    C --> I["FIELD FIELD1"]
    C --> J["BLANKING REMOVE"]
    C --> K["INPUT SELECT"]
    C --> L["up menu"]

    M["F4"] --> N["CURSOR"]
    N --> O["F1"]
    O --> P["CURSOR OFF"]
    O --> Q["XY SELECT Y"]
    Q --> R["X UNIT sec"]
    R --> S["Y UNIT mV"]
    S --> T["FD VALUE REF"]
    T --> U["REF SET sec"]
    U --> V["CURSOR VALUE OFF"]
    V --> W["INPUT SELECT"]
    V --> X["up menu"]

    Y["F5"] --> Z["LINE SELECT"]
    Z --> AA["F1"]
    AA --> AB["LINE SELECT OFF"]
    AA --> AC["F2"]
    AC --> AD["FIELD FRAME"]
    AD --> AE["F6 INPUT SELECT"]
    AE --> AF["up menu"]

    AG["F6"] --> AH["INPUT SELECT"]
    AH --> AI["F1"]
    AI --> AJ["COLOR MATRIX YCbCr"]
    AJ --> AK["YGBR OFF"]
    AK --> AL["YRGB OFF"]
    AL --> AM["COMPOSITE FORMAT AUTO"]
    AM --> AN["AUTO / NTSC / PAL"]
    AN --> AO["SETUP 0%"]
    AO --> AP["INPUT SELECT"]
    AP --> AQ["up menu"]

21. MENU TREE

21.7 VECT Menu

graph TD
    A["VECT"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["VECT INTEN/CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    C --> E["F3"]
    E --> F["VECTOR INTENSITY 0"]
    F --> G["F4"]
    G --> H["VECTOR COLOR WHITE"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    H --> J["VECTOR COLOR"]
    J --> K["F1"]
    J --> L["F2"]
    L --> M["STREAM1 COLOR WHITE"]
    M --> N["F6"]
    M --> O["INPUT SELECT"]
    O --> P["F7"]
    P --> Q["up menu"]
    C --> R["F5"]
    R --> S["3G-B-DS DISPLAY ALIGN"]
    S --> T["F6"]
    T --> U["INPUT SELECT"]
    U --> V["F7"]
    V --> W["up menu"]
    C --> X["F2"]
    X --> Y["VECTOR SCALE"]
    Y --> Z["F1"]
    Y --> AA["SCALE INTENSITY 4"]
    AA --> AB["F2"]
    AA --> AC["SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    AC --> AD["F3"]
    AD --> AE["IQ AXIS OFF"]
    AE --> AF["F4"]
    AF --> AG["VECTOR SCALE AUTO"]
    AG --> AH["F6"]
    AG --> AI["INPUT SELECT"]
    AI --> AJ["F7"]
    AJ --> AK["up menu"]

    subgraph Legend
        L1["VECTOR / 5BAR / HISTGRAM / CIE DIAGRAM"] --> L1a
        L2["VECTOR / 5BAR / HISTGRAM / CIE DIAGRAM"] --> L2a
        L3["-128 ~ _0~ 127"] --> L3a
        L4["WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE"] --> L4a
        L5["WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI"] --> L5a
        L6["WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI"] --> L6a
        L7["WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI"] --> L7a
        L8["WHITE / YELLOW / CYAN / GREEN / MAGENTA / RED / BLUE / MULTI"] --> L8a
    end

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F2"] --> B["CIE DIAGRAM SCALE"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["COLOR B.G. COLOR (B.G. COLOR / B.G. WHITE / B.G. BLACK)"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["TRIANGLE1 BT.709 (BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020 / OFF)"]
    C --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["TRIANGLE2 BT.2020 (BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020 / OFF)"]
    C --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["USER TRIANGLE"]
    J --> K["F1"]
    K --> L["TRIANGLE OFF (1/2/OFF)"]
    K --> M["F2"]
    M --> N["PRIMARY COLOR G (G/B/R)"]
    K --> O["F3"]
    O --> P["x VALUE 0.170 (0.000 ~ 0.170 ~ 1.000)"]
    K --> Q["F4"]
    Q --> R["y VALUE 0.797 (0.000 ~ 0.797 ~ 1.000)"]
    K --> S["F5"]
    S --> T["COMMENT INPUT"]
    T --> U["F1"]
    U --> V["CLEAR ALL"]
    T --> W["F2"]
    W --> X["DELETE"]
    T --> Y["F3"]
    Y --> Z["INSERT"]
    T --> AA["F4"]
    AA --> AB["<="]
    T --> AC["F5"]
    AC --> AD["=>"]
    T --> AE["F6"]
    AE --> AF["CHAR SET"]
    T --> AG["F7"]
    AG --> AH["up menu"]
    J --> AI["F6"]
    AI --> AJ["INPUT SELECT"]
    J --> AK["F7"]
    AK --> AL["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F5"] --> B["SUB SCALE"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["TEMP SCALE OFF (ON/OFF)"]
    B --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["GRID ON (ON/OFF)"]
    B --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["D65 ON (ON/OFF)"]
    B --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["TRIANGLE CAPTION ON (ON/OFF)"]
    B --> K["F6"]
    K --> L["INPUT SELECT"]
    B --> M["F7"]
    M --> N["up menu"]

    O["F3"] --> P["VECTOR GAIN"]
    P --> Q["F1"]
    Q --> R["GAIN VARIABLE CAL (CAL/VARIABLE)"]
    P --> S["F2"]
    S --> T["GAIN MAG x1 (x1/x2/IQ-MAG)"]
    P --> U["F6"]
    U --> V["INPUT SELECT"]
    P --> W["F7"]
    W --> X["up menu"]

    Y["F3"] --> Z["5BAR SEQUENCE GBR (GBR/RGB)"]
    Z --> AA["F3"]
    AA --> AB["HISTGRAM FORM SINGLE (SINGLE/TILE/ALIGN_H/ALIGN_V)"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3"] --> B["CIE DIAGRAM SETTING"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["DISPLAY MODE DIAGRAM (DIAGRAM / TEMP)"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["CIE STANDARD CIE1931 (CIE1931 / CIE1976)"]
    C --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["CLIP ON (ON / OFF)"]
    G --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["FILTER OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    I --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["MANUAL SETUP"]
    L --> M["F1"]
    M --> N["MANUAL SETUP OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    M --> O["F2"]
    O --> P["COLORIMETRY BT.709 (BT.601(525) / BT.601(625) / BT.709 / DCI / BT.2020)"]
    M --> Q["F5"]
    Q --> R["GAMMA SETUP 2.20 (1.50 ~ 2.20 3.00)"]
    Q --> S["F6"]
    S --> T["INPUT SELECT"]
    S --> U["F7"]
    U --> V["up menu"]

    W["F4"] --> X["MARKER OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    X --> Y["F4"]
    Y --> Z["HISTGRAM SETUP"]
    Z --> AA["F1"]
    AA --> AB["Y ON (ON / OFF)"]
    Z --> AC["F2"]
    AC --> AD["R OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    Z --> AE["F3"]
    AE --> AF["G OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    Z --> AG["F4"]
    AG --> AH["B OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    Z --> AI["F6"]
    AI --> AJ["INPUT SELECT"]
    AI --> AK["F7"]
    AK --> AL["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F4"] --> B["CURSOR OFF (ON/OFF)"]
    C["F5"] --> D["LINE SELECT"]
    D --> E["F1"]
    E --> F["LINE SELECT OFF (ON/OFF/CINELITE)"]
    D --> G["F2"]
    G --> H["FIELD FRAME (FIELD1/FIELD2/FRAME)"]
    D --> I["F6"]
    I --> J["INPUT SELECT"]
    I --> K["F7"]
    K --> L["up menu"]
    M["F6"] --> N["INPUT SELECT"]
    O["F7"] --> P["COLOR SYSTEM"]
    P --> Q["F1"]
    Q --> R["COLOR MATRIX COMPONENT (COMPONENT/COMPOSITE)"]
    P --> S["F2"]
    S --> T["COLOR BAR 100% (100%/75%)"]
    P --> U["F3"]
    U --> V["COMPOSITE FORMAT AUTO (AUTO/NTSC/PAL)"]
    P --> W["F4"]
    W --> X["SETUP 0% (0%/7.5%)"]
    P --> Y["F6"]
    Y --> Z["INPUT SELECT"]
    Y --> AA["F7"]
    AA --> AB["up menu"]

21. MENU TREE

21.8 PIC Menu

graph TD
    A["PIC"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["F3"]
    A --> E["F4"]
    A --> F["F5"]
    A --> G["F6"]
    A --> H["F7"]
    A --> I["F8"]
    A --> J["F9"]
    A --> K["F10"]
    A --> L["F11"]
    A --> M["F12"]
    A --> N["F13"]
    A --> O["F14"]
    A --> P["F15"]
    A --> Q["F16"]
    A --> R["F17"]
    A --> S["F18"]
    A --> T["F19"]
    A --> U["F20"]
    A --> V["F21"]
    A --> W["F22"]
    A --> X["F23"]
    A --> Y["F24"]
    A --> Z["F25"]
    A --> AA["F26"]
    A --> AB["F27"]
    A --> AC["F28"]
    A --> AD["F29"]
    A --> AE["F30"]
    A --> AF["F31"]
    A --> AG["F32"]
    A --> AH["F33"]
    A --> AI["F34"]
    A --> AJ["F35"]
    A --> AK["F36"]
    A --> AL["F37"]
    A --> AM["F38"]
    A --> AN["F39"]
    A --> AO["F40"]
    A --> AP["F41"]
    A --> AQ["F42"]
    A --> AR["F43"]
    A --> AS["F44"]
    A --> AT["F45"]
    A --> AU["F46"]
    A --> AV["F47"]
    A --> AW["F48"]
    A --> AX["F49"]
    A --> AY["F50"]
    A --> AZ["F51"]
    A --> BA["F52"]
    A --> BB["F53"]
    A --> BC["F54"]
    A --> BD["F55"]
    A --> BE["F56"]
    A --> BF["F57"]
    A --> BG["F58"]
    A --> BH["F59"]
    A --> BI["F60"]
    A --> BJ["F61"]
    A --> BK["F62"]
    A --> BL["F63"]
    A --> BM["F64"]
    A --> BN["F65"]
    A --> BO["F66"]
    A --> BP["F67"]
    A --> BQ["F68"]
    A --> BR["F69"]
    A --> BS["F70"]
    A --> BT["F71"]
    A --> BU["F72"]
    A --> BV["F73"]
    A --> BW["F74"]
    A --> BX["F75"]
    A --> BY["F76"]
    A --> BZ["F77"]
    A --> CA["F78"]
    A --> CB["F79"]
    A --> CC["F80"]
    A --> CD["F81"]
    A --> CE["F82"]
    A --> CF["F83"]
    A --> CG["F84"]
    A --> DH["F85"]
    A --> DI["F86"]
    A --> DJ["F87"]
    A --> DK["F88"]
    A --> DL["F89"]
    A --> DV["F90"]
    A --> DW["F91"]
    A --> DX["F92"]
    A --> DXF["E100.0 ~ 100.0 ~ 200.0"]

    subgraph PC
        PC1["MONO/COLOR"]:::color
        PC2["UP/NORMAL"]:::color
        PC3["-50.0 ~ 0.0 ~ 50.0"]:::color
        PC4["CONTRAST"]:::color
        PC5["CONTRAST"]:::color
        PC6["GAIN/BIAS"]:::color
        PC7["BIAS"]:::color
        PC8["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC9["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC10["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC11["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC12["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC13["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC14["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC15["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC16["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC17["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC18["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC19["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC20["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC21["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC22["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC23["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC24["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC25["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC26["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC27["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC28["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC29["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC30["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC31["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC32["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC33["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC34["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC35["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC36["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC37["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC38["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC39["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC40["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC41["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC42["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC43["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC44["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC45["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC46["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC47["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC48["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC49["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC50["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC51["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC52["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC53["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC54["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC55["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC56["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC57["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC58["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC59["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC60["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC61["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC62["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC63["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC64["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC65["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC66["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC67["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC68["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC69["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC70["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC71["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC72["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC73["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC74["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC75["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC76["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC77["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC78["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC79["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC80["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC81["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC82["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC83["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC84["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC85["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC86["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC87["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC88["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC89["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC90["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC91["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC92["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC93["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC94["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC95["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC96["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC97["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC98["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        PC99["INPUT SELECT"]:::color
        P1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P2 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P3 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P4 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P5 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P6 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P7 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P8 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P9 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P10 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P11 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P12 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P13 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P14 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P15 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P16 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P17 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P18 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P19 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P20 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P21 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P22 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P23 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P24 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P25 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P26 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P27 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P28 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P29 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P30 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P31 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P32 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P33 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P34 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P35 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P36 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P37 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P38 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P39 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P40 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P41 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P42 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P43 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P44 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P45 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P46 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px;
        P47 fill:#f9f,stroke:#�4e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6e6eE-mail:FPT/REAL/x2/FULLFRM|

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F4"] --> B["MARKER"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["FRAME MARKER OFF"]
    D --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["CENTER MARKER OFF"]
    F --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["ASPECT MARKER OFF"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["ASPECT SHADOW 50"]
    J --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["SAF ETY ZONE"]
    L --> M["F1"]
    M --> N["SAF E ACTION OFF"]
    N --> O["F2"]
    O --> P["SAF E TITLE OFF"]
    P --> Q["F3"]
    Q --> R["USER1/2 SET"]
    R --> S["F1"]
    S --> T["USER1 WIDTH [%"] 90]
    T --> U["F2"]
    U --> V["USER1 HEIGHT [%"] 90]
    V --> W["F3"]
    W --> X["USER2 WIDTH [%"] 80]
    X --> Y["F4"]
    Y --> Z["USER2 HEIGHT [%"] 80]
    Z --> AA["F5"]
    AA --> AB["USER1/2 ASPECT OFF"]
    AB --> AC["F6"]
    AC --> AD["INPUT SELECT"]
    AD --> AE["F7"]
    AE --> AF["up menu"]

    AG["F5"] --> AH["SUPER IMPDSE"]
    AH --> AI["F6"]
    AI --> AJ["INPUT SELECT"]
    AJ --> AK["F7"]
    AK --> AL["up menu"]

    AM["F1"] --> AN["STANDARD OFF"]
    AN --> AO["F2"]
    AO --> AP["FOR MAT 60B (70B)"]
    AP --> AQ["F2"]
    AQ --> AR["FOR MAT HD"]
    AR --> AS["F2"]
    AS --> AT["WST TRANSPORT VBI"]
    AT --> AU["F3"]
    AU --> AV["LANGUAGE CC1"]
    AV --> AW["F3"]
    AW --> AX["LANGUAGE 1"]
    AX --> AY["F3"]
    AY --> AZ["MAGAZINE 7"]
    AZ --> BA["F4"]
    BA --> BB["SERVICE DATA 1"]
    BB --> BC["F4"]
    BC --> BD["PAGE 77"]

    BE["F6"] --> BF["INPUT SELECT"]
    BF --> BG["F7"]
    BG --> BH["up menu"]

    BI["F6"] --> BJ["INPUT SELECT"]
    BJ --> BK["F7"]

    BL["F6"] --> BM["INPUT SELECT"]
    BM --> BN["F7"]

    BO["F6"] --> BP["INPUT SELECT"]
    BP --> BQ["F7"]

    BR["F6"] --> BS["INPUT SELECT"]
    BS --> BT["F7"]

    BU["F6"] --> BV["INPUT SELECT"]
    BV --> BW["F7"]

    BX["F6"] --> BY["INPUT SELECT"]
    BY --> BZ["F7"]

    CA["F6"] --> CB["INPUT SELECT"]
    CB --> CC["F7"]

    CE["F6"] --> CF["INPUT SELECT"]
    CF --> CG["F7"]

    CE --> CH["INPUT SELECT"]
    CH --> CI["F7"]

    CE --> CJ["INPUT SELECT"]
    CJ --> CK["F7"]

    CE --> CY["INPUT SELECT"]
    CY --> CZ["F7"]

    CE --> CE1["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE1 --> CE2["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE1 --> CE3["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE3 --> CE4["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE1 --> CE5["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE5 --> CE6["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE1 --> CE7["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE7 --> CE8["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE1 --> CE9["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE9 --> CE10["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE1 --> CE11["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE11 --> CE12["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE13["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE13 --> CE14["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE15["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE15 --> CE16["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE17["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE17 --> CE18["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE19["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE19 --> CE20["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE21["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE21 --> CE22["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE23["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE23 --> CE24["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE25["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE25 --> CE26["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE27["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE27 --> CE28["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE29["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE29 --> CE30["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE31["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE31 --> CE32["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE33["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE33 --> CE34["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE35["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE35 --> CE36["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE37["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE37 --> CE38["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE39["INPUT SELECT"]
    CE39 --> CE40["INPUT SELECT"]

    CE11 --> CE40

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F5"] --> B["CS LOG"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["LOUDNESS MODE OFF"]
    D --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["LOG STOP"]
    F --> G["START / STOP."]
    C --> H["F3"]
    H --> I["CLEAR"]
    I --> J["F3"]
    J --> K["LOG/CH ART CLEAR"]
    K --> L["F4"]
    L --> M["LOG MODE OVER WT"]
    M --> N["F5"]
    N --> O["TINECOD E SET"]
    O --> P["F1"]
    P --> Q["COMPLETE"]
    P --> R["F7"]
    R --> S["up menu"]
    O --> T["F0"]
    T --> U["USB MEMORY"]
    U --> V["F1"]
    V --> W["AUTO FILENAME ON"]
    W --> X["F2"]
    X --> Y["NAME INPUT"]
    Y --> Z["F1"]
    Z --> AA["CLEAR ALL"]
    Y --> AB["F2"]
    AB --> AC["DELETE"]
    Y --> AD["F4"]
    AD --> AE["<="]
    Y --> AF["F5"]
    AF --> AG["=>"]
    Y --> AH["F6"]
    AH --> AI["CHAR SET"]
    Y --> AJ["F7"]
    AJ --> AK["up menu"]
    U --> AL["F3"]
    AL --> AM["STORE"]
    AL --> AN["F3"]
    AN --> AO["STORE"]
    AO --> AP["F1"]
    AP --> AQ["OVER WR YES"]
    AO --> AR["F3"]
    AR --> AS["OVER WR NO"]
    U --> AT["F5"]
    AT --> AU["FILE DELETE"]
    AU --> AV["F1"]
    AV --> AW["DELETE YES"]
    AU --> AX["F3"]
    AX --> AY["DELETE NO"]
    U --> AZ["F7"]
    AZ --> BA["up menu"]
    U --> BB["F7"]
    BB --> BC["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

```mermaid
graph TD
    A["CINE LITE"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["F3"]
    A --> E["F4"]
    A --> F["F5"]
    A --> G["F6"]
    A --> H["F7"]
    A --> I["F8"]
    A --> J["F9"]
    A --> K["F10"]
    A --> L["F11"]
    A --> M["F12"]
    A --> N["F13"]
    A --> O["F14"]
    A --> P["F15"]
    A --> Q["F16"]
    A --> R["F17"]
    A --> S["F18"]
    A --> T["F19"]
    A --> U["F20"]
    A --> V["F21"]
    A --> W["F22"]
    A --> X["F23"]
    A --> Y["F24"]
    A --> Z["F25"]
    A --> AA["F26"]
    A --> AB["F27"]
    A --> AC["F28"]
    A --> AD["F29"]
    A --> AE["F30"]
    A --> AF["F31"]
    A --> AG["F32"]
    A --> AH["F33"]
    A --> AI["F34"]
    A --> AJ["F35"]
    A --> AK["F36"]
    A --> AL["F37"]
    A --> AM["F38"]
    A --> AN["F39"]
    A --> AO["F40"]
    A --> AP["F41"]
    A --> AQ["F42"]
    A --> AR["F43"]
    A --> AS["F44"]
    A --> AT["F45"]
    A --> AU["F46"]
    A --> AV["F47"]
    A --> AW["F48"]
    A --> AX["F49"]
    A --> AY["F50"]
    A --> AZ["F51"]
    A --> BA["F52"]
    A --> BB["F53"]
    A --> BC["F54"]
    A --> BD["F55"]
    A --> BE["F56"]
    A --> BF["F57"]
    A --> BG["F58"]
    A --> BH["F59"]
    A --> BI["F60"]
    A --> BJ["F61"]
    A --> BK["F62"]
    A --> BL["F63"]
    A --> BM["F64"]
    A --> BN["F65"]
    A --> BO["F66"]
    A --> BP["F67"]
    A --> BQ["F68"]
    A --> BR["F69"]
    A --> BS["F70"]
    A --> BT["F71"]
    A --> BU["F72"]
    A --> BV["F73"]
    A --> BW["F74"]
    A --> BX["F75"]
    A --> BY["F76"]
    A --> BZ["F77"]
    A --> CA["F78"]
    A --> CB["F79"]
    A --> CC["F80"]
    A --> CD["F81"]
    A --> CE["F82"]
    A --> CF["F83"]
    A --> CG["OEF / f Stop / %DISPLAY / CINEZONE"]

    subgraph Memory Components
        direction TB
        direction LR
        F1,F2,F3,F4,F5,F6,F7,F8,F9,F10,F11,F12,F13,F14,F15,F16,F17,F18,F19,F20,F21,F22,F23,F24,F25,F26,F27,F28,F29,F30,F31,F32,F33,F34,F35,F36,F37,F38,F39,F40,F41,F42,F43,F44,F45,F46,F47,F48,F49,F50,F51,F52,F53,F54,F55,F56,F57,F58,F59,F60,F61,F62,F63,F64,F65,F66,F67,F68,F69,F70,F71,F72,F73,F74,F75,F76,F77,F78,F79,F80,F81,F82,F83,F84,F85,F86,F87,F88,F89,F90,F91,F92,F93,F94,F95,F96,F97,GAMMA
        F1,GAMMA SELECT 0.45
        F2,GAMMA CAL
        F3,I DATA CLEAR
        F4,CAL SET
        F5,CAL F
        F6,INPUT SELECT
        F7,UP menu
        F8,INPUT SELECT
        F9,UP menu
        F10,UP menu
        F11,UP menu
        F12,UP menu
        F13,UP menu
        F14,UP menu
        F15,UP menu
        F16,UP menu
        F17,UP menu
        F18,UP menu
        F19,UP menu
        F20,UP menu
        F21,UP menu
        F22,UP menu
        F23,UP menu
        F24,UP menu
        F25,UP menu
        F26,UP menu
        F27,UP menu
        F28,UP menu
        F29,UP menu
        F30,UP menu
        F31,UP menu
        F32,UP menu
        F33,UP menu
        F34,UP menu
        F35,UP menu
        F36,UP menu
        F37,UP menu
        F38,UP menu
        F39,UP menu
        F40,UP menu
        F41,UP menu
        F42,UP menu
        F43,UP menu
        F44,UP menu
        F45,UP menu
        F46,UP menu
        F47,UP menu
        F48,UP menu
        F49,UP menu
        F50,UP menu
        F51,UP menu
        F52,UP menu
        F53,UP menu
        F54,UP menu
        F55,UP menu
        F56,UP menu
        F57,UP menu
        F58,UP menu
        F59,UP menu
        F60,UP menu
        F61,UP menu
        F62,UP menu
        F63,UP menu
        F64,UP menu
        F65,UP menu
        F66,UP menu
        F67,UP menu
        F68,UP menu
        F69,UP menu
        F70,UP menu
        F71,UP menu
        F72,UP menu
        F73,UP menu
        F74,UP menu
        F75,UP menu
        F76,UP menu
        F77,UP menu
        F78,UP menu
        F79,UP menu
        F80,UP menu
        F81,UP menu
        F82,UP menu
        F83,UP menu
        F84,UP menu
        F85,UP menu
        F86,UP menu
        F87,UP menu
        F88,UP menu
        F89,UP menu
        F90,UP menu
        F91,UP menu
        F92,UP menu
        F93,UP menu
        F94,UP menu
        F95,UP menu
        F96,UP menu
        F97,UP menu
        F98,UP menu
        F99,UP menu
        GAMMA SELECT 0.45

    end

    subgraph Memory Components
        direction TB
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
        direction LR
      end

    %% Note: The image contains a diagram of a network or system layout for the CineLite Display (OFF) configuration.

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["CINEZONE SETUP"] --> B["F1"]
    B --> C["UPPER [ % "] 100.0]
    B --> D["LOWER [ % "] 0.0]
    B --> E["LEVEL [ % "] 40.0]
    B --> F["INPUT SELECT"]
    B --> G["up menu"]
    H["CINEZONE FORM GRADATE"] --> I["GRAD ATE / STEP / SEARCH"]
    H --> J["-8.3 ~ 100.0 ~ 109.4"]
    H --> K["-7.3 ~ 0.0 ~ 108.4"]
    H --> L["-7.3 ~ 40.0 ~ 109.4"]
    M["CINELITE ADVANCE OFF"] --> N["ON/OFF"]
    O["CINELITE DISPLAY OFF"] --> P["OFF / fStop / %DISPLAY / CINEZONE"]
    Q["CINELITE HIDR"] --> R["F2"]
    R --> S["F3"]
    S --> T["F4"]
    T --> U["F5"]
    U --> V["F6"]
    V --> W["F7"]
    X["CINELITE STOP SETUP"] --> Y["F1"]
    Y --> Z["F2"]
    Z --> AA["F3"]
    AA --> AB["F4"]
    AB --> AC["F5"]
    AC --> AD["F6"]
    AD --> AE["F7"]
    AF["CINELITE FORM GRADATE"] --> AG["GRAD ATE / STEP / SEARCH"]
    AF --> AH["UPPER [ % "] 100.0]
    AF --> AI["LOWER [ % "] 0.0]
    AF --> AJ["LEVEL [ % "] 40.0]
    AF --> AK["INPUT SELECT"]
    AF --> AL["up menu"]
    AM["CINELITE ADDUCE OFF"] --> AN["F1"]
    AN --> AO["F2"]
    AO --> AP["F3"]
    AP --> AQ["F4"]
    AQ --> AR["F5"]
    AR --> AS["F6"]
    AS --> AT["F7"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3 MAX FALL/CLL"] --> B["F1 MAX FALL/CLL DISPLAY OFF"]
    B --> C["ON / OFF"]
    A --> D["F2 MEASURE STOP"]
    D --> E["STOP / START"]
    A --> F["F3 CLEAR"]
    F --> G["F7 up menu"]
    A --> H["F4 CINELITE ADVANCE OFF"]
    H --> I["ON / OFF"]
    A --> J["F5 HDR ZONE OFF"]
    J --> K["OFF / ON"]
    A --> L["F6 INPUT SELECT"]
    L --> M["F7 up menu"]
    A --> N["F1 PICTURE MODE FIT"]
    N --> O["ELL / REAL / x2"]
    A --> P["F2 POCUS ASSIST OFF"]
    P --> Q["ON / OFF"]
    A --> R["F3 SENSITIVE MIDDLE"]
    R --> S["LOW / MIDDLE / HIGH / V-HIGH / U-HIGH"]
    A --> T["F4 PICTURE LEVEL 100"]
    T --> U["OFF / EMBOSS / 25 / 50 / 75 / 100"]
    A --> V["F5 EDGE COLOR WHITE"]
    V --> W["WHITE / RED / GREEN / BLUE"]
    A --> X["F6 INPUT SELECT"]
    X --> Y["UP menu"]
    A --> Z["F7 up menu"]
    Z --> AA["LINE SELECT"]
    AA --> AB["F1 LINE SELECT OFF"]
    AB --> AC["ON / OFF"]
    AA --> AD["F2 FIELD FRAME"]
    AD --> AE["FIELD1 / FIELD2 / FRAME"]
    AA --> AF["F4 AV PHASE"]
    AF --> AG["AV MEASURE TOP 50"]
    AG --> AH["0 ~ 50 ~ 100"]
    AG --> AI["F2 AV MEASURE LEFT 0"]
    AI --> AJ["0 ~ 99"]
    AG --> AK["F3 AV MEASURE RIGHT 0"]
    AK --> AL["0 ~ 99"]
    AG --> AM["F4 AV MEASURE LINK 1A"]
    AM --> AN["1[A"] / 2["B"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
    AG --> AO["F6 INPUT SELECT"]
    AO --> AP["INPUT SELECT"]
    AG --> AQ["F7 UP MENU"]

21. MENU TREE

21.9 AUDIO Menu

graph TD
    A["AUDIO"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    B --> D["DISPLAY MODE LISSAJOU"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["METER SETUP"]
    E --> F["F1"]
    E --> G["F2"]
    F --> H["DYNAMIC RANGE 60DBFS (60DBFS / 90DBFS / MAG)"]
    G --> I["RESPONSE TRUEPEAK (TRUEPEAK / PPM / VU)"]
    I --> J["F3"]
    I --> K["PPM MODE PPM(I) (PPM(I) / PPM(II))"]
    J --> L["F3"]
    J --> M["PEAK METER TRUE (TRUE / PPM(I) / PPM(II))"]
    K --> N["F4"]
    K --> O["PEAK HOLD 0.5 (0.0 ~ 0.5 ~ 5.0 / HOLD)"]
    O --> P["F5"]
    O --> Q["LEVEL SETTING"]
    Q --> R["F1"]
    Q --> S["F2"]
    Q --> T["F3"]
    Q --> U["F7"]
    R --> V["OVER dBFS 0.0 (-40.0 ~ 0.0)"]
    S --> W["WARNING dBFS -18.0 (-40.0 ~ -18.0 ~ 0.0)"]
    T --> X["REF dBFS -20.0 (-40.0 ~ -20.0 ~ 0.0)"]
    U --> Y["up menu"]
    Z["F3"] --> AA["LISSAJOU SETUP"]
    AA --> AB["F1"]
    AA --> AC["F2"]
    AB --> AD["LISSAJOU INTEN 0 (-8 ~ 0 ~ 7)"]
    AC --> AE["SCALE INTEN 4 (-8 ~ -4 ~ 7)"]
    AD --> AF["DISPLAY MULTI (MULTI / SINGLE)"]
    AE --> AG["FORM X-Y (X-Y / MATRIX)"]
    AF --> AH["AUTO GAIN ON (QN / OFF)"]
    AG --> AI["INPUT SELECT"]
    AH --> AJ["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3"] --> B["SURROUND SETUP"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["SURROUND INTEN 4 (-8 ~ 4 ~ 7)"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["SCALE INTEN 4 (-8 ~ 4 ~ 7)"]
    C --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["SURROUND 5.1 NORMAL (NORMAL / PH ANTOM)"]
    G --> I["F5"]
    I --> J["AUTO GAIN ON (ONL / OFF)"]
    G --> K["F6"]
    K --> L["INPUT SELECT"]
    K --> M["F7"]
    M --> N["up menu"]
    O["F3"] --> P["STATUS SETUP"]
    P --> Q["F1"]
    Q --> R["EVENT LOG"]
    R --> S["F1"]
    S --> T["LOG STOP START / STOP"]
    S --> U["F2"]
    U --> V["CLEAR"]
    S --> W["F3"]
    W --> X["LOG MODE OVER WRT OVER WRT / STOP"]
    W --> Y["F6"]
    Y --> Z["USB MEMORY"]
    Z --> AA["F1"]
    AA --> AB["AUTO FILENAME ON (ONL / OFF)"]
    AA --> AC["F2"]
    AC --> AD["NAME INPUT"]
    AD --> AE["F1"]
    AE --> AF["CLEAR ALL"]
    AD --> AG["F2"]
    AG --> AH["DELETE"]
    AD --> AI["F4"]
    AI --> AJ["<="]
    AD --> AK["F5"]
    AK --> AL["=>"]
    AD --> AM["F6"]
    AM --> AN["CHAR SET"]
    AD --> AO["F7"]
    AO --> AP["up menu"]
    Q --> AQ["F3"]
    AQ --> AR["STORE"]
    AQ --> AS["F3"]
    AS --> AT["STORE"]
    AQ --> AU["F5"]
    AU --> AV["FILE DELETE"]
    AQ --> AW["F7"]
    AW --> AX["up menu"]
    AQ --> AY["F1"]
    AY --> AZ["OVER WR YES"]
    AQ --> BA["F3"]
    BA --> BB["OVER WR NO"]
    AQ --> BC["F1"]
    BC --> BD["DELETE YES"]
    AQ --> BE["F3"]
    BE --> BF["DELETE NO"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F3"] --> B["CHANNEL STATUS"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    B --> D["DISPLAY CHANNEL 1"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    D --> F["ALIGN LSB FIRST"]
    E --> G["F6"]
    F --> H["INPUT SELECT"]
    G --> I["F7"]
    H --> J["up menu"]

    K["F4"] --> L["USER BIT"]
    L --> M["F1"]
    L --> N["DISPLAY CHANNEL 1"]
    M --> O["F2"]
    N --> P["ALIGN LSB FIRST"]
    O --> Q["F6"]
    P --> R["INPUT SELECT"]
    Q --> S["F7"]
    R --> T["up menu"]

    U["F5"] --> V["ERROR RESET"]
    V --> W["F6"]
    W --> X["INPUT SELECT"]
    X --> Y["F7"]
    Y --> Z["up menu"]

    AA["F3"] --> AB["LOUDNESS SETUP"]
    AB --> AC["F1"]
    AB --> AD["PERIOD 2 MIN (2 MIN / 10 MIN / 30 MIN / 1 HOUR / 2 HOUR / 6 HOUR / 12 HOUR / 24 HOUR)"]
    AC --> AD
    AD --> AE["F2"]
    AD --> AF["CHART CLEAR"]
    AE --> AG["F3"]
    AG --> AH["MEASURE STOP (STOP / START)"]
    AH --> AI["F4"]
    AI --> AJ["MAG OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    AJ --> AK["F5"]
    AK --> AL["LOUDNESS SETTING"]
    AL --> AM["F1"]
    AL --> AN["COMPLETE"]
    AM --> AO["F2"]
    AN --> AP["PREV TAB"]
    AO --> AQ["F3"]
    AP --> AR["NEXT TAB"]
    AQ --> AS["F7"]
    AR --> AT["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["USB MEMORY"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["NAME INPUT"]
    A --> E["AUTO FILENAME ON"]
    B --> F["F3"]
    B --> G["F3"]
    C --> H["STORE"]
    D --> I["STORE"]
    E --> J["FILE DELETE"]
    F --> K["F5"]
    G --> L["F7"]
    H --> M["OVER WR YES"]
    I --> N["OVER WR NO"]
    J --> O["DELETE YES"]
    K --> P["F1"]
    L --> Q["F3"]
    M --> R["UP menu"]
    N --> S["DELETE NO"]
    O --> T["F7"]
    P --> U["F7"]
    Q --> V["F7"]
    R --> W["F4"]
    S --> X["F6"]
    T --> Y["F7"]
    U --> Z["ERROR SETUP"]
    V --> AA["F1"]
    W --> AB["F7"]
    X --> AC["F5"]
    Y --> AD["F6"]
    Z --> AE["PHONES VOLUME 0 (0~63)"]
    AA --> AF["INPUT SELECT"]
    AB --> AG["MAPPING"]
    AC --> AH["F1"]
    AD --> AI["F2"]
    AE --> AJ["F3"]
    AF --> AK["F7"]
    AG --> AL["F7"]
    AH --> AM["COMPLETE"]
    AI --> AN["PREV TAB"]
    AJ --> AO["NEXT TAB"]
    AK --> AP["up menu"]

21. MENU TREE

21.10 STATUS Menu

graph TD
    A["STATUS"] --> B["F1"]
    B --> C["EVENT LOG"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["LOG STOP"]
    E --> F["START / STOP"]
    C --> G["F2"]
    G --> H["CLEAR"]
    C --> I["F3"]
    I --> J["LOG MODE OVER WRT"]
    J --> K["OVER.WRT / STOP"]
    C --> L["F4"]
    L --> M["USB MEMORY"]
    M --> N["F5"]
    N --> O["AUTO FILENAME ON (ON / OFF)"]
    O --> P["F2"]
    P --> Q["NAME INPUT"]
    Q --> R["F1"]
    R --> S["CLEAR ALL"]
    Q --> T["F2"]
    T --> U["DELETE"]
    Q --> V["F3"]
    V --> W["<<"]
    Q --> X["F4"]
    X --> Y[">="]
    Q --> Z["F5"]
    Z --> AA["=>"]
    Q --> AB["F6"]
    AB --> AC["CHAR SET"]
    Q --> AD["F7"]
    AD --> AE["up menu"]
    O --> AF["F3"]
    AF --> AG["STORE"]
    AG --> AH["F3"]
    AH --> AI["STORE"]
    AI --> AJ["F3"]
    AJ --> AK["OVER WR YES"]
    AJ --> AL["F3"]
    AL --> AM["OVER WR NO"]
    O --> AN["F5"]
    AN --> AO["PILE DELETE"]
    AO --> AP["F1"]
    AP --> AQ["DELETE YES"]
    AO --> AR["F3"]
    AR --> AS["DELETE NO"]
    O --> AT["F7"]
    AT --> AU["up menu"]

    B --> V
    C --> U
    D --> V
    E --> U
    F --> V
    G --> U
    H --> V
    I --> V
    J --> V
    K --> V
    L --> V
    M --> V
    N --> V
    O --> W
    P --> X
    Q --> Y
    R --> X
    S --> Y
    T --> X
    U --> X
    V --> X
    W --> X
    X --> Y
    Y --> AA
    Z --> AA
    AA --> AB
    AD --> AU

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F2"] --> B["MODE RUN"]
    A --> C["DISPLAY SERIAL"]
    A --> D["LINK PICTURE"]
    A --> E["SUB PICTURE"]
    A --> F["INPUT SELECT"]
    A --> G["up menu"]

    H["F3"] --> I["AV PHASE E"]
    H --> J["F1"]
    H --> K["F2"]
    H --> L["F6"]
    H --> M["F7"]

    N["F4"] --> O["IP"]
    N --> P["F2"]
    N --> Q["PACKET JITTER"]

    R["F5"] --> S["F3"]
    R --> T["PTP"]

    U["F6"] --> V["F3"]
    U --> W["F4"]
    U --> X["F5"]

    Y["F7"] --> Z["F1"]
    Y --> AA["F2"]
    Y --> AB["F3"]

    AC["F8"] --> AD["F5"]
    AC --> AE["F6"]

    AF["F9"] --> AG["F7"]

    AH["F10"] --> AI["F2"]
    AH --> AJ["F3"]

    AK["F11"] --> AL["F4"]
    AK --> AM["F5"]

    AN["F12"] --> AO["F6"]
    AN --> AP["F7"]

    AQ["F13"] --> AR["F2"]
    AQ --> AS["F3"]

    AT["F14"] --> AU["F3"]
    AT --> AV["F4"]

    AW["F15"] --> AX["F4"]
    AW --> AY["F5"]

    AZ["F16"] --> BA["F5"]
    AZ --> BB["F6"]

    BC["F17"] --> BD["F6"]
    BC --> BE["F7"]

    BF["F18"] --> BG["F7"]

    BH["F19"] --> BI["F6"]
    BH --> BJ["F7"]

    BK["F20"] --> BL["F7"]

    BM["F21"] --> BN["F6"]
    BM --> BO["F7"]

    BP["F22"] --> BQ["F7"]

    BQ --> BR["F6"]

    BS["F23"] --> BT["F7"]

    BU["F24"] --> BV["F6"]
    BU --> BW["F7"]

    BX["F25"] --> BY["F7"]

    BZ["F26"] --> CA["F6"]
    BZ --> CB["F7"]

    CC["F27"] --> CD["F7"]

    CE["F28"] --> CF["F6"]
    CE --> CG["F7"]

    DH["F29"] --> DI["F7"]

    EJ["REF SELECT EXT (EXT / SDI)"]
    EJ --> EJ_REF_SET_USER
    EJ --> EJ_REF_SET_DEFAULT
    EJ --> EJ_OH_TIMING LEG_ACY
    EJ --> EJ_INPUT_SELECT
    EJ --> EJ_up_menu

    AFJ["SCALE MAX 50ms (50ms / 300ms / 500ms / 1.0s / 2.5s)"]
    AFJ --> AFJ_REFRESH
    AFJ --> AFJ_AV_PHASE_E_SETUP
    AFJ --> AFJ_F1["COMPLETE"]
    AFJ --> AFJ_up_menu

    AG["PERIOD 2MIN 2MIN/10MIN/30MIN/1HOUR/2HOUR/6HOUR/12HOUR/24HOUR/72HOUR"]
    AG --> AH["CHART CLEAR<br>STREAM1 / STRE AND / S TREAMS / STR EAMM"]

    AI["PERIOD 2MIN 2MIN/10MIN/30MIN/1HOUR/2HOUR/6HOUR/12HOUR/24HOUR/72HOUR"]
    AI --> AJ["CHART CLEAR<br>STREAM1 / STRE AND / S TREAMS / STR EAMM"]

    AK["PERIOD 2MIN 2MIN/10MIN/30MIN/1HOUR/2HOUR/6HOUR/12HOUR/24HOUR/72HOUR"]
    AK --> BA["MODE DELAY TIME DELAY TIME / OFFSET TIME"]

    BB["PERIOD 2MIN 2MIN/10MIN/30MIN/1HOUR/2HOUR/6HOUR/12HOUR/24HOUR/72HOUR"]
    BB --> BC["CHART CLEAR<br>STREAM1 / STRE AND / STR EAMM / STREAMC"]

    BD["PERIOD 2MIN 2MIN/10MIN/30MIN/1HOUR/2HOUR/6HOUR/12HOUR/24HOUR/72HOUR"]
    BD --> BD_UPDMOUT

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["ANC DATA HENSR"] --> B["F3"]
    B --> C["F4"]
    C --> D["F5"]
    D --> E["F6"]
    E --> F["F7"]
    F --> G["F8"]
    G --> H["F9"]
    H --> I["F10"]
    I --> J["F11"]
    J --> K["F12"]
    K --> L["F13"]
    L --> M["F14"]
    M --> N["F15"]
    N --> O["F16"]
    O --> P["F17"]
    P --> Q["F18"]
    Q --> R["F19"]
    R --> S["F20"]
    S --> T["F21"]
    T --> U["F22"]
    U --> V["F23"]
    V --> W["F24"]
    W --> X["F25"]
    X --> Y["F26"]
    Y --> Z["F27"]
    Z --> AA["F28"]
    AA --> AB["F29"]
    AB --> AC["F30"]
    AC --> AD["F31"]
    AD --> AE["F32"]
    AE --> AF["F33"]
    AF --> AG["F34"]
    AG --> AH["F35"]
    AH --> AI["F36"]
    AI --> AJ["F37"]
    AJ --> AK["F38"]
    AK --> AL["F39"]
    AL --> AM["F40"]
    AM --> AN["F41"]
    AN --> AO["F42"]
    AO --> AP["F43"]
    AP --> AQ["F44"]
    AQ --> AR["F45"]
    AR --> AS["F46"]
    AS --> AT["F47"]
    AT --> AU["F48"]
    AU --> AV["F49"]
    AV --> AW["F50"]
    AW --> AX["F51"]
    AX --> AY["F52"]
    AY --> AZ["F53"]
    AZ --> BA["F54"]
    BA --> BB["F55"]
    BB --> BC["F56"]
    BC --> BD["F57"]
    BD --> BE["F58"]
    BE --> BF["F59"]
    BF --> BG["F60"]
    BG --> BH["F61"]
    BH --> BI["F62"]
    BI --> BJ["F63"]
    BJ --> BK["F64"]
    BK --> BL["F65"]
    BL --> BM["F66"]
    BM --> BN["F67"]
    BN --> BO["F68"]
    BO --> BP["F69"]
    BP --> BQ["F70"]
    BQ --> BR["F71"]
    BR --> BS["F72"]
    BS --> BT["F73"]
    BT --> BU["F74"]
    BU --> BV["F75"]
    BV --> BW["F76"]
    BW --> BX["F77"]
    BX --> BY["F78"]
    BY --> BZ["F79"]
    BZ --> CA["F80"]
    CA --> CB["F81"]
    CB --> CC["F82"]
    CC --> CD["F83"]
    CD --> CE["F84"]
    CE --> CF["F85"]
    CF --> CG["F86"]
    CG --> CH["F87"]
    CH --> CI["F88"]
    CI --> CJ["F89"]
    CJ --> CK["F90"]
    CK --> CL["F91"]
    CL --> CD

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F2"] --> B["NET Q"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["DISPLAY TEXT"]
    D --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["DUMP MODE HEX"]
    F --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["Q LOG CLEAR"]
    H --> I["F4"]
    I --> J["BIT MAX"]
    J --> K["F5"]
    K --> L["LINK A [A"]]
    L --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["INPUT SELECT"]
    N --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["USB MEMORY"]
    P --> Q["F8"]
    Q --> R["DATA TRIGGER"]
    R --> S["F9"]
    S --> T["UP menu"]

    subgraph Text / DUMP / Q LOG / FORMAT |
        U["F1"] --> V["COMPLETE"]
        W["F4"] --> X["ALL ON"]
        Y["F5"] --> Z["ALL OFF"]
        AA["F7"] --> AB["up menu"]
    end

    subgraph Text / DUMP / Q LOG / FORMAT
        AC["F1"] --> AD["A/L / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AE["F4"] --> AF["<<"]
        AG["F5"] --> AH[">>"]
        AI["F6"] --> AJ["CHAR SET"]
        AK["F7"] --> AL["up menu"]
    end

    subgraph Text / DUMP / Q LOG / FORMAT
        AM["F1"] --> AN["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AO["F4"] --> AP["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AQ["F5"] --> AR["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AS["F6"] --> AT["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
    end

    subgraph Text / DUMP / Q LOG / FORMAT
        AU["F1"] --> AV["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AW["F4"] --> AX["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        AY["F5"] --> AZ["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
        BA["F6"] --> BB["A/B / B [B"] / A["C"] / B["D"] / 1["A"] / 3["C"] / 4["D"]]
    end

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["INPUT SELECT"] --> B["F6"]
    C["ERROR CLEAR"] --> D["F7"]
    E["LIST CLEAR"] --> F["F4"]
    G["STATUS SETUP"] --> H["F5"]
    I["INPUT SELECT"] --> J["F6"]
    K["INPUT SELECT"] --> L["F7"]
    M["INPUT SELECT"] --> N["F6"]
    O["INPUT SELECT"] --> P["F7"]
    Q["INPUT SELECT"] --> R["F6"]
    S["INPUT SELECT"] --> T["F7"]
    U["INPUT SELECT"] --> V["F6"]
    W["INPUT SELECT"] --> X["F7"]
    Y["INPUT SELECT"] --> Z["F6"]
    AA["INPUT SELECT"] --> AB["F7"]
    AC["INPUT SELECT"] --> AD["F6"]
    AE["INPUT SELECT"] --> AF["F7"]
    AG["INPUT SELECT"] --> AH["F6"]
    AI["INPUT SELECT"] --> AJ["F7"]
    AK["INPUT SELECT"] --> AL["F6"]
    AM["INPUT SELECT"] --> AN["F7"]
    AO["INPUT SELECT"] --> AP["F6"]
    AQ["INPUT SELECT"] --> AR["F7"]
    AS["INPUT SELECT"] --> AT["F6"]
    AU["INPUT SELECT"] --> AV["F7"]
    AW["INPUT SELECT"] --> AX["F6"]
    AY["INPUT SELECT"] --> AZ["F7"]
    BA["INPUT SELECT"] --> BB["F6"]
    BC["INPUT SELECT"] --> BD["F7"]
    BE["INPUT SELECT"] --> BF["F6"]
    BG["INPUT SELECT"] --> BH["F7"]
    BI["INPUT SELECT"] --> BJ["F6"]
    BK["INPUT SELECT"] --> BL["F7"]
    BM["INPUT SELECT"] --> BN["F6"]
    BO["INPUT SELECT"] --> BP["F7"]
    BQ["INPUT SELECT"] --> BR["F6"]
    BS["INPUT SELECT"] --> BT["F7"]
    BU["INPUT SELECT"] --> BV["F6"]
    BW["INPUT SELECT"] --> BX["F7"]
    BY["INPUT SELECT"] --> BZ["F6"]
    CA["INPUT SELECT"] --> CB["F7"]
    CC["INPUT SELECT"] --> CD["F6"]
    CE["INPUT SELECT"] --> CD
    CF["INPUT SELECT"] --> DD["F7"]
    DE["INPUT SELECT"] --> DD
    DF["INPUT SELECT"] --> DG["F6"]
    DH["INPUT SELECT"] --> DG
    DI["INPUT SELECT"] --> DJ["F7"]
    DK["INPUT SELECT"] --> DL["F6"]
    DJ --> DV["F7"]
    DW["INPUT SELECT"] --> DX["F6"]
    DX --> DBF["F7"]
    DCG["INPUT SELECT"] --> DBD["F6"]
    DBG --> DCX["F7"]
    DCY["INPUT SELECT"] --> DCY
    DCZ["INPUT SELECT"] --> DCZ
    DCY --> DCX
    DCZ --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> DCX
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCX --> AC
    DCZ --> AD
    AD --> AE
    AE --> AF
    AF --> AG
    AG --> AH
    AH --> AI
    AI --> AJ
    AJ --> AK
    AK --> AL
    AL --> AM
    AM --> AN
    AN --> AO
    AO --> AP
    AP --> AQ
    AQ --> AR
    AR --> AS
    AS --> AT
    AT --> AU
    AU --> AV
    AV --> AW
    AW --> AX
    AX --> AY
    AY --> AZ
    AZ --> BA
    BA --> BB
    BB --> BC
    BC --> BD
    BD --> BE
    BE --> BF
    BF --> BG
    BG --> BH
    BH --> BH

21. MENU TREE

21.11 EYE Menu (SER02)

graph TD
    A["EYE"] --> B["F1"]
    B --> C["EYE/JITTER INTEN/CONFIG"]
    C --> D["F1"]
    D --> E["EYE/JITTER MODE EYE (EYE / JITTER)"]
    C --> F["F3"]
    F --> G["INTENSITY"]
    G --> H["F1"]
    H --> I["EYE INTENSITY 0 -128 ~ _0 ~ 127}"]
    G --> J["F1"]
    J --> K["JITTER INTENSITY 0 -128 ~ _0 ~ 127}"]
    G --> L["F3"]
    L --> M["EYE SCALE INTENSITY 4 -8 ~ _4 ~ 7}"]
    L --> N["F3"]
    N --> O["JITTER SCALE INTENSITY 4 -8 ~ _4 ~ 7}"]
    L --> P["F6"]
    P --> Q["INPUT SELECT"]
    P --> R["F7"]
    R --> S["up menu"]
    C --> T["F4"]
    T --> U["COLOR"]
    U --> V["F1"]
    V --> W["EYE COLOR WHITE"]
    V --> X["F1"]
    X --> Y["JITTER COLOR WHITE"]
    V --> Z["F3"]
    Z --> AA["EYE SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    V --> AB["F3"]
    AB --> AC["JITTER SCALE COLOR YELLOW"]
    V --> AD["F6"]
    AD --> AE["INPUT SELECT"]
    V --> AF["F7"]
    AF --> AG["up menu"]
    C --> AH["F5"]
    AH --> AI["ERROR SETUP"]
    AI --> AJ["F1"]
    AJ --> AK["COMPLETE"]
    AI --> AL["F2"]
    AL --> AM["PREV TAB"]
    AI --> AN["F3"]
    AN --> AO["NEXT TAB"]
    AI --> AP["F6"]
    AP --> AQ["INPUT SELECT"]
    AI --> AR["F7"]
    AR --> AS["up menu"]
    C --> AT["F6"]
    AT --> AU["INPUT SELECT"]
    C --> AV["F7"]
    AV --> AW["up menu"]

1. MENU TREE
   

graph TD
    A["F2"] --> B["GAIN/FILTER /SWEEP"]
    B --> C["F1"]
    C --> D["CAI (CAL / VARIABLE)"]
    C --> E["F2"]
    E --> F["GAIN MAG x8 (x1 / x2 / x4 / x8 / x16)"]
    C --> G["F3"]
    G --> H["FILTER 100kHz (100kHz / 10kHz / 1kHz / 100Hz / 10Hz / TIMING / ALIGNMENT)"]
    C --> I["F2"]
    I --> J["Sweep 4UI (2UI / 4UI / 16UI)"]
    C --> K["F2"]
    K --> L["Sweep 1H (1H / 2H / 1V / 2V)"]
    C --> M["F6"]
    M --> N["INPUT SELECT"]
    C --> O["F7"]
    O --> P["up menu"]

    Q["F3"] --> R["PEAK HOLD"]
    R --> S["F1"]
    S --> T["PEAK HOLD OFF (ON / QEE)"]
    R --> U["F2"]
    U --> V["CLEAR"]
    R --> W["F6"]
    W --> X["INPUT SELECT"]
    R --> Y["F7"]
    Y --> Z["up menu"]

    AA["F4"] --> AB["CURSOR"]
    AB --> AC["F1"]
    AC --> AD["CURSOR OFF (ON / OFF)"]
    AB --> AE["F2"]
    AE --> AF["XY SEL X (X / Y / Tr, Tf)"]
    AB --> AG["F3"]
    AG --> AH["X UNIT sec. (sec. / Hz / Ulp-p)"]
    AB --> AI["F3"]
    AI --> AJ["Y UNIT V (V. / %)"]
    AB --> AK["F4"]
    AK --> AL["FD VALUE REF (REF / DELTA / TRACK)"]
    AB --> AM["F5"]
    AM --> AN["REF SET"]
    AB --> AO["F6"]
    AO --> AP["CURSOR RESET"]
    AB --> AQ["F7"]
    AQ --> AR["up menu"]

    AS["F5"] --> AT["TRIGGER RUN (RUN / STOP)"]
    AT --> AU["F6"]
    AU --> AV["INPUT SELECT"]
    AT --> AW["F7"]
    AW --> AX["DISPLAY MODE SINGLE (SINGLE / DUAL)"]

21. MENU TREE

21.12 MULTI menu

graph TD
    A["MULTI"] --> B["F1"]
    A --> C["F2"]
    A --> D["F3"]
    A --> E["F4"]
    A --> F["F5"]
    A --> G["F6"]
    A --> H["F7"]
    B --> I["LAYOUT SELECT USER 1 (USER 1 / USER 2 / USER 3 / USER 4 / USER 5 / USER 6)"]
    C --> J["LAYOUT USER 1"]
    D --> K["MULTI WFM"]
    D --> L["LAYOUT USER 2"]
    D --> M["MULTI VECTOR"]
    E --> N["LAYOUT USER 3"]
    E --> O["MULTI PICTURE"]
    F --> P["LAYOUT USER 4"]
    F --> Q["MULTI AUDIO"]
    G --> R["LAYOUT USER 5"]
    G --> S["MULTI STATUS"]
    H --> T["LAYOUT USER 6"]
    H --> U["MULTI EYE"]

22. Firmware Update History

22. FIRMWARE UPDATE HISTORY

This manual is written for firmware version 2.0.

You can view the firmware version by pressing F•3 SYSTEM INFO on the SYS menu.

- Ver. 2.0

- [LV5600/LV7600] Network control functions (Telnet, FTP, SNMP, Web server, LV7290) are now supported.

- [LV5600/LV7600] Reduced the time until the start logo appears after power-on by 15 to 20 seconds.

- [SER01/SER02] The frame capture function supports 16 frames for manual mode and error triggers.

- [SER01/SER02] External sync signal waveform display is now supported.

- [SER01/SER02] XYZ color matrix signals are now supported.

- [SER01/SER02] English and European closed captions are now supported.

- [SER01/SER02] Japanese closed captions are now supported for 4K systems.

- [SER01/SER02] NET-Q is now supported for 4K systems.

• [SER03] Loudness is now supported.

• [SER05] Added an IP packet header analysis display.

• [SER05] IP event log is now supported.

• [SER05] NMOS (IS-04) is now supported.

• [SER05] Added an SFP information display function.

• [SER05] ST2110-30 (audio) is now supported.

- [SER05] Added a message rate setting to PTP Setup on the IP SETUP2 tab.

• [SER23] Full range is now supported in HLG and PQ modes.

- Ver. 1.4

- [SER01/SER02] Improved so that HDR can be selected for the V cursor value display on the waveform display when the variable gain function is enabled in HDR mode.

- [SER01/SER02] Histogram was added to the vectorscope display.

- [SER01/SER02] Improved so that the individual settings of streams 1 and 2 work for the 3G-B-DS system in the waveform color setting of the vector display.

- [SER01/SER02] Improved so that BT.709 and BT.2020 scale and caption are displayed on the initial chromaticity diagram screen.

- [SER01/SER02] Improved so that the background of the Japanese closed caption display on the picture is changed from black to transparent in sync with the on/off state of the status information.

- [SER05] LV5600-SER05 and LV7600-SER05 (10G IP INPUT) are now supported.

Index

%

%DISPLAY SETUP....327

0

OH TIMING 397

1

18% REF-SET 299

3

3G-B-DS DISPLAY 215, 249, 281

4

4Y PARADE....215

5

5BAR 260

5BAR SCALE 261

5BAR SEQUENCE....263

7

75% COLOR SCALE 219

A

AFD 425

ALIGN 353, 354

ALL COPY INT->USB 209

ALL COPY USB->INT 210

ALL INIT ....193

ANC DATA VIEWER....412

ANC DUMP....413

ANC PACKET 415

ARIB....419

ASPECT MARKER....283

ASPECT SHADOW....285

AUDIO 332

AUTO FILENAME 293, 386

AUTO GAIN.... 348, 350

AV MEASURE LINK ....316

AV MEASURE RIGHT 316

AV MEASURE TOP 316

AV MESURE LEFT 316

AV PHASE 316, 399

AV PHASE SETUP 401

B

B BIAS[%] 278

B GAIN[%]......278

BIAS 278

BIT MASK 422

BLANKING 233

BRIGHTNESS[%] 277

C

CAL F 303

CAL SET 303

CAP....194

CENTER MARKER 282

CHANNEL STATUS.... 353

CHART SETUP 406

CHROMA GAIN[%] 278

CHROMA UP 277

CIE DIAGRAM....267

CIE DIAGRAM SCALE 267

CIE DIAGRAM SETTING 272

CIE STANDARD....272

CINELITE 297

CINELITE ADVANCE 308, 329

CINELITE DISPLAY....297, 326

CINELITE/HDR 326

CINEZONE 309

CINEZONE FORM 309

CINEZONE SETUP 328

CLEAR 291, 295, 331, 385, 445, 452

CLIP 273

CLOSED CAPTION 419

COLOR 268,434

COLOR BAR....258

COLOR MATRIX 240, 257

COLOR SYSTEM....240, 257

COMMENT INPUT....205

COMPOSITE FORMAT 242, 259

CONTRAST[%] 277

CONTROL PACKET 418

CS LOG 290

CURSOR....234, 446, 453

CURSOR RESET 450, 455

CURSOR VALUE....236

CUSTOM SEARCH ....426

D

D65....271

DATA DUMP 388

DATA TRIGGER 423

DELETE 208

DELETE FILE....198, 204

DID 426

DISPLAY..84, 195, 202, 346, 392, 417, 418, 419, 420, 423, 425

DISPLAY CHANNEL 353, 354

DISPLAY MODE ....272, 337, 450, 455

DUMP MODE. 414, 417, 418, 419, 422, 423, 424, 425, 427

DUMP OPERATION....390

DYNAMIC RANGE 342

E

EDGE COLOR 314

EDH....417

End Time....292

ERROR CLEAR....381

ERROR RESET....354

ERROR SETUP....340, 372, 435

EVENT LOG.... 352, 381

EXT REF PHASE....395

EXT.SYNC COLOR 244

EXT.SYNC INTENSITY 244

EXTERNAL SYNC 244

EYE....428

EYE COLOR....434

EYE INTENSITY....433

F

f STOP SETUP ....298

FD 1CLICK....391

FD FUNCTION....391

FD VALUE....236

FD VAR 449, 454

FIELD....229, 239, 256, 316

FILE DELETE 294, 387

FILE LIST.... 303

FILE LOAD 303

FILTER....222, 273, 443, 451

FOCUS....313

FOCUS ASSIST 313

FORM 347

FORMAT....288, 289

FRAME MARKER....282

G

G BIAS[%] 278

G GAIN[%] 278

GAIN 221, 278

GAIN MAG.... 221, 253, 451

GAIN VARIABLE.... 221, 253, 443

GAIN/BIAS....278

GAIN/FILTER 221

GAIN/FILTER/SWEEP....443, 450

GAMMA....303

GAMMA CAL....303

GAMMA FILE 303

GAMMA SELECT....299, 303

GAMMA SETUP 273

GAMUT ERR. DISPLAY 279

GRADATE....309

GRID 271

GROUP 418

H

H POS 212,432

H SWEEP 228

HDR 317

HDR ZONE 328

HISTGRAM 264

HISTGRAM FORM 264

HISTGRAM SCALE 325

HISTGRAM SETUP....266

HOLD TIME 413

I

ID SET 426

INDICATION SETTING 279

INIT CANCEL....192, 193

INITIALIZE....192

INPUT SELECT....86

INTENSITY 433

IP 404

IQ AXIS....251

J

JITTER INTENSITY ....433

JUMP 390

L

LANGUAGE 288, 289

LAYOUT INIT ....193

LCD BACK LIGHT....191

LCD OFF....191

LEVEL SETTING 344

LICENSE....190

LINE SEL 274

LINE SELECT 238, 255, 315

LINK394, 412, 415, 417, 418, 420, 422, 423, 424, 426, 427

LISSAJOU INTEN....345

LISSAJOU SETUP....345

LOG....385

LOG MODE....291, 385

M

MAGAZINE....296

MANUAL SETUP....273

MAPPING....333

MARKER 254, 282

MAX FALL/CLL....330

MAX FALL/CLL DISPLAY 330

MEASURE 330

MEASURE NUMBERS....302

MEASURE POSITION....302

MEASURE SIZE 302

MEM 205

METER SETUP....342

MODE 391,432

MONO/COLOR....277

N

NAME INPUT....293, 386

NET-Q....420

SCALE DISPLAY....219, 245, 322

SCALE INTEN....216, 244, 345, 349

SCALE INTENSITY 250, 433

SCALE JUMP 225

SCALE MAX....400

SCALE SELECT 252

SCALE SETTING 217, 219, 245

SCALE UNIT....217, 245

SDI / IP ANALYSIS....404

SDI ANALYSIS....388, 395, 399

SDID/DBN 426

SENSITIVE 314

SERCH 312

SERVICE DATA....288

SET 426

SETUP....243, 260

SIGNAL IN OUT....143

SMPTE 425

SRAM/FLASH INIT....192

STANDARD 288

Start Time....292

STATUS....367

STATUS INFORMATION 280

STAUS SETUP 351

STEP....310

STORE 196, 203, 205

STREAM SELECT ...... 412, 417, 418, 426, 427

STREAM1 COLOR 216, 248

STREAM2 COLOR 216, 248

SUB 394, 412, 415, 417, 418, 426, 427

SUB SCALE....271

SUPER IMPOSE ......288

SURROUND 5.1....350

SURROUND INTEN 349

SURROUND SETUP ....348

SWEEP 227, 444, 451

SWEEP MAG 230

SYS 143

SYSTEM INFO ....189

SYSTEM SETUP ....164

T

TABLE CLEAR....303

TEMP SCALE 271

TIMECODE SET 292

TRIANGLE CAPTION ......271

TRIANGLE1 269

TRIANGLE2 269

TRIGGER 200, 450, 455

TYPE 419

U

UNIT SELECT 300

USB MEMORY 293, 386, 394

USER BIT 354

USER DATA 1 424

USER DATA 2 424

USER TRIANGLE 269, 270

V

V POS....212, 432

V SWEEP 229

V-ANC 419, 425

VECT 246

VECT INTEN/CONFIG 247

VECTOR COLOR....248

VECTOR DISPLAY....247

VECTOR GAIN 253

VECTOR INTENSITY 248

VECTOR SCALE....250

W

WFM 211

WFM COLOR....216

WFM INTEN/CONFIG....213, 244

WFM INTENSITY....215

WFM MODE....213, 214

WFM SCALE 216, 244

WST TRANSPORT 296

X

X UNIT 236,449,454

XY SEL 447, 453

XY SELECT 234

Y

Y UNIT 235, 324, 449, 454

Y/C SELECT....427

YGBR....242

YRGB 242

所含有毒有害物质信息

部件号码：LV 5600

Head office Sales Department

Tel [phone]

Fax [phone]

Email [e-mail]

Leader Electronics Corporation

2-6-33 Tsunashimahigashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama-shi,

Kanagawa, 223-8505, Japan

www.leader.co.jp

Oct. 29, 2018

Ver.3 (Firmware Ver. 2.0)